THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 

IN  MEMORY  OF 
HELEN  LOUISE  LEGO 


-  5-- 


GYMNASTICS 


A   TEXT-BOOK   OF   THE 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  SYSTEM  OF  GYMNASTICS 


SPECIALLY  ADAPTED   TO  THE  USE   OF  TEACHERS  AND 

PUPILS  IN  PUBLIC  AND  PRIVATE  SCHOOLS 

AND  GYMNASIUMS 


EDITED   BY 

W.    A.    STECHER 

SECRETARY  OF  THE  COMMITTEE  ox  PHYSICAL  TRAINING  OF  THE 
NORTH  AMERICAN  GYMNASTIC  UNION 


BOSTON 
LOTHROP,  LEE  &  SHEPARD  CO. 


COPYRIGHT,  1895,  1896,  BY  THE 
NOBMAL  SCHOOL  OF  THE  NORTH  AMERICAN  GYMNASTIC  UNION. 


TYPOGRAPHY  BY  C.  J.  PETERS  &  SON, 


ROCKWELL    AND    CHURCHILL    PRESS, 
BOSTON,  U.S.A. 


Ed./  Psych. 
Library 


PREFACE 


THE  lessons  contained  in  this  booK  are  the  result  of  a 
resolution  passed  at  a  meeting  of  the  teachers  of  the  North 
American  Gymnastic  Union. 

Said  resolution  provided  that  teachers  should  contribute 
to  a  work  on  the  System  of  German  Gymnastics,  as  taught 
in  the  gymnasiums  of  the  North  American  Gymnastic  Union, 
and  that  the  presiding  officer  should  assign  to  sixteen  of  the 
teachers  present  each  a  part  of  the  work. 

The  series  of  lessons  as  arranged  by  these  teachers  on  the 
different  subjects  is  hereby  offered  to  all  teachers  as  a  guide 
to  work  by,  the  name  of  the  author  being  given  with  each 
series.  Some  of  the  contributors  have  divided  their  work  into 
separate  grades  of  difficulty,  while  others  have  merely  kept  a 
systematic  progression  in  view.  No  paper  has  been  changed 
by  the  compiler,  as  it  was  deemed  best  to  give  the  original  pro- 
duction of  each  contributor.  This  will  enable  the  reader  to 
become  acquainted  with  the  manner  and  order  in  which  some 
of  the  foremost  teachers  of  the  German  System  of  Gymnastics 
arrange  their  work,  and  to  follow  that  plan  which  best  suits 
the  conditions  under  which  he  works. 

WM.  A.   STECHER. 
ST.  Louis,  Mo. 


CONTENTS 


1 

?AGE 

William  Fleck     .    . 

.    New  York     . 

1 

NOTES  FOR  LEADERS  

William  A.  Stecher 

.    St.  Louis  .     . 

18 

MARCHES      

William  A.  Stecher 

.    St.  Louis  .    . 

22 

Henry  Suder   .    .    . 

.    Chicago    .     . 

26 

WAND  EXERCISES    

William  Renter   .    . 

.    Davenport    . 

46 

EXERCISES  WITH  CLUBS   

F.  W.  Froehlich  .     . 

.     St.  Louis  .     . 

98 

Henry  Suder   .    .    . 

.     Chicago    .     . 

117 

EXERCISES  WITH  RINGS   

Dr.  Karl  Zapp     .     . 

.    Cleveland 

130 

FANCY  STEPS  , 

Christian  Eberhard 

.    Boston  .     .     . 

136 

HORIZONTAL  BAR    

F.  W.  Froehlich  .    . 

.    St.  Louis  .     . 

148 

PARALLEL  BARS  

A.  E.  Kindervater   . 

.     St.  Louis  .     . 

166 

SIDE  AND  LONG  HORSE    

William  A.  Stecher. 

.    St.  Louis  .     . 

186 

VERTICAL,  INCLINED,  AND  HORIZON- 

TAL LADDER  

Dr.  Henry  Hartung 

.    Chicago    .     . 

205 

FOUR  INCLINED  LADDERS    .    .    .    ; 

Dr.  Karl  Zapp     .    . 

.    Cleveland 

239 

RINGS  

Dr.  Karl  Ziegler  .    . 

.    Cincinnati 

242 

VERTICAL  POLES      

William  Kopp      .     . 

.    Chicago    .     . 

250 

SWINGING  POLES      

Dr.  Karl  Zapp     .    . 

.     Cleveland 

254 

BUCK   

William  A.  Stecher. 

.     St.  Louis  .     . 

257 

ROUND  SWING  

Hans  Ballin    .    .    . 

.    Carbondale  . 

261 

WHIFFLE  LADDER   

Hans  Ballin    .     .     . 

.     Carbondale   . 

269 

BALANCING  BOARD  

Richard  Pertuch 

.    Philadelphia 

272 

HIGH  AND  FAR  JUMPING,  AND  POLE 

VAULTING  

Herm.  Hein     .    .    . 

.    Chicago    .    . 

282 

HOP,    STEP    AND    JUMP,    HIGHFAR 

JUMP,  WEIGHTS,  SPEAR  THROW- 

ING      

D.  M.  Krogh    .    .    . 

.    Philadelphia 

290 

GYMNASTIC  GAMES  .    

KarlKroh   .... 

.    Chicago    .    . 

299 

ROUNDEL,  MARCHING  

William  A.  Stecher  . 

.    St.  Louis  .     . 

322 

ROUNDEL  WITH  HAND  APPARATUS, 

RINGS,  WANDS,  AND  HOOPS  .    . 

Dr.  Karl  Zapp     .    . 

.    Cleveland 

328 

SYSTEM  AND  METHOD   OF  GERMAN- 
AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 


BY  WILLIAM  FLECK 

Formerly  director  of  the  Normal  School  of  Gymnastics  of  the 
North  American  Gymnastic  Union 


SYSTEM 

OUR  materials  for  gymnastic  exercises  have,  ever  since 
their  existence,  more  than  a  hundred  years  ago,  been  elabo- 
rated in  every  possible  direction  by  persons  called  upon  to  do 
so,  with  varied  results. 

From  the  beginning,  experience  alone  has  passed  judg- 
ment on  the  merits  or  immerits  of  an  exercise,  each  and  every 
addition  and  improvement  being  immediately  looked  upon  as 
common  property ;  a  custom  which  prevails  to  the  present  day. 

Since  no  field  of  human  experience  may  be  regarded  as 
closed  so  long  as  human  beings  are  being  born,  we  must  of 
course  look  upon  gymnastics  as  incomplete.  The  German 
System  of  Gymnastics  is  at  all  times  ready  to  admit  of  im- 
provement, but  not  until  it  has  been  clearly  and  indisputably 
shown  that  the  proposed  improvements  are  really  such,  and  not 
idle  illusions,  which,  under  a  high-sounding  name  and  an  ap- 
parently scientific  garb,  are  calculated  to  impress  and  mislead 
the  inexperienced. 


2  GERMAN-AMI-:  nn  .1  -V  '.  y.\i  VA8  //'  - 

To  give  those  unacquainted  with  the  German  System  of 
Gymnastics  an  insight  into  the  extraordinary  wealth  and  vari- 
ety of  its  materials  for  gymnastic  exercises,  a  short,  precise 
synopsis  of  our  system  as  it  is  in  general  use  to-day  and  is  l>est 
adapted  to  practical  purposes,  is  here  submitted.  It  is  the  sys- 
tem arranged  by  Adolf  Spies,  the  father  of  the  new  tendency 
of  German  school-gymnastics,  and  the  founder  of  gymnastics 
for  girls,  in  his  work,  "The  Doctrine  of  Gymnastic  Art." 
Basel,  1840,  improved  and  amended  up  to  the  present  time 
by  his  most  prominent  colleagues  and  pupils. 

In  accordance  with  this  system  the  materials  for  gymnastic 
exercises  are  divided  as  follows :  Free  Exercises ;  Tactics ; 
Exercises  with  Apparatus ;  Exercises  on  Apparatus ;  Compan- 
ion Exercises  (Gesellschafts  Uebungen). 

I  — FREE   EXERCISES 

These  are  divided  into  two  classes,  namely,  Free  Exercises 
of  the  first  order,  and  Free  Exercises  of  the  second  order. 

A  —  FREE  EXERCISES  OF  THE  FIRST  ORDER. 

1.  Exercises  in   the   fundamental  position. 

2.  Exercises  in   derived   positions. 

3.  Exercises  in    common   marching. 

4.  Exercises  in   derived   steps. 

5.  Exercises  in   common   hopping. 

6.  Exercises  in   derived  hops. 

1 EXEKCISES    IN    A    FUNDAMENTAL    POSITION. 

a.  Head  exercises.  cf.    Leg  exercises. 

b.  Arm  exercises.  e.    Turning. 

C.    Trunk  exercises.  /.    Compound  exercises. 


FREE  EXERCISES  3 

B  —  FREE  EXERCISES  OF  THE  SECOND  ORDER. 

1.  Exercises  in   a  kneeling  posture. 

2.  Exercises  in   a  sitting  posture. 

3.  Exercises  in   a  lying  posture. 

4.  Exercises  in  the   leaning  stand. 

5.  Exercises  in   the   head   stand. 

6.  Exercises  in   the   hand   stand. 

With  the  aid  of  this  disposition  it  is  an  easy  matter  to  find 
and  classify  all  free  exercises.  To  begin  with,  it  is  only  neces- 
sary to  find  the  possible,  simple  activities  of  the  designated 
limbs  in  the  fundamental  position,  and  then  to  arrange  suc- 
cessively the  possible  combined  exercises,  and  lastly  to  find 
out  which  simple  and  which  combined  exercises  may  be 
brought  out  in  the  other  positions.  In  this  manner  we  get 
a  complete,  systematic  compilation  of  an  abundance  of  free 
exercises. 

Alfred  Maul,  Director  of  the  Normal  School  of  Gymnastics 
of  the  Grand  Duchy  of  Baden  at  Karlsruhe,  Speaker  of  the 
National  Gymnastic  Society  of  Germany,  in  speaking  of  this 
matter,  says :  "  This  process,  however,  is  anything  but  inter- 
esting and  practical,  if  we  try  to  take  into  consideration,  with- 
out distinction,  all  the  exercises  of  the  different  members  of 
the  body,  and  all  positions  that  can  -possibly  be  taken.  It  is  a 
different  thing,  however,  if  we  limit  ourselves  to  the  practical 
exercises  and  positions  of  gymnastic  value ;  for  then  the  great 
mass  of  exercises  of  uncertain  value,  which  is  too  intricate  to 
be  overlooked,  shrinks  to  a  number  of  useful  exercises,  which, 
while  still  quite  large,  may  easily  be  overlooked  and  regulated. 
To  find  these  in  accordance  with  the  above  method  is  a  work 


4  GEllMAN-A MERIC'AN   G  YM  \  .  1  fl  V7C',S 

less  tiresome  and  <livary:  a  work  which  becomes  agreeable  and 
interesting  to  every  one  who  delights  in  discovering  good  exer- 
cises. And  any  one  who  wishes  to  become  so  thoroughly  ac- 
quainted with  the  gymnastic  materials  for  free  exercises  as  to 
be  able  to  rely  on  himself  alone  at  all  times  for  exercises,  must 
necessarily  do  this.  He  who  has  never  searched  for  or  prac- 
tised new  exercises,  but  has  always  blindly  imitated  what 
others  have  shown  him,  will  never  master  the  materials  for 
exercise." 

II  —  TACTICS 

These  are  divided  into  exercises  of  a  rank ;  exercises  of 
a  body ;  exercises  of  a  colonnade ;  and  exercises  of  a  number 
of  colonnades. 

A  — THE  RANK. 

A  rank  can  be  formed  either  as  — 

1.  A  front  rank,  a  flank   rank,  or   an   oblique   rank  ;   called   so 

from    the   position   of    each    scholar  when    taking    the 
length   of  a   rank   as   basis. 

2.  A    straight    or    a    curved     rank,    in    accordance    with    the 

shape   of  the   rank. 

3.  A   closed   rank    or  an   open  rank,  taking  into   consideration 

the    distance    the    single    members     stand    from    each 
other. 

4.  A    rank   of    two,    of   three,  of    four,    etc.,    taking   into    con- 

sideration the  number  of  pupils   in   a   rank. 

EXERCISES  OF  A  RAXK. 
The  exercises  of  a  rank  are  — 

a.  Forming  and  dressing.  d.    Wheeling. 

b.  Opening  and  closing.  e.    Forming  in  the  rank. 

C.    Marching.  /.    Combinations  of  the  above  exercises. 


TACTICS  5 

B  —  THE  BODY  OF  RANKS. 
The  body  of  ranks  can  be  formed  either  as  — 

1.  A  front  line,   a  flank  line,   an   oblique   line,   or 

2.  A  front   column,   a  flank   column,   an  oblique   column. 

EXERCISES  OF  THE  BODY  OF  RANKS. 
The  exercises  of  the  body  of  ranks  are  — 

a.  Forming  and  re-forming.  df.    "Wheeling. 

b.  Opening  and  closing.  e.   Forming  in  the  body. 

C.    Marching.  /.    Combinations  of  the  above  exercises. 

C — THE  COLONNADE. 
The  colonnade  can  be  formed  either  as  — 

1.  A  line   of  bodies   of  ranks. 

2.  A  column   of  bodies   of  ranks. 

3.  An   oblique    (Staffel)    of  bodies  of  ranks. 

EXERCISES  OF  THE  COLONNADE. 
The  exercises  of  the  colonnade  are  — 

a.  Forming  and  re-forming.  (Z.    Wheeling. 

b.  Opening  and  closing.  e.    Forming  in  the  colonnade. 

C.   Marching.  /.    Combinations  of  the  above  exercises. 

The  exercises  in  the  colonnade  are  very  numerous,  for 
they  offer  the  opportunity  of  executing  movements  to  the 
body  of  ranks,  to  the  ranks  themselves,  and  to  the  individual 
members  of  the  rank. 

D  —  THE  BODY  OP  COLONNADES. 

The  body  of  colonnades  is  composed  of  a  number  of 
colonnades,  and  can  be  formed  in  the  shape  of  a  line,  a 
column,  or  an  oblique.  Forms  of  a  more  complex  nature 


6  GEHMAN-AMEItICA.\    <.  )  M \ASTICS 

than  the  body  of  colonnades  arc  seldom  used  in  gymnastics. 
Forms  of  a  mixed  nature  are  also  so  seldom  used,  that 
iu  consideration  of  the  shortness  of  our  synopsis,  they  may 
be  omitted  entirely. 

m —  EXERCISES   WITH   THE   APPARATUS 
(WANDS,  DUMB-BELLS,  ETC.) 

1.  Exercises   -with  the    short  -wands  ;   short   wand    exercises. 

2.  Exercises   -with  long   -wands ;   long   wand   exercises. 

3.  Exercises   with  dumb-bells. 

4.  Exercises   -with  clubs. 

5.  Exercises   -with  balls   and   -weights. 

6.  Exercises  -with  short  rope    and  hoop. 

IV  — EXERCISES   ON   THE   APPARATUS 

Spiess  divides  these  exercises  into  hang  exercises,  sup- 
porting exercises,  and  hang  and  supporting  exercises,  and 
follows  a  similar  plan  in  finding  and  classifying  them  as 
he  does  with  his  free  exercises;  he  distinguishes  between 
the  main  kinds,  according  to  which  member  of  the  body 
keeps  it  (the  body)  in  one  of  these  positions. 

We,  however,  from  practical  reasons,  do  not  follow  this 
plan;  we  grade  the  exercises  (counting  from  two  to  nine), 
taking  into  consideration  the  apparatus  on  which  the  exer- 
cise is  performed,  making  allowance  for  the  increased  diffi- 
culty with  which  the  exercise  is  performed. 

Below  follows  a  classification  of  exercises  compiled  by 
Ludwig  Puritz,  with  the  assistance  of  two  of  our  most 
eminent  writers  on  gymnastics,  Dr.  J.  C.  Lion  in  Leipzig, 


EXERCISES   ON   THE  APPARATUS  1 

and  Dr.  K.  Wassmansdorf  in  Heidelberg,  in  his  "  Codebook 
for  Gymnastic  Exercises,"  which  some  ten  years  ago  was 
translated  into  English.  So  far,  Puritz  has  classified  the 
exercises  on  the  following  apparatus  in  a  masterly  manner, 
and  has  arranged  them  in  groups  in  accordance  with  their 
similarity;  and  he  will  no  doubt,  in  due  season,  supply  a 
list  and  classification  of  the  exercises  on  the  other  apparatus. 

A  —  EXERCISES  ON  THE  BALANCING  BOARD. 
B  —  EXERCISES  WITH  JUMPING  STANDS. 
C  —  EXERCISES  IN  POLE-VAULTING. 
D  —  EXERCISES  ON  THE  BUCK. 
E  —  EXERCISES  ON  THE  HORSE. 
F  —  EXERCISES  ON  THE  PARALLEL  BARS. 
G  —  EXERCISES  ON  THE  HORIZONTAL  BARS. 
H  —  EXERCISES  ON  THE  DOUBLE  HORIZONTAL  BARS. 
I  —  EXERCISES  ON  THE  TRAPEZE. 
K  —  EXERCISES  ON  THE  SWINGING  RINGS. 

a.   Exercises  without  a  swing.  b.    Exercises  with  a  swing. 

L  —  EXERCISES  ON  THE  HORIZONTAL  LADDER. 
M  —  EXERCISES  ON  THE  INCLINED  LADDER. 

a.  On  the  upper  side.  c.    On  the  outer  side. 

b.  On  the  lower  side.  d.    On  the  double  ladder. 

N  —  EXERCISES  ON  THE  CLIMBING  POLES  AND  ROPES. 

a.  Exercises  on  the  vertical  poles. 

b.  Exercises  on  the  inclined  poles. 
C.    Exercises  on  the  climbing  ropes. 

0  —  EXERCISES  ON  THE  ROUND  SWING. 

Of  the  Gymnastic  Exercises  with  apparatus  merely  men- 
tioned in   "Puritz's  Codebook,"   but  widely  commented  upon 


8  <;i:ilMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 

by  other  authors  on  gymnastics,  such  as  A.  Maul,  A.  Raven- 
stein,  J.  C.  Lion,  W.  .Jenny,  and  others,  \ve  here  mention: 

P  —  EXKKCISES    WITH   THE   LONG   AND   SHORT   ROPE. 

Q  —  EXERCISES  ON  THE  SWINGING  BOARD. 

R  —  KXKUCISES   WITH   THE    PuLLY    WEIGHTS. 

S  —  EXERCISES  ON  THE  SEE  SA\V. 

T  —  EXERCISES  ON  THE  VAULTING  Box. 

U  —  EXERCISES  ON  THE  VAULTING  TABLE. 

V  —  PYRAMIDS  ON  LADDERS,  CHAIRS,  AND  APPARATUS. 

W — COMPANION  EXERCISES. 

a.    Wrestlings  and  Combats.  c.    Gymnastic  Games. 

b.    Acrobatics. 


METHOD 


METHOD 

ANY  procedure  based  on  established  rules  for  the  purpose 
of  attaining  the  object  of  gymnastics  may  be  termed  a  method 
of  gymnastics.  However,  before  examining  more  closely  into 
the  present  prevalent  manner  of  conducting  gymnastic  exer- 
cises, we  must  above  all  things  positively  define  the  object  of 
gymnastics ;  for  with  different  ends  in  view  different  methods 
must  be  followed.  In  the  opinion  of  a  large  number  of  the 
most  prominent  physicians  and  educators,  the  object  of  gym- 
nastics is:  "A  harmonious  development  of  the  entire  body." 
/  Dr.  Muenchenberger  hits  the  nail  on  the  head,  when  he 
|ays,  "The  sole  aim  of  gymnastic  art  is  the  harmonious 
development  of  the  body  in  such  a  manner  that  the  smallest 
part,  itself  and  for  itself,  as  well  as  in  conjunction  with  the 
whole,  is  able  to  actualize  and  execute  the  mind's  will." 
Jahn,  the  father  of  our  gymnastics,  says,  "Gymnastic  art 
seeks  to  re-establish  the  lost  portion  of  the  human  edu- 
cation." 1 

Dr.  Frteorich  Dittes,  the  eminent  pedagogue,  writes  as  fol- 
lows: "We  must  not  try  to  make  athletes,  but  must  aim  at 
the  harmonious  development  of  all  the  bodily  forces."  And, 
after  enumerating  the  different  bodily  exercises  for  gain- 
ing this  end,  he  adds :  "  The  best  of  all  physical  exercises 
are  gymnastics,  —  German  gymnastics  as  defined  by  Guts 
Muths,  Adolf  Spiess,  and  others.  No  other  kind  of  exer- 
cises does  so  perfectly  develop  all  the  forces  of  the  body  as 

9 


10  '•  I:KMAN-AM /:/.-/<  . i  .v  t.  YM. \ASTICS 

do  gymnastics,  properly  conducted ;  and  it  may  be  regards! 
as  a  gn-at  improvement  in  our  educational  system,  that 
gymnastic  exercises  are  being  more  and  more  acknowledged 
as  a  necessary  means  for  the  education  of  our  youth.  Gym- 
nastic exercises  are  to  effect  a  symmetrical  development  of 
all  the  members  of  the  Ixnly,  in  order  to  make  possible  the 
free  use  of  the  bodily  forces,  which  are  subject  to  the  influ- 
ence of  the  mind.  Since  this  can  be  effected  by  positive 
discipline  and  order  only,  such  as  is  maintained  in  our  gym- 
nasiums, it  follows  that  gymnastics  accustom  the  youth  to  a 
proportionate  use  of  their  strength,  accustom  them  to  punc- 
tuality, to  obedience,  to  self-control,  to  public  spiritedness, 
and  to  the  suppression  of  arbitrariness  and  wilfulness ;  while 
the  sense  of  decency  cultivated  in  the  gymnasium  proves  a 
valuable  counterpoise  against  the  incitation  to  immoral  and 
enervating  pleasures.  From  this  we  learn  that  gymnastic 
exercises,  judiciously  conducted,  do  not  only  promote  the 
abilities  of  the  individual,  but  have  a  tendency  also  toward 
giving  the  state  a  people  ready  and  able  to  meet  any  emer- 
gencies in  time  of  peace  or  war. 

"Here  it  must  be  remarked,  that  girls  are  as  much  in 
need  of  gymnastic  exercises  as  boys  are ;  for  the  fragility  of 
its  women  may  prove  of  fatal  importance  to  a  whole  nation. 
In  this  respect,  the  old  Spartans  discerned  and  acted  judi- 
ciously. The  selection  of  exercises  with  respect  to  their 
difficulty  must,  of  course,  be  suited  to  the  condition  of  the 
children ;  and  at  no  time  is  it  more  necessary  to  individualize 
than  when  conducting  gymnastics.  Up  to  the  tenth  year, 
games  and  calisthenics  must  form  the  main  part  of  the  exer- 
cises. Beware  of  allowing  your  enthusiasm  for  gymnastics  to 


METHOD  11 

run  away  with  you,  by  giving  children  difficult  and  dangerous 
exercises  (feats)  to  perform;  this  is  dangerous  and  harmful, 
and  tends  to  bring  gymnastic  art  into  disrepute.  The  careful, 
observant  pedagogue  will  never  forget  that  gymnastic  art  does 
not  aim  to  merely  teach  gymnastic  exercises  and  feats,  but 
that  it  is  an  essential  part  of  a  general  education." 

Another  well-known  pedagogue,  Friedrich  Disterweg,  says, 
"Gymnastic  exercise  is  the  training  of  both  mind  and  body." 
As  early  as  1819  Dr.  Fred  Strass  writes:  "Gymnastic  exer- 
cise is,  therefore,  but  a  supplement  to  a  complete  education 
of  youth,  heretofore  (1819)  strangely  overlooked,  and  must 
be  combined  with  the  other  branches  of  education  as  a  whole, 
if  our  youth  is  to  receive  a  uniform  mental,  physical,  and 
moral  education,  the  foundation  of  the  state's  welfare."  "If, 
then,"  says  Moritz  Zettler,  a  noted  German  teacher  of  gym- 
nastics, "the  school  places  gymnastics  in  its  course  of  study, 
it  but  obeys  the  dictates  of  nature,  the  first  law  of  which 
is  the  uniform  development  of  the  whole  human  being." 
And  again  he  says :  "  From  this  aim  of  the  school,  which 
is  naturally  consistent  with  human  nature,  it  may  be  seen 
that  physical  exercises  should  be  cultivated,  not  for  their 
own  sake  only,  not  for  the  purpose  of  educating  gymnasts, 
but  for  the  purpose  of  making  the  body  of  the  pupil  healthy, 
strong,  and  agile ;  in  other  words,  to  preserve  it,  and  to 
train  the  pupil  to  discretion,  resoluteness,  courage,  and  endu- 
rance." And  again :  "  To  gain  this  end,  the  school  must 
avoid  everything  that  is  not  consonant  to  this.  Gymnastics 
in  the  school  must  not  be  regarded  as  a  means  for  restoring 
the  debilitated,  enervated,  sickly  body,  or  for  removing  cer- 
tain deformities.  School  gymnastics  must  not  and  cannot 


12  <.I-:I;.M.\.\   AMI:I;K.\\  >.  v  \i  \  .1  -TICS 

be  a  cure  for  sickness;  for  we  take  it  for  granted  that  the 
pupils  of  a  class  enjoy  normal  health  so  long  as  they  are 
able  to  attend  school.  Should  this  not  be  the  case  with  tins 
or  that  child,  the  physician's  diagnosis  must  decide  whether 
the  child  is  to  continue  its  attendance  at  school  or  not.  Tin- 
school  has  no  time  to  spend  with  the  diseases  of  the  single 
pupils,  for  it  must  never  lose  sight  of  its  main  object. 
Where  gymnastics  are  used  as  a  remedy  for  an  ailment  or 
a  deformity,  the  exercises  must  be  carefully  selected  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  special  requirements  of  the  case  in  ques- 
tion. Every  exercise  must  be  carefully  examined  into,  as  to 
its  suitability  in  this  special  case,  and  it  must  be  performed 
only  in  accordance  with  certain  sanitary  rules.  With  such 
gymnastics  the  school  cannot  deal,  for  they  belong  to  the 
field  of  orthopedy ;  and  to  try  to  transplant  them  to  the 
gymnasium  would  be  just  as  wrong  as  it  would  be  foolish 
for  a  physician  to  prescribe,  for  a  perfectly  healthy  person 
the  continued  use  of  fever-allaying  medicines." 

" Hinc  illce  lacrimce;"  this  is  the  sore  point  over  which 
so  much  foolish  debating  and  wrangling  is  being  indulged 
in  nowadays,  almost  leading  one  to  believe  that  German  gym- 
nastics are  something  entirely  new,  and  have  yet  to  prove 
their  practicability  and  value  as  an  educational  means.  ( )ne 
of  the  first  demands  of  our  school  is  that  the  teacher  who 
instructs  our  youth  in  gymnastics  must  be  a  man  and  a 
pedagogue,  and  not  a  mere  gymnast  or  physician.  This 
qualification  was  made  indispensable  by  Adolf  Spiess,  the 
founder  of  the  present  system  of  German  school  gymnastics, 
more  than  fifty  years  ago ;  and  so  strictly  has  it  been  insisted 
upon,  that  teachers  of  gymnastics  without  a  pedagogical  edu- 


METHOD  13 

cation  are  rarely  met  with.  The  physicians  of  Germany 
have  at  no  time  pushed  themselves  forward  as  teachers  of 
gymnastics,  although  a  great  number  of  them  have  diligently 
taken  regular  gymnastic  exercise  and  do  so  yet.  Concerning 
this,  Dr.  F.  Dittes  makes  the  following  appropriate  remark: 
"Instruction  in  gymnastics  must  not  be  isolated,  but  must 
be  closely  linked  with  the  whole  school  education,  and  form 
an  essential  part  thereof.  Mere  gymnasts  are  not  wanted; 
the  school  needs  thorough  pedagogues ;  and  it  would  be  most 
desirable  if  the  class-teacher  could,  at  the  same  time,  be  the 
instructor  in  gymnastics ;  hence  gymnastic  art  ought  to  be 
theoretically  and  practically  taught  in  our  normal  schools 
for  public  school  teachers." 

The  same  author,  in  speaking  of  the  future  of  gymnas- 
tics, says,  "  If  once  the  conviction  prevails  that  the  youth 
of  the  present  age  sit  entirely  too  long  on  the  school-benches, 
deriving  therefrom  no  mental  nor  moral  benefit,  but  rather  im- 
pairing their  physical  welfare,  if  once  the  people  shall  have 
become  conscious  of  this  fact,  then  sufficient  time  for  gym- 
nastic exercises  will  be  found,  and  a  willingness  for  procuring 
the  necessary  place  and  apparatus  will  naturally  follow." 

For  a  harmonious  development  of  the  whole  body,  the  first 
thing  to  be  learned  is  the  free  control  of  one's  limbs,  either 
while  standing  or  walking  on  even  ground,  or  while  in  unac- 
customed positions,  and  on  extraordinary  bases  of  support. 
This  necessitates,  besides  calisthenics,  exercises  on  the  appara- 
tus. Generally  speaking,  there  are  two  methods  of  conducting 
the  gymnastic  exercises  of  the  German  school ;  but,  strictly 
speaking,  there  are  any  number  of  them.  The  one  followed 
formerly,  but  now  almost  entirely  out  of  use,  is  the  so-called 


14  t ;/•;/,-. v. L v-.i.u /•:/;/'•. i. v  GYMHA8TH  a 

"Jahn-Eiselen"  method;  the  other,  which  is  now  in 
eral  use,  and  is  frequently  combined  with  the  former,  is 
Spiess's  method.  It  is  but  a  short  time  since  that  thr  advo- 
cates of  these  two  methods  were  bitterly  fighting  each  other ; 
but  the  controversy  was  decided  in  favor  of  Spiess's  method. 
At  the  present  time  all  gymnastic  exercises,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  those  on  the  apparatus,  both  in  schools  and  in 
in  gymnastic  societies,  are  conducted  after  Spiess's  method. 
In  the  lower  classes  of  schools,  the  exercises  on  the  apparatus, 
too,  are  conducted  after  Spiess's  method ;  while,  as  a  rule, 
in  the  upper  classes  and  in  the  gymnasium  the  Jahn-Kiselen 
method  is  followed.  After  the  old  Jahn-Eiselen  method 
gymnastic  exercises  are  conducted  in  divisions  ;  the  class 
is  divided  into  small  divisions  of  ten  to  fifteen  pupils, 
each  division  being  under  the  supervision  of  an  advanced 
pupil  (a  leader),  who  shows  certain  exercises,  supervises 
them,  and  assists  when  necessary.  When  the  pupils  have 
practised  one  kind  of  exercise  for  a  certain  time,  a  general 
change  of  divisions  to  a  different  apparatus  leads  to  another 
kind  of  exercises ;  then  comes  a  game,  in  which  the  whole 
class  participates,  or  separate  games  and  contests  are  in- 
dulged in ;  while  the  teacher  looks  after  good  order,  and 
sees  that  the  leaders  show  correctly  the  exercises,  which 
they  have  been  taught  in  a  special  lesson  for  leaders. 

Occasionally  the  teacher  takes  all  the  pupils  as  one  class, 
and  conducts  a  few  simple  free  exercises ;  but  the  exercises 
on  the  apparatus^  and  the  games,  are,  of  course,  at  all  times 
of  the  greatest  importance.  The  advantages  of  this  method 
of  gymnastic  exercises  are  :  - 

"A.  rapid  progress   of   talented  young  gymnasts,  enabling 


METHOD  ]  5 

them  to  do  difficult  exercises,  so-called  master-exercises  (Grip- 
feluebungeiiy  ;  and  a  lessening  of  expenses." 

Alfred  Maul  speaks  of  this  as  follows  :  "  If  gymnastic  art 
has  no  other  end  in  view  than  to  give  our  youth  an  oppor- 
tunity for  healthful  exercise  in  the  free  air,  or  to  give  them 
a  playground  where  they  may  gratify  their  pleasure  in  test- 
ing their  physical  strength  and  skill,  then  this  method  may 
suffice ;  but  the  aim  of  German  gymnastics  is  a  regulated, 
general  development  of  the  body.  German  gymnastics  must 
be  looked  upon  as  an  essential  branch  of  education ;  and  they 
must,  therefore,  be  conducted  in  a  rational  pedagogical  man- 
ner. Hence,  the  combining  of  a  number  of  classes  to  one 
class  is  considered  a  serious  defect  in  the  above  described 
method,  especially  where  these  classes  are  composed  of  per- 
sons in  different  stages  of  development.  As  the  pupils  of 
a  school  are  graded  in  classes,  so  ought  the  pupils  in  gym- 
nastics to  be  graded  in  classes,  according  to  age,  sex,  etc." 

Spiess's  method  is  the  method  of  general  or  class  gym- 
nastics. According  to  it,  the  pupils  are  divided  after  the 
manner  of  our  public  schools,  and  receive  gymnastic  instruc- 
tions in  such  a  manner  as  to  keep  them  under  the  constant 
supervision  of  the  teacher,  who  himself  gives  out  the  exer- 
cises, and,  when  necessary,  shows  how  to  do  them,  and 
superintends  the  execution  thereof.  All  the  exercises,  with 
the  exception  of  the  exercises  on  the  apparatus,  are,  as 
a  rule,  performed  simultaneously  by  all  the  pupils  of  the 
class,  either  at  the  command  of  the  teacher  or  at  counting; 
while  the  exercises  on  the  apparatus  are  generally  performed 
simultaneously  by  one-sixth  or  one-eighth  of  the  class,  on 
command  or  at  counting. 


16  GERMAN-AMERICAN   GYMNASTICS 

While  part  of  the  class  is  actively  employed,  the  others 
may  rest  from  the  exercises,  which  are  often  very  fatiguing, 
and  may  watch  their  fellow-pupils  while  they  exercise. 

The  advantages  of  this  method  of  gymnastics  are:  (1)  A 
clear  insight  on  the  part  of  the  teacher  into  the  work  and 
capabilities  of  each  and  every  pupil  ;  (2)  an  instruction 
according  to  plan,  and  a  systematic  gradation  of  exercises, 
which  is  sure  to  gain  positive  results ;  (3)  a  confidence- 
inspiring  encouragement  of  timid  pupils,  a  continued  incite- 
ment to  lazy  ones,  and  a  healthy  restriction  of  the  over- 
zealous  ;  (4)  an  unavoidable  accustomance  to  attention  and 
resoluteness ;  and,  lastly,  a  refreshing,  invigorating  pleasure 
in  general,  regulated  work. 

The  different  kinds  of  exercises  generally  observed  in 
class  gymnastics  are  classified  as  follows :  - 

1.  Tactics  in  walking  and  running. 

2.  Calisthenics  with  or  without  apparatus. 

3.  Exercises  on  the  apparatus,  generally  on  an  apparatus 

for  hanging  or  supporting  exercises,  alternating  with 
some  kind  of  jumping. 

4.  Gymnastic  games. 

According  to  the  age  and  sex  of  the  pupils  this  or  that 
class  of  gymnastics  should  receive  special  attention.  A  de- 
toiled  instruction  for  the  solving  of  all  questions  connected 
with  a  systematic  conduction  of  gymnastic  exercises  is  out 
of  place  here ;  this  must  be  left  to  a  treatise  on  special 
methods.  However,  to  meet  the  wishes  of  such  of  our 
English-speaking  colleagues  as  are  earnestly  desirous  of 
obtaining  a  better  knowledge  of  the  German  method  of 
school  gymnastics,  a  list  of  the  papers  read  on  this  subject, 


METHOD  17 

during  the  courses  of  the  Normal  School  of  Gymnastics  of 
the  German  Gymnastic  Union  of  North  America,  when  the 
school  was  situated  at  Indianapolis,  is  here  given:  — 

1.  The  Necessity  of  Physical  Training. 

2.  The  Influence  of  Physical  Exercise  on  our  Health. 

3.  The  Influence  of  Gymnastics  on  Strength  and  Agility. 

4.  The  Influence  of  Gymnastics  on  the  Mental  Forces. 

5.  The  Object  of  Gymnastic  Instruction. 

6.  Gymnastic  Exercises. 

7.  The  Gymnasium. 

8.  Gymnastic  Apparatus. 

9.  The  Time  for  Gymnastics. 

10.  The  Gymnastic  School. 

11.  The  Dress  of  Gymnasts. 

12.  The  Teacher  of  Gymnastics. 

13.  The  Ruling  Principles  in  Gymnastic  Instruction. 

14.  Auxiliaries  in  Gymnastic  Instruction. 

15.  Duration  of  Exercises 

16.  Form  of  Exercises. 

17.  The   Difference   between    Gymnastics    for    Boys    and 

Gymnastics  for  Girls. 

18.  Tactics. 

19.  Free  Exercises.     (Calisthenics.) 

20.  Exercises  with  Apparatus. 

21.  Exercises  on  Apparatus. 

22.  Gymnastic  Games. 

23.  Grading  of  Pupils  according  to  Work. 

24.  The  Course  of  Study  in  Gymnastic  Instruction. 

The   text-books   used   were   M.   Zettler's    "  Method,"   and 
A.  Maul's  "Gymnastic  Instruction/' 


is  GXRMAN-AMERICAS   GYMNA8TH  - 


NOTES    FOR    LEADERS 

BY  WM.  A.  STECHER 

EVERY  large  undertaking,  especially  one  lasting  a  number 
of  months  or  years,  must  have  a  definite  plan  by  which  it 
is  governed,  so  that  its  aims  may  be  reached,  and  that  the 
efforts  spent  in  its  behalf  may  not  be  lost,  or  drift  into 
wrong  directions. 

Every  class-leader  undertakes  a  responsible  piece  of  work 
when  taking  charge  of  the  gymnastic  work  of  a  class  or  divis- 
ion. He  must  endeavor  to  advance  his  class  systematically. 
He  must  know  how  to  awaken  the  interest  of  his  scholars. 

He  must  bring  them  to  look  forward  to  their  gymnastic 
lesson  with  ever-increasing  enthusiasm.  He  must  be  a  model 
to  them  in  every  respect.  He  must  be  a  teacher  in  the 
noblest  sense  of  the  word. 

To  be  able  to  do  this  a  few  rules  must  always  be  kept 
in  mind.  They  are  :  — 

1.  Try  to  master  every  exercise  that  you  intend  to  teach, 

Practise  as  much  as  you  can. 

2.  Thoroughly  prepare  yourself  for  each  lesson. 

3.  Keep   a    memorandum    of    all    the    exercises   practised, 

and   make    notes    concerning    their    execution   so   as 
to  go  forward  intelligently. 

4.  Repeat  all  exercises ;   then  alternate  and  combine  them 

with  new  movements,  gradually  going    from  easy  to 
difficult,  from  simple  to  complex  movements. 


NOTES   FOR   LEADERS  19 

5.  See  that  your  teaching  is  interesting  to  your  scholars, 

and  give  them  enough  to  do. 

6.  Arrange  your  order  of  exercises  so  that  your  scholars 

leave  the  gymnasium  with  the  feeling  of  having  been 
benefited.  Do  not  waste  your  time  on  movements 
having  little  gymnastic  value. 

7 .  Gradually  bring  your  scholars  to  do  all  exercises  with 

the  utmost  precision  and  correctness. 

8.  Show  the  exercise  you  want  done  in  its  best  form.     A 

practical  illustration  is  better  than  a  long  explanation. 

9.  When  exercising   on  the  apparatus,  have  your  scholars 

go  to  and  from  the  same  in  an  orderly  manner  and 
in  the  same  order.  Have  your  scholars  stand  so 
that  all  can  see  the  exercise. 

10.  Gradually    increase    the    difficulty   of    your    exercises. 

Build  up,  so  to  say,  your  exercises  from  a  simple 
movement  to  a  complex,  but  add  no  new  exercises 
for  which  the  pupils  have  not  been  prepared  by  the 
foregoing  movements. 

11.  When   exercising  on  the    apparatus,  stand  so  that  you 

are  always  ready  to  give  any  needed  help  to  your 
scholars.  (Before  beginning  to  exercise,  see  that 
your  apparatus  is  in  good  order.) 

NOTES    ON    APPARATUS    WO 

1.  For  the  sake  of  brevity,  words  that  are  not  absolutely 

necessary  to  explain  an  exercise  are  generally  omitted 
in  the  following  groups  of  exercises. 

2.  Whenever   possible,    all    exercises   should   be   executed 

left  as  well  as  right.     (See  6.) 


20  (.HUMAN-AMERICAN   GYMNASTICS 

3.  The  terms  front,  rear,  and  flank  vault  are  derived  from 

the  fact,  that,  while  executing  one  of  these  move- 
ments, either  the  front,  the  rear,  or  one  of  the 
flanks  of  the  gymnast  is  turned  towards  the  appa- 
ratus. 

4.  During  a  side-stand   (hang  or  rest)   the  width  of   the 

body  is  in  a  line  with  the  length  of  the  apparatus ; 
in  a  cross-stand  (hang  or  rest)  it  is  at  right  angles 
to  the  length  of  the  apparatus. 

5.  A  scholar  stands   either  with  his    face,    back,    or   side 

towards  an  apparatus;  and  from  these  positions  the 
terms  forwards,  backwards,  or  sideways  stand  (hang 
or  rest)  are  derived. 

6.  The    word    right    (left)     as    commonly    used    in    the 

description  of  an  exercise,  means  either  the  right 
(left)  arm,  leg,  or  side  of  the  body. 

7.  In  speaking  of  the  right  (left)  side   of  an   apparatus, 

as  for  instance  the  long  horse,  the  side  that  is  to 
your  right,  when  the  horse  stands  ready  for  use 
(the  highest  part  farthest  from  you)  is  called  the 
right  side.  This  same  side  is  called  the  right  when 
the  horse  stands  crosswise  as  a  side  horse.  The  terms 
off  and  near  side  are  sometimes  used  in  the  place 
of  right  and  left  side  in  exercises  on  the  side 
horse. 

8  When  exercising  on  the  side  horse  the  neck  (the  high- 
est end)  is  to  your  left,  the  saddle  in  front  of,  and 
the  croup  to  the  right  of  you.  The  pommel  to 
your  left  is  called  the  first,  the  other  the  second, 
pommel. 


NOTES  FOR  LEADERS  21 

ABBREVIATIONS. 

r.  Stands  for  right.  o.  Stands  for  or. 

1.  Stands  for  left.  inw.  Stands  for  inward, 

fw.  Stands  for  forward.  outw.  Stands  for  outward, 

bw.  Stands  for  backward.  pos.  Stands  for  position, 

sw.  Stands  for  sideways.  opp.  Stands  for  opposite. 

Other  abbreviations  are   found   under  the   head  of   Club- 
swinging  and  Exercises  on  the  Horizontal  Bar. 


'//•.7M/.I.V-.  IV /:/.'/'.  I  V    i.)  M\.  |>yv> 


MARCHES 


BY  WILLIAM  A.  STKniKi: 


THE  following  are  simple  marches  for  arranging  a  class 
in  a  position  from  which  the  ranks  can  easily  be  opened  for 
free  exercises. 


KNOWN  AS  LION'S  MARCH 


In  a  single  file  the  scholars  march  left  around  the  hall, 
then   through   the    middle,    when,    upon   reaching    the   upper 


K  H  1  4  \  /  f  V  f  1- 


Fig.   1. 


Fig.  2. 


end  of  the  hall,  they  face  alternately,  right  and  left,  march 
to  the  comers,  then  along  the  sides  to  the  lower  end,  then 
inward  toward  each  other.  Upon  meeting,  they  form  ranks 


MARCHES  23 

of  twos,  and  perform  tlie  above  evolutions  by  twos,  then  by 
fours,  eights,  etc.  Upon  command  the  scholars  mark  time 
and  halt  (Fig.  1). 

The  ranks  are  then  opened  outward  sw.  from  the  centre, 
by  taking  side  steps  and  raising  the  arms  sw.  until  at  full 
distance.  The  re-forming  into  single  file  (a  flank  rank)  can 
be  accomplished  by  reversing  the  above  movements,  or  by 
facing  right  and  closing  the  ranks  fw.  The  first  rank  then 
marches  to  the  left,  the  others  following. 

II 

This  is  similar  to  the  above,  only  that  the  marching  is 
not  done  at  right  angles,  but  by  countermarches  through  the 
centre  (Fig.  2). 

This  march  can  also  be  varied  by  alternately  marching 
at  right  angles  and  countermarching. 

Open  the  ranks  sideways  from  the  centre,  by  marching 
forward,  the  arms  raised  in  line  with  the  rank  until  the 
required  distance  is  found. 

jj\  -r'ii.'un.- .'     •-:, 

1  In  a  single  file  the  scholars  march  left  around  the  hall, 
then  through  the  middle,  and,  upon  reaching  the  upper  end, 
face  alternately  right  and  left,  march  to  the  corners,  then 
ahong  the  sides  to  the  lower  end.  Here  the  first  of  each 
rank  executes  a  three-eighths  turn  inw.  and  marches  fw., 
(obliquely  bw.  to  his.  line  of  march  at  the  side)  diagonally 
through  the  hall,  the  rest  following.  In  the  centre  the 
two  ranks  meet  and  cross  through  each  other.  This  is  done 
as  follows  :  — 

The  first  of  the  class  passes  on,  the  first  of  the   opposite 


24 


GERM  A  N-A  M  ERIC  A  N    G  YMNA  STICK 


side   then  crosses  over  behind  him,  the  second  of  each  side 

then  follows  in  the  same  manner,  and  so  on  (Fig.  3). 

The  leaders,  upon  reaching 
the  corners,  march  along  the 
sides,  and,  upon  reaching  the 
lower  comers,  again  cross  over 
obliquely  through  the  hall, 
along  the  sides,  and  inward 
towards  each  other.  They 
then  form  ranks  of  two,  who 
repeat  the  foregoing  move- 
ments, eventually  forming 
fours,  and  eights,  etc. 

Let  the  column  march  1. 
around  the  hall,  mark  time, 

and  halt.      Open   the   ranks   sw.   to   the  left  by  taking   side 

steps    and     raising     the     arms 

until    the     distance     is     estab- 
lished. 

IV 
This  march  is  similar  to  the 

above,  with  the  exception  that 

each   rank    (or   column),    after 

crossing  over  and  reaching  the 

corner,  counter  marches  outw., 

thereby     immediately     crossing 

over  again   (Fig.  4). 

After     halting,      open     the 

ranks  to  the  left  by  marching 

fw.,  the  arms  raised  until  the  required  distance  is  found. 


Fig.  4. 


MARCHES 


25 


The  scholars  march  left  around  the  hall  in  single  file. 
Upon  nearing  a  corner  the  command  is  given  to  form  twos 
by  executing  a  quarter  turn  1.  As  they  successively  reach 
the  corner  the  scholars  face  left  by  twos,  and  then  march 
fw.  in  a  front  column  composed  of  ranks  of  two  (Fig.  5). 


JL 


Fig.  5. 

Later  the  command  is  given  to  form  fours  (eights,  etc.). 
This  is  done  by  a  quarter  wheel  left  of  two  ranks,  as  they 
reach  the  corner.  After  halting,  open  the  ranks  half  dis- 
tance (by  raising  one  arm)  sw.  from  the  centre.  Should 
more  room  be  needed,  let  the  odd  files  (the  ones,  threes,  etc.) 
take  one  step  fw.  or  bw.  Front  ranks  can  also  be  opened 
fw.  (or  bw.)  by  each  succeeding  file  taking  one  more  step 
fw.  then  the  foregoing.  The  opening  and  closing  can  also 
be  done  at  a  run,  or  by  hopping,  skipping,  etc. 


L>(  I  GERM  A  N-A  M  /•:/,'  H'A  .V    <;  YM  ^ .  I  .s  TH  '.s 


FREE     EXEBCISES 

BY  HKNKV   SfOER 

FEEE  exercises  may  be  practised  with  or  without  appa- 
ratus. 

Among  the  different  branches  of  physical  training  prac- 
tised in  the  gymnasium,  free  exercises  are  of  the  greatest 
importance. 

The  teacher's  programme  in  a  gymnasium  generally  begins 
with  marching  and  free  gymnastics.  In  the  latter  all  the 
muscles  of  the  body  ought  to  be  brought  into  action,  there- 
fore it  is  necessary  to  practise  arm,  trunk,  and  leg  exercises 
during  a  lesson.  Contrary  to  this  rule,  in  this  chapter  some 
groups  of  exercises  are  indicated  where  arm  and  leg,  or  trunk 
and  arm,  or  leg  and  trunk  exercises  only  are  given.  The 
author  does  not  presume  to  dictate  every  exercise,  but  leaves 
it  to  the  discretion  of  the  teacher  to  bring  into  each  lesson 
he  gives  such  exercises  as  he  considers  necessary  in  every 
given  case.  These  exercises  and  groups  of  exercises  are  in- 
tended to  show  how  different  movements  can  be  combined. 
The  number  of  good  exercises  and  combinations  of  exercises 
is  inexhaustible.  The  teacher  of  gymnastics  may  take  the  best 
exercises  from  this  work,  and  combine  them  into  such  groups 
as  he  thinks  suitable  for  his  class.  A  few  groups  of  counter 
and  dissimilar  exercises  are  also  given  here. 

A  brief  explanation  of  these  exercises  may  be  necessary. 
Counter  exercises  are  movements  which  are  practised  i:i 


FREE  EXERCISES  27! 

opposite  directions ;  i.e.,  one  division  exercises  to  the  right 
or  with  the  right  arm,  leg,  etc. ;  while  the  other  division 
practises  the  same  exercise  to  the  left,  or  with  the  left  arm, 
leg,  etc. 

Dissimilar  exercises  are  different  movements  executed  at 
the  same  time  by  two  or  more  divisions ;  i.e.,  one  division 
bends  the  trunk  forward,  the  other  raises  the  arms  side- 
ways. 

We  distinguish  between  simple  and  compound  exercises. 
Exercises  executed  by  any  one  part  of  the  body,  or  by  both 
arms  or  both  legs  simultaneously,  are  called  simple  exercises ; 
while  all  movements  executed  by  two  or  more  different  mem- 
bers of  the  body  are  called  compound  exercises. 

Simple  as  well  as  compound  exercises  may  be  practised 
in  two  or  more  counts.  There  are  different  methods  of 
forming  groups  of  exercises ;  but  all  groups  ought  to  be 
combined  in  such  manner  as  to  overtax  no  part  of  the  body. 
Various  methods  may  ba  followed  in  teaching  the  exercises. 

One  of  these  is  :  - 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  to  begin,  and  counts 
1—2,  or  1—2-3—4,  and  the  command  "  Halt "  finishes  the 
exercise  ;  or  he  gives  a  number  of  exercises,  which  are  exe- 
cuted in  succession ;  and  also  gives  the  number  of  counts 
for  each  exercise,  as  1—8  or  1—16. 

The  pupil  then  counts  for  himself,  and  practises  the 
given  number  of  exercises.  This  method  is  generally  used 
in  practising  exercises  with  music,  for  exhibitions,  etc. 

Another  method  is  to  practise  exercises  upon  command. 
The  pupil  practises  a  given  exercise  until  the  teacher  indi- 
cates another  movement,  for  example  i  - 


28 


GERM  A  N-A  M  ERICA  N   G  TMNA8TKS 


Raise  the  arms  forward ;  Begin ! 

Rise  on  the  toes  ;  Begin ! 

Bend  the  trunk  forward  ;  Begin !  etc. 

The  pupils  continue  practising  one  exercise  until  the 
command  to  l>egin  another  movement  is  given. 

Every  command  is  divided  into  two  parts;  between  the 
command  of  explanation  and  of  execution  a  pause  must  be 
made.  The  command  of  explanation  is  pronounced  slowly 
and  distinctly,  that  of  execution  decisively  and  sharply. 


PRELIMINARY    EXERCISES. 
Fundamental   position  ;     Stand  ! 

(Fig.  6). 

The  heels  together,  the  toes 
turned  outward  to  a  right  angle,  the 
knees  straight  and  together,  the  arms 
at  the  sides  slightly  curved,  the  hands 
a  little  backward,  the  thumbs  forward, 
the  shoulders  backward,  chest  well  for- 
ward, and  the  head  erect. 


Resting  position  ;  Stand ! 
Rest! 


Or,   In   place  ; 


Fig.   7. 


Cross  the  arms  forward,  the  hands  grasping  the  biceps, 
and  place  the  right  foot  forward.  Or,  grasp  the  hands  back- 
ward, and  place  the  right  foot  forward. 


POSITIONS    OF    THE    ARMS. 
1.      Arms   forward  ;  Raise  ! 

The    arms    straight    and    level    with    the    shoulders,    the 
knuckles  outward  (Fig.  7). 


FREE  EXERCISES 


29 


2.  Arms   side-ways  ;   Raise  ! 

The  arms  straight  and  level  with  the  shoulders,  the 
knuckles  upward. 

3.  Arms   upward;   Raise! 

The  arms  straight,  and  raised  directly  upward  over  the 
head,  the  knuckles  outward.  (See  Fig.  13.) 

4.  Arms   side-ways   upward  ;   Raise  ! 

The    amis    straight   until   level    with    the    shoulders,    the 
knuckles    upward;    when    raising    up- 
ward   twist    the    arms,    the    knuckles 
outward. 

Reverse  when  lowering. 

5.  Arms  to  thrust ;  Raise ! 

The  forearms  must  be  level  with 
the  elbows,  the  hands  clenched,  the 
knuckles  downward,  the  elbows  moved 
backward  (Fig.  8). 

6.  Arms   to   strike   forward;   Raise! 
The   hands    clenched,   the   knuckles 

upward,   the    elbows   pointing    forward    and    level    with    the 
shoulders   (Fig.  9). 

7.  Arms   to   strike   sideways  ;   Raise  ! 

As  Exercise  6,  elbows  pointing  sideways. 

8.  Arms  to   cut  forward  ;   Raise  ! 

The  arms  bent  to  an  acute  angle,  the  elbows  point  forward 
level  with  the  shoulders,  the  fingers  straight,  the  knuckles 
outward.  (See  Fig.  22.) 


Fig.  9. 


Fig.  8. 


30 


GKRMA  N-A  M  ERIC  A  N    G  YM  A  .  1  >  TI<  > 


9.      Arms   to   cut   sideways  ;   Raise  ! 
As  Exercise  8,  elbows  pointing  sideways  (Fig.  JO). 

10.  Hands   on  hips;   Place! 

Place  the  thumbs  backward,  fingers  straight  and   forward 
(Fig.  11). 

11.  Hands   on   shoulders  ;   Place  ! 

Fingers  touch  the  shoulders,  the  elbows  pointing  sideways 
and  level  with  the  shoulder.     (See  Fig.  19.) 


Fig.   10.  Fig.  11. 

12.  Arms  backward  ;   Fold  ! 

The  arms  placed  on  the  small  of  the  back.     (See  Fig.  14.) 

13.  Hands  backward  ;   Grasp  ! 

The   hands  clasped  behind   the  back,  the  arms  downward 
and  slightly  bent.     (See  Fig.  15.) 

POSITION    OF   THE   FEET. 

1.      Step  position,  right    (left)   leg  forward  ;  Place 
Move  one  leg  about  twelve  inches  in  the  given  direction, 
standing  firmly  on  both  feet  (Fig.  11). 


FREE  EXERCISES  31 

2.  Step  position,  right   (left)   leg  sideways  ;  Place  . 

3.  Step   position,  right   (left)   leg  back-ward ;  Place ! 

4.  Side   straddle   position;   Stand! 

The  feet  firmly  on  the  floor,  about  eighteen  inches  apart. 
(See  Fig.  21.) 

5.  Cross   straddle   position;   Stand! 

The  feet  firmly  on  the  floor,  about  eighteen  inches  apart, 
right  or  left  leg  forward.  (See  Fig.  22.) 

6.  Fencing  position  ;   Stand  ! 

Execute  one-eighth  of  a  turn  left  or  right,  and  place  the 
right  or  left  leg  about  eighteen  inches  forward,  and  bend 
the  knees  to  an  obtuse  angle,  the  feet  firmly  on  the  floor, 
the  body  erect,  and  resting  more  on  the  stationary  leg. 
(See  Fig.  20.)  Another  fencing  pos.  often  practised  is  to 
keep  the  stepping  leg  straight. 

ARM   EXERCISES    FROM   DIFFERENT    POSITIONS. 

1.  Raise   the   arms  forward;  Begin!  1—2. 

2.  Raise   the    arms   sideways  ;   Begin  !   1—2. 

3.  Raise   the   arms  forward   upward ;   Begin  !  1—2. 

4.  Raise   the    arms   sideways   upward ;   Begin !  1—2. 
See  the  arm  positions. 

5.  Thrust   the    arms   forward ;   Begin !  1—2. 

6.  Thrust   the   arms   sideways  ;   Begin  !  1—2. 

7.  Thrust   the   arms   upward ;   Begin  !   1—2. 

8.  Thrust   the    arms   downward  ;   Begin  !  1-2. 

In  thrusting  forward  or  sideways,  the  knuckles  are  upward ; 
in  thrusting  upward,  the  knuckles  are  backward ;  in  thrusting 
downward,  the  knuckles  are  forward. 

9.  Strike   the   arms  forward ;   Begin !  1—2. 


32 


GERM  A  N-A  M ERICA  N   G  YMNAST1CS 


10.  Strike   the   arms  forward   downward  ;   Begin !   1-2. 

11.  Strike   the   arms  sideways;   Begin!   1-2. 

12.  Strike   the   arms   sideways   downward ;   Begin !   1-2. 
The  knuckles  downward. 

13.  Cut  with  the   arms  forward;   Begin!   1—2. 

14.  Cut  with  the   arms  forward   downward ;   Begin !  1—2. 

15.  Cut  with  the   arms   sideways  ;   Begin  !  1—2. 

16.  Cut  with  the   arms   sideways   downward ;   Begin  !   1—2. 
In  cutting   with   the    arms    forward    and    downward,    the 

knuckles   are   outward.     In   cutting  sideways   and  downward, 
the  knuckles  are  backward. 

IT.      Straighten     the  -  arms     forward      ob- 
liquely  upward  r    Begin  !   1—2. 

18.  Straighten     the     arms     forward     ob- 
liquely  downward  ;    Begin  !    1—2. 

19.  Straighten     the     arms    sideways     ob- 
liquely  upward  ;    Begin  !    1—2. 

20.  Straighten    the    arms     sideways     ob- 
liquely  downward  ;    Begin  !  1-2. 


Fig.  12. 


TRUNK    EXERCISES. 


1.  Bend  the   trunk  forward    (Fig.  12)  ;   Begin  !   1-2. 

2.  Bend  the   trunk  backward ;   Begin !  1—2. 

3.  Bend   the   trunk  sideways  right ;  Begin !   1—2. 

4.  Bend  the   trunk  sideways  left ;   Begin  !  1—2. 

5.  Turn  the   trunk   to   the   right   (Fig.  13) ;   Begin !   1-2. 
G.      Turn  the  trunk  to  the  left;  Begin!  1—2. 

The    feet   remaining    linn,    the    upper   part    of    the    body 
executes  a  quarter  turn. 

7.      Turn   and  bend   the   trunk  forward   to   the   right ; 

Begin  !  1-2. 


FREE  EXERCISES 


33 


8.  Turn  and  bend  the  trunk  forward  to  the  left !  Begin !  1-2. 

9.  Turn   and  bend  the   trunk  back-ward  to  the   right; 

Begin  !  1-2. 

10.      Turn   and   bend  the   trunk  backward  to   the   left ; 

Begin !  1-2. 

Execute  the  trunk  exercises  slowly. 

HEAD    EXERCISES. 

1.  Bend  the   head  forward;   Begin!  1—2. 

2.  Bend  the   head  backward ;   Begin  !  1—2. 

3.  Turn  the   head  to  the  right ;   Begin !  1—2. 

4.  Turn  the   head  to   the   left ;    Begin  !  1-2. 
Head  exercises  in  slower  time. 

FOOT    AND    LEG   EXERCISES. 

1.  Close   and   open  feet ;   Begin  !  1—2. 
Move   the   feet  closely   together,    the  heels 

remain  closed. 

2.  Rise   on  the  toes. 

The  heels   and  the  knees  together,  the  lat- 
ter straight. 

3.  Place   the  right   or  the   left  leg  forward   or  obliquely  for- 

ward ;  Begin  1—2. 

4.  Place   the   right  or  left  leg  sideways ;   Begin  1—2. 

5.  Place   the   right  or  left  leg  backward   or    obliquely  back- 

ward ;   Begin !   1—2. 

6.  Cross  the  right   or   the    left  leg  forward  or  backward ; 

Begin!  1-2. 

The  toes  point  downward  and  touch  the  floor,  the  knees 
straight,  the  weight  of  the  body  resting  on  the  standing  foot. 
In  crossing  the  legs  forward,  the  toes  of  the  right  foot  meet 
the  toes  of  the  left  foot,  the  right  knee  slightly  bent.  In 


Fig.  73. 


34 


GBRMAN-AMERH  . I  \    i;  Y M  \  .\ST1CS 


crossing  backward,  the  toes  of   the  right  foot  meet   the  heel 
of  the  left  foot. 

7.  Raise   the    right   or    the    left    leg   forward;    (Fig.   14); 

Begin !     1-2. 

8.  Raise   the   right   or  the   left  leg  sideways  ;   Begin  !  1—2. 

9.  Raise   the   right  or  the   left  leg  backward  ;   Begin !   1-2. 
10.      Raise     the    right    or     the    left    leg    obliquely    forward    or 

backward  ;  Begin  !  1—2. 
The  toes  of  the  raised  leg  point  downward,  and  the  knee 


Fig.   14. 


Fig.   15. 


is  straight.     The  weight  of  the   body  rests    on    the   standing 
leg. 

11.  Raise  the   right  or  the   left   knee    (Fig.  15)  ;    Begin  !  1-2. 
Raise  the  knee  to  a  right  angle  with  the  trunk,  the  leg 

forming    a    right   angle    with   the    thigh,    the     toes    pointing 
downward. 

12.  Bend  the  knees;   Begin!  1-2. 

In  bending  the  knees,  rise  on  the  toes,  and  bend  the  knees 
outward  to  form  an  obtuse  or  a  right  angle.     (See  Fig.  16.) 


FREE  EXERCISES 


35 


13.  Lunge   forward   right  or  left ;  Begin !   1—2. 

14.  Lunge   side-ways  right  or  left    (Fig.  17)  ;  Begin !  1—2. 

15.  Lunge    back-ward  right  or  left ;   Begin !  1—2. 

16.  Lunge    obliquely  forward  or  backward  right  or  left; 

Begin!  1-2. 


Fig.   16. 


Fig.   17. 


In  lunging  in  any  direction,  place  the  moving  foot  about 
three  feet  from  the  other,  which  remains  in  place.  Both 
feet  are  placed  firmly  on  the  floor,  the  knee  of  the  sta- 
tionary leg  straight,  the  body  erect. 

When  practising  the  trunk,  leg,  or  head  exercise,  place 
the  arms  in  a  suitable  position. 


GROUP    I. 

Simple  Exercises  in  Two  Counts.  —  Arm,  Trunk,  and  Leg 
Movements. 

PART    1. 

1  Raise  the  arms  forward,  Begin!  1-2      4  Raise  the  arms  upward,  Begin!  1-2 

2  Bend  the  trunk  forward,  5  Bend  the  trunk  backward, 

Begin!  1-2  Begin!  1-2 

8  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately,  6  Exercises  4  and  5  alternately, 

Begin!  1^  Begin!  1-4 


36  GERMAN-AMERICA  .V    t;  YM  \ .  I  >  TH  > 

7  Raise  the  anns  sideways,  10  liaise  the  arms  sideways  upward, 

Begin!  1-2  Begin!  1-2 

8  Bend  the  trunk    sideways  to  the  11  Bend  the  trunk  sideways  left, 

rii;ht,  Begin!  1-2  Begin!  1-2 

9  Exercises  7  and  8  alternately,  12  Exercises  10  and  11  alternately, 

Begin!  1-4  Begin!  1-4 


PART  2. 

1  Bend  the  trunk  forward,  7  Bend  the  trunk  sideways  right, 

Begin!  1-2  Begin!  1-2 

2  Place  the  right  (left)  leg  backward,  8  Place  the  right  leg  sideways  right, 

Begin!  1-2  Begin!  1-2 

3  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately,  9  Exercises  6  and  7  alternately, 

Begin!  1-4  Begin!  1-4 

4  Bend  the  trunk  backward,  10  Bend  the  trunk  sideways  to  the 

Begin!  1-2  left,                                Begin!  1-2 

5  Place  the  right  (left)  leg  forward,  11  Place  the  left  leg  sideways  left, 

Begin!  1-2  Begin!  1-2 

6  Exercises  4  and  5  alternately,  12  Exercises  10  and  11  alternately, 

Begin!  1-4  Begin!  1-4 


PART  3. 

1  Raise  the  right  (left)  leg  forward,  7  Raise  the  right  leg  sideways, 

Begin!  1-2  Begin!  1-2 

2  Raise  the  arms  forward,  8  Raise  the  arms  sideways, 

Begin!  1-2  Begin!  1-2 

3  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately,  9  Exercises  7  and  8  alternately, 

Begin!  1-4  Begin!  1-4 

4  Raise  the  right  (left)  leg  backward,  10  Raise  the  left  leg  sideways, 

Begin!  1-2  Begin!  1-2 

5  Raise  the  arms  upward,  Begin!  1-2  11  Raise  the  arms  sideways  upward, 

6  Exercises  4  and  5  alternately,  Begin !  1-2 

Begin!  1-4  12  Exercises  10  and  11  alternately, 

Begin!  1-4 

PART  4. 

1  Raise  the  arms  forward,  4  Raise  the  arms  upward, 

Begin!  1-2  Begin!  1-2 

2  Bend  the  trunk  forward,  5  Bend  the  trunk  backward, 

Begin!  1-2  Begin!  1-2 

3  Raise  the  right  and  the  left  leg  for-  6  Raise  the  right   and  the  left  leg 

ward  alternately,          Begin!  1^  backward  alternately,  Begin!  1-4 


FREE  EXERCISES  37. 

7  Raise  the  arms  sideways,  10  Raise  the  arms  sideways  upward, 

Begin!  1-2  Begin!  1-2 

8  Bend  the  trunk  sideways  right,  11  Bend  the  trunk  sideways  left, 

Begin!  1-2  Begin!  1-2 

9  Raise  the  right  leg  sideways,  12  Raise  the  left  leg  sideways, 

Begin!  1-2  Begin!  1-2 


GROUP    II. 
Simple  and  Compound  Exercises  in  Two  Counts. 

PART    1. 

Arm  and  Leg  Exercises. 
The  Hands  on  the  Hips. 

1  Straighten  the  right  arm  forward,          10  Straighten  the  right  arm  upward. 

Begin!  1-2      11  Raise  the  right  knee. 

2  Raise  the  right  knee.  12  Straighten  the  right  arm  upward 

3  Straighten  the  right  arm  forward  and  raise  the  right  knee. 

and  raise  the  right  knee.  13  Straighten  the  left  arm  upward. 

4  Straighten  the  left  arm  forward.  14  Raise  the  left  knee. 

5  Raise  the  left  knee.  15  Straighten   the   left  arm   upward 

6  Straighten  the  left  arm  forward  and  and  raise  the  left  knee. 

raise  the  left  knee.  16  Straighten  both  arms  upward. 

7  Straighten  both  arms  forward.  17  Bend  the  knees. 

"8  Bend  the  knees.  18  Straighten  both  arms  upward  and 

9  Straighten  both  arms  forward  and  •  bend  both  knees, 

bend  both  knees. 

PART   2. 

Leg  and  Trunk  Exercises. 

Grasp  the  Hands  or  fold  the  Arms  backward. 

CROSS  STRADDLE  POSITION"  RIGHT  (LEFT)  LEG  FORWARD. 

1  Bend  the  right  knee,     Begin !  1-2        6  Bend  the  left  knee  and  the  trunk 

2  Bend  the  trunk  forward.  backward. 

3  Bend  the  right  knee  and  the  trunk      7  Bend  the  right  knee  and  the  trunk 

forward.  forward,  and  the  left  knee  and 

4  Bend  the  left  knee.  the  trunk  backward  alternately, 

5  Bend  the  trunk  backward.  Begin!   1-4 

SIDE  STRADDLE  POSITION. 

8  Bend  the  right  knee,     Begin !  1-2       10  Bend  the  right  knee  and  the  trunk 

9  Bend  the  trunk  sideways  to  the  sideways  to  the  right. 

right.  11  Bend  the  left  knee. 


88 


i ;  }•:  i;  M  .  i  .V  - .  i  M  HI;  i  r .  i  .v  < , }  •  M  \  • .  i  .s  TIC 8 


12  Bend  the  tnmk  sideways  left. 

13  Bend  the  left  knee  and  trunk  side- 

ways to  the  left. 


14  Bend  the  right  knee  and  the  trunk 
and  the  left  knee  and  the  trunk 
sideways  alternately,  Begin!  1-4 


PART   3. 

Trunk  and  Arm  Exercises. 
The  Hands  on  Shoulders. 


1  Turn  the  trunk  to  the  right, 

Begin!  1-2. 

2  Straighten  the  arms   sideways   to 

the  right  (Fig.  18). 


I 


Fig.   18. 


3  Turn  the  trunk  to  the  right  and 

straighten   the    arms    sideways 
right. 

4  Turn  the  trunk  to  the  left. 

5  Straighten     the     arms     sideways 

left. 

6  Turn  the  trunk  to  the  left  and 

straighten    the     arms    sideways 
left. 

7  Exercises  3  and  6  alternately, 

Begin!  1-4. 

8  Turn  the  trunk  to  the  right  and 

bend  forward. 

9  Straighten  the  arms  sideways. 

10  Turn  the  trunk  to  the  right,  bend 

forward,     and     straighten    the 
arms  sideways. 

11  Turn  the  trunk  to  the  left  and 

bend  forward. 

12  Straighten  the  arms  sideways. 

13  Turn  the  trunk  to   the   left   and 

bend    forward    and    straighten 
the  arms  sideways. 

14  Exercises  10  and  13  alternately. 


REMARKS.  —  In  raising  the  arms  sideways  to  the  r.,  the  r. 
arm  must  be  straight,  the  1.  arm  bent  to  a  r.  angle,  the 
knuckles  upw.  Instead  of  turning  and  bending  forw.,  the 
pupils  may  turn  and  bend  the  trunk  backw.  Instead  of 
straightening  the  arms  sidew.,  they  may  straighten  them 
forw.  or  upward. 


FHEE  EXELiCltiES 


39 


GROUP     III. 
Simple  Exercises. 

PART    1. 

Arm,  Trunk,  and  Leg  Exercises. 
Arms  to  Thrust. 


1  Thrust  the  right  arm  forward  ob- 

liquely downward,    Begin!  1-2. 

2  Thrust  the   left  arm  forward  ob- 

liquely downward. 

3  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately, 

Begin!  1-4. 

4  Thrust   both    arms     forward    ob- 

liquely downward. 

5  Bend  the  trunk  forward. 

6  Lunge  forward  right. 

7  Lunge  forward  left. 

8  Exercises  6  and  7  alternately. 

9  Rise  on  the  toes. 


10  Thrust    the    right    arm    forward 

obliquely  upward. 

11  Thrust  the  left  arm  forward   ob- 

liquely upward. 

12  Exercises  10  and  11  alternately. 

13  Thrust    both    arms    forward    ob- 

liquely upward. 

14  Bend  the  trunk  backward. 

15  Lunge   obliquely  forward    to    the 

right. 

16  Lunge   obliquely   forward   to    the 

left. 

17  Exercises  15  and  16  alternately. 

18  Bend  the  knees. 


PART   2. 

Arm,  Trunk,  and  Leg  Exercises. 
Arms  to  Thrust. 


1  Thrust  the  right  arm  sideways  ob- 

liquely downward,       Begin !  1-2. 

2  Thrust  the   left  arm  sideways  ob- 

liquely downward. 

3  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately. 

4  Thrust    both    arms     sideways    ob- 

liquely downward. 

5  Bend  the  trunk  right  sideways. 

6  Lunge  sideways  right. 

7  Lunge  sideways  left. 

8  Exercises  6  and  7  alternately. 

9  Rise  on  the  toes. 


10  Thrust  the  right  arm  sideways  ob- 

liquely upward. 

11  Thrust  the  left  arm  sideways  ob- 

liquely upward. 

12  Exercises  10  and  11  alternately. 

13  Thrust    the    arms    sideways    ob- 

liquely upward. 

14  Bend  the  trunk  sideways  left. 

15  Lunge  obliquely  backward  right. 

16  Lunge  obliquely  backward  left. 

17  Exercises  15  and  16  alternately. 

18  Bend  the  knees. 


40  GERM  A  N-AMERICA  .V    <,  YM  V .  1  >  TK  > 


GROUP    IV. 
Simple  and  Compound  Exercises. — Arm,  Trunk,  and  Leg  Exercises. 

PART   1. 

Arm  and  Leg  Exercises. 
FENCING  POSITION  (Fio.  19). 
Arms  to  Thrust.     (See  Fig.  8.) 

1  Thrust  the  right  arm  forward  ob-      3  Combine  exercises  1  and  2. 

liquely  upward,  the  left  arm  back-      4  Thrust  both  arms  forward  obliquely 
ward  obliquely  downward,  upward. 

Begin!  1-2.       5  Bend  the  knees. 

2  Lunge  forward  right.  6  Combine  exercises  4  and  5. 

CHANGE  FENCING  POSITION  (LEFT  LEG  FORWARD). 

7  Thrust  the    left   arm   forward  ob-       10  Thrust    both    arms    forward    ob- 

liquely  upward,   the    right    arm  liquely  upward, 

backward  obliquely  downward.  11  Bend  the  knees. 

8  Lunge  forward  left.  12  Combine  exercises  10  and  11. 

9  Combine  exercises  7  and  8. 

PART   2. 

Arm  and  Leg  Exercises. 

FENCING  POSITION. 

Arms  to  Thrust. 

1  Cover  the  head  with  the  right  arm      5  Bend  the  knees. 

and  thrust  the  left  arm  backward  6  Combine  exercises  4  and  5. 

obliquely  downward  (Fig.  20),  7  Thrust   both   arms    backward    ob- 
Begin!  1-2.  liquely  downward  to  the  left. 

2  Lunge  forward  right.  8  Lunge  forward  right. 

3  Combine  exercises  1  and  2.  9  Combine  exercises  7  and  8. 

4  Cover  the  head  with  both  arms. 

CHANGE  FENCING  POSITION  (LEFT  LEG  FORWARD). 
10-18  As  exercises  1-9,  but  left. 

PART   3. 

Arm  and  Trunk  Exercises. 

SIDE  STRADDLE  POSITION  (Fio.  21). 

Arms  Upward  in  Position.     (See  Fig.  13.) 

1  Swing  the  arms  outward  in  a  circle,       2  Swing  the  arms  outward  in  a  circle 
Begin!  1-2.  and  bend  the  trunk  forward. 


FREE  EXERCISES 


41 


3  Swing  the  arms  inward  in  a  circle. 

4  Swing  the  arms  inward  in  a  circle 

and  bend  the  trunk  forward. 

5  Swing  the  arms  sideways  to   the 

right  in  a  circle. 


6  Swing   the   arms   sideways    to   the 

right   in  a  circle   and   bend   the 
trunk  sideways   right. 

7  Swing  the  arms  sideways  to  the  left 

in  a  circle. 


Fig.   TO. 


Fiy.  20. 


Fig.  21. 


8  Swing  the  arms  sideways   to  the 

left  in  a   circle  and  bend  the 
trunk  sideways  left. 

9  Swing  the   arms   forward   at  the 

right  side  in  a  circle. 

10  Swing     the     arms     forward  at 
the     right     side     in     a     circle 


the 


Fig.  22. 
trunk    to    the 


and     turn 
right. 

11  Swing  the   arms  sideways  to  the 

left  in  a  circle. 

12  Swing  the   arms  sideways  to  the 

left  in  a  circle  and    turn  the 
trunk  to  the  right. 


GROUP    V. 

Compound  Exercises  in  Two  Counts. 
Arm,  Leg,  aud  Trunk  Exercises. 

PART    1. 
Arm  and  Leg  Exercises. 


1  liaise  the  arms  forward  and  bend 

the  knees,  Begin!  1-2. 

'2  Raise  the  arms  upward  and  rise  on 

the  toes, 
i}  Raise  the  arms  sideways  and  bend 

the  knees. 
4  Raise  the  arms  sideways  upward 

and  rise  on  the  toes. 


5  Raise  the  arms  sideways  to  the  right 

and  bend  the  knees. 
G  Raise  the  arms  sideways  to  the  left 

and  bend  the  knees. 

7  Raise  the  arms  sideways  upward  by 

the  right  and  rise  on  the  toes. 

8  Raise  the  arms  sideways  upward  by 

the  left  and  rise  on  the  toes. 


42  GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 

PART    2. 
Leg  and  Trunk  Exercises. 

1  Raise  the  right  leg  forward,  bend      .")  Raise  the  right  leg  sideways,  bend 

the  left  knee,  and  bend  the  trunk  the  left  knee,  and  bend  the  trunk 

backward,  Begin!  1-2.  sideways  left. 

2  Raise  the  left  leg  forward,  bend  the      6  Raise  the  left  leg  sideways,  bend  the 

right  knee,  and  bend  the  trunk  right  knee,  and  bend  the  trunk 

backward.  sideways  right. 

3  Raise  the  right  leg  backward,  bend      7  Raise  the  right  leg  obliquely  back- 

the  left  knee,  and  bend  the  trunk  ward,  bend  the  left  knee,  and  turn 

forward.  the  trunk  to  the  right. 

4  Raise  the  left  leg  backward,  bend       8  Raise  the  left  leg  obliquely  back- 

the  right  knee,   and    bend    the  ward,  bend   the  right  knee,  and 

trunk  forward.  turn  the  trunk  to  the  left. 


GKOUP    VI. 

Compound  Exercises  in  Two  Counts. 
Arm,  Trunk,  and  Leg  Exercises. 

PART   1. 
The  Hands  on  the  Hips. 

1  One  step  forward,         March!  1-2.       5  One  step  backward. 

2  Bend     the     trunk     forward     and       6  Bend  the  trunk  sideways  right  and 

straighten   the  arms  downward,  straighten  the  arms  sideways. 

Begin !  1-2.       7  One  step  sideways  left. 

3  One  step  sideways  to  the  right.  8  Bend  the  trunk  sideways  left  and 

4  Bend    the    trunk     backward     and  straighten  the  arms  sideways. 

straighten  the  arms  upward. 

After  executing  one  step,  practise  the  trunk  and  arm  exer- 
cises several  times. 

PART  2. 
Arms  to  Cut. 

1  One  step  forward  and  backward,  5  One  step  backward  and  forward. 

March!  1-4.       6  Cut  the   arms   forward   downward 

2  Cut  the  arms  forward  and  jump  to  and   jump   to   the  cross  straddle 

the  cross  straddle  position  (Fig.  position. 

22).  7  One  step  sideways  left  and  right. 

3  One  step  sideways  to  the  right  and      8  Cut  the  arms  sideways   downward 

the  left.  and    jump  to   the  side  straddle 

4  Cut  the  arms  sideways.  position. 

In  practising   the    cross  straddle  position,  place  the  right 
and  left  leg  forward  alternately. 


FREE  EXERCISES 


GKOUP    VII. 

Combined  Exercises  in  Two  Counts.  —  Counter  Exercises. 

FOBM  THE  CLASS  INTO  Two  DIVISIONS. 

Arm,  Leg,  and  Trunk  Exercises. 

PART    1. 
Arms  to  Thrust. 


1  Thrust  the  outer  arm  forward  and 

lunge  forward  with  the  outer  leg, 
Begin!  1-2. 

2  Thrust  the  inner  arm  forward  and 

lunge  forward  with  the  inner  leg. 

3  Thrust  the  outer  arm  sideways  and 

lunge   sideways   with   the  outer 
leg. 

4  Thrust  the  inner  arm  sideways  and 

lunge  sideways  with  the  inner  leg. 

5  Thrust  the  outer  arm  upward  and 

lunge  backward  with  the  outer 

i«w 

leg. 

0  Thrust  the  inner  arm  upward  and 
lunge  backward  with  the  inner  leg. 


7  Thrust    both  arms   forward    and 

lunge     forward    obliquely    out- 
ward. 

8  Thrust  both    arms    forward    and 

lunge  forward  obliquely  inward. 

9  Thrust   both   arms   sideways  and 

lunge    sideways    obliquely   out- 
ward. 

10  Thrust  both  arms  sideways  and 

lunge  sideways  obliquely  inward. 

11  Thrust    both    arms    upward    and 

lunge   backward   obliquely  out- 
ward. 

12  Thrust  both  arms  upw.  and  lunge 

backward  obliquely  inward. 


The  outer  arm  or  leg  of  the  division  to  the  right  is  the 
right  arm  or  leg;  of  the  division  to  the  left,  the  left  arm  or 
leg.  Inward  means  towards  the  centre. 

PART  2. 

Leg,  Trunk,  and  Arm  Exercises. 


1  Lunge  forward  with  the  outer  leg, 

bend  the  trunk  forward,  and  fold 
the  arms  backward,  Begin!  1-2. 

2  Lunge  forward  with  the  inner  leg, 

bend  the  trunk  forward,  and  fold 
the  arms  backward. 

3  Lunge  sideways  with  the  outer  leg, 

bend  the  trunk  sideways  out- 
ward, and  place  the  hands  on 
the  shoulders. 


4  Lunge  sideways  with  the  inner  leg, 

bend  the  trunk  sideways  inward, 
and  place  the  hands  on  the 
shoulders. 

5  Lunge  backward  with  the  outer  leg, 

bend  the  trunk  backward,  and 
fold  the  arms  forward. 

6  Lunge  backward  with  the  inner  leg, 

bend  the  trunk  backward  and 
fold  the  arms  forward. 


44 


<;i.i;  MAN-AMERICAN   a  YM  \ASTICS 


7  Lunge  forward  obliquely  outward, 

bend   the    trunk    forward,   and 
raise  the  arms  forward. 

8  Lunge    forward  obliquely   inward, 

bend    the    trunk    forward,  and 
raise  the  anus  forward. 

9  Lunge  sideways  outward,  turn  the 

trunk    outward,  and    raise  the 
arms  upward. 

See  Part  1. 


10  Lunge  sideways  inward,  turn  the 

trunk    inward,    and    raise    the 
anus  upward. 

11  Lunge    backward    obliquely    out- 

ward, bend  the  trunk  backward, 
and  raise  the  arms  sideways. 

12  Lunge  backward  obliquely  inward, 

bend   the  trunk  backward,  and 
raise  the  arms  sideways. 


GROUP   VIII. 
Simple  Exercises  in  Two  Counts.  —  Dissimilar  Exercises. 

DIVIDE  THE  CLASS  IN  A  FIRST  AND  SECOND  DIVISION  OR  IN  FIRST  AND 

SECOND  FILES. 

Arm,  Trunk,  and  Leg  Exercises. 

PART   1. 

Arm  and  Trunk  Exercises. 
The  Hands  on  the  Hips  or  the  Shoulders. 


1  1st  Division  straighten    the  arms 

forward. 

2d  Division  bend   the   trunk  for- 
ward, Begin!  1-2 

2  1st  Division  bend  the  trunk  for- 

ward. 

2d   Division  straighten   the  arms 
forward. 

3  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately, 


7  1st  Division  straighten  the  arms 

sideways  to  the  right. 
2d  Division  bend  the  trunk  side- 
ways to  the  right. 

8  1st  Division  bend  the  trunk  side- 

ways to  the  right. 
2d  Division   straighten   the   arms 
sideways  to  the  right. 

9  Exercises  7  and  8  alternately. 


Begin!  1-4       10  1st  Division  straighten  the  arms 


4  1st  Division   straighten   the  arms 

upward. 

2d  Division  bend  the  trunk  back- 
ward. 

6  1st  Division  bend  the  trunk  back- 
ward. 

2d  Division  straighten  the  arms  up- 
ward. 
6  Exercises  4  and  5  alternately. 


sideways  to  the  left. 
2d  Division  bend   the  trunk  side- 
ways to  the  left. 

11  1st  Division  bend  the  trunk  side- 

ways to  the  left. 

2d  Division   straighten  the   arms 
sideways  to  the  left. 

12  Exercises  10  and  11  alternately. 


FREE  EXERCISES 


45 


PART     2. 

Compound  Exercises   in   Two    Courts. 
Arms  to  Thrust. 


1  1st  Division   thrust  the   arms  for- 

ward and  bend  the  knees. 
2d   Division   thrust   the   arms   up- 
ward   and    lunge    forward    right 
and  left  alternately,    Begin!  1-4 

2  1st  Division   thrust   the   arms  up- 

ward   and    lunge    forward   right 
and  left  alternately. 
2d  Division   thrust   the   arms   for- 
ward and  bend  the  knees. 

3  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately, 

Begin!  1-4 

4  1st  Division  thrust  the  arms  upward 

and  rise  on  the  toes. 
2d  Division  thrust  the  arms  side- 
ways  and  lunge  sideways  right 
and  left  alternately. 

5  1st  Division  thrust  the  arms  side- 

ways  and   lunge   sideways  right 
and  left  alternately. 
2J   Division    thrust    the   arms  up- 
ward and  rise  on  the  toes. 

6  Exercises  4  and  5  alternately. 


7  1st  Division  thrust  the  arms  side- 

ways and  bend  the  knees. 
2d  Division  thrust  the  arms  for- 
ward and  lunge  backward  right 
and  left  alternately. 

8  1st  Division  thrust  the  arms  for- 

ward and  lunge  backward  right 
and  left  alternately. 
2d  Division  thrust  the  arms  side- 
ways and  bend  the  knees. 

9  Exercises  7  and  8  alternately. 

10  1st  Division  thrust  the  arms  down- 

ward and  rise  on  the  toes. 
2d  Division  thrust  the  arms  back- 
ward  and  lunge   forward  right 
and  left  alternately. 

11  1st  Division  thrust  the  arms  back- 

ward and  lunge   forward  right 
and  left  alternately. 
2d  Division  thrust  the  arms  down- 
ward and  rise  on  the  toes. 

12  Exercises  10  and  11  alternately. 


46  GEltMA  .V  - .  I  M  Kit  1C  AN     G  Y  M  \ .  I  >  IK  9 


"WAND    EXERCISES 

i:v   WILLIAM  REUTKIi 

THE  lessons  here  presented  are  in  form  of  series,  and  art- 
progressive,  each  one  in  itself  being  complete.  In  the  arrange- 
ment thereof,  great  care  has  been  observed  to  adapt  them  to 
the  wants  of  good  honest  "  class-work,"  as  well  as  to  make 
them  pleasing  to  the  eye,  in  the  hope  of  awakening  a  sense 
for  quick,  accurate,  and  decided  action,  as  well  as  for  the 
beautiful  in  form  and  position. 

THE   WAND. 

The  wand  is  a  round  stick,  generally  of  wood  or  iron. 
Thickness,  length,  and  weight  should  be  in  proportion  to  the 
person  using  it;  viz.,  always  long  enough  to  form  the  hypote- 
nuse of  a  right-angled  triangle,  when  the  hands  have  grasped 
it  at  the  extreme  ends,  and  the  arms  are  extended  at  right 
angles.  When  of  wood  the  thickness  varies  from  three-quarters 
of  an  inch  to  one  and  a  quarter  inches ;  when  of  iron,  from 
five-eighths  of  an  inch  to  one  inch.  •  The  wand  for  the  adult 
may  weigh  from  five  to  eight  pounds. 

POSITIONS. 

It  is  advisable  to  become  familiar  with  the  different  positions 
of  the  wand,  and  the  different  ways  in  which  it  can  be  brought 
from  one  position  to  another,  before  attempting  to  combine  the 
movements  with  steps,  lunges,  or  other  motions.  In  the  fol- 
lowing lessons  the  positions  will  be  treated  only  in  the  order 
in  which  they  are  used. 


WAND    EXERCISES 


.PART    I. 
FIRST    COURSE. 

LESSON    I. 

a  —  Taking  of  wand  and  position  in  carrying, 
b  —  Fundamental  position. 
C  —  Resting  position. 

d  —  First  or  most  simple  starting  position. 
6  —  Resting  position  from  the  starting  position, 
f  —  Lowering  the  wand  to  the  floor  (or  to  the  foot), 
g — Resting   position;   with  the  wand   on   the  floor  (or   at 

the  foot), 
h — Other  ways  of  lowering  and  raising  the  wand. 

A  —  Carrying  the  Wand. 

The  wand  should  stand  on  end ;  when  taken  from  its  place,  it 
should  be  carried  like  a  gun,  either  at  the  right  or  the 
left  side.  The  wand  should  rest  on  end  on  the  first 
joint  of  the  first  finger,  with  the  thumb  brought  around 
in  front,  pressing  the  wand  firmly  against  the  shoulder. 

B  —  Fundamental  Position. 

In  position;    stand!      (Fig.  23.) 

C  — Resting  Position  with  the  Wand   under  the  Arm. 
Taken  from  Position  at  Shoulder. 

1    Resting  position  ;    stand  ! 
In  place  ;  rest ! 

At  1  Grasp  the  wand  with  the  left  hand,  the  fingers  be- 
hind, the  thumb  in  front  at  the  height  of  the  chest,  the 
forearm  close  to  the  body  and  nearly  or  quite  in  a  hori- 
zontal position. 

At  2  Reverse  the  wand  by  bringing 
the  left  hand  forward  and  the 
right  upward,  passing  the  shoul- 
der and  returning  to  the  chest. 
The  wand  is  allowed  to  partly 
glide  through  the  right  hand. 
The  hold  of  the  left  hand  re- 
mains unchanged. 


3  counts. 


Fig.  23. 


At  3  Press  the  wand  under  the  shoul- 
der with  the  left  hand,  release  the 
hold  and  bring  the  arm  down; 
swing  around  to  small  of  the 
back,  lower  the  right  hand  (hold- 
ing the  wand  firmly)  to  the  thigh, 
and  then  take  the  step  position 
backward  right  or  forward  left. 


48  GERMAN-AMERICAN   GYMNASTK  s 

In  position ;    stand !    3  counts. 
Fundamental  Position  from  Resting  Position  Under  the  Arm. 

1   Raise  the  right  hand  (the  wand  to  2   Move  the  left  hand   forward  and 

vertical  position),  and  grasp  the  return  while   the  right  hand  is 

wand  with  the  left  hand  at  the  lowered  and  slides  to  the  end  of 

height  of  the  chest  with  the  lin-  the  wand. 

gers  in  front  and  the  thumb  be-  3  Release  the  hold  of  the  left  hand 

hind,  the  elbow  the  height  of  the  and  bring  the  foot  into  place  with 

shoulders.  a  firm  step. 

Down  in  front ;    down !    or,  now  !     2   counts. 
D  —  Starting  Position  Horizontally  Down  in  Front. 

1  The  left  hand  grasps  the  wand  at  to  the  front  in  full  hold.     This  is 

the  height  of  the  chest,  the  thumb  the    upper   hold,    in   which    the 

in  front  and  the  fingers  behind  wrists   must  be  well  bent  back- 

(the  arm  in  position  as  described  ward  and  the  back  of  the  hands 

under  C).  turned   upward.      Excepting  the 

2  Lower   to   horizontal  position,  the  first  count  or  motion,  there  is  no 

left  hand   sliding   nearly  to   the  material  difference  between  the 

end,  and  the  right  hand  turning  movements  of  this  and  those  of 

around  the  other  end  and  moving  the    resting    position    from    the 

a  little  from  the  end;  the  fingers  wand  at  the  shoulder. 

Wand  under  shoulder;    resting  position;    stand!     Count  1,  2,  3! 
Of  — 

Wand  under  shoulder ;    in  place ;    rest !      Count  1.  2,  3 ! 

E  —  Resting  Position  from  the  Starting  Position,  and  Return  to  Position 

at  the  Shoulder. 

1    Bring  the  left  hand  to  the  chest,       To   return   from   the   resting  to   the 
sliding  along  the  wand,  and  the  starting  position  is  the  same  as 

right  hand  around  the  end,  the  to  return  to  the  fundamental  po- 

first    finger  under,  as  described  sition,  with  the  exception  that  at 

under  A.  3  the  left  hand  does  not  release 

•2,  3   Same  as  described  under  C.  its  hold,  but  takes  the  wand  down 

to  the  starting  position. 

NOTE  WELL.  —  When  this  is  intended,  simply  call  for 
"  Position !  "  Let  it  be  understood  that  "  position,"  in  all 
cases  where  so  used,  means  or  calls  for  the  return  to  the 
position  previous  to  the  change  to  resting  position. 


WAND  EXERCISES 


49 


From  the  Starting  Position  to  Position  at  Shoulder. 
To  return  the  wand  from  the  starting  position  to  the  shoulder  is  simply  to  go 
back  in  reverse  order. 


or 


Raise  to  the   right  shoulder ;    now !      Count   1,    2 ! 
To  the   right  shoulder ;    raise  !      Count   1,    2 ! 


1  Raise  the  left  hand  to  the  chest, 

letting  the  wand   glide   through 
the  hand. 

2  Release  the  hold  of  the  left  hand 

and   bring    the    arm   and    hand 
down  to  the  side. 


As  the  left  hand  is  raised,  the  right 
hand  is  brought  close  to  the  side 
and  turned  around  to  the  end  of 
the  wand. 


In  position  ;    stand ! 

F— From  the  Fundamental  Position  ;  the  Wand  at  the  Shoulder.    Lower 
the  Wand  to  the  Floor. 


The  wand  carried  at  the  right  shoul- 
der, not  leaning  backward  nor  in 
a  vertical  position,  but  slanting 


forward  slightly  same  as  the 
body.  Let  the  wand  point  in 
line  to  the  heel. 


In  four  counts,  wand  to  the  foot !    down !    or,  now !   1,   2,  3,  4 ! 


1  Bring  the  left  hand  up  and  grasp 

the  wand  at  the  height  of  the 
chest,  the  fingers  in  front,  the 
thumb  behind,  forearm  close  to 
the  body,  and  nearly  or  quite  in 
a  horizontal  position. 

2  Release  the  right  hand  and  grasp 

the  wand  at  the  height  of  the 
shoulder,  or  a  little  higher  back 
of  the  hand  in  front,  and  elbow 


resting  close  to  the  wand  and  to 
the  other  hand. 

3  Bring  the  left  hand  down  to  the 

side. 

4  Lower  the  wand  to  the  standing 

position  on  the  floor  at  the  foot 
near  the  small  toe.  Return  to 
position  at  the  shoulder  in  the 
reverse  order. 


G  —  Resting  Position,  with  the  Wand  on  the  Floor  or  at  the  Foot. 

Another  and  more  simple  resting  position  from  the  start- 
ing position  is :   The  wand  on  the  floor,  or  — 

To  foot.      Resting  position  ;    Stand  !      Count  1,   2,  3 ! 

or, — 

The  wand  on  the  floor.      In  place ;  Rest !      Count  1,  2,  3 ! 

1    Raise   the  left  hand  and   bring  it  to  rest  on  the  end  near  the  small 

over  to  the  right  side,  letting  the  toe;  the  left  hand  is  brought  to 

wand  glide  through  the  right  hand  rest  on  the  other  end  of  the  wand. 


50  GKKMA.V-AMKHH  'AN    <!  YM  \ASTICS 

2  Release  the  hold  of  the  right  hand ;  over  to  the  left  somewhat.     Re- 

rest  it  on  the  left.  turn   to  the  position  in  reverse 

3  Step  position    backward   right   or  order,  but  get  the  closing  st«'i>  in 

forward  left,  slanting  the  wand  last. 

H — Other  Ways  of  lowering  and  raising  the  Wand. 

The  wand  may  be  lowered  to  the  foot  in  three  and  four 
counts,  as  well  as  when  the  pupil  is  a  little  further  advanced, 
by  combining  the  different  movements.  This  will  be  readily 
understood,  and  needs  no  further  explanation. 

Also  to  the  starting  position,  horizontally  down  in  front, 
it  may  be  lowered  in  three  and  four  counts  as  well  as  two. 
For  example :  — 

1  Raise  the  left  arm  sideways.  3  Down    iii    front   as  described  be- 

2  Grasp  the  wand  with  the  left  hand  fore. 

(height  of  the  chest  or  at  the  top). 

In  four   counts  :  — 

1  Raise  the  arm  forward.  3   Grasp  as  above. 

2  Swing  the  arm  sideways.  4   Down  in  front. 

Or  in  four  counts  :  — 

1  Raise  the  left  arm  sideways.  3   Glide  to  the  top. 

2  Grasp  at  the  height  of  the  chest  or      4   Down  in  front. 

the  shoulder. 

It  matters  not  which  way  the  wand  is  brought  down ;  but 
it  must  be  returned  in  reversed  order,  and  in  as  many  counts 
as  it  was  lowered  in. 

For  the  elementary  series  it  is  advisable  to  take  the  posi- 
tion horizontally  down  in  front  as  the  starting  position.  Other 
positions  are  possible,  but  less  available. 

For  short,  this  position  will  be  "down  in  front,"  or  "start- 
ing position,"  until  the  other  positions  come  into  consideration. 


WAND   EXERCISES  51 

LESSON    2. 

Horizontal  Position  only.     Arms  in  Similar  Position. 

• 
Starting  position ;    down   in  front ! 

One  motion  and  return  to  the  starting  position  in  two 
counts. 

Simply  raising  and  lowering  the  wand. 

1  Raise  with  bent  arms  in  front  (the       4   Raise  with  straight  arms  overhead 

height  of  and  close  to  the  chest).  (the    arms     extended     at     full 

2  Raise  with  straight  arms  in  front  length). 

and  forward  (the  arms  extended       5   Raise  with  bent  arms  behind  (the 
height  of  shoulders).  wand    lying    across    the    shoul- 

3  Raise  with  bent  arms  over  head  (the  ders). 

wand  almost  touching  the  head). 

The  arms  are  swung  forward  at  full  length,  then  bent,  so 
as  to  bring  the  wand  on  both  shoulders. 

6   Raise   with   straight   arms   behind  7   Raise   with   straight   arms   behind 

backward  (same  as  explained  in  and  down.     (Same  as  explained 

Exercise  5,  but  lower  backward,  in  Exercise  5,  but  lower  the  arms 

with  the  arms  extended  height  of  at  full  length  down. ) 
the  shoulders). 

If  the  sixth  exercise  is  found  too  difficult  for  beginners, 
it  may  be  omitted. 

Suggestions  regarding  the  Forming  of  Classes. 

Classes  may  be  formed  in  regular  or  alternate  lines  of 
any  numbers.  The  triangular  form  of  placing  is  also  very 
good  and  pleasing  to  the  eye.  Other  forms,  such  as  a  circle, 
square,  etc.,  are  sometimes  used. 

Positions  or  Poses. 

Pupils  will  remember  a  series  of  exercises  better,  and 
execute  them  with  more  exactness,  when  they  are  preceded 
or  followed  by  rests  or  pauses.  It  promotes  the  value  of  the 


52  GERMAN-AMERICAN    GYMNASTICS 

exercise,  tending  to  cultivate  a  sense  for  the  beautiful  in 
posture,  when  these  rests  consist  partly  or  wholly  of  POM-.S 
in  some  relation  to  that  which  has  been  executed  or  is  to 
follow.  Begin  to  count  1,  2,  3,  etc.  At  3,  take  the  first 
movement  of  the  first  exercise  as  a  position,  and  remain  in 
the  same  until  13.  At  13  return  to  the  starting  position,  then 
pause  until  16.  If  desired  to  make  the  position  of  shorter 
duration,  take  it  at  5,  and  return  at  11,  etc..  thereby  giving 
more  time  to  think  of  what  is  to  follow.  Then  begin  the 
first  exercise  and  repeat  once  or  twice.  In  this  manner  pro- 
ceed with  the  other  exercises,  taking  poses  and  movements 
in  their  order.  It  is  of  pleasing  effect  to  wind  up  with  a 
grouping  of  the  class  in  positions,  showing  as  much  as  pos- 
sible a  resume  of  the  different  positions  (by  different  lines) 
contained  in  the  whole  series. 

Music. 

When  accompanied  by  music,  exercises  may  be  executed 
either  in  fast  or  slow  time  as  desired,  and  to  almost  any  piece 
of  music  with  well-marked  time.  Exercises,  or  series  of  exer- 
cises, may  be  arranged  for  a  certain  specified  piece  of  music, 
or  vice  versd.  Great  care  should  be  taken  that  the  character 
of  the  music  be  in  harmony  with  the  exercises. 

LESSON  3. 

Horizontal  Position  only ;  with  the  Anns  in  Dissimilar  Positions.    The 
Wand  Parallel  and  Oblique  and  Diagonal  to  the  Body. 

Starting   Position;   down   in   Front. 

NOTE.  —  When  both  arms  are  bent  the  elbows  are  pointed 
downward.  When  only  one  arm  is  bent  the  elbow  points  as 


WAND   EXERCISES 


53 


much  as  possible  on  a  line  with  the  wand  in  horizontal  posi- 
tion, or  at  right  angles  to  it,  as  in  vertical  positions.  There 
are  only  few  exceptions  to  this  rule.  By  simply  giving  the 
directions  or  place  to  which  the  hands  are  brought,  the  posi- 
tions will  in  nearly  all  cases  be  more  uniform  and  more 
readily  understood.  It  is  easier  to  describe  the  motion  or 
course  of  each  hand  than  the  final  position ;  the  latter  being 
the  ultimate  result  of  the  former,  it  is  advisable  to  strictly 
adhere  to  these  directions. 


Explanations  of  Terms  "in  Front,"  "in  Front  Forward,"  "Behind," 
"Behind  Backward,"  and  "Sideways." 

By  the  term  "in  front"  is  meant  as  near  to  the  chest  as 
possible  with  one  or  both  hands :  "  in  front  forward,"  one  or 
both  arms  extended  height  of  the  shoulders.  The  same  holds 
good  for  the  positions  behind  the  body.  "  Behind  "  is  at  the 
height  of  the  shoulders  and  resting  near  there,  and  "behind 
backward"  is  with  the  arms  ex- 
tended backward  at  the  height  of 
the  shoulders.  "  Sideways  "  means 
arms  extended  sideways  at  the 
height  of  the  shoulders.  In  "side- 
ways "  one  arm  is  bent,  the  other 
extended.  In  Lessons  1  and  2 
the  hands  retain  their  hold ;  that 
is,  do  not  glide  along  the  wand 
except  when  so  stated. 


A  —  Wand  parallel  to  the  body.       2  counts. 

1  Left    sideways,    right    in   front    (Fig. 

24.)  2  counts. 

2  Right  sideways,  left  in  front.    2  counts. 


Fig.  24. 


54 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 


3  Left     sideways,     right     behind 

(Fig.  25).  2  counts. 

4  liight  sideways,  left  behind. 

2  counts. 

B  —  The  wand  in  an  oblique  position 
to  the  body;  both  arms  ex- 
tended. 

1  Left  sideways,  right  in  front  for- 

ward. 2  counts. 

2  Right  sideways,  left  in  front  for- 

ward. 2  counts. 

3  Left  sideways,  right  behind  back- 

ward. 2  counts. 

4  Right  sideways,  left  behind  back- 

ward. 2  counts. 


Fig.  25. 


P.S.  —  Exercises  3  and  4  are  less  used,  and  are  more  difficult. 


•The  wand  in  an  oblique  posi- 
tion to  the  body;  one  arm 
bent. 

Left  under  the  shoulder,  the  right 
in  front  forward  (Fig.  26). 

2  counts. 


2  Right  under  the  shoulder,  the  left 

in  front  forward.         2  counts. 

3  Left  on  the  shoulder,  the  right  in 

front  forward  (Fig.  27). 

2  counts. 

4  Right   on   shoulder,   the   left   in 

front  forward.  2  counts. 


Fig.  26.  Fig.  27. 

The   exercises    in  this  lesson  are  not  so  well  adapted   to 
form   series   alone,    but   in    combining   with    others    they   are 


WAND  EXERCISES 


OO 


indispensable.  They  should  be  well  practised.  Great  care 
should  be  taken  to  bring  the  elbow  in  a  line  with  the  wand, 
and  to  have  the  hand  of  the  extended  arm  turned  palm  down 
in  the  exercises  1,  2,  3  and  4  A.  In  B  both  hands  retain  full 
hold. 

LESSON    4. 

Oblique  or  Diagonal  Position,  but  not  Horizontal.    Arms  in  Dissimilar 
Positions. 


Starting  Position : 

A  —  Oblique  with  one  arm  bent. 

1  Left   in   front,   right   (remains) 

down.     See  note  below. 

2  counts. 

2  Right    in    front,   left   (remains) 

down.     See  note  below. 

2  counts. 

3  Left  in  front,  right  upward.     See 

note  below.  2  counts. 

4  Right  in  front,  left  upward.    See 

note  below.  2  counts. 

5  Left    behind     (near    shoulder), 

right  remains  down.    2  counts. 

6  Right    behind    (near   shoulder), 

left  remains  down.     2  counts. 
B  —  Oblique    with    both    arms    ex- 
tended. 

1  Left  in  front  forward,  right  (re- 
mains) down  (bring  to  the 
thigh).  2  counts. 

Both  oblique  and  diagonal  are  considered,  by  many,  correct 
terms.  We  are  rather  inclined  to  favor  the  oblique  or 
obliquely,  and  give  it  the  preference. 

NOTE.  —  In  the  exercises  of  A  the  hand  of  the  straight 
arm  glides  partly  along  the  wand.  In  exercises  3  and  4  the 
straight  arm  may  point  forward  upward  or  sideward  upward 
obliquely.  In  exercises  3  and  4  the  bent  arm  may  be  behind 
as  well  as  in  front. 


down  in  Front. 

2  Right  in  front  forward,  left  (re- 

mains)   down    (bring    to    the 
thigh).  2  counts. 

3  Left  in  front  forward,  right  up- 

ward. 2  counts. 

4  Right  in  front  forward,  left  up- 

ward. 2  counts. 

5  Left  sideways,  right  upward. 

2  counts. 

6  Right  sideways,  left  upward. 

2  counts. 

7  Left  sideways,   right  (remains) 

down  (bring  to  the  thigh). 

2  counts. 

8  Right    sideways,    left   (remains) 

down  (bring  to  the  thigh). 

2  counts. 


66 


GERM  A  N-A  MElilC.  1  .V    (; )  M  .V .  1  s  TICS 


LESSON   5. 

Horizontal  and  Parallel.    Horizontal  and  Right  Angular  and  Vertical 
Positions.    The  Arms  in  Similar  and  Dissimilar  Positions. 

Movements  in  which  one  or  both  arms  cross  to  the  oppo- 
site side;  either  straight  or  bent.  One  or  both  hands  glide 
along  the  wand. 


A  —  Parallel ;  both  arms  cross  to  the 

opposite  sides  (Fig.  28). 
1   Left  above  to  right,  right  below 
to  left  (cross  the  arms  left  over 
right).  2  counts. 


2  Right  above  to  left,  left  below  to 

right  (cross  the  arms  right  over 

left).  2  counts. 

B  —  Right  angular;  one  arm  crosses 

to  the  opposite  side. 


•    Fig.  28. 


Fig.  29. 


Fig.  30. 


1  Left  forward  down,  right  back- 

ward down,  the  arms  extended, 
or  the  wand  resting  on  the  hip 
(Fig.  29).  2  counts. 

2  Right  forward  down,  left  back- 

ward down,  the  arms  extended, 
or  the  wand  resting  on  the 
hip.  2  counts. 

C — Right  angular;  the  extended  arm 
crosses  to  the  opposite  side. 


1  Left    under   shoulder,   right    in 

front,  forward,  over  (Fig.  30). 
2  counts. 

2  Right    under    shoulder,    left    in 

front,  forward,  over.  2  counts. 

3  Left  on  shoulder,  right  in  front, 

forward,  over.  2  counts. 

4  Right  on  shoulder,  left  in  front, 

forward,  over.  2  counts. 


WAND   EXERCISES 


57 


D  —  Right  angular.     The  bent  arm 
crosses  to  the  opposite  side. 

1  Left  under  right  shoulder,  right 

in  front  forward  (Fig.  31). 

2  counts. 

2  Right  under  left  shoulder,  left  in 

front  forward.  2  counts. 

3  Left  on  right  shoulder,  right  in 

front  forward.  2  counts. 


4  Right  on  left  shoulder,  left  in 

front  forward.  2  counts. 

E  —  Vertical;   the  wand  in  front  on 

middle  line  of  the  body. 
1   Left     upward     forward,     right 
downward  forward  (the  arms 
bent),  (present).         2  counts. 


Fig.  31. 


Fig.  32. 


Fig.  33. 


2  Right  upward  forward,  left  down 

forward  (the  arms  bent),  (pre- 
sent). 2  counts. 

3  Left  upward  forward,  right  down 

forward  (the  arms  straight), 
(present).  (Fig.  32.)  2  counts. 

4  Right  upward  forward,  left  down 

forward  (the  arms  straight), 
(present).  2  counts. 

5  Left  in  front,  right  upward  and 

glide  to  left  (the  arms  bent), 
changing  underhold.  2  counts. 
This  may  be  executed  with 
the  arms  extended  upward  as 
well  as  bent. 


6  Left  in  front,  right  down  and 

glide   to  the  left    (the    arms 

bent),  may  rest  on  the  floor  or 

not.  2  counts. 

P  —  Vertical ;  the  wand  at  the  side  of 

the  body;  one  arm  crosses  to 

the  opposite  side. 

1   Left  in  front  over  (in  front  of 

the  right  shoulder),  right  down 

(Fig.  33).  2  counts. 

2.   Right  in  front  over  (in  front  of 

right  shoulder),  left  downward. 

2  counts. 

3  Left  in  front  over,  the  right  down 
(on  the  floor).  2  counts. 


58 


< ;  i-:  n  M  A.N-A  M  /•:/.•  ICA.N  HYMN  AS  Tics 


J 


Fig.  34. 


4  Right  in   front  over,  left  down  (on   tin-  noor). 

2  counts. 

5  Left  in   front   over  (in  front  of   right   shoulder  ,  ri^ht 

upward  (Fig.  34).  2  counts. 

6  Right  in  front  over  (in  front  of  the  left  shoulder),  left 

upward.  2  counts. 


NOTE.  —  In  all  vertical  positions  in 
one  arm  crosses  over  to  the  opposite  side,  the 
hand  of  the  extended  arm  glides  along  tin- 
wand.  When  practising  this  lesson  it  will  be 
readily  seen  in  which  other  exercises  one  or 
both  hands  glide.  There  are  a  few  more  ver- 
tical positions  behind  the  body;  they  will  be 
explained  in  lessons  farther  on.  Being  very- 
difficult,  they  require  much  practice.  In  the 
five  foregoing  lessons  all  essential  positions  adapted  to  sim- 
ple exercises  consisting  of  but  one  movement  and  return  have 
been  presented.  Accuracy  in  position,  vim  and  energy  in 
execution,  should  be  acquired  before  the  exercises  of  the 
second  course  are  attempted. 


SECOND   COURSE 


59 


PART   II. 

SECOND   COURSE. 

FROM  the  starting  position  "Down  in  front,"  two  suc- 
cessive motions  and  return  in  reverse  order.  In  the  fol- 
lowing lessons,  the  most  simple  forms  are  given ;  i.e.,  those 
in  which  the  changes  from  one  position  to  the  other  are 
executed  in  the  shortest  way  possible. 

P.S.  —  The  accent  or  force  of  execution  is  placed  on  the 
second  and  fourth  counts  more  than  on  the  others. 


Horizontal  and  Parallel  Position  only. 


1  ( Bend  arms. )     In  front. 

2  (Straighten  arms.)     Forward. 

3  (Bend  arms. )     In  front. 

4  (Straighten  arms.)     Down. 

4  counts. 

II 

1  (Bend  arms. )     In  front. 

2  (Straighten  arms.)     Upward. 

3  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

4  (Straighten  arms.)     Down. 

4  counts. 

Ill 

1  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

2  (Straighten  arms.)   Behind  back- 

ward. 

3  (Bend  arms. )     In  front. 

4  (Straighten    arms.)      Down    in 

front.  4  counts. 


Fig.  35. 

IV 

1  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

2  (Straighten      arms.)        Behind 

downward  (Fig.  35). 

3  (Bend  arms. )     In  front. 

4  (Straighten    arms.)      Down    in 

front.  4  counts. 


60 


GERM  AN- AMERICAN    0  YMNA8T1CS 


1  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

2  Left  sideways,  right  in  front. 

3  (Bend  arms.)    In  front. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 

VI 

1  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

2  Right  sideways,  left  in  front. 

3  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 

VII 

1  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

2  Left  sideways,  right  behind. 

3  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 

VIII 

1  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

2  Right  sideways,  left  behind. 


3  (Bend  arms.) 

4  Down. 


In  front. 

4  counts. 


IX 

1  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

2  (Bend  arms.)     Behind. 

3  (Bend  arms. )     In  front. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 

X 

1  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

2  (Straighten  arms.)  Behind  buck- 

ward. 

3  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

4  Down  in  front.  4  counts. 

XI 

1  (Bend  the  arms.)     In  front. 

2  (Straighten  the  arms.)     Behind 

down. 

3  (Bend  the  arms).     In  front. 

4  Down  in  front.  4  counts. 


LESSON   2. 
Starting  position;    down   in   front! 

NOTE.  —  Two  successive  motions  and  return  in  reverse 
order.  Horizontal  position  in  the  first  count  or  movement, 
and  vertical,  angular,  or  horizontal  position  in  the  second 
count.  The  position  (bent  arms)  in  front  need  not  neces- 
sarily always  be  the  first  of  two  motions  and  return.  It 
may  be  second,  or  may  be  omitted  entirely,  as  is  done  in 
the  next  lesson. 


Angular  Position. 


II 


1  (Straight  arms.)  In  front  forward. 

2  Left  in  front  over  (see  note  below). 

3  (Straight  arms.)  In  front  forward. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 


1  (Straight  arms.)  In  front  forward. 

2  Right  in  front  over. 

3  (Straight  arms.)  In  front  forward. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 


SECOND    COURSE 


61 


Vertical  Position. 


Ill 


1  (Straight  arms.)  In  front  forward. 

2  Left  in  front  over,  right  downward. 

3  (Straight  arms.)  In  front  forward. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 


IV 


1  (Straight  arms.)   In  front  forward. 

2  Right  in  front  over,  left  down. 

3  (Straight  arms. )   In  front  forward. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 


Angular  Position. 


1  (Straight  arms. )   In  front  forward. 

2  Left  in  front  over,  on  right  shoul- 

der. 

3  (Straight  arms.)   In  front  forward. 


4  Down. 


VI 


1  (Straight  arms.)    In  front  forward. 

2  Right   in   front   over,  on  the   left 

shoulder. 

3  (Straight  arms.)    In  front  forward. 


4  counts.       4   Down. 


4  counts. 


Horizontal  Position. 


VII 

1  (Straight  arms.)   In  front  forward. 

2  Left    in  front  over    and   right   in 

front    over     (left    arm     crosses 


over  the   right   arm,   the   hands 
glide). 

3  (Straight  arms.)   In  front  forward. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 


VIII 

(Straight  arms. )   In  front  forward. 


2  Left  in  front  over,  right  upward. 

3  (Straight  arms.)    In  front  forward. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 

IX 

1  (Straight  arms.)    In  front  forward. 

2  Right  in  front  over,  left  upward. 

3  (Straight  arms.)   In  front  forward. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 


1  (Straight  arms.)   In  front  forward. 

2  Left  in  front  (middle  of  the  chest) 

and  right  downward. 

3  (Straight  arms.)   In  front  forward. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 

XI 

1  (Straight  arms.)   In  frtmt  forward. 

2  Right  in  front  (middle  of  the  chest) 

and  left  downward. 


Vertical  Position. 

3  (Straight    arms.)      In   front   for- 

ward. 

4  Down.  "4  counts. 


XII 

1  (Straight    arms.)      In   front    for- 

ward. 

2  Left  in  front  (middle  of  the  chest) 

right  upward. 

3  (Straight    arms.)      In    front    for- 

ward. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 

XIII 

1  (Straight    arms.)     In    front    for- 

ward. 

2  Right  in  front  (middle  of  the  chest) 

left  upward. 

3  (Straight    arms.)      In    front    for- 

ward. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 


62 


i :  Kit  M .  I .  V  - .  1  M  KR  1C  A  N  G  YMNA  S  TICS 


XIV 

1  (Straight  arms.)   In  front  forward. 

2  Left  upward,  right  downward  (the 

arms  remain  extended). 

3  (Straight  arms.)    In  front  forward. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 


XV 

1  (Straight  arms.)    In  front  forward. 

2  Kight      upward,     left      downward 

(arms  remain  extended). 

3  (Straight  arms.)     In  front  forward. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 


XVI   AND   XVII 

Same  as  XIV.  and  XV.,  with  both  arms  bent  in  vertical  position  in 
front  in  the  second  count. 

NOTE.  —  When  one  hand  crosses  to  the  opposite  side  at 
the  height  of  the  chest,  the  other  end  of  the  wand  is  brought 
under  the  shoulder  or  arm  (armpit),  and  the  wand  glides 
through  the  hand  of  the  extended  arm,  which  remains  in 
nearly  the  same  position.  Where  the  end  of  the  wand  is  to 
be  brought  on  the  opposite  or  on  the  same  shoulder,  a  special 
command  must  be  given. 

LESSON    3. 

Starting  position;   down  in  front! 

Two  successive  motions  and  return.  Vertical  position  in 
the  first  count  and  oblique  position  in  the  second  count. 

I 

1  Vertical  in  front  forward  (left  hand  up, 

right  hand  down).    See  the  note  below. 

2  Left  down,  right  sideways. 

3  Eeturn  to  the  first  position. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 

II 

1  Vertical  in  front  forward. 

2  Right  down,  left  sideways. 

3  Vertical  in  front  forward. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 

Ill 

1  Vertical  in  front  forward. 

2  Left  sideways,  right  upward  (Fig.  36). 

3  Vertical  in  front  forward. 

4  Down.  4  counts. 


Fig.  36. 


SECOND   COURSE  63 

I Y  3  Vertical  in  front  forward. 

1  Vertical  in  front  forward.  4  Down-  4  counts. 

2  Right  sideways,  left  upward. 

3  Vertical  in  front  forward.  VII 

4  Down.  4  counts.       i   Vertical  in  front  forward. 

"V  2   Left    downward,    sideways,    right 

1  Vertical  in  front  forward.  (overhead)  behind. 

2  Right   upward  (overhead),  left  in       3   Vertical  in  front  forward. 

front  forward.      (Left  hand   re-       4  Down  (in  front).  4  counts, 

mains  lowered  just  a  little.) 

3  Vertical  in  front  forward.  VIII 

4  Down.  4  counts.       ,    ^     ...     ,  .     , 

1   Vertical  m  front  forward. 

VI  2   Right    downward,    sideways,    left 

1  Vertical  in  front  forward.  (overhead)  behind. 

2  Left  upward,  right  in  front  forward       3   Vertical  in  front  forward. 

(same  as  in  ExerciseS).  4   Down.  4  counts. 

NOTE.  —  All  the  vertical  positions  in  this  lesson  must  be 
practised  alternately;  i.e.,  in  the  first  exercise  the  left  hand 
should  be  up  and  the  right  hand  down,  and  vice  versa. 

Care  should  be  taken  to  have  the  vertical  position  in  the 
3d  count  or  movement  of  each  exercise  the  same  as  in  the 
first  count  of  the  same  exercise. 

LESSON    4. 

From  the  starting  position,  "  Down  in  front."  Three  suc- 
cessive motions  and  return.  The  changes  from  one  position 
to  the  other  in  the  shortest  way  possible. 

REMARKS.  —  Although  not  so  much  used  in  the  compo- 
sition for  exhibitions,  it  is  well  to  swerve  from  the  "it  so 
seems "  established  rule  of  "  two,  four,  eight."  Movements 
can  be  taken  with  two  counts  of  resting  following  each 
repetition;  or  with,  a  "facing"  (one-quarter  turn  or  about 
face)  at  7  and  8  ;  but  they  will  tax  the  attention  of  a  class 
in  a  greater  degree  than  usual. 


64 


GERM  AX- AMERICAN  OTMNA8TK  3 


For  "motions  in  reverse,"  the  simpler  expression,  "return 
motions,"  will  be  used  in  the  following  lessons. 


1  ( Bend  arms. )     In  front. 

2  (Straight  arms.)   In  front  forward. 

3  (Straight  arms.)     Upward. 

4) 

5  >  Return  motions. 

6) 

II 

1  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

2  ( Straight  arms. )     In  front  forward. 

3  (Straight    arms.)      Behind    back- 

ward. 

4  > 

5  >  Return  motions. 
6J 

III 

1  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

2  (Straight  arms. )    In  front  forward. 

3  (Straight   arms.)       Behind   down- 

ward. 

4) 

5  >  Return  motions. 

•  j 

IV 

1  (Bend  arms. )     In  front. 

2  (Straight  arms.)    In  front  forward. 

3  Left  sideways,  right  in  front. 

4) 

5  >  Return  motions. 


V 

1  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

2  (Straight  arms. )    In  front  forward. 

3  Right  sideways,  left  in  front. 

Return  motions. 

VI 

1  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

2  (Straight  arms.)    In  front  forward. 

3  (Bend  arms. )     Behind. 

5  >  Return  motions. 

VII 

1  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

2  (Straight  arms. )    In  front  forward. 

3  Left     (overhead)     behind,      right 

downward. 

4) 

5  >  Return  motions. 

6) 

VIII 

1  (Bend  arms.)     In  front. 

2  (Straight  arms.)    In  front  forward. 

3  Right  (overhead)  behind,  left  down- 

ward. 
4 

5  £  Return  motions. 
6 


IX 

REMARK.  —  A  very  neat   arrangement  of   this    lesson   for 
.exhibition  is  as  follows :  — 

24  counts  of  the  4th  and  5th  exercises  alternated,  then  8  counts  rest. 
24  counts  of  the  1st  exercise,  then  8  counts  rest. 

24  counts  of  the  2d  exercise,  then  8  counts  rest. 

24  counts  of  the  6th  exercise,  then  8  counts  rest. 

24  counts  of  the  7th  and  8th  exercises  alternated,  then  8  counts  rest. 
24  counts  of  the  third  exercise,  then  8  counts  rest. 

144  counts  of  movements,  and  48  counts  rest. 


SECOND   COURSE  65 

LESSON   5. 

From  the  starting  position,  "  Down  in  front,"  four  succes- 
sive motions  and  return..  The  change  from  one  position  to 
the  other  in  the  shortest  way  possible. 

REMARKS.  —  The  positions  may  all  differ  from  1  to  4,  or 
the  4th  may  simply  be  the  opposite  of  the  3d.  Even  this 
rule  need  not  be  strictly  observed,  as  in  some  arrangements 
it  may  be  better  to  make  the  3d  motion  the  opposite  of 
the  2d.  In  this  lesson  but  four  successive  changes  of  the 
simplest  form  will  be  given.  In  the  following  lessons,  the 
command  "bend  arms"  before  the  command  "in  front"  will 
be  omitted.  Let  it  be  understood  that  "in  front"  means 
at  the  height  of  the  chest  (near  the  shoulder).  The  "in 
front "  will  also  be  omitted  before  the  "  forward."  Let  it 
be  understood  that  the  "  forward  "  means  with  the  arms  (or 
one  arm)  extended  at  the  height  of  the  shoulders,  unless 
otherwise  mentioned.  It  makes  the  command  simpler  and 
more  concise,  and  will  be  understood  fully  as  well  when  the 
pupils  have  practised  all  previous  lessons  thoroughly.  The 
word  "  behind,"  when  used  with  "  backward,"  may  be 
dropped;  in  fact,  all  commands  of  explanation  should  be 
limited  to  the  fewest  words  possible,  without  cutting  or  alter- 
ing the  meaning.  Instead  of  giving  the  exercises  in  full  in 
both  directions,  they  will  in  the  remaining  lessons  be  given 
in  one  direction  only;  and  when  the  same  are  to  be  exe- 
cuted in  the  opposite  direction,  the  simple  command,  "  The 
same  contrarily !  "  or,  "  Contrary,  the  same  !  "  will  be  given. 

4  Right  sideways,  left  in  front. 

1  In  front.  g) 

2  Forward.  [  Return  motions. 

3  Left  sideways,  right  in  front.  8 


60 


t.  EUMAN-AMERICAN 


The  same  contrarily. 

Ill 
1   In  front.  2   Forward. 

3  Left  sideways,  right  in  front. 

4  Right  sideways,  left  behind. 
5 

Return  motions. 


~  > 
> 


IV 

The  same  contrarily. 

V 
1   In  front.  2  Forward. 

3  Upward. 

4  Left  behind,  right  downward. 
5 

-  >  Return  motions. 

VI 

The  same  contrarily. 

VII 
1   In  front.  2  Forward. 

3  Behind. 

4  Behind  downward,  or  down  behind. 
6, 

„  >  Return  motions. 

8* 

VIII 

The  same  contrarily. 

IX 

1  In  front. 

2  Forward. 

3  Upward. 
Down  behind. 

Return  motions. 


The  same  contrarily. 


XI 

1   In  front.  2   Forward. 

3  Upward. 

4  Left  (remains)  upward,  right   in 

front  over  (in  front  of  the   left 
shoulder). 


Return  motions. 

XII 

The  same  contrarily. 


XIII 

1   In  front.  2   Forward. 

3  Upward. 

4  Left  forward,  right  in  front  over 

(the   end   in   the   right   hand   is 
brought  under  the  left  shoulder). 
\ 

n    I 

„  >  Return  motions. 

8* 

XIV 

The  same  contrarily. 

XV 

1   In  front.  2  Forward. 

3  Upward. 

4  Left  downward,  right  in  front  over. 
5, 

o   j 

_  >  Return  motions. 

8^ 

XVI 
The  same  contrarily. 


1   In  front. 


XVII 

2   Forward. 


3  Upward. 

4  Left   in   front  over,  and   right   in 

front  over  (left  arm  crosses  over 
right,  and  hands  glide  towards 
each  other  somewhat). 


>  Return  motions. 

XVIII 

The  same  contrarily. 


WAND   EXERCISES 


67 


PAET    III. 

THIRD    COURSE. 

Series  of  wand  exercises  combined  with  steps,  strides,  lunge- 
reverses,  lunges,  turning  and  bending  of  the  trunk  and  knees. 
In  this  course  a  number  of  series  are  given  comprising  motions 
or  exercises  learned  in  the  first  and  second  courses.  No  at- 
tempt is  made  at  exhausting  each  and  every  lesson  previously 
learned.  The  series  here  offered  show  simply  how  to  com- 
bine and  arrange  for  a  composition,  wand-drill,  or  Roundel. 


SERIES   I. 

Starting  position;  down  in  front. 
Parallel  and  easy  centra-combinations. 


PART   1. 
With  Step  Position  Forward. 

1  Forward  with  step  position,  forward  left  (on 

ball  of  the  foot)  (Fig.  37).  2  counts. 

2  Forward  with  step  position,  forward  right  (on 

ball  of  the  foot).  2  counts. 

3  Forward  with  step  position,  forward  left  (on 

whole  foot).  2  counts. 

4  Forward  with  step  position,  forward  right  (on 

whole  foot).  2  counts. 

Repeat  four  times.  32  counts. 

Pause  16  counts,  with  rest  or  pose  at  3,  and 

recover  at  13. 


PART   2. 
With  Step  Position  Sideways. 

1  Sideways  left,  right  in  front,  with 
step  position  sideways  left  (on 
ball  of  the  foot).  2  counts. 


Fig.  37. 


2  Sideways  right,  left  in  front  with 
step  position,  sideways  right  (on 
ball  of  the  foot).  2  counts. 


68 


G  Eli  MA  N-A  M ERIC  A  N  G  YMNA  8  TICS 


3  Sideways  left,  right  in  front  with 

step  position,  sideways  left  (on 
whole  foot)   (Fig.   38). 

2  counts. 

4  Sideways  right,  left  in  front,  with 


step  position,  sideways  right  (on 
whole  foot).  "2  counts. 

Repeat  four  times.  32  counts. 

Pause  with  rest  or  pose,  and  re- 
cover as  above. 


Fig.  38. 


PART    3. 


Fig.  39. 


With  Step  Position  Backward. 

1  Upward  with  step  position,  back-      3   Upward  with  step  position,  back- 

ward  left,  (on   ball   of   the  foot  ward  right  (on  whole  foot). 

(Fig.  39).  2  counts.  2  counts. 

2  Upward  with  step  position,  back-      4  Upward  with  step  position,  back- 

ward right  (on  ball  of  the  foot).  ward  right  (on  whole  foot). 

2  counts.  2  counts. 

Repeat  four  times.  32  counts. 

Pause,  etc.,  as  above. 


PART  4. 


With  Trunk  Bent  Backward. 


1    In  front  with  trunk  bent  backward      4   In  front  with  trunk  bent  backward 


(slightly).  2  counts. 

In  front  with  trunk  bent  backward 

(low).  2  counts. 

In  front  with  trunk  bent  backward 

(slightly).  2  counts. 


(low).  2  counts. 

Repeat  four  times.  32  counts. 

Pause,  etc.,  as  above. 


WAND   EXERCISES 


69 


PART    5. 

With  Trunk  Bent  Sideways. 

1  Left  upward,   right  in  front  over  (height   of    the 

stomach),  with  the  trunk  bent  sideways  right 
(slightly).  2  counts. 

2  Right  upward,  left  in  front  over  (as  in  Exercise  1), 

with  the  trunk  bent  sideways  left.  2  counts. 

3  Left  upward,  right    in    front   over   (height  of  the 

chest,  the  wand  glides  through  the  left  hand), 
with  the  trunk  bent  sideways  right  (low)  (Fig. 
40).  2  counts. 

4  Right  upward,  left  in  front  over  (as  in  Exercise  3), 

with  the  trunk  bent  sideways  left  (low). 

2  counts. 

Repeat  four  times.  32  counts. 

Pause,  etc.,  as  above. 

PART   6. 


With  the  Trunk  Bent  Forward. 

1  Behind   (on  the   shoulders),   with 

the  trunk  bent  forward  (slightly). 
2  counts. 

2  Behind  (on  the  shoulders),  with 

the  trunk  bent    forward    (low) 
(Fig.  41).  2  counts. 


Fig.  40. 


the  trunk  bent  forward  (slight- 
ly). 2  counts. 
4  Behind   (on   the   shoulders),  with 
the  trunk  bent  forward  (low). 

2  counts. 
Repeat  four  times.  32  counts. 


3   Behind   (on  the  shoulders),  with  Pause,  etc.,  as  above. 


Fig.  47. 

With  Turn  Trunk. 

1    Left  downward  (hand  glides),  right 

in  front  over,  with  turn  trunk 


PART   7. 


Fig.  42. 

right  (the  head  turns  still  more) 
(Fig  42).  2  counts. 


70 


GEltMAN-AMElilCAN   G  Y21NA8T1C8 


2  Right  downward  (hand  glides),  left 

in  front  over,  with  turn  trunk 

left  (the  head  turns  still  more). 

2  counts. 

3  Left  downward  (the  hand  glides), 

right  in  front  over  (height  of  the 
stomach),  with  turn  trunk  left. 
2  counts. 


4   Right  downward  (the  hand  glides), 

left  in  front  over  (height  of  the 

stomach),  with  turn  trunk  right. 

2  counts. 

Repeat  four  times.  32  counts. 

1'uuse,  etc.,  as  above. 


PART  8. 


With  Bent  Knees. 

Behind  down   with  bent  knees  (slightly)  (Fig. 
43).  2  counts. 

2  Behind  down,  with  bent  knees  (low).      2  counts. 

3  Behind  down,  with  bent  knees  (slightly). 

2  counts. 

4  Behind  down,  with  bent  knees  (low).       2  counts. 
Repeat  four  times,  and  finish  with  pose  in  sym- 
metrical grouping. 


NOTE.  —  In  Part   2,  Exercise  3,  side- 
ways   left,   right  in  front,  may  be  taken 
sideways  left,  right  behind,  if  preferred.     Also  contrarily,  4. 


Fig.  43. 


SERIES    II. 
Starting  position ;   down  in  front . 

Two  motions  and  return.  By  taking  the  foregoing  Series 
I,  with  "  bent  arms  "  in  front  for  the  first  motion,  and  for  the 
second  motion  just  as  given  there,  we  have  the  same  in  a  more 
effective  arrangement.  Only  the  first  and  fourth  parts  of  the 
series  are  given  for  example ;  the  fourth,  because  it  undergoes 
more  of  a  change  in  the  new  arrangement. 


PART  i. 


1  In  front. 

2  Forward   with   step   position,   for- 

ward left  (on  ball  of  the  foot). 


3  ) 

4  >  Return  motions. 


WAND  EXERCISES 


71 


II 


2   In  front. 

2  Forward  with  step  position,   for-  whole  foot, 

ward  right  (on  ball  of  the  foot).       Repeat  four  times. 


Ill,  IV 
Same  as  I  and  II,  but  step  on  the 


32  counts. 


>  Return  motions. 


Pause,  and  rest  or  pose. 


PART   2. 


II 


1   Forward  (instead  of  in  front,  as  in      1   Forward  (instead  of  in  front  as  in 


Series  I). 

2  In  front  with  trunk  bent  backward 

(slightly). 

3  ) 

'  Return  motions. 


Series  I). 

2  In  front  with  trunk  bent  backward 

(low). 

3  )  Return  motions. 

4  J  Pause,  and  rest  or  pose. 

And  so  on  with  the  remaining  parts. 


SERIES    III. 
Starting  Position;  down  in  front! 

Two  combined  motions  and  return.  While  in  Series  II. 
the  first  motion  was  a  simple  one  and  the  second  a  combined 
one,  both  are  combined  motions  in  this  series. 

PART  i 
Step  Position  and  Bend  the  Knee  of  the  Stepping  Leg. 


1  In  front  with  step  position,  forward 

left. 

2  Forward     with     bent    left     knee 

(Fig.  44). 

q  i 

4  >  Return  motions. 

NOTE.  —  Step  as  in  Series  I,  through- 
out; when  the  knee  is  bent,  the 
whole  foot  is  down. 

II 

The  same  contrarily. 
Repeat  four  times.  32  counts. 

Rest  or  pose,  and  recover,  as  in  the 
other  series. 


Fig.  44. 


72 


GERMAN-AMERICAN   G YMNASTICS 


PART    2. 


1  In  front  with  step  position,  side- 

ways left. 

2  Sideways  left,  right  in  front,  with 

bent  left  knee  (Fig.  45). 

3  ) 

.  >  Return  motions. 


Fig    45. 


II 

The  same  contrarily. 
Repeat  four  times. 
Rest  or  pose,  etc. 


PART    3. 


II 


1  In  front  with  step  position,  back- 

ward left. 

2  Upward,  with  bent  left  knee. 

Return  motions. 

PART   4. 
I 

1  Forward  with  step  position,  back- 

ward left. 

2  In  front,  with  bent  trunk  backward 

and  bent  left  knee. 


The  same  contrarily. 
Repeat  four  times. 
Rest  or  pose,  etc. 


Return  motions. 


II 

Contrarily. 
Repeat  four  times. 


32  counts. 


32  counts. 


32  counts. 


Pause,  and  rest  or  pose,  etc. 


PART    5. 


1  In  front  with  step  position,  sideways 

right. 

2  Left  upwards,  right  in  front  over 

(height  of  the  chest),  with  trunk 
bent  sideways  right  and  right 
knee  bent. 


Return  motions. 

II 

The  same  contrarily. 
Repeat  four  times. 
Pause,  rest  or  pose,  etc. 


32  counts. 


PART    6. 


II 

3  1 
1   In  front  with  step  position,  for-      4  }  Return  motions. 


ward  left. 

2   Behind,  with  trunk  bent  forward 
and  the  left  knee  bent. 


The  same  contrarily. 

Repeat  four  times.  32  counts. 

Pause,  and  rest  or  pose,  etc. 


WAND  EXERCISES 


73 


PART    7. 


1   In  front  with  step  position,  side- 
ways right. 

•2  Left    downward,    right    in    front 

over,  with  turn  trunk  left  and      „ 
bent  right  knee.  4 

3  ) 

.     Return  motions. 

II 

The  same  contrarily. 

Ill 

1   In  front  with  step  position,   side- 
ways right. 

With  Both  Knees  Bent. 

I  2 

1  In  front  with  raised  heels. 

2  Behind    down,   with    bent    knees      3 

(slightly). 


Left  downward,  right  in  front  over, 
with  turn  trunk  right  and  bent 
right  knee  (the  wand  in  front  of 
the  left  leg). 

>  Return  motions. 

IV 

Contrarily. 

Repeat  two  times.  32  counts. 

Pause,  and  rest  or  pose,  etc. 


PART    8. 


Behind    down,    with   bent    knees 
(low). 

>  Return  motions. 


O    I 

.  > 


Return  motions. 
II 
1   In  front  with  raised  heels. 


Repeat  four  times. 
Finish  with  grouping. 


32  counts. 


SERIES     IV. 
Starting  position ;  down  in  front ! 

PART    1. 

With  Oblique  Step  Positions  and  Knee  Bent  of  the  Stepping  Leg. 
I  II 


1  In  front  with  step  position,  ob- 
liquely forward  left. 

2.  Left  oblique  forward,  right  in 
front  over,  with  bent  left  knee. 

o  -v 

v  Return  motions. 


Contrarily  the  same. 
Repeat  four  times.  32  counts. 

Pause,  and  rest  or  pose,  as  in  the 
other  series. 


PART    2. 


1  In  front  with  step  position,  side- 

ways left. 

2  Left   sideways,   obliquely  upward, 

right  in  front  over,  with  the  left 
knee  bent  (Fig.  46). 


q  j 

>  Return  motions. 

II 

Contrarily  the  same. 
Repeat  four  times.  32  counts. 

Pause,  and  rest  or  pose,  etc. 


74 


GERMAN-AMERICAN    MM/AM  .s  /  /<   - 


PART    3. 


1  In  front   with  step    position,   ob- 

liquely backward  left. 

2  Left  upward,  right  in  front  over, 

with  left  knee  bent. 


QI 

> 


Return  motions. 

1  1 

Contrarily  the  same. 
Repeat  four  times. 


:',-j>  counU. 


Pause,  and  rest  or  pose,  etc. 


PART    4. 


In    front   with    step  position,  ob- 

liquely forward  left. 
Down   with   bent    trunk  forward, 

over  left  knee  (the  wand  almost 

touching  in  front  of  the  left  foot) 

(Fig.  47). 


? 


?  Return  motions. 


Contrarily  the  same. 
Repeat  four  times. 


32  counts. 


Pause,  and  rest  or  pose,  etc. 


PART    5. 


1  In   front    with   step   position,   ob- 

liquely backward  left. 

2  Upward,  with  trunk  bent  backward 

and  left  knee  bent  (the  trunk 
turns  one-eighth  to  the  right) 
(Fig.  48). 


31 

.  > 


Return  motions. 


Contrarily  the  same. 
Repeat  four  times. 


32  counts. 


Pause,  and  rest  or  pose,  etc. 


PART    6. 


Upward  with  cross  step  position, 
forward  left. 

Left  in  front  over,  right  upward 
(the  right  hand  remains  nearly 
where  it  is,  but  the  wand  glides 
through  the  hand),  with  lunge 
sideways  left  (Fig.  49). 


!  Return  motions. 

Contrarily  the  same. 

Repeat  four  times.  32  counts. 

Pause,  and  rest  or  pose,  etc. 


PART    7. 


1  Upward   with  step  position,  side- 

wavs  left. 

2  Left  sideways  down  (on  the  floor), 

with  the  trunk  bent  sideways 
left  and  the  left  knee  bent.  The 
right  hand  may  be  brought  in 


front  over  (in  front  of  the  left 
shoulder),  or  the  arm  may  be 
bent  over  head  ;  the  wand  must 
stand  in  a  vertical  position  (Fig. 

;  I  Return  motions. 


WAND  EXERCISES 


75 


Fig.  46. 


Fig.  47. 


Fig.  43. 


Fig.  49. 


Fig.  50. 


76 


< ;  l-ll  MAN-AM  ERIC  AN  G  YMNASTICS 


II 

Contrarily  the  same. 


Repeat  four  tinn>.  32  counts. 

Pause,  and  rest  or  pose,  etc. 


PART    8. 


1  Upward  with  lunge  sideways  left. 

2  Left  in  front  over,  right  upward 

with  straightened  left  knee  and 
bent  right  knee. 


3  ) 

'.  >  Return  motions. 

II 

Contrarily  the  same. 
Repeat  four  times. 


32  counts. 


Pause,  and  rest  or  pose,  etc. 


PART    9. 


1  Upward  with  stride  (both  feet  step 

sideways  with  a  jump). 

2  Left  down  (on  the  floor)  (see  part 

7),  with  the  trunk  bent  sideways 
left  and  the  left  knee  bent. 


Return  motions. 

II 

Contrarily  the  same. 
Repeat  four  times. 


32  counts. 


Pause,  and  rest  or  pose,  etc. 


PART    1O. 


1  Upward  with  stride. 

2  Left  in  front  over  and   right  in 

front  over  (left  arm  crosses  over 
right),  with  bent  trunk  sideways 
right  and  bent  right  knee  (Fig. 
51). 

^  >  Return  motions. 


II 

Contrarily  the  same. 

Repeat  four  times.  32  counts. 

Pause,  and  rest  or  pose,  etc. 


Fig.  51. 


P  A  E  T     IV. 

FOURTH    COURSE. 


In   this    course    the    more    complicated    motions,    termed 
"winding,"  are  spoken  of  exclusively. 

The  term  "winding"  may  have  originated  from   the    cir- 


WAND   EXERCISES 


77 


cular  motion  of  the  hand,  resembling  somewhat  the  process  of 
winding  a  cord  around  something.  It  may  be  done  toward 
the  body,  and  away  from  it.  The  former,  which  is  executed 
with  the  under  hold,  occurs  more  frequently ;  the  latter,  which 
is  often  combined  with  a  circular  swing  or  sweep  of  the 
wand,  and  in  combination  with  the  former,  permits  of  fewer 
changes.  These  movements  are  best  explained  and  will  be 
more  readily  understood  if  taken  from  the  starting  position 
"  down  in  front."  When  once  learned,  they  may  be  executed 
from  different  positions,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  following 
series. 

EXPLANATION  FOR  WINDING  WITH  THE  UNDER  HOLD.— 
Raise    the    left   hand   in    front    of    the    chest,    and   the    right 


Fig.  52. 


Fig.  53. 


sideways  (the  arm  extended)  (or  let  the  wand  glide  through 
the  right  hand  in  raising).  The  thumb  of  the  left  hand 
should  now  point  downward,  and  the  back  of  the  hand 
towards  the  chest,  with  the  elbow  a  little  higher  than  the 
shoulder  (Fig.  52).  From  this  position  straighten  the  left 


GERMAN-AMERICAN   G YMNA STIC'S 


arm  sideways,  down  or  upward,  retaining  the  hold  of  ill-- 
left hand  as  much  as  possible,  and  bringing  the  right  hand 
to  position  in  front,  or  in  front  over,  as  the  position  of  tin- 
left  hand  and  arm  or  wand  may  demand  (Fig.  53).  It  is 
possible  to  wind  upward,  downward,  sideways,  forward,  and 
backward,  in  front  of,  and  behind,  the  body.  In  the  follow- 
ing exercises  these  movements  will  be  simply  termed  "wind 
sideways,  wind  upward,"  etc.  When  the  position  at  the  end 
of  an  exercise  is  other  than  horizontal  or  vertical,  it  will  so 
be  stated. 

LESSON  i. 

Starting  position ;  down  in  front  (under  hold) ! 
A  —  "Wind  to  a  horizontal  position. 

To  make  the  command  shorter,   let  the  second  or  return 
motion  always  be  understood. 


1  Wind  sideways  left,  right  in  front. 

2  Wind  sideways  right,  left  in  front. 

3  Wind  sideways  left,  right  behind. 

4  Wind  sideways  right,  left  behind. 

5  Wind  forward  left,  right  in  front 

over  (the  wand  glides  through 
the  winding  hand). 

6  Wind  forward  right,  left  in  front 

over  (the  wand  glides  through 
the  winding  hand).  ' 

7  Wind  forward  left,  right  in  front 

over  (on  shoulder). 

8  Wind  forward  right,  left  in  front 

over  (on  shoulder). 

9  Wind  forward  left,  right  behind 

over  (on  shoulder). 
10  Wind  forward  right,  left  behind 
over  (on  shoulder). 


11  Wind  backward  left,  right  in  front 

over  (height  of  the  shoulders). 

12  Wind  backward  right,  left  in  front 

over  (height  of  the  shoulders). 

13  Wind  backward  left,  right  in  front 

over  (height  of  the  hips). 

14  Wind  backward  right,  left  in  front 

over  (height  of  the  hips). 

15  Wind  upward  left,  right  upward 

(both  arms  extended  upward). 

16  Wind  upward  right,  left  upward 

(both  arms  extended  upward). 

17  Wind  sideways  left  over  to  right, 

right  over   in  front  (cross   the 
arms  height  of  the  chest). 

18  Wind  sideways  right  over  to  left, 

left    over   in    front   (cross   the 
arms  height  of  the  chest). 


WAND  EXERCISES 


79 


LESSON  2. 
B  —  Wind  to  the  vertical  positions. 

The  wand  may  glide  through  the  winding  hand,  or  through 
the  other  hand,  or  through  both  hands. 


1  Wind  downward  left,  right  in  front  over  (Fig.  54). 

2  Wind  downward  right,  left  in  front  over. 

3  Wind  downward  left,  right  behind  over  (middle  of  the 

back). 

4  Wind  downward  right,  left  behind  over  (middle  of  the 

back). 

5  Wind  downward  left,  right   upward  (both  arms  ex- 

tended). 

6  Wind  downward  right,  left  upward   (both  arms    ex- 

tended). 

7  Wind  upward  left,  right  in  front  over. 

8  Wind  upward  right,  left  in  front  over. 

9  Wind  upward  left,  right  behind  over. 
10  Wind  upward  right,  left  behind  over. 


Fig.  54. 


NOTE. — The  position  in  9  and  10,  taken  alone,  will  be 
somewhat  slanting,  but  when  taken  with  bending,  will  be 
found  to  come  under  the  head  of  the  vertical  positions.  The 
winding  upward  and  downward,  both  in  front  and  behind 
the  body,  may  lead  to  a  slanting  position  as  well,  and  when 
properly  combined  will  make  a  fine  exercise. 


LESSON  3. 
The  contra,  or  wind  reverse.  —  Two  motions  and  return. 

Although  very  difficult,  this  is  nothing  more  than  changing 
from  one  position  after  winding  to  the  opposite.  The  extreme 
difficulty  arises  through  the  quickness  of  the  change,  as  the 
returning  movement  from  the  first  position  and  the  entire 
movement  to  the  second  position  must  be  done  in  one  count; 


80 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  G YMNASTICS 


the   movements   from  the  second  position   to   the   third  must 
also  be  effected  at  one  count. 


A  —  Wind  in  directly  opposite  directions. 

As  the  position  of  the  right  hand  naturally  suggests  itself 
when  the  left  winds,  it  is  not  given  in  the  following  lessons 
unless  necessary. 


Sideways. 

1  Wind  sideways  left. 

2  Return  and  wind  sideways  right. 

3  Return  and  wind  sideways  left. 

4  Return  and  down  in  front. 

II 

Contrarily  the  same. 

Ill 
Downward. 

1  Wind  downward  left. 

2  Return  and  wind  downward  right. 

3  Return  and  wind  downward  left. 

4  Return  and  down  in  front. 

IV 

Contrarily  the  same. 


Upward. 

1  Wind  upward  left. 

2  Return  and  wind  upward  right. 

3  Return  and  wind  upward  left. 

4  Return  and  down  in  front. 


VI 

Contrarily  the  same. 

VII 
Forward. 

1  Wind  forward  left,  right  in  front 

(on  or  under  shoulder). 

2  Return  and  wind  forward  right  to 

the  opposite  position. 

3  Return  and  wind  forward  left  to 

the  opposite  position. 

4  Down  in  front. 

VIII 

Contrarily  the  same. 

IX. 
Backward. 

1  Wind  backward  left  (height  of  the 

shoulders  or  the  hips). 

2  Return  and  wind  backward  right 

to  the  opposite  position. 

3  Return  and  wind  backward  left  to 

the  opposite  position. 

4  Return  and  down  in  front. 

X. 

Contrarily  the  same. 


B  —  In  different,  but  non-opposite  directions. 

XI 

Sideways  and  downward. 
1   Wind  sideways  left. 


2   Return  and  wind  downward  right, 
left  behind  in  slanting  position. 

3 
4 


Return  motions. 


WAND  EXERCISES  81 

XII  left  in  front  over  (on  or  under 

Contrarily  the  same.  the  shoulder). 

'  [  Return  motions. 
XIII 

Sideways  and  upward.  XVI 

1  Wind  sideways  left.  Contrarily  the  same. 

2  Return  and   wind   upward    right, 

X  V  T  T 

left  in  front  over. 

3  )  _  Sideways  and  backward. 
.  >  Return  motions. 

1  Wind  sideways  left. 

XIV  2   Return  and  wind  backward  right, 

Contrarily  the  same.  left  in  front  over  (at  the  height 

of  the  shoulders  or  the  hips). 

XV  3  ) 

,  >  Return  motions. 

Sideways  and  forward. 

1  Wind  sideways  left.  XVIII 

2  Return   and   wind  forward   right,  Contrarily  the  same. 

As  will  be  seen  by  the  foregoing  lessons,  the  contra,  or  wind 
reverse,  may  be  extended  ad  infinitum. 

LESSON    4. 

The  -wind  with  the  upper  hold. 
The  wind  in  combination  with  circle,  or  sweep  simple,  and  followed 

again  by  a  wind. 
Starting  position  ;   down  in  front  (upper  hold) 

NOTE.  —  When  followed  by  a  wind  as  last  motion,  the 
winding  hand  slips  around  the  end  of  the  wand  to  the  under 
hold. 

EXPLANATION  OF  THE  DIFFERENT  MOVEMENTS  OF  THE 
WIND  WITH  THE  UPPER  HOLD. 

Raise  the  left  hand  with  the  hold  unchanged  in  front,  and 
bring  the  right  downward,  letting  the  wand  glide  through  the 
hand.  The  wand  is  now  in  a  vertical  position  in  front,  on 
the  middle  line  of  the  body;  the  left  hand  at  the  height  of 


82 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 


the  chest.  Now  turn  the  wand  with  the  left  hand  firmly 
(as  if  driving  a  screw),  until  it  has  completed  a  whole  turn ; 
then,  pressing  the  elbow  close  to  the 
bod}-,  turn  the  hand  a  little  more, 
and  straighten  the  left  arm  sideways, 
bringing  the  right  hand  in  front  or 
front  over.  (Fig.  55.)  This  (the 
wind  sideways  left)  should  be  practised 
first  in  two  motions  and  return,  then 
in  one  motion  and  return.  When  ex- 
ecuted in  the  latter  way,  the  right  arm 
swings  down  over,  so  as  to  allow  the 
left  hand  to  make  the  turn  as  ex- 
plained above.  The  right  hand  must 

not  remain  in  this  downward  position  any  length  of  time,  but 
must  come  immediately  up  to  the  position  in  front.  The 
wind  with  the  upper  hold  is  more  limited  than  that  with  the 
under  hold. 


Fig.    55. 


Sideways. 

1  Wind  sideways  left,  right  in  front 

(see  explanation). 

2  Wind  sideways  right,  left  in  front 

(see  explanation). 

3  Wind   sideways   left,   right   down- 

ward sweep  and  under  left  shoul- 
der (end  of  the  wand  behind,  on 
back,  the  wand  in  slightly  slant- 
ing position). 

4  Wind   sideways   right,   left   down- 

ward sweep  and  behind  as  in  3. 

Forward. 

5  Wind  forward  left,  right  downward 

sweep  and  under  the  left  shoul- 
der. 


6  Wind   forward   right,   left   down- 

ward sweep  and  under  the  left 
shoulder. 

7  Wind   forward   left,   right   down- 

ward sweep  and  in  front,  the 
right  end  of  the  wand  under 
the  right  shoulder  (oblique  posi- 
tion). 

8  Wind   forward   right,  left   down- 

ward sweep  and  in  front,  as  in 
Exercise  7. 

Upward 

9  Wind    upward   left,    right   down- 

ward sweep  and  in  front  over. 
10   Wind   upward   right,    left    down- 
ward sweep  and  in  front  over. 


WAND  EXERCISES  83 

LESSON   5. 

Miscellaneous  winds,  such  as  one-half  wind  followed  by  long  sweep 
or  circle  of  the  wand,  and  finish  the  wind  after  the  circle,  etc. 

The  few  examples  here  offered  will  give  the  teacher  a 
good  idea  of  how  manifold  these  exercises  may  be  made. 
Both  the  under  and  the  upper  hold  permit  of  good  combina- 
tions in  this  line.  In  some  exercises  the  hold  must  be 
changed  (the  hand  slips  around  the  end  of  the  wand  while 
in  motion). 

Sideways.  2   Circle  to  the  left  (swing  the  wand 

With  underhold.    Two  motions  and  in  a  circle  to  the  left)  ri§ht  side" 

return.  ways,  left  in  front  (right  arm  is 

T  extended  sideways). 

3  ) 

i    TTT.    j    -j  i  tt  4  t  Return  motions. 

1  Wind  sideways  left.  4  J 

EXPLANATION.  —  After  the  plain  wind  sideways  left,  the 
left  hand  (firm  hold)  is  drawn  towards  the  body,  and  the 
right  hand  is  raised  in  front  of  the  body,  permitting  the  hand 
to  glide  along  the  wand  almost  to  the  left  hand;  the  wand 
continues  the  circular  swing  or  sweep,  and  when  it  rises  to 
the  right  the  right  hand  glides  along  the  wand  until  the  arm 
is  extended  sideways  at  the  height  of  the  shoulders,  the  left 
hand  in  front  with  under  hold. 

II.  III. 

Contrarily  the  same.  1   One-half  wind  left  in  front  (middle 

With  the  upper-hold,  the  one-half  of  the  chest),  circle  to  the  right 

wind,  circle,  and  wind.    Two  mo-  and  sideways  right  to  position. 

tions  and  return.  2  Wind  sideways  left,  right  in  front. 

3  \  Return  motions,  but  circle  in  the 

4  /   same  direction. 

EXPLANATION.  —  The  left  hand  is  raised  and  turned  as 
explained  in  Lesson  4.  The  wand  is  now  in  a  vertical  posi- 
tion. Instead  of  winding  out  sideways,  as  commanded  in  that 


84 


CKHMA  \-A  MI-:i:K  A.\     (,  }'M. \ASTIVti 


lesson,  the  wand  is  swung  by  the  right  hand,  which  glides 
along  it,  in  a  circle  to  the  right  and  to  position  sideways 
right,  left  hand  in  front.  As  the  wand  is  raised  to  the  latter 
position,  the  left  hand  slips  around  the  end  to  the  under  hold. 
Wind  sideways  left  and  return,  change  the  hold,  and  circle  to 
down  in  front. 


IV. 

Contrarily  the  same. 
With  the  under  hold.    Wind,  circle, 
and  wind. 

V. 

1  Wind  sideways  left. 

2  Circle  to  the  left  and  as  the  right 

hand  (gliding)  is  raised  sideways 
right,  wind  forward  left,  the  right 
hand  over  in  front,  on  the  left 
shoulder. 

3  ) 

.  >  Eeturn  motions. 

VI. 

Contrarily  the  same. 
With  the  upper  hold. 

VII. 

Forward. 

1  Wind  forward  left  (right  over  in 

front). 

2  Return,  and  as  the  left  hand  slips 


around  the    end   to   under  hold, 
wind  backward  left. 
Return  motions. 

VIII. 

Contrarily  the  same. 
With  under  hold. 

IX. 

Downward. 

1  Wind  downward  left. 

2  Wind  downward  right  (both  arms 

extended  downward). 

X. 

Contrarily  the  same. 
XI. 

1  Wind  upward  left. 

2  Wind  upward  right  (both  arms  ex- 

tended). 

XII. 

Contrarily  the  same. 


An  almost  endless  variety  of  combinations  in  winds,  with 
and  without  circles,  may  be  arranged  from  the  above. 


PAKT   V. 

FIFTH    COURSE. 

In  all  preceding  lessons  the  motions  from  one  position  to 
the  other  have  been  treated  in  the  shortest  way  possible.  The 
starting  position  has  been  down  in  front  in  all  cases.  The 


WAND  EXERCISES 


85 


following  lessons  contain  all  the  different  ways  of  changing 
from  one  position  to  another,  as  well  as  the  starting  position, 
carry  at  the  shoulder  (fundamental  position).  To  illustrate 
the  different  modes  of  executing  changes,  the  following  lesson 
is  prepared  without  any  respect  to  arrangement  for  series, 
simply  containing  the  positions  mostly  used,  with  their  pos- 
sible changes. 

LESSON  i. 
Starting  position ;    down  in  front ! 


1  From   the  position   sideways   left, 

right  in  front,  the  following 
changes  are  possible. 

2  Sideways  right,  left  in  front. 

First:  The  nearest  or  shortest  way 
over. 

EXPLANATION.  —  Draw  or  pull  with 
the  right  hand  and  extend  the 
arm  sideways ;  as  the  right  arm 
is  straightened,  the  left  arm  must 
be  bent  in  front. 

^  >  Return  motions. 

Second :  With  the  forward  sweep 
or  curve  around. 

1  EXPLANATION.  —  From  the  posi- 

tion sideways  left,  right  in  front. 

2  Extend    both   arms   forward,   and 

bring  the  left  hand  in  front,  while 
the  right  hand  goes  on  until  the 
arm  is  extended  sideways. 

\  [  Return  motions. 

Third :  With  the  upward  sweep  or 
curve  around. 

1  EXPLANATION.  —  Sideways  left, 
right  in  front  (same  as  in  the 
first  and  second). 


Extend  both  arms  upward,  and 
bring  the  left  Hand  in  front,  while 
the  right  hand  goes  on  until  the 
arm  is  extended  sideways. 

Return  motions. 


Fourth :  With  the  downward  sweep 
or  curve  around. 

1  EXPLANATION.  —  Same  as  above. 

2  Extend  both  arms  downward,  and 

bring  the  left  hand  in  front,  while 
the  right  goes  on  until  the  arm  is 
extended  sideways. 

3  ) 

'.  >  Return  motions. 

Fifth :  In  the  shortest  way  behind 
over. 


1  EXPLANATION.  —  Same  as  above. 

2  Raise  the  right  hand  overhead  and 

draw  or  pull  until  the  arm  is  ex- 
tended at  the  height  of  the  shoul- 
der ;  the  left  hand  may  remain 
behind  or  may  be  brought  in  front. 

Return  motions. 


Sixth :  With  the  backward  sweep 
or  curve  around. 

1  EXPLANATION.  —  Same  as  above. 


86  GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNAST!'  8 

2   Raise  the  right  hand  overhead  and  Seventh  :  With  the  downward 

extend    both    arms     backward,  sweep  or  curve  around, 

right  goes  on  to  the  right  until  1   EXPLANATION.  —  Same  as  above, 

the  arm  is  extended  at  the  height  2  Same  as  in  the  sixth>  but  extend 

of  the  shoulder;    the  left  hand  the  arms  downward  and  swing  to 

may  be  left  behind  or  brought  in  position;  right  hand  may  be  left 

*ront'  behind    or  may  be  brought    in 

4  |  Return  motions.  front. 

In  commanding  the  above  changes,  the  author  has  found 
the  following  to  be  concise  and  definite :  - 

"  Over  in  front,"  "  around  forward,"  "  around  above," 
"around  below,"  "  over  behind,"  "around  backward,"  "  around 
below  behind."  If  the  terms  "forward  sweep,  or  curve,"  "up- 
ward sweep,"  "downward  sweep,"  etc.,  suit  better,  make  use 
of  them.  The  position  sideways  (horizontal),  as  given  in  these 
examples,  permits  of  more  changes  to  the  reverse  position  than 
any  other.  There  is  another  change,  but  it  is  used  chiefly  in 
combinations  of  series  and  combined  with  lunges,  etc.  It  is 
the  circle  swing,  in  which  the  one  hand  glides  along  the  wand 
to  the  other  hand,  as  the  desired  position  is  attained  in  the 
winding  lessons. 

PART    VI. 

SIXTH    COURSE. 

Series  of  exercises  of  all  courses  in  more  difficult  arrangements. 
Starting   position ;    fundamental  position.       The   -wand   at  the   right 
shoulder  (carry). 

SERIES    I. 

NOTE.  —  The  second  movement  may  be  upward  as  well  as 
down  in  front;  it  is  even  more  effective.  In  this  series  the 
down  in  front  in  the  second  count  is  adhered  to  until  the 
eleventh  part,  hi  which  and  in  the  twelfth  it  is  changed  to 
the  upward. 


WAND  EXERCISES  87 

PART    1. 

Starting  position ;   carry  at  the  right  shoulder ! 
Down  in  front  and  in  front. 

1  Left  hand  grasps  with  the  fingers      6  Down  in  front. 

behind  at  the  upper  end.  7  To  the  left  shoulder  (right  hand 

2  Down  in  front.  raises  the  wand);  carry  position. 

3  In  front.  8   Bring  the  right  arm  and  the  hand 

4  Down  in  front.  to  the  position  at  the  right  side. 

5  In  front.  9-16  Contrarily  the  same. 

PART   2. 
Down  in  front  and  forward. 

1  As  above.  7   To  the  left  shoulder  as  above. 

2  As  above.  8  Right  arm  to  position  at  the  right 

3  Forward.  side. 

4  Down  in  front.  9-16  Contrarily  the  same 

5  ) 

.  >  Same  as  3  and  4. 

PART    3. 

Down  in  front  and  upward. 
1   As  above.  5 


>  Same  as  3  and  4. 


2  As  above.  6 

3  Upward   (swing  up  forward  with      7  To  the  left  shoulder. 

straight  arms).  8   Right  arm  to  position  at  the  side. 

4  Down  in  front.  9-16  Contrarily  the  same. 

PART    4. 
Down  in  front  and  behind. 

1  As  above.  5  -> 

2  As  above.  6  }  Same  as  3  and  4. 

3  Behind  (bent  arms),  with  the  for-      7  To  the  left  shoulder. 

ward  and  upward  sweep  or  curve      8  Right  arm  to  position  at  the  side, 
to  position  on  the  shoulders.  9-16  Contrarily  the  same. 

4  Down  in  front. 

PART    5. 
Down  in  front  and  down  behind. 

1  Asabove-  jj)  Same  as  3  and  4. 

2  As  above. 

3  Down  behind  (full  swing).  7  To  the  left  shoulder. 

4  Down  in  front.  8   Ri8ht  arm  to  position. 

9-16  Contrarily  the  same. 


88  GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 

PART     6. 

The  same  as  Part  1,  but  with  step  position  backward  right 
in  the  third  count,  and  return  the  foot  to  place  in  the  fourth 
count,  so  at  5  and  6.  At  11,  12,  13,  and  14  the  left  foot  steps. 

PART    7. 

The  same  as  Part  2,  with  step  position  forward  right  and 
left  as  indicated  in  Part  6. 

PART    8. 

The  same  as  Part  3,  with  step  position  sideways  right  and 
left. 

PART    9. 

The  same  as  Part  4,  with  lunge  forward  right  and  left. 

PART    1O. 

The  same  as  Part  5,  with  lunge  sideways  right  and  left. 

PART  11. 
Upward  and  behind  (slanting). 

1  Left  hand  grasps  with  the  fingers 

behind  at  the  upper  end. 

2  Upward. 

3  Behind  and  left  downward  (slant- 

ing) with   lunge  sideways  right 
(Fig.  56). 

4  Upward   with    recover   (return  to 

the  fundamental  position). 
5 


Same  as  3  and  4 

7  To  the  left  shoulder. 

8  Right  arm  to  position  at  the  side. 
9-16   Contrarily  the  same. 

—    ^^~± 
Fig.  56. 

PART    12. 

Upward  and  down  sideways  (vertically). 

1  As  above.  3  Left  down  sideways,  and  right  over 

2  As  above.  in  front,  with  lunge  obliquely  for- 

ward right. 


WAND   EXERCISES  89 

4  Upward  with  recover.  7   To  the  left  shoulder. 

I  I  Same  as  3  and  4.  8  HiSht  arm  to  Position  at  the  side- 

9-16   Contrarily  the  same. 

SERIES    II. 
PART    1. 

In  front  and  forward  with    step  position,  forward   and  bend  the 
forward  knee  (knee  of  the  supporting  leg). 

1  Left  hand  grasps   behind  at  the      5)  Retum  to  3  and  2 

upper  end. 

2  Down  in  front.  7  f  T°  the  left  shoulder  (carry)'  an(i 

3  In  front  with  step  position  forward      8]      retu™  right  arm  to  position  at 

right  (on  ths  whole  foot).  the  side- 

4  Forward  with  bent  right  knee.  9~16  Contrarily  the  same. 

PART    2. 

In  front  and  sideways  with  step  position,  sideways  and  bend  the 

knee  sideways. 

^  |  As  above.  g  j  Return  to  3  and  2. 

3  In  front  with  step  position,  side-      7  ">  To  the  left  shoulder,  and  return 

ways  right  (on  the  whole  foot).         8  j      right  arm  to  position  at  the  side. 

4  Sideways    right    with    bent    right      9-16  Contrarily  the  same. 

knee. 

PART    3. 

In  front  and  upward  with  step  position,  backward   and  bend  the 

rear  knee. 

1  )  5 ) 

,  >  As  above.  >  Return  to  3  and  2. 

*  )  o  j 

3  In  front  with  step  position  back- 

ward right  (on  the  whole  foot). 

4  Upward  with  bent  right  knee.  9-16  Contrarily  the  same. 


ward  right  (on  the  whole  foot).       8j 


PART    4. 

In  front  and   downward   with  step  position,  forward,   turn  trunk 
and  bend  trunk  forward,  -with  bent  front  knee. 

*  \  As  above.  and  bent  trunk  forward  (straight 

back). 

3  In   front   with  step    position,   ob-      5  •> 

liquely  forward  right  and  turn      6/ Return  tc 
trunk  right  (one-eighth  turn ) .  7  )  Ag  above 

4  Downward  with  bent  right  knee      8  J 

9-16  Contrarily  the  same. 


90 


<;  /•:/.'  MAN-AMERICAN  G  TMNAST1C8 


PART   5. 

In  front  and  upward  with  step  position,  obliquely  backward ;  turn 
trunk,  and  bent  trunk  backward  with  bent  rear  knee. 

4   Upward  with  bent  trunk  backward 


As  above. 


and  bent  right  knee. 


1 

2  . 

3  In  front  with  step   position,   ob-      -  , 

liquely  backward  right,  with  turn       o  /  Return  to  3  and  2- 

trunk,  one-eighth  left. 

u  >  As  above. 

9-16   Contrarily  the  same. 

PART    6. 

Upward  and  to  vertical  position,  up- 
ward with  cross  step  position,  for- 
ward and  lunge  sideways. 

2  1  As  above. 

3  Upward   (horizontal   position)  with  cross 

step  position,  forward  right. 

4  Right  in  front  over  (in  front  of  the  left 

shoulder),    left    remains    up    (vertical), 
with  lunge  sideways  right  (Fig.  57). 

Return  to  3  and  2. 


Fig.  57. 


g  >•  As  above. 

9-16  Contrarily  the  same. 


PART    7. 

Upward   and   downward   to   vertical    position,   -with    step    position 
sideways,  and  bent  knee  with  bent  trunk  sideways. 


5 
6 

1} 


Return  to  3  and  2. 


As  above. 


9-16   Contrarily  the  same. 


2  >  As  above. 

3  Upward  with  step   position  side- 

ways right. 

4  Downward  right  (end  on  the  floor) 

writh  bent  trunk  sideways  right 
and  right  knee  bent. 

PART    8. 
Upward,  and  upward  to  vertical  position,  and  reverse  with  lunge 

sideways  and  lunge  reverse. 
1  \  A  s  aho  'p  ^   Right  in  front  over  (in  front  of  the 


J 


3  Upward  with  lunge  sideways  right. 


left   shoulder),  vertical   position 
with  lunge    reverse    (straighten 


WAND  EXERCISES  91 

the    bent    knee    and    bend    the      6  Down  in  front  with  recover  (fun- 
other),  damental  position). 
5   Around  below   (downward    curve      ^  \Asabove. 

or  sweep  and  left  upward),  right 

.,,    f  9-16  Contrarily  the  same. 

m  front  over  with  lunge  reverse 

(original  lunge  position). 

PART    9. 

In  front  and  upward.    Down  sideways  with  stride  sideways,  and 
bend  knee  and  trunk  sideways. 

1  As  above.  5  Around   above  (upward  sweep  or 

2  In  front    with    jump    or    hop    to  curve),  with  lunge  reverse  and 

stride    position    sideways    (both  bend  reverse,  and  downward  side- 

feet    sideways    about   36    inches  ways  left  (on  the  floor), 

apart).  6  Upward    (horizontally)    with 

3  Upward.  straightened  trunk  and  knee. 

4  Down  sideways  right  (on  the  floor),  7   To  the  left  shoulder  with  a  jump 

with  bent   right   knee  and  bent  to  the  fundamental  position, 

trunk  sideways  right.  8  Eight  arm  to  position  at  the  side. 

PART    1O. 

1  As  above.  on   the  feet  (one-quarter  turn). 

2  Down  in  front.  See  note  below. 

3  Right    in    front   over  and   left  in  5   Eeturn  wind  and  cross  the  arms 

front  over  (cross  the  right  arm  again,  but  right  under  left  with 

over  left),  with  a  lunge  sideways  lunge  reverse. 

right.  6  Down  in  front  with  recover. 

4  Wind   right  (upper  hold)   over  to  7  \  To  the  left   shoulder   and   return 

the  left  side  with  lunge  reverse,  8  f  right  arm  to  position  at  the  side, 

and  turn  trunk  left  and  turn  left  9-16   Contrarily  the  same. 

NOTE.  —  The  wind  here  is  actually  a  wind  forward  right, 
as  the  one-quarter  turn  on  the  feet  makes  it  so.  The  posi- 
tion attained  with  4  is  right  forward,  left  under  right  shoul- 
der, facing  left  and  left  knee  bent. 

SERIES    III. 
Starting  position ;   carry  at  the  right  shoulder. 

Preliminary  1. 
A  3  Raise  with  the  right  hand  to  the 

1  Grasp  with  the  left  hand  at  the  left  shoulder. 

upper  end  (the  fingers  behind).      4  Right    hand    and    arm    to    posi- 

2  Down  in  front  (upper  hold).  tion. 


92  GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 

B  11   Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  left 
5-8  Return  motions.  shoulder. 

12   Right  hand  and  arm  to  position 
C  at  the  side. 

9  Grasp  with  the  left  hand  at  the 
upper  end  (the  fingers  in  front). 

10  Down  in  front  (under  hold).  13-16.   Retuni  motions. 

Preliminary  2. 

Same  as  A,  B,  C,  and  D,  in  Pre-  seventh  count  ;  one-quarter  turn 

liminary  1,  with  one-quarter  turn  right  in  the  tenth  count,  and  one- 

(face)  left  in  the  second  count,  quarter  turn  left  in  the  fifteenth 

and  one-quarter  turn  right  on  the  count. 

PART    1. 
In  front  and  behind,  with  bent  trunk  forward  and  backward. 

A  6  Down  in  front  with  straightened 

1  Grasp  with  the  left  hand  at  the  trunk. 

,   x.,      „  ,    ,.    ,N        7  |  To  the  left  shoulder  and  return  the 

upper  end  (the  fingers  behind).       g  }    rf  ht  arm  to  position  at  the  si(le_ 

2  Down  in  front.  Q_1Q   Contrarily  the  same. 

3  In  front  with    bent   trunk   back- 

ward. 

4  Behind  (upward  curve)  with  bent  The  same  as  A,  with  one-quarter 

trunk  forward.  turns   (facing)   as  explained  in 

5  As  3.  Preliminary  2. 

PART    2. 
Forward  and  on  the  hips  with  step  backward ;   bent  knees. 

A  6  Upward   (horizontally)  with  bent 

1  As  in  Part  1.  knee  (low). 

2  Left   forward,    right    on    the    hip       7   To  the  left  shoulder  with  straight- 

(right),  with  step  backward  right.  ened  knees. 

3  Right  forward,  left  on  the  left  hip,       8  Right  arm  to  position  at  the  side. 

with  step  backward  left.  9-16  Contrarily  the  same. 

4  Forward     (both    extended),    with 

step  forward  left. 

5  Down  in  front  with  step  up  right          Same  as  A,  with  facing  as  in  the 

(right  foot  to  place).  first  part. 

PART  3. 
Forward  and  upward,  with  raise  the  *eg  and  step  backward. 

A  3   Forward  with  raise  right  leg  for- 

1  As  above.  ward. 

2  In  front.  4  In  front  with  step  backward  right. 


WAND  EXERCISES 


93 


5  Upward  with  raise  right  leg  back- 

ward. 

6  In  front  and  right  foot  to  place. 

To    the   left  shoulder  and    right 
arm  to  position  at  the  side. 


l\ 


9-16  Contrarily  the  same. 

B 

Same  as  A,  with  facings. 


PART  4. 


Obliquely  upward,  with  trunk  bent  forward,  with  raised  leg  back- 
ward, trunk  bent  backward,  and  swing  the  leg  forward. 

A  5  Same  as  3. 

6  Down  in  front  and  right  foot  to 

place. 

7  ) 

o  >  As  in  the  first  part. 

9-16  Contrarily  the  same. 


1  As  in  the  first  part. 

2  As  in  the  first  part. 

3  Obliquely  upward  (forward),  with 

raise   right   leg  backward,   with 
trunk  bent  forward  (Fig.  58). 

4  Down  in  front  with    trunk  bent 

backward    and    swing  right  leg 
forward. 


B 

The  same  as  A,  with  facings. 


Fig.  58. 

PART    5. 

Upward  (vertically)  and  downward  and  sideways,  with  bent  knees, 
with  step  position  sideways  (other  foot) ;  raise  the  leg  side- 
ways, straighten  the  bent  knee  and  lunge,  and  lunge  reverse. 

A  3  Around  below  (down  curve),  and 

1  As  in  the  first  part. 

2  Right  upward,  left   in   front  over 

with  step  position,  sideways  left, 
with  the  right  knee  bent. 


the  left  upward,  right  in  front 
over,  with  straightened  right  knee 
and  raise  the  left  leg  sideways. 


94 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  G YMNASTICS 


4  Around  forward  (forward  sweep  or 

curve)  and  sideways  right,  left  in 
front  with  lunge  sideways  left. 

5  Around  forward  and  sideways  left, 

with  lunge  reverse. 

6  Around   upward   (upward  sweep) 

and    downward    right,    left    in 


front  over  with  the  left  foot  to 

place. 

c  /  Right  arm  to  position  at  the  side. 
9-16  Contrarily  the  same. 

B 

The  same  as  A,  with  facings. 


PART  6. 

Sideways  in  front  and  behind,  with  step  position  sideways;   cross 
step  position  and  lunge,  and  cross  lunge. 

5  Same  as  3,  with  cross  lunge  back- 

ward right. 

6  Down  in  front  with  recover  from 

the  lunge. 
To   the   left   shoulder,   and   right 

arm  to  position  at  the  side. 
9-16   Contrarily  the  same. 


1  As  in  the  first  part. 

2  Sideways  right,  left  in  front  over, 

with  step  position  sideways  right. 

3  Left  over  behind  and  sideways  left, 

with  cross  step  position  forward 
right. 

4  Right  over  in  front  and   sideways 

right,  left  in  front  over  with  lunge 
sideways  right. 


l\ 


6 

The  same  as  A,  with  facings. 


PART  7. 

Downward  and  upward  with  lunge  sideways,  lunge  reverse, 
and  turn  trunk. 


1  As  in  the  first  part. 

2  Left  downward,  right  in  front  over. 

3  Right   upward,   left  in  front  over 

with  lunge  sideways  left. 

4  Right  behind  over  (the  hand  slips 

around  to  under  hold,  and  the 
wand  is  brought  behind  the  left 
shoulder),  the  left  upward  with 
lunge  reverse,  and  turn  trunk 
right.  See  note. 

5  Left  upward   (remains),   right   in 

front  over  (right  circles  around 


the  head,  and  is  brought  in  front 
of  the  left  shoulder,  hand  slips 
around  with  lunge  reverse  and 
turn  trunk  left). 

6  Around  below  (down  sweep)  and 

right  upward,  left  in  front  over 
with  recover. 

7  i  To   the   left   shoulder,   and   right 

8  \      arm  to  position  at  the  side. 
9-16   Contrarily  the  same. 

B 

Same  as  A,  with  facings. 


NOTE.  —  The  end  of  the  wand  is  behind  the  shoulder ;  the 
hand  is  on  the  shoulder,  the  arm  behind.  It  is  easier  to  change 
the  hold  in  the  foregoing  count,  that  is,  at  3.  In  returning, 
the  hand  slips  back  again  to  the  under  hold. 


WAND   EXERCISES 


95. 


PART   8. 


In  front  over  with  both  (crossed   arms,  the  hands  glide),  with 
bent  knees  (low). 


[  As  in  the  first  part. 


3  In    front   over  with    both    (cross 

arms,  right  over  the  left),  with 
bent  knees  (low)  (Fig.  59). 

4  Reverse  3  with  straightened  knees. 

5  Reverse  with  bent  knees  very  low. 


6  Reverse  5  with  straightened  knees. 

7  )  To  the  left  shoulder  and   right 

8  )      arm  to  position  at  the  side. 
9-16  Contrarily  the  same. 

B 

Same  as  A,  with  facings. 


Fig.  59. 


Fig.  60. 


PART   9. 

On  the  hip,  circle  and  downward  with  bent  knees,  with  step  posi- 
tion,   cross   backward    and    obliquely   lunge,  and    cross   lunge 


forward. 


1  As  in  the  first  part. 

2  On  the  right  hip,  left  forward,  right 

backward  with  cross  step  position, 
backward  right  with  left  knee 
bent  (Fig.  60). 

3  Circle  forward  to  right  obliquely 

downward,  left  in  front  over  (un- 
der right  shoulder),  with  lunge 
obliquely  forward  right. 

4  Circle  backward  to  position  as  2, 


with  cross  step  backward  right, 
with  the  left  knee  bent. 

5  Same  as  3,  but  cross  lunge  forward 

right. 

6  Same  as  4. 

7  To  the  left  shoulder  with  recover. 

8  Right  arm  to  position  at  the  side. 
9-16  Contrarily  the  same. 


B 


Same  as  A,  with  facings. 


96 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  G  YMNA  8TICS 


PART    1O. 

Wind  forward   and    upward,   after    winding  with    bent    knees   and 
bent  trunk  backward. 


1  Grasp  with  the  left  hand  at  the 

upper  end  (fingers  in  front). 

2  Down  in  front  (under  hold). 

3  Wind    forward    right    with    bent 

knees  (low). 

4  Wind  forward  left  (right  remains) 

with  straightened  knees. 

5  Bent  trunk  backward    and    raise 

wand  upward. 


6  Forward  with  return  wind  left  and 

straightened  trunk. 

7  Downward  left  to  shoulder,  with 

return  wind  right. 

8  Right  arm  to  position  at  the  side. 
9-16  Contrarily  the  same. 

B 

The  same  as  A,  with  facings. 


PART    11. 

Wind   and  wind   reverse   with    stride,   bent    knee,   and    bent    knee 

reverse. 

.  5  Same  as  3. 

6  Wind  reverse  sideways  to  the  right, 

and  recover  to  fundamental  posi- 
tion. 

7  Return  wind  right  to  the  left  shoul- 

der, left  downward. 

8  Right  arm  to  position  at  the  side. 
9-16   Contrarily  the  same. 


1  Same  as  1  in  Part  10. 

2  Wind  sideways  right,  left  in  front 

with  stride  sideways. 

3  Wind  reverse  sideways  to  the  left 

with  bent  left  knee. 

4  Wind  reverse  sideways  to  the  right 

with  bent  knee  reverse. 


B 

The  same  as  A,  with  facings. 


PART    12. 

Wind  and  wind  reverse  to  different  direc- 
tions with  lunge  reverse  and  bent 
trunk. 

A 

1  Same  as  1  in  Part  11. 

2  Upward  (horizontally,  under  hold). 

3  Wind  sideways  right,  left  in  front  with  lunge 

sideways  right. 

4  Wind    reverse    downward    left,   right  behind 

(slanting  position)  with  lunge  reverse. 

5  Wind  reverse  upward  right,  left  in  front  over 

with  lunge  reverse  and  bent  trunk  sideways 
left  (Fig.  61). 


WAND  EXEECISES  97 

6  Return  wind  and  upward  (both)      9-16  Contrarily  the  same. 

(horizontal    position)    with    re- 
cover. B 

7  |  To  the  left  shoulder  and  right  arm  Same  as  A,  with  facings. 

8  /     to  position  at  the  side. 

By  taking  the  second  position  upward  instead  of  "  down 
in  front,"  the  exercises  of  the  several  series  here  given  will 
increase  in  value. 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  G YMNASTIC'S 


EXERCISES     WITH     CLUBS 

BY  FEUD.  W.  FROEHLICH 

Arranged  in  three  grades  of  four  lessons  each. 
Weight  of  clubs :   1  to  2  pounds. 

Armcircle,  a;  forearmcircle,  b;  haiidcircle,  c  (Fig.  62). 
Armcircle  sideways  right  (left;,  or  outward  (a)  (Fig.  63); 

also  inward  (b). 
Armcircle  forward  right  (left),  also  backward  (Fig.  64). 

ABBREVIATIONS. 

AC.   Armcircle.  DEC.  Double  handcircle. 

FAC.    Forearmcircle.  A  double  circle  means  that  both 

HC.   Handcircle.  arms  execute  an  AC,  FAC,  or  an  HC 

DAC.   Double  armcircle.  simultaneously. 
DFAC.   Double  forearmcircle. 

G  E  A  D  E     I. 

LESSON    1. 

Raise  the  clubs  to  position  (the  arms   bent  to  an  acute  angle,  the 
hands  width  of  shoulders  apart)  (Fig.  65) ;  Raise ! 

1   AC  right  sideways   (or  outward),  4   The  same  left, 

and  return  to  the  starting  posi-  o  AC  right  forward, 

tion  in  two  counts.     Begin !  1-2,  6   The  same  left. 

1-  Halt  !  7   AC  right  backward. 

8  The  same  left. 
EXPLANATION.  —  Extend    the    arm  . , 

9  AC    right    sideways    right    three 
upward,  describe  one  complete  times  and  retum  to  the  8tapt, 

circle  without  twisting  the  trunk,  jn  four  countg 

before  bending  the  arm  to  the  "  Ha]t  , 

starting  position. 

10  Execute   Exercise   2  as   in  Exer- 

2  The  same  left.  cise  9. 

3  AC    right   sideways    left    (or   in-       11   Execute   Exercise  3   as  in   Exer- 

ward)  in  2  counts.  cise  9. 


EXERCISES    WITH  CLUBS 


99 


\ 


\ 


\ 


Fig.  62  a. 


Fig.  62  b. 


Fig.  62  C. 


100 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 


Fig.  63a. 


Fig.  83  b. 


EXERCISES    WITH  CLUBS 


101 


12  Execute   Exercise  4  as   in  Exer-       14  Execute   Exercise   6  as   in  Exer- 

cise 9.  cise  9. 

13  Execute   Exercise   5   as  in  Exer-       15   Execute   Exercise   7  as   in  Exer- 

cise 9.  cise  9. 

16  Execute  Exercise  8  as  in  Exer- 
cise 9. 


Fig.  84. 


Fig.  65. 


LESSON    2. 
Clubs  to  position  ;  Raise  ! 


Exercises  1  and  2  of  Lesson  1  al- 
ternately in  4  counts. 

Exercises  3  and  4  of  Lesson  1  al- 
ternately in  4  counts. 

Exercises  5  and  6  of  Lesson  1  al- 
ternately in  4  counts. 

Exercises  7  and  8  of  Lesson  1  al- 
ternately in  4  counts. 

Exercises  1  and  4,  2  and  3,  5 
and  8,  and  6  and  7  of  Lesson  1 
alternately  in  4  counts. 

Exercises  9  to  16  of  Lesson  1  al- 
ternately in  8  counts. 


7  DAC  sideways  right  in  2  counts. 

8  The  same  left. 

9  DAC  right  sideways  right  and  left 

sideways  left  (or  outward)  in  2 
counts. 

10  DAC  right  sideways  left  and  left 

sideways  right  (or  inward)  in  2 
counts. 

11  AC  right  forward  and  left  back- 

ward simultaneously  in  2  counts. 

12  AC  left  forward  and  right  back- 

ward simultaneously  in  2  counts. 


102 


GERMAN-AMERICA  .V    t;  YM  V .  I STKJS 


LESSON    3. 
Clubs  to  position  ;  Raise  ! 


1  DAC  sideways  right    three  times 

and     return    to    position    in    4 
counts. 

2  The  same  left. 

3  DAC  outward  three  times  and  re- 

turn to  position  in  four  counts. 

4  DAC  inward  three  times  and  return 

to  position  in  four  counts. 

5  AC  right  forward   and   left   back- 

ward three  times  and  return  to 
position  in  4  counts. 

6  AC  left   forward   and   right   back- 

ward three  times   and  return  to 
position  in  4  counts. 

7  DAC  sideways  right  and  left  alter- 

nately in  4  counts. 

8  DAC   outward    and    inward    alter- 

nately in  4  counts. 

9  AC  right  forward   and   left   back- 

ward ;    left    forward    and    right 


backward;  alternately  in  4 
counts. 

10  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately  in  8 

counts. 

11  Exercises  3  and  4  alternately  in  8 

counts. 

12  Exercises  5  and  0  alternately  in  8 

counts. 

13  DFAC  sideways  right  in  2  counts. 
EXPLANATION.  —  The  centre  of  the 

circle  lies  at  the  elbows;  keep 
the  upper  arms  close  to  the  body. 

14  Same  sideways  left. 

15  Same  sideways  outward. 

16  Same  sideways  inward. 

17  Exercises  13,  14,  15,  and  16,  three 

times  and  return  to  position,  as 
in  the  above  exercises  ;  also  al- 
ternately in  8  counts,  or  alter- 
nating with  DAC. 


LESSON    4. 
Clubs  to  position ;  Raise ! 


1  AC   right  sideways   right,   or   out- 

ward   and    step     position    right 
sideways,  in  2  counts. 
EXPLANATION.  —  Place  the  foot  side- 
ways at  1,  close  the  heels  at  2. 

2  The  same  left. 

3  AC  right  sideways  left,  or  inward 

and  step  position  backward  right, 
in  2  counts. 

4  The  same  left. 

5  AC  right  forward  and  step  position 

right  forward  in  2  counts. 

6  The  same  left. 

7  AC  right  backward  and  step  posi- 

tion right  backward  in  2  counts. 

8  The  same  left. 

9  Exercises   1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  and 


8,  but  AC  three  times  and  return 
to  position;  the  step  position  at 
1,  and  close  heels  at  3  in  4 
counts. 

10  DAC  right  and  step  position  side- 

ways right,  bending  the  left 
knee,  in  2  counts  (Fig.  66). 

11  The  same  left. 

12  DAC  outward   and   step   position 

right  backward,  bending  the  left 
knee,  in  2  counts. 

13  DAC    inward    and    step    position 

left  backward,  bending  the  right 
knee,  in  2  counts. 

14  Exercises  1  and  2,  3  and  4,  7  and 

8,  10  and  11,  12  and  13,  alter- 
nately in  4  counts. 


EXERCISES    WITH  CLUBS 


103 


\      \ 


Fig.  66. 


GRADE    II. 

Clubs  to  position;  Raise! 

LESSON    1. 


1  DAC  sideways  right  three  times, 

and  step  position  sideways  right, 
bending  the  left  knee,  in  4 
counts. 

EXPLANATION.  —  Step    position    at 
1,  close  the  heels  at  3. 

2  The  same  left. 

3  DAC  outward  three  times,  and  step 

position  right  backward,  bending 
the  left  knee,  in  4  counts. 

4  DAC  inward  three  times,  and  step 

position  left  backward,  bending 
the  right  knee,  in  4  counts. 

5  Three-quarter    DAC    forward,    re- 

verse to  starting  position,  in  3 
counts. 


EXPLANATION.  —  Extend  the  arms 
upward,  and  swing  them  for- 
ward, downward,  and  backward, 
keeping  the  hands  width  of 
shoulders  apart,  the  arms  on  a 
level,  or  nearly  so,  with  the 
shoulders  at  1  ;  reverse  to  up- 
ward position  at  2  ;  bend  the 
arms  to  the  starting  position  at  3. 

6  Exercise  5,  with  bending  the  trunk 

forward  to  a  right  angle  at  1, 
straighten  the  trunk  at  2  (Fig. 
67). 

7  Three-quarters  DAC  sideways  right, 

twist  the  trunk  to  the  left,  re- 
verse to  starting  position,  in  3 


104 


GERMAN-AMERICAN   GYMNASTICS 


\ 


Fig.  67. 


Fig.  68. 


EXERCISES    WIT II   CLUBS 


105 


counts.  Also,  without  twisting 
the  trunk,  right  arm  bent  to  a 
right  angle. 

EXPLANATION.  —  Start  off  to  the 
right  at  1  ;  after  the  clubs  have 
passed  body  in  front,  twist  the 
trunk  to  the  left,  the  arms  in 
the  forward  position  (the  clubs 


and  arms  in  one  line)  at  2, 
swing  downward,  twist  the  trunk 
forward,  and  return  to  the  start- 
ing position. 

8  The  same  left. 

9  Three-quarters    DAC    inward,    re- 

verse to  the  starting  position,  in 
3  counts  (Fig.  68). 


Fig.  69. 


10  Three-quarters  DAC  outward,  re- 

verse to  the  starting  position  in 
3  counts  (Fig.  69). 

EXPLANATION.  —  The  arms  bent  at 
the  elbows  to  a  right  angle,  on 
a  level  with  the  shoulders,  the 
right  hand  over  the  left  elbow, 
the  left  hand  under  the  right 
elbow,  the  clubs  and  forearms 
in  one  line. 

11  Exercises  7  and  8,  and  while  the 

arms  are  in  the  forward  position 
at  the  left  side  at  2,  execute 
a  half  DHC  upward,  lowering 


the  clubs  on  the  forearms  (strik- 
ing them),  reverse  to  the  start- 
ing position,  in  4  counts  (Fig. 
70). 

12  The  same  left. 

13  Exercise  9,  and  while  the  arms 

are  in  a  sideways  position  at  2, 
execute  a  half  DHC  upward,  as 
in  Exercise  11;  reverse  to  posi- 
tion ;  in  four  counts. 

H  Execute  Exercise  10  similarly. 

15  Three-quarters  DAC  forward;  re- 
verse to  the  forward  position 
and  one-half  DHC  upward,  as 


106 


GEllMAN-AMElilCAN  G YMNASTICS 


in  Exercise  11;  at  4  bend  the 
arms  to  the  starting  position;  in 
4  counts.  The  same  with  bend- 
ing  the  trunk  forward,  as  in  Ex- 
ercise 6. 

16  Three-quarters  DAC  forward;  re- 
verse three-quarters  and  bend 
the  arms,  dropping  the  clubs  in 
the  rear  of  shoulders,  holding 
the  elbows  sideways  high;  at  4 


(Fig.  71)  return  to  the  starting 
position  ;  in  4  counts.  The 
same  with  bending  the  trunk 
forward,  as  in  Exercise  6. 

17  Exercise   16,  but  at  3  bend   the 

trunk   backward    or    bend    the 
knees. 

18  Execute  Exercises  15,  16,  and  17 

several  times   before  returning 
to  the  starting  position. 


Fig.  70. 


Fig.  71. 


LESSON    2. 


1  Three-quarters  DAC  right  ;  twist 
the  trunk  left;  outer  DHC  for- 
ward, and  three-quarters  DAC 
left,  back  to  the  starting  posi- 
tion, in  4  counts. 

EXPLANATION.  —  While  the  arms 
are  in  the  forward  position,  and 
the  trunk  twisted  left,  the  clubs 
describe  a  DHC  downward  for- 


ward in  a  vertical  plane  on  the 
outer  side  of  the  hands  (which 
should  be  width  of  shoulders, 
apart). 

2  The  same  opposite. 

3  Three-quarters  DAC  inward ;  DHC 

outward  in  the  rear;  three-quar- 
ters DAC  outward  to  the  start- 
ing position. 


EXERCISES    WITH  CLUBS 


107 


EXPLANATION.  —  The  arms  ex- 
tended sideways,  the  clubs  de- 
scribe DEC  outward  in  the  rear 
of  the  arms  (Fig.  72). 

4  Exercise   1,  but   inner   DHC   for- 

ward.   The  same  opposite;  also 
right  outer  and  left  inner  HC. 

5  Exercise  3,  but  DHC  outward  in 

front. 

6  Exercise   1,  but  DHC  backward. 

The  same  opposite. 


7  Exercise  3,  but  DHC  inward   in 

the  rear.  The  same  DHC  in- 
ward in  front. 

8  Exercise   4,  but   DHC   backward. 

Same  opposite. 

9  Three-quarters  DAC  forward,  re- 

verse to  forward  position ;  outer 
DHC  forward  at  three,  then  only 
one-half  DAC  forward,  and  pro- 
ceed as  before,  in  3  counts. 


Fig.  72. 


EXPLANATION. — This  exercise  should 
be  done  several  times,  that  is, 
continued  before  returning  to 
position. 

10  Exercise  9,  but  DHC  backward. 

11  Exercise  9,  but  inner  DHC  for- 

ward. 

12  Exercise  9,  but  inner  DHC  back- 

ward. 

13  Three-quarters  DAC  forward  at  1; 

reverse  to  forward  position  at  2, 
one-half  DHC  backward,  lower- 
ing the  clubs  on  the  forearms  at 
3;  outer  one  and  one-half  DHC 
forward  downward  at  4;  then 


repeat  several  times  before  re- 
turning to  position,  in  4  counts. 

14  Exercise   13,  but  inner  one   and 

one-half  DHC  forward. 

15  Exercises  13  and  14,  but  bend  the 

trunk  forward  at  1,  straighten 
at  2. 

16  Exercise  16  of  Lesson  1  of  this 

grade;  but  instead  of  returning 
to  position  at  4,  execute  an  outer 
DHC,  forward  arms  bent;  repeat 
in  4  counts. 

17  Exercise  1(5  of  this  Lesson,  but  at 

3  bend  the  trunk  backward,  or 
bend  the  knees  at  3. 


108 


G  Eli  MA  N-A  NEK  1C  A  N  G  YMNA  S  TICS 


LESSON    0. 


1  Exercise  1  of  Lesson  2  of  this  Grade, 

but  at  1  lunge  left  sideways;  at 
3  close  the  heels. 

2  Same  opposite. 

3  Exercise  3  of  Lesson  2;  but  at  1 

lunge  left  backward. 

4  Exercises  4,  5,  6,  7,  and  8  of  Lesson 

2  can  be  done  similarly  to  Exer- 
cises 1,  2,  and  3  of  this  lesson. 

5  Exercise  13  of  Lesson  2;  but  at  1 

lunge  left  forward,  at  3  close  the 
heels.     Same  right. 

6  Exercise   15;   but  at   1   lunge  left 

forward,   at    3   close   the   heels. 
Same  right. 

7  Exercise   1   of    this   Lesson;   at   2 

kneel  right,  at  the  same  time  turn 


Fig.  73. 


feet  left,  so  that  the  body  ha- 
ecuted  a  quarter  turn  left.     At  3 
straighten  the  right  knee;    at  4 
close  the  heels  and    face  front 
(Fig.  73). 

8  The  same  opposite. 

9  Exercise  3  of  this  Lesson ;  but  at 

1  step  left  forward,  at  2  kneel 
right;  at  3  straighten  the  right 
knee ;  at  4  close  the  heels.  Same 
right. 

10  Exercises  4,  5,  6,  7,  and  8  can  be 

done  similarly  to  Exercises  7.  8, 
and  9  of  this  Lesson. 

11  Three-quarters    DAC    right,    one 

and  three-quarters  DAC  left  to 
the  starting  position,  in  4  counts. 

12  Same  opposite. 

13  Three-quarters  DAC  outward,  one 

and  three-quarters  DAC  inward 
to  starting  position,  in  4  counts. 

14  Three-quarters  DAC  inward,  one 

and  three-quarters  DAC  outward 
to  starting  position,  in  4  counts. 

15  Exercise  11,  with  a  lunge  left  side- 

ways at  1 ;  close  the  heels  at  3. 
Same  opposite. 

16  Exercise  13,  with  lunge  left  back- 

ward or  right. 

17  Exercise    14,   with    a    lunge  left 

backward  or  right. 


LESSON    4. 


AC  right  sideways  right  (or  out- 
ward); HC  sideways  right  (or 
outward)  in  rear  of  the  right 
shoulder,  alternately  (Fig.  74)  in 
2  counts  continued,  the  arm  bent 
during  HC. 

The  same  left. 

AC  right  forward  ;  outer  HC  for- 
ward alternately  in  2  counts,  the 
arm  bent  during  HC. 


4  The  same  left. 

5  AC  right  sideways  left  (or  inward ) ; 

HC  sideways  left  or  inward  in 
rear  of  right  shoulder  alternately, 
the  arm  bent  during  HC. 

6  The  same  left.     Exercises  1,  2,  3, 

4,  5,  6,  as  continued  movements, 
or  return  to  starting  position  at  3. 

7  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately  in  6 

counts. 


EXERCISES    WITH  CLUBS 


109 


X"    "-x 


Fij.  74. 


EXPLANATION.  —  Return  to  position 
after  each  HC. 

8  Exercises  3  and  4  alternately  in  4 

counts. 

9  Exercises  5  and  6  alternately  in  6 

counts. 

10  Exercises  1  and  6  alternately  in  6 

counts.     Same  opposite. 

11  AC  right  outward;  HC  right  out- 

ward in  the  rear  of  the  right 
shoulder;  AC  right  outward  and 
return  to  position,  in  4  counts. 

12  Same  as   11   with   left  outward; 

right  inward;  left  inward,  right 
forward  ;  left  forward. 

13  Combine  the  Exercises  11  and  12 

alternately  in  8  counts. 

14  Five-quarters  DAC  sideways  right ; 

twist  the  trunk  right,  outer  DEC 
forward  alternately,  in  2  counts. 


EXPLANATION.  —  Twist    the    trunk 

during  the  fifth  quarter  of  the 

DAC. 
Repeat  several  times  before  returning 

to  position. 
After  the  first  DEC,  the  DAC  is  only 

four  quarters. 

15  The  same  left. 

16  Exercise  14,  but  inner  DEC  for- 

ward. 

17  The  same  left. 

18  Three     quarters    DAC    sideways 

right,  twist  the  trunk  left;  outer 
DEC  upward  (or  backward); 
twist  the  trunk  forward;  alter- 
nately in  2  counts.  Repeat. 
EXPLANATION.  —  After  the  DEC  the 
DAC  is  four  quarters. 

19  The  same  opposite. 


110 


GERMAN-AMERICAN   0 YMNAST1CS 


GRADE   III. 


LESSON    1. 


1  DAC  sideways  right;   DHC  side- 

ways right  in  rear  of  the  shoul- 
ders ;  alternately  in  4  counts. 
Continued  (without  returning  to 
position  each  time). 

2  The  same  left. 

3  DAC   outward;   DHC   outward   in 

rear  of  the  shoulders;  alternately 
in  4  counts. 

4  DAC  inward ;  DHC  inward  in  rear 

of  the  shoulders;  alternately  in 
4  counts. 

5  DAC   sideways   right;   DHC   side- 

ways right  in  the  rear  of  the 
shoulders  ;  DAC  sideways  right 
and  return  to  position ;  same  left ; 
alternately  in  8  counts. 
0  DAC  outward;  DHC  outward  in 
the  rear  of  the  shoulders  ;  DAC 
outward  and  return  to  position; 
same  inward  ;  alternately  in  8 
counts. 

7  One-half     DAC     sideways     right, 

DHC  sideways  right  in  front  the 
arms  extended  downward  ;  one 
half  DAC  sideways  right  ;  con- 
tinued alternately  in  2  counts, 
the  arms  extended  (Fig.  75). 

8  The  same  opposite. 

9  The  same  outward. 
10  The  same  inward. 


1 1  AC  right  outward  ;  HC  right  out- 

ward in  the  rear,  the  arm  ex- 
tended downward  ;  continued 
alternately  in  2  counts. 
EXPLANATION.  —  While  executing 
the  HC,  bend  the  wrist  and  el- 
bow slightly,  allowing  the  hand 
to  touch  the  body,  and  move  it 
forward  over  the  hip  (Fig.  76). 

12  The  same    left.     Also  with    the 

anus  upward. 

13  Exercise  11  inward. 
EXPLANATION.  — While    doing   the 

HC,  the  back  of  the  hand  against 
the  body,  moving  it  backward. 

14  The  same  left. 

15  DAC  sideways   right ;   DHC  side- 

ways right  in  rear,  the  arms 
downward.  Continued  alter- 
nately in  2  counts. 

16  The  same  left. 

17  The  same  outward. 

18  The  same  inward. 

19  DAC   sideways   right  ;  DHC  side- 

ways right  in  front  of  the  shoul- 
ders, the  arms  bent. 
Continued  alternately  in  2  counts. 
EXPLANATION.  —  While    doing   the 
HC,  the  knob  of  the  club  should 
be  between  the  first  and  second 
fingers  and  thumb. 


LESSON  2. 


DAC  sideways  right  ;  DHC  side- 
ways right  in  rear,  leftover  (the 
left  arm  bent,  the  hand  over  the 
right  shoulder,  the  arm  in  front 
of  the  face)  (Fig.  77).  Contin- 
ued alternately  in  2  counts. 

The  same  left. 


DAC  sideways  right  ;  DHC  side- 
ways right  in  the  rear,  the  left 
under  (the  right  in  the  rear  of 
the  right  shoulder,  the  left  hand 
under  the  right  arm).  Continue 
alternately  in  2  counts. 

The  same  left. 


EXERCISES    WITH  CLUBS 


111 


Fig.  76. 


112 


GERMAN-AMERICAN   G YMNAST1CS 


Fig.  77. 


5  DAC  sideways  right ;  DHC  side- 

ways right  in  the  rear  of  the 
shoulders  at  2;  DHC  sideways 
right  as  in  Exercise  1  at  3. 
Continue  in  3  counts. 

6  The  same  left. 

7  Exercise  5,  but  at  2  swing  the 

third  movement,  and  at  3  the 
DHC  of  the  third  Exercise.  Con- 
tinue in  3  counts. 

8  The  same  left. 

9  Exercise    5,    and    at    4    DHC   of 

Exercise  3.  Continue  in  4 
counts. 

10  The  same  left. 

11  DAC   sideways   right  at  1  ;   DHC 

sideways  right  in  rear  of  the 
shoulders  at  2  ;  twist  the  trunk 
right  and  outer  DHC  forward  at 
3.  Continue  in  3  counts. 

12  The  same  left. 


13  Exercise   11,  at  4  add  the  inner 

DHC  forward. 

14  The  same  left. 

15  DAC  outward  at  1  ;  DHC  outward 

in  the  rear  of  the  shoulders 
at  2  ;  extend  the  arms  side- 
ways, and  DHC  outward  in  front 
at  3  ;  bend  arms  and  DHC  out- 
ward in  the  rear  of  the  shoulder 
at  4. 

16  The  same  inward,  without  extend- 

ing the  arms  for  the  second 
DHC. 

17  Most  of  the  DHC  of  Exercises  1- 

14  can  also  be  done  backward 
at  the  opposite  side,  then  twist 
the  trunk  forward  and  DHC  in 
the  rear  of  the  shoulders. 
The  overswings  in  this  lesson  can 
be  learned  easily  by  exercising 
with  one  arm  at  a  time. 


EXEECISES    WITH  CLUBS 


113 


Fig.  78. 


LESSON    3. 


1  HC  right  outward  in  the  rear  of 

the    right    shoulder  at   1  ;    AC 
outward  at  2. 

AC  left  outward  at  1  ;  HC  left 
outward  in  the  rear  of  the 
shoulder  at  2,  both  movements 
simultaneously  continued  (Fig. 
78). 

2  HC  right  inward  in  the  rear  of  the 

right    shoulder   at    1  ;    AC    in- 
ward at  2. 

AC  left  inward  at  1  ;  IIC  left 
inward  in  the  rear  of  the  left 
shoulder  at  2,  simultaneously 
continued. 

3  HC  right  outward  in  the  rear  of 

the    right  shoulder    at    1  ;  AC 
outward  at  2. 


AC  left  inward,  or  to  the  right  at 
1  ;  HC  left  inward  in  the  rear 
at  2  simultaneously. 

4  The  same  as  3  left. 

5  HC  right  forward  at  1  ;  AC  for- 

ward at  2. 

AC  left  forward  at  1  ;  HC  left 
forward  at  2  simultaneously 
(Fig.  79).  Same  backward. 

6  DAC  sideways  right ;  DHC  side- 

ways right  in  the  rear  of  the 
shoulders  ;  three-quarters  DAC 
sideways  right  and  double  hori- 
zontal HC  sideways  right.  Con- 
tinue in  4  counts. 

EXPLANATION.  —  Both  arms  raised 
sideways  left  (the  left  arm  ex- 
tended, the  right  arm  bent  to  a 


114 


GERM  AN- AMERICAN  G  YMNAST1CS 


Fig.  79. 


right  angle),  both  clubs  describe 
a  HC  to  the  right  in  a  horizontal 
plane  over  the  hands,  at  the 
same  time  both  arms  move  side- 
ways right,  the  elbows  bent 
slightly. 

7  The  same  opposite. 

8  The  same  outward. 

9  The  same  inward. 

Exercises  6,  7,  8,  and  9  should  be 
taken  with  one  arm  at  a  time, 
until  the  exercise  has  been  thor- 
oughly learned. 

10  Three-quarters  DAC  sideways 
right  ;  then  reverse  one  and 
three-quarters  DAC  left  ;  DEC 
sideways  left  in  the  rear  of  the 
shoulders,  then  the  same  to  the 
opposite  side.  Continued  alter- 
nately in  8  counts. 


11  Three-quarters    DAC    outward; 

then  reverse  one  and  three-quar- 
ters DAC  inward  ;  DHC  inward 
in  the  rear  of  the  shoulders, 
then  the  same  inward.  Con- 
tinued alternately  in  8  counts. 

12  Three  -  quarters    DAC    outward  ; 

then  reverse  one  and  three-quar- 
ters DAC  inward  ;  DHC  inward 
in  the  rear  of  the  shoulders  ; 
three-quarters  DAC  inward  ;  one 
and  three-quarters  DAC  out- 
ward ;  DHC  outward  in  the  rear 
of  the  shoulders.  Continued  al- 
ternately in  8  counts. 

13  Exercises  10  and  11  can  also  be 

done  with  a  double  horizontal 
HC  instead  of  DHC  in  the  rear 
of  the  shoulders,  as  in  the  Ex- 
ercises 6,  7,  8,  and  9. 


EXERCISES    WITH  CLUBS 


115 


14  Exercise    6,    with   a   lunge   right 

sideways  at  1,  close  the  heels 
at  3.  Same  opposite. 

15  Exercise  8  and  9  with  a  lunge  left 

or  right  backward. 

16  Exercise  10,  with  a  lunge  left  side- 

ways at  1,  close  the  heels  at 
3,  lunge  right  sideways  .at  5, 
close  the  heels  at  7. 

17  Exercise   11,  with  a   lunge   right 

backward  at  1,  close  the  heels 
at  3,  lunge  left  backward  at  5, 
close  the  heel  sat  7. 

18  Lunge  sideways  right,  straighten 

the  right  arm  sideways  obliquely 
upward,  AC  left  inward  and  HC 
inward  in  the  rear  of  the  left 


shoulder  at  1  and  2,  at  3  close 
the  heels  and  DAC  sideways 
right  to  starting  position  or  con- 
tinue in  2  counts. 

19  The  same  left. 

20  DAC   sideways    right,   DHC   side- 

wrays  right  in  the  rear  of  the 
shoulders  and  one  step  sideways 
right  at  1  and  2  ;  DAC  sideways 
right,  and  return  to  position  and 
one  step  sideways  right  at  3 
and  4. 

21  Same  left. 

Many  other  exercises  can  be  done 
while  marching  forward,  side- 
ways, and  backward. 


LESSON    4. 


1  AC  left  inward  ;    follow  immedi- 

ately with  AC  right  outward  ; 
HC  left  inward  in  the  rear  of 
the  left  shoulder,  followed  by  a 
HC  right  outward  in  the  rear  of 
the  right  shoulder.  Continue  in 
2  counts  ;  AC  and  HC  wheel  right 
sideways. 

EXPLANATION.  —  Count    1    for    AC 
and  2  for  HC. 

2  The  same  left. 

3  Exercise  1,  but  HC  left  in  the  rear 

of  the  right  shoulder,  the  arm  in 
front  of  the  face,  wheel  right 
with  the  left  over. 

4  The  same  left. 

5  AC  right  forward  ;  follow  immedi- 

ately with  the  left  forward  ;  outer 
HC  right  forward,  followed  with 
outer  HC  left  forward  in  2  counts. 

6  DAC  sideways  right  at  1,  twist  the 

trunk  right  and  outer  DHC  for- 
ward at  2  ;  inner  DHC  forward 
at  3,  outer  DHC  at  4.  Continue 
in  4  counts. 


7  The  same  left. 

8  Exercise  1,  after  HC  in  the  rear, 

twist  the  trunk  right  and  exe- 
cute an  outer  following  HC  right 
and  left  forward  twice  at  3  and 
4,  HC  wheel.  Continue  in  4 
counts. 

9  The  same  left. 

10  Exercise  3,  and  add  the  last  part 

of  the  eighth  Exercise  in  4 
counts. 

11  The  same  left. 

12  Exercise  1,  after  HC  in  the  rear 

execute  the  same  in  front  of  the 
shoulders  at  3,  and  rear  of  the 
shoulders  again  at  4,  in  4  counts. 

13  The  same  left. 

14  Wheel  right  sideways  as  in  Exer- 

cise 1  at  1  and  2 ;  twist  the  trunk 
right  and  outer  following  HC 
right  and  left  forward  at  3,  in- 
ner following  HC  right  and  left 
at  4.  Continue. 

15  The  same  left. 

16  The  same  outward. 


11G  GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 

17  Exercise  1  at  1  and  2  ;  following       19  All   the   following    HC   given   in 

three  quarters  AC  left  and  right  this  lesson  at  the  right  side,  the 

sideways  right  at  3,  following  trunk  twisted  right,  can  also  be 

horizontal    HC    right  and    left  done  backward  at  the  left  side, 

sideways  right  at  4.     Continue.  the  trunk  twisted  left. 

18  The  same  left. 

Many  other  and  more  difficult  exercises  may  be  developed 
from  the  foregoing,  also  combinations  of  movements  having 
4,  6,  8,  12,  and  16  counts. 


DUMB-BELL   EXERCISES  117 


DUMB-BELL    EXERCISES 

BY    HENRY    SUDER 

THE  dumb-bell  is  an  apparatus  consisting  of  a  short  handle 
with  two  balls.  It  is  turned  of  wood,  about  eleven  inches 
long,  the  bell  three  inches  in  diameter,  the  handle  four  inches 
long,  five-eighths  inches  thick,  and  its  average  weight  is  from 
one  to  two  pounds. 

All  that  has  been  said  about  calisthenics  must  be  repeated 
here,  as  nearly  all  free  gymnastic  exercises  can  be  practised 
with  the  dumb-bells.  In  order  not  to  repeat  many  exercises 
given  under  the  title  Free  Gymnastics,  the  following  dumb- 
bell exercises  will  consist  of  groups  of  movements  in  2,  4, 

or  more  counts. 

GROUP   I. 

PART    1. 

1  Raise  the  arms  forward.  9   Raise    the    arms    sideways,    and 

Begin!  1-2  bend  the  knees. 

2  Bend  the  knees.  Begin!  1-2      10  Raise  the  arms  sideways  upward. 

3  Raise  the  arms  forward,  and  bend      11    Rise  on  the  toes. 

the  knees.                   Begin!  1-2  12  Raise  the  arms  sideways  upward, 

4  Raise  the  arms  upward.  and  rise  on  the  toes. 

5  Rise  on  the  toes.  REMARKS.  —  In  raising  forward  and 

6  Raise  the  arms  upward,  and  rise  upward,  keep  the  knuckles  out- 

on  the  toes.  ward ;  in  raising  sideways,  the 

7  Raise  the  arms  sideways.  knuckles  upward. 

8  Bend  the  knees. 

PART    2. 
The  hands  on  the  shoulders. 

1   Bend    the    trunk    forward,    and        2  Bend  the  trunk  backward,  and 
straighten  the  arms  downward.  straighten  the  arms  upward. 

Begin!  1-2  Begin  1  1-2 


us 


GEBMAN-AMEltlCAN  GYMNASTICS 


3  Turn  the  trunk  to  the  right,  and 

straighten     the    arms    forward 
(Fig.  80). 

4  Turn  the  trunk  to  the  left,  and 

straighten  the  arms  forward. 

Begin!  1-2 

5  Bend  the  trunk  sideways  to  the 

right,  and  straighten  the   arms 
sideways.  Begin!  1-2 

6  Bend  the  trunk  sideways  to  the 

left,   and    straighten   the   arms 
sideways.  Begin!  1-2 


7  Turn  the  trunk  to  the  right,  bend 

forward,  and  straighten  tin-  aims 
backward. 

8  Turn  the  trunk  to  the  left,  bend 

forward,  and  straighten  the  anus 
backward. 

9  Turn  the  trunk  to  the  right,  bend 

backward,    and    straighten    the 
arms  sideways  (Fig.  81). 
10  Turn  the  trunk  to  the  left,  bend 
backward,    and    straighten   the 
arms  sideways. 


Fig.  80. 


Fig.  81. 


G  R  0  U  P     II. 


PART    1. 


1    a.  Raise  the  right  arm  forward  and 

place  the  right  leg  forward. 
6.  Twist  the  right  arm  (knuckles 
upward)  and  raise  and  lower 
the  right  leg  forward. 

c.  Twist  the  right  arm  (knuckles 

outward)  and  raise  and  lower 
the  right  leg  forward. 

d.  Lower  the  arm   and  place  the 

leg  backward  into  position. 
Begin  !  1-4 


The  same  exercise  left. 
Exercises  1  and  2  alternately. 
With  both  arms  and  rise  on  the 
toes. 

As  Exercise  1,  but  raise  the  arms 
sideways  and  place  the  leg 
sideways. 

~\  As  Exercises  1-4,  but  raise  the 
>•  arms  upward  and  place  the  leg 
)  backward. 


DUMB-BELL   EXERCISES 


119 


PART    2. 


1  a.  Raise    the    right    arm    forward 

and  place   the   right   leg  for- 
ward. 

6.  Move  the  right  arm  sideways 
and  place  the  right  leg  side- 
ways. 

c.  Move  the  right  arm  forward  and 

place  the  right  leg  forward. 

d.  Lower  the   arm   and  place  the 

leg  back  into  position. 

2  The  same  exercise  left.  Begin!  1-4 


3  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately. 

4  With     both      arms      and      bent 

knees. 

5  fAs  Exercises  1-4,  but  raise  the 

6  J      arms  forward  and  upward  and 
'   1     place  the  leg  forward  and  back- 

v     ward. 

9  fAs  Exercises  1-4,  but  raise  the 
10  J  arms  sideways  and  upward  and 
11 1  place  the  leg  sideways  and 

I    cross  forward. 


GROUP     III. 


PART    1. 


1  Swing  the  right  arm  forward  and 

place  the  right  leg  forward.  1-8 
At  the  eighth  count,  bend  both 
arms  to  thrust,  and  thrust  the 
arms  forward  and  rise  on  the 
toes.  9-16 

At  the  sixteenth  count  lower  the 
arms,  and  return  the  leg  into  po- 
sition. 1-16 

2  As  Exercise  1,  but  begin  with  the 

left  arm. 

PART    2. 


As  Exercise  1-2,  but  swing  and 
thrust  the  arm  or  arms  upward. 

As  Exercise  1-2,  but  swing  and 
thrust  the  arm  or  the  arms  side- 
ways. 

r  As  Exercise  1-2,  but  swing  the  arm 
or     arms     side- 
ways     upward, 
and    thrust  up- 
ward. 


1  Swing  both  arms  forward.  1-8 
At  the  eighth  count  place  the  hands  on  the  shoulders, 

straighten  the  arms  downward,  and  bend  the  trunk 

forward.  9-16 

At  the  sixteenth  count  straighten  the  trunk.        1-16 

2  As  Exercise    1,  but   swing  and    straighten  the  arms 

upward,  and  bend  the  trunk  backward  (Fig.  82). 

3  As  Exercise  1,  but  swing  and  straighten  the  arms  side- 

ways, and  bend  the  trunk  sideways  right. 

4  As  Exercise  3,  but  bend  the  trunk  to  the  left. 

5  As  Exercise  1,  but  swing  the  arms  sideways  upward, 

and  straighten  the  arms  upward,  and  turn  the  trunk 
to  the  right. 

6  As  Exercise  5,  but  turn  the  trunk  to  the  left. 


Fig.  82. 


120 


< ; HUM . i  .v-- 1  MKIIICA  Ar    a  y.\i  \ .  i  >  TH  s 


GROUP     IV 

PART    1. 


1  o.  Bend  the  knees,  and  place  the 
dumb-bells  on  the  floor  inside 
of  the  knees. 

6.  Straighten   the   right  leg  back- 
ward (Fig.  83). 
c.  Place  the  leg  back  into  position. 


d.  Straighten  the  knees.  Begin!  1-4 

2  As  Exercise  1,  but  straighten  the 

left  leg. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  but  straighten  both 

legs    backward    (front    leaning 
rest).     (Fig.  84.) 


Fig.  83. 

4  As  Exercise  1,  but  straighten  the 

right  leg  backward,  and  raise  the 
left  arm  forward. 

5  As  Exercise  4,   but    the   left    leg 

backward  and  the  right  arm  for- 
ward. 

6  As  Exercise   3,  but    straddle   the 

legs. 


Fig.  84. 

7  As  Exercise  1,  but  straighten  the 

right  leg  forward. 

8  As  Exercise  1,  but  straighten  the 

left  leg  forward. 

9  As     Exercise     3,    but     place    the 

dumbbells  outside  of  knees  and 
straighten  both  legs  forward  (rear 
leaning  rest). 


PART    2. 
1 


Fig.  85. 


a.  Bend  the  knees,  and  place  the 

dumb-bells  on  the  floor  inside 
of  the  knees. 

b.  Straighten  the  left  leg  sideways 

(Fig.  85). 

c.  Place  the  leg  back  into  position. 

d.  Straighten  knees.       Begin  !  1-4 

2  As  Exercise  1,  but  straighten  the 

right  leg. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  but  straighten  the 

left  leg  and  raise  the  left  arm 
sideways. 


DUMB-BELL   EXERCISES 


121 


4  As  Exercise  1,  but  straighten  the 

right  leg  and  raise  the  right  arm 
sideways. 

5  As  Exercise  1,  but  straighten  the 

left  leg  sideways  and  raise  the 
left  arm  upward. 

6  As  Exercise  1,  but  straighten  the 

right  leg  sideways  and  raise  the 
right  arm  upward. 


7  As  Exercise  1,  but  place  the  dumb- 

bells outside  of  the  knees,  and 
straighten  the  left  leg  forward, 
and  raise  the  left  arm  forward. 

8  As  Exercise  7,  but  straighten  the 

right  leg  forward  and  raise  the 
right  arm  forward. 

9  As  Exercise  7,  but  straighten  both 

legs  forward  (rear  leaning-rest). 


Fig.  86. 


Fig.  87. 


GROUP   V. 

PART    1. 
Arms  to  thrust.      Cross  straddle  position  (right  leg  forward). 


1  Thrust  the  arms  forward  and  bend 

the  right  knee.  Begin  !  1-2 

2  Thrust  the  arms  forward  and  bend 

the  left  knee. 

3  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately.  9 

4  Thrust    the    arms    sideways    and      10 

bend  the  right  knee. 

5  Thrust    the    arms   sideways    and      11 

bend  the  left  knee. 

6  Exercises  4  and  5  alternately.  12 


7  Thrust  the  arms  upward  and  bend 

the  right  knee  (Fig.  86). 

8  Thrust  the  arms  upward  and  bend 

the  left  knee. 

Exercises  7  and  8  alternately. 
Thrust  the   arms  backward  and 

bend  the  right  knee. 
Thrust  the  arms  backward  and 

bend  the  left  knee. 
Exercises  10  and  11  alternately. 


1-2-2 


C  Eli  MA  N-.  1  M  /•;/;/  r .  1  .V    M '  .W  .V .  I  >  /  / '   S 


PART    2. 
Sidestraddle  position. 


1  Thrust  the  arms  downward,  bend 

the  trunk  forward,  and  bend  the 
right  knee.  Begin  !  1-2 

2  Thrust  the  arms  downward,  bend 

the  trunk  forward,  and  bend  the 
left  knee. 

3  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately. 

4  Thrust  the    arms   sideways,   bend 

the  trunk  to  the  right,  and  bend 
the  right  knee  (Fig.  87). 

5  Thrust   the    arms  sideways,   bend 

the  trunk  to  the  left,  and  bend 

the  left  knee. 

G   Exercises  4  and  5  alternately. 
7   Thrust   the  arms   backward,  turn 


to  the  right,  and  bend  the 
knee. 

8  Thrust  the  arms  backward,  tiim 

to  the  left,  and  bend  the  left 
knee. 

9  Exercises  7  and  8  alternately. 

10  Thrust  the  arms  upward,  turn  left 

and  bend  the  trunk  backward  to 
the  right,  and  bond  the  right 
knee. 

11  Thrust    the    arms   upward,   turn 

right  and  bend  the  trunk  back- 
ward to  the  left,  and  bend  the 
left  knee. 

12  Exercises  10  and  11  alternately. 


GKOUP  VI. 

PART    1. 
Counter  exercises.      See  Calisthenics. 


1  Lunge  forward  obliquely  outward 

and  raise  the  outer  arm  forward 
obliquely  upward,  inner  hand  at 
the  outer  shoulder  (elbow  level 
with  the  shoulder).  Begin  !  1-2 

2  The  same  exercise  inward. 

3  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately. 

4  Lunge  forward  obliquely,  outward 

and  inward  alternately,  and 
bend  the  trunk  forward  in  the 
same  direction,  and  place  the 
hands  on  the  hips. 

5  As  Exercise  1,  but  sideways  out- 

ward. 


6  The  same  exercise  inward. 

7  Exercises  5  and  (5  alternately. 

8  As  Exercise  4,  but  lunge  sideways, 

outward  ami  inward  alternately, 
and  bend  the  trunk  sideways. 

9  As  Exercise  1,  but  backward  out- 

ward and  raise  the  outer  arm 
backward  obliquely  upward. 

10  The  same  exercise  inward. 

11  Exercises  9  and  10  alternately. 

12  As  Exercise  4,  but  lunge  backward 

obliquely,  outward  and  inward 
alternately,  and  bend  the  trunk 
backward. 


PART    2. 


1  Lunge   forward  obliquely  outward 

and    raise    the    arms     forward 
obliquely  upward.       Begin  !  1-2 

2  The  same  exercise  inward. 

3  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately. 


4  Lunge  forward  obliquely,  outward 
and  inward  alternately,  and  bend 
the  trunk  sideways,  outward  and 
inward  alternately,  and  place 
the  hands  on  the  shoulders. 


D  UMB-BELL   EXEB  CISES 


As  Exercise  1,  but  sideways  out- 
ward and  raise  both  arms  up- 
ward obliquely  outward. 

The  same  exercise  inward. 

Exercises  5  and  6  alternately. 

As  Exercise  4,  but  lunge  sideways, 
outward  and  inward  alternately, 
and  bend  the  trunk  forward. 


9  As  Exercise  1,  but  lunge  backward 
obliquely,  the  arms  backward 
obliquely. 

10  The  same  exercise  inward. 

11  Exercises  9  and  10  alternately. 

12  As  Exercise  4,  but  lunge  backward 

and  bend  the  trunk  backward. 


G  K  0  U  P     VII. 


PART    1. 


1  a.  Raise   the   arms   to   thrust   and 

place  the  right  leg  forward. 

b.  Thrust  the  arms  forward,  bend 

the  right  knee,  and  raise  the 
left  leg  backward  (Fig.  88). 

c.  Bend      the     arms      to     thrust, 

straighten  the  knee  and  place 
the  left  leg  back  into  position. 

d.  Lower  the  arms  and  place  the 

right  leg  back  into  position. 

Begin  !  1-4 

2  The  same  exercise  left. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  but  thrust  sideways. 

4  The  same  as  3,  but  left  leg  for- 

ward. 

5  As   Exercise   1,  but  the  right  leg 

backward,    thrust    upward,   and 
raise  the  left  leg  forward. 

6  As  Exercise  5,  but  left  leg  back- 

ward. 


As  Exercise  1,  but  thrust  the  arms 
sideways  left  and  cross  the  left 
leg  backward. 


As  Exercise  7,  but  thrust  the  arms 
sideways  right  and  cross  the 
right  leg  backward. 


PART    2. 


1  a.  Raise  the  arms  to  thrust  and 
place  the  right  leg  forward. 

6.  Thrust  the  arms  downward, 
bend  the  right  knee,  bend  the 
trunk  forward,  and  raise  the 
left  leg  backward. 

c.  Bend  the  arms  to  thrust, 
straighten  the  knee  and  trunk, 
and  lower  the  left  leer. 


d.  Lower  the  arms  and  place  the 
leg  back  into  position. 

2  The  same  exercise  left. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  but  place,   thrust, 

and  bend  sideways  right. 

4  As  Exercise  3,  but  place,   thrust, 

and  bend  sideways  left. 
6  As  Exercise  1,  but  place  the  right 
leg  backward,  thrust  the  arms  up- 


124 


<;r.ll.M.\  .\-AMKIlH  'A  \    <;  VM. \AST1C8 


ward,  bend  backward,  and  raise 
the  left  leg  forward. 

6  As  Exercise  5,  but  place  the  left 

leg  backward. 

7  As  Exercise  1,  but  thrust  the  arms 


sideways  left,  cross  the  left  leg 
backward,  and  turn  the  trunk  to 
the  left. 

As  Exercise   7,  but  thrust,    cross, 
and  turn  the  trunk  to  the  right. 


GROUP     VIII. 


PART    1. 


a.  Raise   the  arms  to  thrust  and 

bend  the  knees. 

b.  Straighten  the  knees,  and  place 

the  right  leg  forward,  and  raise 
the  arms  to  cut. 

c.  Lunge   forward    right    and   cut 

with  the  arms  forward. 

d.  Lower  the  arms  and  place  the 

leg  back  into  position. 

Berrin!  1-4 


2  The  same  exercise  left. 

3  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately. 

4  As  Exercise  1,  but  place,  and  lunge, 

sideways  right  and  cut  sideways. 

5  As  Exercise  4,  but  left. 

6  Exercises  4  and  5  alternately. 

7  As  Exercise  1,  but  place,  lunge  right 

and  cut  backward. 

8  As  Exercise  7,  but  left. 

9  Exercises  7  and  8  alternately. 


PART    2. 


1  a.  Raise   the   arms   to   thrust   and 

bend  the  knees. 

b.  Lunge  forward   right  and  raise 

the  arms  to  cut. 

c.  Bend  the  trunk  forward  and  cut 

the  arms  downward. 

d.  Return  to  position.     Begin!  1-4 

2  The  same  exercise  left. 

3  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately. 


4  As  Exercise  1,  but  sideways  right 

and  cut  sideways. 

5  As  Exercise  4,  but  left. 

6  Exercises  4  and  5  alternately. 

7  As  Exercise  1,  but  backward  right,. 

and  bend  the  trunk,  and  cut  the 
arms  backward. 

8  As  Exercises  7,  but  left. 

9  Exercises  7  and  8  alternately. 


GROUP   IX. 


PART    1. 


1   a.  Lunge  forward  right  and  place 
the  hands  on  the  hips. 

b.  One  quarter  turn   left    (on  the 

heels),  bend  the  left  knee, 
and  place  the  hands  on  the 
shoulders. 

c.  One  quarter  turn  right  (on  the 

heels),  bend  the  right  knee, 
and  place  the  hands  on  the 
hips. 


d.  Lower  the  arms  and  place  the 
leg  back  into  position. 

Begin!  1-4 

2  As  Exercise  1,  but  lunge  left  and 

one  quarter  turn  right. 

3  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately. 

4  As  Exercise  1,  but  straighten  the 

arms  forward. 

5  As  Exercise  2,  but  straighten  the 

arms  forward. 


DUMB-BELL  EXERCISES 


125 


6  Exercises  4  and  5  alternately. 

7  As  Exercise  1,  but  straighten  the 

arms  sideways. 

8  As  Exercise  2,  but  straighten  the 

arms  sideways. 

9  Exercises  7  and  8  alternately. 


10  As  Exercise  1,  but  straighten  the 

arms  upward. 

11  As  Exercise  2,  but  straighten  the 

arms  upward. 

12  Exercises  10  and  11  alternately. 


PART    2. 


1  a.  Lunge  forward  right,  and  raise 

the  right  arm  forward 
obliquely  upward,  the  left 
arm  backward  obliquely 
downward  (Fig.  89). 
6.  One  half  turn  left,  and  change 
the  position  of  the  arms  (left 
obliquely  upward,  right 
obliquely  downward). 

c.  One  half  turn  right,  and  change 

the  position  of  the  arms 
(right  obliquely  upward,  left 
obliquely  downward). 

d.  Lower  the  arms,  and  place  the 

leg  back  into  position. 

2  The  same  exercise  left   and   one 

half  turn  right. 

3  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately. 

4  As  Exercise  1,  but  bend  the  right 

arm  to  a  right  angle  to  cover 
the  head. 

5  As  Exercise   2,  but  bend  the  left 

arm  to  a  right  angle  to  cover  the 
head. 

6  Exercises  4  and  5  alternately. 

7  As  Exercise  1,  but  lunge  sideways 

right  and  turn  the  trunk  right. 


8  As  Exercise  2,  but  lunge  sideways 

left  and  turn  the  trunk  left. 

9  Exercises  7  and  8  alternately. 

10  As  Exercise  4,  but  lunge  sideways 
and  turn  the  trunk  right. 


Fig.  89. 

11  As  Exercise  2,  but  lunge  sideways 

and  turn  the  trunk  left. 

12  Exercises  10  and  11  alternately, 


GKOUP     X. 

PART    1. 


1  a.  Raise  the  arms  to  thrust  and 
lunge  forward  right,  remain 
in  position  2  counts. 
6.  One  quarter  turn  left  and  thrust 
the  arms  forward,  remain  in 
position  2  counts. 


c.  One  quarter    turn     right    and 

bend  the  arms  to  thrust,  re- 
main in  position  2  counts. 

d.  Lower  the  arms  and  place  the 

leg  back  into  position,  remain 
2  counts.    Begin  !  1-8  counts. 


126 


GERMAN-AMERICAN   OTMNA8TK  s 


2  The  same  as  Exercise  1,  but  lunge 

left  and  one  quarter  turn  right. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  but  one  count  for 

each  movement. 

4  As  Exercise  2,  but  one  count  for 

each  movement. 

5  As  Exercise  1,  but  thrust  the  arms 

sideways. 

6  As  Exercise  2,  but  thrust  the  arms 

sideways. 

7  As  Exercise  3,  but  thrust  the  arms 

sideways. 

PART 


8  As  Exercise  4,  but  thrust  the  arms 

tideways. 

9  As  Exercise  1,  but  thrust  the  arms 

upward. 

10  As  Exercise  2,  but  thrust  the  arms 

upward. 

11  As  Exercise  3,  but  thru&t  the  arms 

upward. 

12  As  Exercise  4,  but  thrust  the  arms 

upward. 


2. 


1  a.  Lunge  forward  right,  and  raise 

arms  to  thrust,  remain  in  posi- 
tion 2  counts. 

b.  One  quarter  turn  left,  bend  trunk 

forward  and  thrust  arms  down- 
ward, remain  in  position  2 
counts. 

c.  Straighten  the  trunk,  one  quar- 

ter turn  right,  and  raise  arms 
to  thrust,  remain  in  position  2 
counts. 

d.  Lower  arms  and  place  the  leg 

back,  remain  in  position  2 
counts.  1-8  counts. 

2  The  same  exercise,  but  lunge  for- 

ward left   and  one  quarter  turn 
right. 

3  As   Exercise  1,  but  one  count  for 

each  movement. 

4  As  Exercise  2,  but  one  count  for 

each  movement. 


5  As   Exercise    1,   but   lunge,  rai-c 

arms  to  thrust,  one  quarter  turn 
left  and  bend  trunk  sideways 
right  and  thrust  the  arms  side- 
ways. 

6  The  same  exercise,  but  lunge  for- 

ward left,  one  quarter  turn  right. 

7  As  Exercise  5,  but  one  ccunt  for 

each  movement. 

8  As  Exercise  6,  but  one  count  for 

each  movement. 

9  As  Exercise  1,  but  one  half  turn 

left,  and  bend  trunk  backward 
and  thrust  the  arms  upward. 

10  The  same  exercise,  but  lunge  for- 

ward left  and  one  half  turn 
right. 

11  As  Exercise  9,  but  one  count  for 

each  movement. 

12  As  Exercise  10,  but  one  count  for 

each  movement. 


GROUP     XI. 

PART    1. 


1  a.  Lunge  forward  right  and  raise 
the  arms  forward,  remain  in 
position  4  counts. 
b.  Lunge  sideways  right  and  move 
the  arms  sideways  right,  re- 
main in  position  4  counts. 


c.  Lunge     backward      right     and 

raise    the    arms   upward,   re- 
main in  position  4  counts. 

d.  Return    to  position,   remain    4 

counts.     Begin  !  1-16  counts. 
2   The  same  exercise  left. 


DUMB    I>ELL    EXERCISES 


127 


3  As  Exercise  1,  but  two  counts  for 

each  movement. 

4  As  Exercise  2,  but  two  counts  for 

each  movement. 

5  a.  As   Exercise    1,   but   lunge   for- 

ward,   and    raise    the    arms 
sideways  right. 

6.  Lunge  sideways  right,  and  raise 
the  arms  upward. 

c.  Lunge      backward     right,     and 

lower  the  arms  forward. 

d.  Return  to  position. 

6  The  same  exercise  left. 

7  As  Exercise  5,  but  two  counts  for 

each  movement. 


8  As  Exercise  G,  but  two  counts  for 

each  movement. 

9  a.  As  Exercise  1,  but  lunge  for- 

ward   right,    and    raise    the 
arms  upward. 

b.  Lunge  sideways  right,  and  lower 

the  arms  forward. 

c.  Lunge  backward,  and  move  the 

arms  sideways  right. 

d.  Return  to  position. 

10  The  same  exercise  left. 

11  As  Exercise  9,  but  two  counts  for 

each  movement. 

12  As  Exercise  10,  but  two  counts  for 

each  movement. 


GROUP    XII. 

PART    1. 
Dissimilar    Exercises. 

Divide  the  class  into   the   first  and  second  division.     See 

Calisthenics. 

Arms  to  thrust. 


1  First  division  lunge  forward  right, 

and  thrust  the  arms  forward. 

Begin  !  1-2 

Second  division  lunge  forward  right, 
and  thrust  the  arms  sideways. 

2  The  same  exercise,  but  lunge  left. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  but  the  first  divis- 

ion executes  the  exercise  of  the 
second  division,  and  vice  versa. 

4  The  same  exercise,  but  lunge  left. 


5  First  division  lunge  forward  right, 

and  thrust  the  arms  upward. 
Second     division     lunge     forward 
right,  and  thrust  the  arms  back- 
ward. 

6  The  same  exercise,  but  lunge  left. 

7  As  Exercise  5,  but  the  first  divis- 

ion executes  the  exercise  of  the 
second  division,  and  vice  versa. 

8  The  same  exercise,  but  lunge  left. 


1  First  division  lunge  forward  right, 

bend  trunk  forward,  and  thrust 
the  arms  downward.  Begin  !  1-2 
Seconl  division  lunge  backward 
right,  bend  the  trunk  backward, 
and  thrust  the  arms  upward. 

2  The  same  exercise,  but  lunge  left. 


PART    2. 
3 


As  Exercise  1,  but  the  first  division 
executes  the  exercises  of  the  sec- 
ond division,  and  vice  versa. 

4  The  same  exercise,  but  lunge  left. 

5  First  division  lunge  sideways  right, 

bend  the   trunk  sideways   right, 
and  thrust  the  arms  sideways. 


ll'S 


GERM  A  N-.  1 M  Kit  1C  AN  G  YMNAST1CS 


Second   division    lunge    sideways, 
bright   end   the    trunk    forward, 
and  thrust  the  arms  sideways. 
0  The  same  exercise,  but  lunge  left. 


7  First  division  executes  the  exercises 

of  the  second  division,  and  vice 
verm  i. 

8  The  same  exercise,  but  lunge  left. 


PART    3. 
DIVIDE  THE  CLASS  INTO  CENTRE  AND  OUTEU  DIVISIONS. 


1  a.  Centre   division    lunge   forward 

right,  and  raise  the  arms  for- 
ward, remain  in  position  4 
counts. 

6.  Move  the  arms  sideways  and 
remain  4  counts. 

c.  Move   the  arms  forward  and 

remain  4  counts. 

d.  Return  to  position,  4  counts. 

1-16  counts. 

Outer  division  lunge  forward  and 
raise  the  arms  forward. 

b.  Move  the  arms  sideways. 

c.  Move  the  arms  forward. 

d.  Return  to  position. 

Begin  !  1-4 

2  The  same  exercise,  but  lunge  for- 

ward left. 


3  The  centre   division   executes   the 

exercises  of  the  outer  divisions, 
and  vice  versa. 

4  The  same  exercise  left. 

5  The  centre  division  as  Exercise  1, 

but  — 

a.  Lunge  backward,  and  raise  the 

arms  sideways. 

b.  Raise  the  arms  upward. 

c.  Lower  the  arms  sideways. 

d.  Return  to  position. 

6  The  same  exercise,  but  lunge  back- 

ward left. 

7  The  outer    divisions    execute  the 

exercises  of  the  centre   division, 
and  vice  versa. 

8  The  same  exercise,  but  lunge  left. 


PART    4. 
DIVIDE  THE  CLASS  INTO  CENTRE  AND  OUTER  DIVISIONS. 


1  a.  Centre  division  lunge  forward 
right,  and  raise  the  arms  for- 
ward, and  remain  in  position 
four  counts. 

6.  Centre  division  bend  the  trunk 
forward,  remain  in  position 
four  counts. 

c.  Centre   division    straighten    the 

trunk,  and  remain  in  position 
four  counts. 

d.  Return  to  fundamental  position, 

remain  four  counts. 

1-16  counts. 

1  a.  Outer  divisions  lunge  sideways 
outward  and  raise  the  arms 
sideways. 


6.  Outer  divisions  bend  the  trunk 
sideways  outward. 

c.  Outer  divisions    straighten   the 

trunk. 

d.  Return  to  fundamental  position. 

1-16  counts. 

2  The  same  exercise,  but  the  centre 

division  lunge  forward  left,  and 
the  outer  divisions  lunge  sideways 
inward. 

3  The  centre  division  executes  the 

exercises  of  the  outer  divisions  to 
the  right,  and  vice  versa. 

4  The  same  exercise,  but  the  centre 

division  to  the  left,  and  the  outer 
divisions  lunge  forward  left. 


D  U MB -BELL   EXERCISES 


129 


As  Exercise  1.  — a.  Centre  division 
lunge  backward  right  and  raise 
the  arms  upward. 

6.  Bend  the  trunk  backward  and 
lower  the  arms  sideways. 

c.  Straighten  the  trunk  and  raise 

the  arms  upward. 

d.  Return  to  position.  1-16  counts. 
As  Exercise  1.  —  a.  Outer  divisions 

lunge   sideways  outward   and 
raise  the  arms  sideways. 
b.  Outer  divisions  turn  the  trunk 
outward  and  raise  the  arms 
upward. 


c.  Outer  divisions  turn  the  trunk 

forward  and  lower  the  arms 
sideways. 

d.  Return  to  position. 

6  The  same  exercise,  but  the  centre 

division  lunge  backward  left, 
and  the  outer  divisions  lunge 
inward. 

7  The  centre  division  executes  the 

exercise  of  the  outer  divisions  to 
the  right,  and  vice  versa. 

8  The  same  exercise,  but  the  centre 

division  to  the  left. 


130 


GERMAN-AMERICAN   G YMNASTKJti 


EXERCISES     WITH     RINGS 

By  DR.  KARL  ZAPP 

THESE  exercises  belong  to  light  gymnastics,  and  permit  of 
a  great  number  of  variations  after  the  manner  of  free  gym- 
nastics, dumb-bell  and  wand  exercises,  etc. 

The  exercises  with  the  rings  offer  combinations  which  are 
characteristic  of  these  exercises.  These  are  the  combinations 

which  result  from  the  position  of 
the  participants,  who  are  generally 
coupled  together  in  pairs,  either 
side  by  side,  face  to  face,  or  back 
to  back  (Fig.  90).  The  class  may 
also  be  arranged  in  groups  of  three 
(triangle),  four  (square  or-  ring), 
and  .  in  a  half-circle,  circle,  or  lines 
composed  of  as  many  members  as 
the  room  permits. 

With    tactics     and     fancy    steps 
beautiful    and    interesting    combina- 
tions and  Roundels   (Reigeri)  may  be  arranged. 

A  combination    of    ring   exercises,   as   well    as    any   other 
combination    of    light   gymnastics,   should    contain    in    proper 
alternation  one  or  more  groups  of  exercises  for  the  most  im- 
portant groups  of  muscles  and  the  principal  parts  of  the  body. 
The  following  four  groups  may  illustrate  the  principle :  - 


Fig.  90. 


EXERCISES    WITH  RINGS  131 

GROUP  I.  Leg  Exercises. 

GROUP  II.  Step  and  Lunging  Exercises. 

GROUP  III.  Trunk   Exercises. 

GROUP  IV.  Balancing  Exercises. 

GROUP  I.  contains  the  more  strenuous  exercises  of  the 
legs,  such  as  the  bending  of  knees,  kneeling,  etc. 

GROUP  II.,  the  different  step-positions  and  their  combina- 
tions. 

GROUP  III.  contains  the  bending  and  twisting  of  the  trunk 
in  all  directions. 

GROUP  IV.  contains  exercises  in  which  the  weight  of  the 
body  is  balanced  on  one  foot,  while  the  other  leg  is  held  in  a 
certain  position,  or  moved  from  one  position  into  another. 

All  four  groups  should  be  accompanied  by  suitable  arm 
movements,  making  a  special  group  of  arm  movements  super- 
fluous. No  strict  line  of  demarcation  need  be  kept  between 
the  different  groups;  the  exercise  of  one  group  may  be  com- 
bined with  a  suitable  exercise  of  any  other  group. 

The  rings  afford  excellent  opportunity  for  the  so-called 
resting  exercises. 

The  rings  are  not  necessarily  indispensable,  but  afford  a 
pleasant  variation  in  the  routine  free  gymnastics,  and  are 
especially  appropriate  for  higher  grades  of  misses'  and  ladies' 
classes. 

A.    EXERCISES  IN  POSITION  —  FACE  TO  FACE. 

GBOUP     I. 
Leg  and  Arm  Movements. 

1    Kaising  the  heels  in  2  counts,  com-  arms  sideways  upwards,  or  bend- 

bined   with   or  alternating   with  ing  of  arms,  or  straightening  of 

such  arm  exercises  as  raising  of  arms  from  a  flexed  position. 


132 


GEliMAN-AMEHICAN  G YMNASTICS 


2  Bending  the  knees  (on  the  ball  of 

the  foot),  half  way  (right  angle), 
or  as  far  as  possible,  quickly  or 
slowly,  combined  with  similar 
arm  exercises ;  care  must  be 
taken  that  the  body  is  kept  in 
an  erect  position. 

3  The  alternate  raising  of  the  heels 

and  the  bending  of  the  knee  with 
arm  movements  ;  i.  e.,  raise  heels 
with  arms  in  position  sideways, 
1  ;  lower,  2  ;  bend  knees  with 
arms  upward,  3  ;  position,  4. 

4  Raising  the  heels  and  bending  the 

knees  interchained  ;  i.  e.,  raise 


the  heels  and  bend  the  arms,  1  ; 
bend  the  knees  and  straighten 
the  arms  sideways  or  upwards,  2  ; 
reverse,  3-4. 

5  Each  of  the  two  partners  performs 
a  different  exercise  at  the  same 
time  ;  i.  e., 

No.  1,  raise  the  heels  and  bend  the 
arms,  and 

No.  2,  bend  the  knees  and  straight- 
en the  arms  upward,  1  ;  both  re- 
turn to  position,  2  ; 

Nos.  1  and  2  exchange  exercises, 
3-4. 


GROUP     II. 
Step  and  Lunging  Exercises. 

All  the  step  and  lunging  exercises  can  be  executed  in  this 
position  except  those  directly  forward.     EXAMPLES  : 

Also,  step  or  lunge  sideways 
extension  of  arms  in  the  same 
direction  or  upward  ;  or  step 
backward  with  the  arms  upward 
or  cross  steps  forward  or  back- 
ward ;  or  lunge  backward  with 
extension  of  the  arms  forward. 

2  In  a  step  position    raising  of  the 

heels  (rising  on  the  toes),  or  bend- 
ing of  the  knees  ;  i.e.,  step  posi- 
tion left,  obliquely  forward,  with 
bending  of  the  arms,  1  ;  rise  on 
the  toes  with  extension  of  arms 
upward,  2  ;  reverse,  3-4  ;  the 
same  exercise  right,  5-8. 

The  rising  on  the  toes  may  also 
be  done  several  times  in  the  same 
position  before  changing. 

3  Step  position  backward  left,  arms 

sideways,  1  ;  bend  both  knees, 
the  arms  upward,  2 ;  reverse,  3-4  ; 


Fig.  91. 

From  position  —  arms  bent : 
1  Step  position  or  lunge  obliquely 
forward,  with  extending  the  same 
arm  in  the  same  direction,  the 
other  arm  in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion (Fig.  91). 


EXERCISES    WITH  RINGS 


133 


the  same  with  step  position  of 
the  right  foot,  5-8. 

3  Each  of  the  two  partners  may  per- 

form a  different  exercise  at  the 
same  time. 

4  Lunging  (or  charging)  in  the  same 

or  in  the  opposite  direction,  rock- 
ing of  the  knees,  or  kneeling. 
Example  :  — 

a.  Lunge  obliquely  forward  left  ex- 
tending the  arms,  1  ;  rock  the 
knees  (change  extension  of 


the  legs)  and  bend  the  arms, 
2 ;  reverse,  3-4  ;  the  same 
right,  5-8. 

b.  Lunge  obliquely  backward,  the 

arms  forward,  1  ;  rock  knees, 
the  arms  outward,  2  ;  reverse, 
3-4  ;  the  same  right,  5-8. 

c.  Lunge   sideways   left,   the  arms 

extended,  1  ;  rock,  and  bend 
arms,  etc.,  2-8. 

d.  Both  lunge  in  one  direction  (one 

left,  the  other  right). 


GROUP    III. 


Trunk  Movements. 


1  Bending  backward. 

This  can  be  performed  com- 
bined with  raising  of  the  arms 
outward  or  upward,  also  with 
step  or  lunging  positions,  i.e.,  — 

Bend  the  trunk  backward  with 
step  position  obliquely  forward 
left,  and  the  arms  sideways,  1  ; 
raise  the  arms  upward,  2  ;  re- 
verse, 3-4. 

2  Bending  forward  and  downward. 


These  two  movements  can  only 
be  executed  in  an  oblique  direc- 
tion. They  may  be  accompanied 
by  arm  and  leg  movements. 

Step    position     backward,    1  ; 
bend  forward  (hollow  back),  2  ; 
reverse,  3^4. 
3   Turning  or  twisting  of  the  trunk. 

Performed  in  one  direction, 
one  turning  left,  the  other  right 
(forward  or  backward). 


Turning  of  the  trunk  may  be  combined  with  the  various 
trunk  and  leg  exercises,  as :  - 

Turn  the  trunk  to  the  front  with  forward  arm  overhead  and 
forward  leg  in  cross  step  position  backward.  Turning  of  the 
trunk  may  also  be  combined  with  lunging. 


GROUP    IV 
Balancing  Exercises  (Standing  on  One  Foot). 

These  exercises  may  be  executed  in  a  similar  manner  as  the 
step  position,  i.e.,  — 


134  GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 

a.  Raise  the  left   leg  and   the   arms       d.  Raise   the   left    leg  obliquely   for- 

sideways,  1;  lower,  2.  ward,  with  the  amis  outward,  1  ; 

b.  Raise  the  left  knee  and  both  arms  move  the  left  leg  backward,  the 

upward,  1  ;  lower,  2.  arm  upward,  2;  reverse,  3-4. 

c.  Flex  the  left  leg  backward  and  the 

arms  outward,  1  ;  lower,  2. 

B.     EXERCISES   IN  FRONT   POSITION. 

The  class  may  be  arranged  so  that  the  members  stand 
singh'  holding  ring  in  one  hand ;  or  two  are  coupled  together 
holding  one  ring  between  them ;  or  the  entire  rank  may  be 
joined  together  each  holding  with  one  hand  the  neighbor's 

ring. 

GROUP    I. 

Leg  Exercises. 

Rising  on  the  toes  and  bending  of  the  knees  with  all  possi- 
ble variations  are  available,  also  the  performance  of  different 
exercises  by  different  individuals  at  the  same  time. 

GROUP    II. 
Step  and  Lunging  Exercises 

All  movements  except  lunging  directly  sideways  may  be 
executed.  If  the  members  are  standing  alone,  the  ring  may  be 
moved  from  one  hand  to  the  other  during  an  exercise  ;  i.e.,  — 

Step  or  lunge  obliquely  sideways  left  ring  overhead,  2  ;  lunge  or  step 

•with  the  arms  and  the  ring  ex-  obliquely  sideways  right  and  the 

tended  to  the  right,  the  ring  in  arms  to  the  left,  the  ring  in  the 

the  right  hand,  1;  close  the  heels,  left  hand,  3  ;  position,  4. 
with  the  arms  upward  and  the 

GROUP    III. 
Trunk   Movements. 

All  the  different  movements  backward,  forward,  downward, 
and  sideways  may  be  performed. 


EXERCISES    WITH  RINGS  135 

GROUP    IV. 
Balancing  Exercises. 

See  exercises  in  position  Face  to  Face. 

C.     EXERCISES  IN  POSITION  —  BACK   TO   BACK. 
GROUP     I. 
Leg  Exercises. 

In  this  position,  bending  of  the  knees  is  not  very  practica- 
ble, as  partners  are  usually  in  too  close  proximity. 

Rising  on  the  toes,  combined  with  the  arm  movements,  is 
available. 

GROUP     II. 
Step   and   Lunging   Exercises. 

These  exercises  may  be  practised  as  in  the  position  face  to 
face,  and  with  all  possible  variations. 

GROUP     III. 
Trunk  Exercises. 

Trunk  exercises  are  also  limited  in  this  position,  being 
restricted  principally  to  bending  sideways,  twisting,  and  a 
slight  bending  backward  in  an  oblique  direction. 

GROUP     IV. 
Balancing  Exercises. 

These  allow  of  about  as  much  variety  as  in  the  position 
face  to  face. 


136 


GERMAN- AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 


FANCY     STEPS 

Bv   CHRISTIAN    EBERHABD 

THESE  exercises,  while  mainly  intended  for  misses  or  ladies, 
may  also  be  practised  to  advantage  by  young  boys.  The  exer- 
cises have  a  tendency  toward  the  development  of  grace,  a  good 
and  erect  bearing  or  carriage,  and  will  be  found  admirable  for 
the  development  of  the  respiratory  organs. 

Children  usually  delight  in  work  of  this  kind,  and  these 
movements  will  prove  valuable  to  enliven  and  cheer  up  an 
otherwise  indifferent  or  dull  class. 


LESSON  i. 

The  pupils  are  ranged  in  single  file,  and  march  around 
the  hall.  It  is  advisable  to  change  the  direction  in  which 
the  pupils  are  marching  several  times  during  each  lesson.  The 
hands  are  placed  on  the  hips,  or  the  arms  crossed  backward. 


1  Follow  (or  lock)  step  left  forward. 

(The  left  foot  advances  a  moder- 
ate pace,  the  right  foot  follows, 
and  the  fundamental  position  is 
resumed  ;  i.e.,  the  heels  are 
locked.) 

2  Follow  step  right  forward.     (The 

right  foot  advances  and  the  left 
foot  follows. ) 

3  Follow  step  left  and   right  alter- 

nately. (Let  it  here  be  under- 
stood that,  if  no  command  to 
the  contrary  is  given,  the  al- 
ternate movement  is  always 
meant. ) 


Follow  step  with  raising  the  knees 
forward.  (The  knee  of  the  strid- 
ing leg  is  raised  forward  at  a 
right  angle,  the  toes  extended 
downward.) 

Follow  step  with  swinging  (quickly 
raising  and  lowering)  the  legs 
forward. 

Follow  step  with  raising  the  heels 
backward. 

Follow  step  with  raising  the  heels 
in  front.  (In  front  of  the  op- 
posite leg.)  (Fig.  92.) 

Follow  step  obliquely  forward. 
(Instead  of  striding  straight  for- 


FANCY  STEPS 


137 


10 


ward,  stride  in  an  oblique  diag- 
onal direction.) 

Follow  step  forward  and  sideways 
alternately.  (After  executing 
one  step  forward  left  and  right, 
execute  one  follow  step  sideways 
left  and  right.) 

Skip  left  forward.  Galop.  (In- 
stead of  locking  the  heels,  in 
this  exercise,  the  toes  of  the 


right  foot  are  placed  against  the 
heels  of  the  left  foot.) 

11  Skip  right  forward. 

12  Skip  left  and  right  forward  alter- 

nately. 

13  Skip  left  sideways  (after  the  class 

has  faced  to  the  right). 

14  Skip    right    sideways    (after  the 

class  has  faced  to  the  left). 


Fig.   92. 


M* 
V 

><* 
V 

Fig.  93. 


Fig.  93  b. 


LESSON    2. 


1  Change  step  (Fig.  93).     (The  left 

foot  advances,  the  right  foot  fol- 
lows in  such  a  manner  that  the 
toes  of  the  right  foot  are  placed 
in  about  a  right  angle  against 
the  heel  of  the  left  foot ;  then  the 
left  foot  advances  again.  After 
this,  the  right  foot  advances, 
the  left  foot  follows  against  the 
heel  of  the  right  foot,  etc. 

2  \  Change  step,  with  the  leg  rnove- 
*  \  ments  as  in  Exercises  4,  5,  6,  and 
5'    7  of  Lesson  1. 

6  Change   step  left    and    right    ob- 
liquely forward. 


7  Change  step  with  turning  (facing) 

right  and  left. 

8  Change  step  with  turning  (facing) 

left  and  right. 

9  Double  change   step  (schottische 

step).  (The  left  foot  advances 
twice  in  succession  and  the 
right  foot  follows  twice,  after 
which  the  left  foot  advances  a 
third  time.  Then  the  right  foot 
advances  as  the  left  did.) 
10  Double  change  step  with  turning 
right  and  left.  (The  movement 
is  now  sideways.  The  turn  is  ex- 
ecuted on  the  ball  of  the  foot.) 


1QQ 
OO 


i;  /•;/,- .u  AN-A  M  r.i;i< '.  I  .v  <:  YMNA  N TI<  '8 


Polka  step.  (Same  as  the  change 
step,  only  executed  with  three 
light  hops,  the  most  vigorous  of 
which  is  done  ou  the  first  count.) 

Polka  step  with  leg  movements 
and  variations,  as  in  Exercises  2, 
3,  4,  5,  (>,  7,  and  8  in  Lesson  2. 


Li: S3  ON    3. 
9 


Galop    step    forward    four    steps 

(hops)  with  each  foot. 
10   Galop   step   left    and   right   side- 
ways.     (The    first    turn   is    to 
the  right,  four  hops  each  way. ) 


LESSON    4. 


1  Touch  step.  (The  toes  of  the  strid- 

ing leg  touch  the  floor  gently  at 
a  distance  somewhat  less  than 
one  half  of  an  ordinary  pace  ; 
after  the  touch,  the  stride  is  com- 
pleted. ) 

2  Touch  step  with  hending  the  oppo- 

site knee.  (When  the  left  foot 
touches,  the  right  knee  bends.) 

3  Touch  step  with  crossing  the  feet 

in  front.  (The  feet  are  crossed 
during  the  touch  only.) 

4  Touch  step  with  crossing  the  feet 

in  front  and  bending  the  opposite 
knee. 

5  Double    touch    step.      (The    toes 

touch  twice,  after  which  the 
stride  is  finished.) 


6  Double  touch  step,  with  crossing 

the  feet  at  the  second  touch. 

7  Double  touch  step,  with  crossing 

the  feet  as  in  Exercise  6,  and 
bending  the  opposite  knee  dur- 
ing the  second  touch. 

8  Double    touch     step,    front    and 

rear.  (The  first  touch  in  front, 
the  second  after  moving  the 
striding  leg  slightly  backward.) 

9  The  same  as  Exercise  8,  with  bend- 

ing the  opposite  knee  during  the 
touch  in  front. 

10  The  same  as  Exercise  8,  with 
bending  the  opposite  knee  dur- 
ing the  touch  in  the  rear 


LESSON    5. 


1   Double    touch    and    change    step. 

(Two   touches  and  then  change 

step  as  in  Lesson  2.) 
2-\ 

3  Double  touch  and  change  step  with 

4  v    variations,  as  in  Exercises  6,  7, 

5  8,  9,  and  10  of  Lesson  4. 
6J 

7  Double  touch  and  polka  step.    (The 

same  variations  can  also  be  used 
here  again. ) 

8  Heel  and  toe  polka.    (Double  touch 

and  polka,  but  instead  of  touch- 


ing both  times  writh  the  toes,  the 
heel  is  touched  on  the  floor  in 
the  first  count,  and  the  toe  in 
the  second  count,  with  the  feet 
crossed  in  front,  while  simul- 
taneously with  each  touch  there 
is  a  slight  hop  on  the  other  foot. ) 
9  The  same  as  8,  with  touching  the 
heel  in  front  and  the  toe  in  the 
rear. 

10  Double  polka.     Similar  to  Exer- 
cise 8,  but  instead  of  touchin- 


FANCY  STEPS 


139 


the  heel  and  the  toe,  the  striding 
leg  is  swung  obliquely  forward 
during  the  first  hop,  and  crossed 
in  front  of  the  other  with  heel 


raised  backward  during  the  sec- 
ond hop,  after  which  the  polka 
step  follows. 


LESSON    6. 

For  this  lesson  the  pupils  are  ranged  in  a  column  of  twos 
(in  couples  or  pairs).  The  inner  hands  are  joined  and  raised 
to  shoulder  height,  the  outer  hands  are  placed  on  the  hips. 
The  pupils  to  the  left  begin  with  the  left,  those  to  the  right 
with  the  right,  foot. 


1  Change  step. 

2  The  same  as  in  1,  but  obliquely  for- 

ward (with  opening  and  closing 
the  ranks). 

3  Polka  step  obliquely  forward,  etc. 

4  Polka  step  obliquely  forward,  with 

facing    toward    and   away  from 
each  other. 

5  Polka  step  forward  and  obliquely 

forward  alternately. 

6  Polka  step  forward  and  sideways 

alternately    (without    and    with 


facing    (turning)    toward     and 
away  from  each  other). 

7  Galop  step,  four  steps  each  way 

obliquely  forward  (with  opening 
and  closing  the  ranks). 

8  Galop  step  sideways  (with  facing 

toward  and  turning  away  from 
each  other). 

9  Schottische    step,    obliquely    for- 

ward. 

10   Schottische  step,  with  turning  as 
in  Exercise  8. 


LESSON    7. 


Follow  step  with  rising  on  the  toes 
(with  balancing). 

Rocking  step.  (Step  forward  left 
and  throw  the  weight  of  the  body 
onto  the  left  leg,  slightly  raising 
the  right  foot  off  the  floor ;  at 
2,  rock  back  onto  the  right  foot, 
slightly  raising  the  left  foot  off 
the  floor  ;  at  3,  the  left  foot  is 
placed  on  the  floor  as  in  an  ordi- 
nary step  or  stride.  Then  the 
right  foot  is  placed  forward  for 
the  forward  rock,  etc.) 

Rocking  step,  with  rocking  the 
trunk  forward  and  backM-ard,  the 


free  leg  is  kept  in  a  line  with  the 
trunk.  For  this  exercise  the  arms 
should  be  locked  (arms  crossed 
and  the  hands  grasped).  (Fig.  94. ) 
4  Cross  balance  step.  The  left  leg 
takes  a  moderate  pace  obliquely 
forward  to  the  left,  then  the  right 
foot  is  crossed  in  front  of  the 
left,  at  the  same  time  balancing 
(rising  on  the  toes  and  very 
slightly  raising  the  left  foot  off 
the  floor)  ;  in  the  third  measure 
the  feet  (body)  settle  down  again. 
Then  the  right  leg  strides  oblique- 
ly forward  to  the  right,  etc. 


140 


a  /•;/,' MAN-AMERICAN  G FMNASTICS 


This  is  best  practised  first  in 
single  file,  with  the  hands  upon 
the  hips. 

5  Cross  balance  step,  with  swinging 

left  and  right  arm  in  a  half 
circle  overhead. 

6  Cross   balance  step,  with  bending 

the  trunk  sideways  right  and 
left. 

7  Cross   balance  step,  with   bending 

the  trunk  sideways  right  and 
left,  and  swinging  the  left  and 
right  arm  in  a  half  circle  over- 
head (Fig.  95) 


8  The  same  as  Exercise  7,  but  with 
swinging  both  arms  sideways  to 
a  circle  overhead  (Fig.  90). 
0  The  same  as  Exercise  7,  but  swing 
both  arms  sideways  to  the  left 
and  right.  (As  the  trunk  is 
bent  sideways,  the  arms  should 
point  obliquely  upward  in  a  line 
with  the  shoulders.) 
10  Cross  balance  hop.  Like  Exer- 
cise 4,  with  a  light  hop  on  tin- 
first  count.  (Spring  from  the 
right  onto  the  left  foot.) 


Fig.  94  a. 


Fig.  94  b. 


LESSON    8. 


1  Waltz   hop.      Two   hops   on   each 

foot,  the  free  (unoccupied)  leg 
extended  backward. 

2  Waltz  hop,  the  free  leg  extended 

sideways. 

3  Waltz  hop,  the  free  leg  extended 

forward. 

4  Waltz  hop,  with  swinging  the  free 

leg  obliquely  forward  in  front  of 
the  other  leg  (crossing  legs  for- 
ward). 

5  The  same  as  Exercise  4,  with  slid- 

ing  the    swinging  leg  over   the 


floor  during  the  first  part  of  the 
swing. 

The  same  as  Exercise  4,  with  rais- 
ing the  heel  in  front  and  extend- 
ing the  leg  downward. 

Kocking  hop.  While  hopping  for- 
ward twice  on  the  left  foot,  swing 
the  right  leg  backward  and  bend 
the  trunk  forward,  then  the  right 
foot  comes  up  to  where  the  left 
foot  had  been,  the  right  foot  ap- 
parently striking  the  left  away  ; 
and  while  hopping  forward  twice 


FANCY  STEPS 


141 


on  the  right  foot,  the  left  leg  is 
swung  forward  and  the  trunk 
bent  backward. 

8  The  same  as  Exercise  7,   but  ad- 
vancing with  the  right  leg. 
/"The    same  as  Exercise  7  or  8, 
9  I     but   backward  instead  of  for- 
10  |     ward  (retreating  instead  of  ad- 
\.    vancing). 


Exercises  7,  8,  and  9  are  best  ex- 
ecuted in  a  column  of  twos,  or 
fours,  etc.  They  will  also  make 
an  excellent  impression  if  exe- 
cuted in  a  front  line,  the  whole 
class  advancing  or  retreating  in 
one  line,  the  arms  locked  for- 
ward or  backward. 


Fig.  95. 


Fig.  96. 


LESSON    0. 

MAZURKA  STEP. 
The  pupils  are  ranged  in  twos. 


1  The  pupils  face  each  other,  the 
hands  on  each  other's  shoul- 
ders. 

Mazurka  step  sideways  (around 
the  hall).  In  the  first  measure  the 
left  (or  right)  foot  steps  sideways, 
in  the  second  measure  the  right 
(or  left)  foot  hops  up  and  appar- 
ently strikes  away  the  left  (or 
right)  foot,  and  this  left  (or 
right)  foot  swings  sideways  ;  in 
the  third  measure  another  hop 
follows  on  the  right  (or  left)  foot 


and  the  free  left  (or  right)  leg 
swings  sideways,  slightly  bent,  in 
front  of  the  hopping  leg.  (The 
exercise  is  thus  :  step,  hop,  hop. ) 
The  same  foot  advances  all  the 
time. 

2  The  same  as  Exercise  1,  but  around 

the  hall  the  other  way.  After 
changing  places,  those  formerly 
on  the  inside  are  now  on  the 
outside. 

3  Mazurka  step  sideways  across  the 

hall  (best  done  in  single  file). 


142 


GERMAN-AMERICA*    QTM  \  A8TH  8 


4  Mazurka    step    forward,    the    left 

foot  advancing. 

5  Mazurka   step   forward,   the   right 

foot  advancing. 

«'•  M;i/urka  step  forward,  left  and 
right  alternately.  In  order  to 
be  able  to  alternate,  the  exercise 
must  be  executed  in  four  meas- 
ures (if  the  left  foot  began,  this 
same  foot  is  placed  down  on  the 
floor  in  the  fourth  measure), 
and  the  exercise  is  now  :  Step, 
hop,  hop,  step. 


7  Polka    mazurka    step    (mazurka 

step  as  in  4,  followed  by  tin- 
polka  step). 

8  Polka    mazurka    step,   with    one 

half  turn  of  the  couples  (or 
twos).  The  turn  to  be  contin- 
uously in  the  same  direction. 

9  The  same  as  8,  with  the  tuni  in 

the  opposite  direction. 
10   The    same    as    Exercise   8,    with 
turning     alternately    left    and 
right. 


LESSON    10. 


Exercises  1—9  in  single  file.     Exercises  1-6  Inclusive  mav 
also  be  done  in  a  front  line. 


1  Cross  step  twirl  with  one  half  turn 

in  5  measures.  Two  ordinary 
steps  (or  paces)  forward  ;  in  the 
third  measure  cross  the  left  foot 
in  front  of  the  right ;  in  fourth 
measure  turn  right  about  on  the 
balls  of  the  feet ;  in  fifth  meas- 
ure turn  back  again  in  the  same 
manner. 

2  The  same  as  1 ,  beginning  with  the 

right  foot. 

3  Cross  step  twirl  with  one  half  turn 

in  4  measures.  Similar  to  Exer- 
cise 1,  taking  but  one  step  for- 
ward, crossing  the  feet  in  the  sec- 
ond measure,  etc.  The  turn  is  now 
alternately  left  and  right  about. 

4  Cross   step    twirl   in    6   measures. 

The  same  as  3,  with  three  steps 
forward  instead  of  one. 

5  Cross  step   twirl   with    full    (four 

quarter)  turn  in  5  measures.  Ex- 
ecuted as  follows :  Three  steps 
forward,  cross  the  right  foot  in 
front  of  the  left  in  the  fourth 
measure,  and  turn  completely 
around  on  the  balls  of  the  feet  in 


the  fifth  measure.  (The  turn  is 
to  the  left. ) 

6  The  same  as  5,  beginning  with  the 

right  foot.  (The  turn  is  now  to 
the  right. ) 

7  Stride    twirl    in   four    measures. 

Three  steps  forward,  in  fourth 
measure  execute  a  full  turn  to 
the  right  (four  quarter  turn)  on 
the  ball  of  the  left  foot,  swinging 
right  leg  in  a  half  circle  to  the 
right  (around  the  left  leg). 

8  The  same  as  Exercise  7,  but  begin- 

ning with  the  right  foot.  ( The 
turn  is  now  to  the  left. ) 

9  Stride  twirl  in  3  measures.     Take 

two  steps  forward  instead  of 
three  ;  the  turn  is  now  alter- 
nately left  and  right. 
10  In  couples,  or  column  of  twos 
with  the  arms  locked.  The  same 
as  Exercise  1  ;  those  on  the  in- 
side (to  the  left)  beginning  with 
the  left  foot,  those  on  the  outside 
(to  the  right)  beginning  with  tin1 
right  foot.  (The  arms  remain 
locked. ) 


FANCY  STEPS 


LESSON    11. 
IN  A  COLUMN  OF  Twos. 

The  inner  hands  are  joined  and  raised  to  shoulder  height,  the  outer  hands 
are  placed  on  the  ht2)s. 


\  March  and  polka  alternately,  8 
measures  for  each  movement. 
(Eight  paces  forward  and  4  polka 
steps  forward.) 

2  March   and    galop    forward   alter- 

nately, 8  measures  each. 

3  Polka    and    galop    forward    alter- 

nately, 8  measures  each. 

4  Galop  and  heel  and  toe  polka  for- 

ward alternately,  8  measures 
each. 

5  Beginning   with   the    feet   on   the 

outer  side  (those  to  the  left  with 
the  left  foot,  those  to  the  right 
with  the  right  foot),  march  for- 
ward and  galop  sideways.  Dur- 
ing the  first  4  galop  steps,  facing 
toward  each  other,  the  hands 
joined  and  raised  shoulder  height, 
during  the  next  4  galop  steps 
facing  away  from  each  other. 

6  Beginning   with    the    feet   on   the 


outer  side   as   in   5,  polka   for- 
ward and  galop  sideways. 

7  Beginning  with  the  feet  on  the 
outer  side,  as  in  Exercise  5,  heel 
and  toe  polka  forward  and  galop 
sideways. 

S  Beginning  with  the  feet  on  the 
outer  side,  as  in  Exercise  5, 
double  polka  with  opening  and 
closing  the  ranks,  and  galop  side- 
ways. 

9  Beginning  with  the  feet  on  the 
outer  side,  inarch  forward  8 
paces,  and  polka,  holding  the 
partner,  and  turning  a  half  turn 
to  each  polka  step  as  in  dancing 
8  measures. 

10  Holding  the  partner  as  in  dan- 
cing ;  heel  and  toe  polka  with 
half  turns  8  measures,  and  8 
galop  steps,  with  a  half  turn 
after  the  fourth  step. 


LESSON    12. 


1  Cross  step  hop  in  4  measures,  as 

follows  :  two  ordinary  steps  for- 
ward (beginning  with  the  left 
foot)  ;  in  the  third  measure  cross 
the  left  foot  in  front  of  the  right 
foot ;  and  in  the  fourth  measure 
hop  once  on  both  feet. 

2  The  same  as  Exercise  1,  but  begin- 

ning with  the  right  foot. 

3  Cross  step  hop  in  3  measures.     One 

step  forward,  cross  the  feet  in 
the  second,  and  hop  in  the  third 
measure.  (An  odd  number  of 
counts  or  measures  alternates  the 
exercise  left  and  right. ) 


4  Cross   balance   hop.     (Similar  to 

cross  balance  step  of  Lesson  7. ) 
Instead  of  a  step  left  obliquely 
forward  in  the  first  measure, 
spring  from  the  right  foot,  at  the 
same  time  swinging  the  left  leg 
obliquely  forward,  and  then  land- 
ing on  the  left  foot.  The  second 
and  third  measures  are  the  same 
as  in  the  cross  balance  step,  only 
livelier. 

5  A  combination  of  change  step  and 

cross  balance  step. 

6  Change   step   and  cross  step  hop 

(see    Exercise    1).    After    the 


144 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  G YMNA8T1CS 


change  step,  cross  the  right  foot 
in  front  of  the  left  in  the  fourth, 
and  hop  on  both  feet  in  the  fifth 
measure. 

7  Cross  balance  step  and  cross  step 

hop.  6  measures. 

(The  cross  balance  step  is  to 
the  left,  the  cross  step  hop  to  the 
right.) 

8  Mazurka  step    and    cross  balance 

step.  6  measures. 

(During  the  first  6  measures 
left  forward,  during  the  next  6 
measures  right  forward. ) 


0  Mazurka  step  and  cross  step  hop. 
6  measures. 

(As  in  Exercise  8,  the  first  6 

measures  left  forward,  the  next 

6  measures  right  forward. ) 

10  Cross  balance  step  and  a  full  turn 

cross  twirl.  6  measures. 

(The  first  balance  step  to  the 

left,  the  cross  twirl  to  the  right ; 

the    next    balance   step  to  the 

right,  and  the  cross  twirl  to  the 

left,  etc.) 


Many  of  the  exercises  of  these  twelve  lessons  may  be  varied 
(as  partly  exemplified  in  Lesson  6)  by  opening  and  closing  the 
ranks  of  two,  by  changing  places  with  each  other,  by  having 
one  pupil  circle  around  the  other,  while  this  one  marks  time, 
etc. 

Appropriate  arm,  trunk,  head,  and  leg  exercises  or  combina- 
tions of  these  may  be  executed  with  many  of  the  steps. 


FOUR  LESSONS  FOR  PUPILS  ARRANGED  IN 
OPEN  ORDER. 

(AS    FOR    I"REE    EXERCISES.) 

LE  SSON    1. 
The  hands  upon  the  hips. 


1  Follow  step  sideways  left  and  right 

with  balancing  on  the  toes. 

2  The    same    as    Exercise    1,    with 

swinging  the  arms  sideways  in  a 
circle  overhead  (Fig.  97). 

3  Two  hops  alternately  on  each  foot, 

raising   the    free    leg    backward 
(waltz  hopping).     See  Lesson  8. 

4  The  same  as  Exercise  3,  raising  or 

swinging  the  free  leg  sideways. 


5  The  same  as  Exercise  3,  swinging 
the  free  leg  forward. 

G  The  same  as  Exercise  3,  swinging 
the  free  leg  obliquely  inward 
(crossing  in  front  of  the  other 
leg,  also  with  sliding  the  foot 
over  the  floor). 

7  The  same  as  Exercise  6,  with  bend- 
ing the  trunk  sideways  and  swing- 
ing one  arm  in  a  half  circle  over- 


FANCY  STEPS 


145 


head  (if  bending  to  the  right  swing  the  left  arm, 
and  reverse). 

8  Cross  step  twirl  with  a  half  turn  in  4  measures  side- 

ways left  and  right  alternately.  (Sidestep  left,  cross 
the  right  foot  in  front  of  the  left,  turn  left  about  on 
the  balls  of  the  feet.)  See  Exercises  1  and  3,  Lesson 
10. 

9  The  same  as  8,  with  arm  exercises  :     (for  example, 

place  the  hands  on  the  shoulders,  while  crossing  the 
feet;  raise  the  arms  in  a  circle  overhead,  while  turn- 
ing about;  the  hands  again  on  the  shoulders,  while 
turning  back  ;  and,  finally,  the  hands  on  the  hips) 
(Fig.  97). 

10  The  same  as  Exercise  8,  adding  a  hop  on  both  feet 
after  turning  to  the  front  in  the  fourth  measure 
and  while  the  feet  are  still  crossed,  thus  executing 
the  whole  exercise  in  5  measures. 

LESSON    2. 


Fig.  97. 


1  Cross  balance  step   sideways  left 

and  right  (see  Lesson  7). 

2  Cross  balance  step  with  swinging 

one   arm   in   a  half  circle  over- 
head. 

3  Cross  balance  step  sideways  with 

bending  the  trunk  sideways. 

4  Cross  balance  step,  with  bending 

the  trunk  sideways  and  swinging 
one  arm  in  a  half  circle  overhead. 

5  The  same  as  in  Exercise  3,  and 

swinging  both  arms  in  a  circle 
overhead. 

6  Exercises  1,  2,  3,  4,  and  5  toward 

each  other  and   away  from  one 
another  (inward  and  outward). 

7  Change   step    and    cross    balance 

step    sideways    left    and    right. 
(Execute  one  change  step  to  the 


left  in  three  measures,  cross  the 
feet  in  the  fourth,  and  balance 
in  the  fifth  measure.) 

8  The  same  as  Exercise  7,  with  arm 

exercises  as  follows  :  During 
the  change  step  sideways  to  the 
left,  raise  both  arms  sideways  to 
the  left  ;  and  during  the  re- 
mainder of  the  exercise  continue 
the  movement  with  the  arms  in 
the  same  direction  upward,  and 
curve  them  to  a  circle  overhead. 

9  Polka  step  and  cross  balance  step 

sideways  left  and  right. 
10  The  same  as  Exercise  9,  toward 
each  other,  etc.  Also  with  arm 
exercises,  as  in  Exercise  8,  add- 
ing a  bending  of  the  trunk  side- 
ways, etc. 


LESSON    3. 

Mazurka  step  sideways  left.    (Any  2   The  same  as  Exercise  1,  sideways 

stated  number  of  steps.  For  three  to  the  right, 

mazurka  steps  the  counting  will  3   One  mazurka    step  sideways  left 

be:    1,2,3;   1,2,3;   1,2,3,4.)  with  waltz  turn.     (The  class  has 


140 


(',  I:  /,'.)/.  I  .Y-.  I  M  A./.'/'  .  I  .V    0  y.\l  .V  .  I  S  77'  > 


now  moved  about  two  paces  to 
the  left  and  is  facing  the  other 
way.  After  a  second  mazurka 
step  and  waltz  turn  to  the  left 
the  class  is  back  in  place,  and 
facing  as  at  first.) 

4  Tho   same    as   Exercise  3,   to   the 

right. 

5  Mazurka   step    and   cross   balance 

step  sideways  left  and  right. 

6  The  same  as  Exercise  5,  obliquely 

inward  (toward  each  other),  and 
outward  in  such  a  manner,  that, 
during  the  balance,  files  one  and 
two  form  one  file,  and  files  three 
and  four  another  file,  etc.  (Fig. 
98). 

7  Stride  twirl  sideways  left  and  right 

with  two  consecutive  half  turns 
in  the  same  direction.  The  ex- 
ercise is  executed  as  follows  : 
In  the  first  measure  the  left  foot 
is  placed  sideways  to  the  left  ;  in 
the  second  measure  a  half  turn 


10 


left  is  executed  on  the  ball  of 
the  left  foot,  while  the  right  leg 
describes  a  half  circle  forward 
around  the  left  leg  ;  in  tin-  third 
measure  a  half  turn  is  executed 
on  the  ball  of  the  right  foot, 
while  the  left  describes  a  half 
circle  backward  around  tin; 
right ;  in  the  fourth  measure  the 
heels  are  locked  (Fig.  99). 

The  same  as  Exercise  7,  to  the 
right. 

The  same  as  Exercise  7,  inward 
and  outward  (either  the  odd  or 
the  even  files  should  now  be  one 
pace  farther  forward  than  the 
others),  with  crossing  over  or 
changing  places  of  the  files. 
(File  two  crosses  over  to  where 
file  one  has  been,  and  file  one 
to  where  file  two  has  been,  and 
back  to  places  again.) 

The  same  as  Exercise  9,  but  be- 
ginning in  the  opposite  direction. 


/  \ 


Fig.  99. 


\ 


LESSON    4. 


Stride  twirl  and  cross  balance  step 
sideways  left  and  right.  (The 
stride  twirl,  as  before,  but  in  the 
fourth  measure  the  right  foot 
crosses  in  front  of  the  left  foot, 
and  in  the  fifth  measure  the  bal- 
ance follows.) 

The  same  as  Exercise  1,  inward 
and  outward  (with  crossing  over 
and  changing  places  as  in  Exer- 
cise 9  of  the  third  lesson). 


3  The  same  as  Exercise  2,  beginning 

in  the  opposite  direction. 

4  The  same  as  Exercise   1,   with  a 

hopping  movement.     (Hop  twirl 
and  balance  hop.) 

5  The   same   as  Exercise  2,  with   a 

hopping  movement.     (Hop  twirl 
and  balance  hop.) 

6  Cross  balance  step  and  cross  twirl 

with  a  full  turn.     (After  execut- 
ing the  cross  balance  step  to  the 


FANCY  STEPS 


147 


left,  place  the  right  foot  side- 
ways to  the  right,  cross  the  left 
in  front  of  the  right,  and  execute 
a  complete  circle  to  the  right  on 
the  balls  of  both  feet.  Next  the 
right  foot  begins  the  cross  bal- 
ance, etc.) 

7  Cross  twirl  and  cross  balance  step. 
(The  same  as  Exercise  6,  only 
beginning  with  a  full  turn.) 


8  Mazurka,    stride   twirl  (two  half 

turns),  and  cross  balance  step 
sideways  left  and  right. 

9  The  same  as  Exercise  8,  inward 

and  outward  (crossing   over  in 
the  files). 

10  The  same  as  Exercise  9,  but  be- 
ginning in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion. 


148 


GERM  A  N- AM  ERIC  AN  G  YMNA  S  TICS 


HORIZONTAL     BAR 

BY  F.  W.  FKOEHLICH 

THE  exercises  are  arranged  in  three  grades  of  four  lessons 

each. 

ABBREVIATIONS    OF   TERMS    USED. 


Sidestand     .     .      SS 
Frontsidestand .    FSS 

Rearsidestand   .  RSS 
Crossstand    .     .      CS 

Leftcrossstand  .  LCS 
Rightcrossstand,  RCS 

Handhang     .     .  HH 

Elbowhang  .     .  EH 

Shoulderhang    .  ShH 

Bentarmhang    .  BAH 

Overbold  ...  OH 

Underhold     .     .     UH 
Twistunderhold,  TUB 


Stand   directly  under  the   bar,    the   bar  and   a   line 

drawn  through  the  shoulders  run  parallel. 
Facing  the  bar,  a  distance  of  one,  two,  or  more  feet 

between  the  body  and  a  vertical  line  drawn  through 

the  bar. 

Facing  from  the  bar,  at  a  distance  same  as  FSS. 
Stand  directly  under  the  bar,  a  line  drawn  through  the 

shoulders  runs  at  right  angles  to  the  bar. 
A  CS  with  the  left  flank  toward  the  bar  at  a  distance 

varying  as  in  FSS. 
A  CS  with  the  right  flank  toward  the  bar  at  a  distance 

varying  as  in  FSS. 
The  body  hanging  suspended  from  the  bar  by  means  of 

the  hands  ;  the  legs  together,  the  toes  downward. 
The  bent  arm  over  the  bar  forward,  the  hand  down- 
ward, clinched. 
The  bent  arms  over  the  bar  forward,  the  hands  close 

together. 
The  arms  bent  to  an  acute  angle,  the  shoulders  close 

to  the  bar. 
Handhanj,  the  hands  width  of  shoulders  apart,  the 

back  of  the  hands  toward  the  rear,  thumbs  inward 

and  under  the  bar. 
The  back  of  the  hands  toward  the  front,  the  thumbs 

outward  and  under  the  bar. 
Raise  the   arms  sideways,  thumbs  downward,  palms 

toward  the  rear;     Raise  the  arms  up  toward  the 

bar  ;   in  this  position  take  hold,  the  back  of  the 

hand  toward  the  front,  little  fingers  inward. 


HORIZONTAL   BAB 


149 


Frontrest  .  .  FR  The  body  is  supported  by  means  of  the  arms,  the  bar 
in  front,  the  hands  OH  or  UH,  and  width  of  the 
shoulders  apart.  The  body  rests  against  the  bar  at 
the  thighs,  the  legs  together,  the  toes  downward, 
the  chest  forward,  and  the  back  arched. 

Rearrest  .  .  .  RR  Similar  to  the  FR,  with  the  bar  in  the  rear  of  the 
body. 

Sidehang      .     .      SH    See  sidestand. 

Crosshang     .     .      CH    See  crossstand. 

Bentarmrest      .  BAR    See  FR  and  RR,  but  the  arms  bent. 

Jumpoff  ...  JO  After  finishing  an  exercise,  jump  off,  landing  on  the 
feet,  bend  the  knees  to  an  angle  and  raise  the  arms 
forward,  then  change  to  the  fundamental  position. 


GRADE    I. 

LESSON    I. 
HIGH  BAR. 

The  bar  should  be  at  such  a  height  from  the  floor,  that  the  person  exercis- 
ing can  do  a  HH  and  have  his  toes  from  three  to  six  inches  from  the  floor. 

SS.     Jump  into  — 

1  The  HH;  OH  ;  JO  ;  repeat  several  times. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  with  UH  ;  also  1  and  2  alternately. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  with  TUH. 

4  SS  at  the  left  end  of  the  bar,  jump  to  HH  ;  OH  ; 

travel  sideways  right  by  moving  the  right  hand 
four  or  five  inches  sideways,  following  with  the 
left ;  JO. 

5  The  same  opposite. 

6  As  Exercises  4  and  5  with  UH  ;  also  with  TUH. 

7  As  Exercises  4  and  5  in  a  BAH  with  UH ;  also  with  OH. 

8  As  Exercise  4,  moving  both  hands  simultaneously, 

bending  the  arms  slightly  immediately  before  the 
change. 

9  As  Exercise  8,  with  UH  ;  also  in  a  BAH. 

10  A  HH  ;  OH  ;  change  the  right  hand  to  UH  ;  also  left 

hand ;  change  right  hand  back  to  UH  ;  also  the 
left  hand  ;  repeat  several  times  ;  JO. 

11  As  Exercise  10,  changing  both  hands  simultaneously 

to  UH,  bending  the  arms  just  before  the  change. 

12  A  HH  ;  OH  ;  raise  the  right  knee  forward  and  lower 

in  2  counts  ;  the  same  left  (Fig.  100).  Fig.  100. 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  G  YMNAST1C8 


18   As  Exercise   12,  alternately  in  4 

counts. 
14   As  Exercise  12,  raising  both  knees 

forward  and  lower. 


Fig.  101. 

15  As  Exercises  12,  13,  and  14  in  a 
BAH,  with  OH  or  UH,  raising  the 
straight  legs  forward  (Fig.  101). 


10  Bend  and  straighten  the  anus  as 
often  as  possible,  first  with  UH, 
then  with  OH. 

17  At  the  right  end  of  the  bar  HH  ; 

OH  ;  travel  left  sideways  with 
a  half  turn  left  and  right  alter- 
nately. 

EXPLANATION.  —  The  right  shoulder 
moves  forward  ;  the  right  hand 
takes  OH  on  the  opposite  side 
of  the  bar,  the  left  hand  retains 
UH  ;  then  the  same  left  for- 
ward. 

18  At    the    right    end    of    the    bar, 

UH  ;  travel  left  sideways  with 
a  half  turn  backward.  Continue 
changing  from  UH  to  OH  alter- 
nately. 


LESSON    2. 
HIGH  BAR. 


1  Crosshang,  right  and  left  hand  in 

OH  ;  on  the  opposite  sides  of  the 
bar ;  bend  the  arms  ;  raise  the 
right  leg  forward,  throwing  it 
over  the  bar  from  the  right  side 
into  a  crosskneehang ;  the  arms 
extended ;  the  left  leg  and  body 
parallel  with  the  bar,  change  to 
CH,  and  JO. 

2  The  same  left. 

3  As   Exercise   1,   changing    to    EH 

right  and  place  the  left  hand  on 
the  hip  (Fig.  102);  back  to  knee- 
hang  and  CH,  and  JO. 

4  The  same  left ;  execute  the  change 

from  the  kneehang  to  CH  several 
times. 

5  As  Exercises  3  and  4  alternately. 

6  HH  and  OH  shortswing  forward  and 

backward  from  four  to  eight 
times;  JO. 


EXPLANATION.  —  The  body  remains 
under  the  bar  ;  swing  the  legs 
forward  and  backward  alternate- 
ly ;  with  the  backward  swing 
arch  the  back  well,  throwing  the 
chest  forward,  and  bending  the 
arms  slightly  ;  jump  off  with 
the  backwardswing. 

7  HH  ;  OH  ;  shortswing  forward,  back- 

ward and  forward,  and  then  turn 
over  backward  into  a  squatdrop- 
hang,  the  soles  of  the  feet 
against  the  bar,  the  knees  and 
hips  flexed  between  the  hands  ; 
turn  forward  into  HH  ;  JO. 

8  As  Exercise  7,  and  turn  over  back- 

ward into  the  rearhang  ;  JO. 
EXPLANATION.  —  The     knees     ex- 
tended, the  hips  flexed. 

9  As    Exercise    7,   and    inner    side- 

kneehang  right ;  change  to  squat- 


HORIZONTAL    BAR 


151 


drophang  ;  to  HH  ;  and  JO.    See 
Exercise  1. 

EXPLANATION.  —  Squat  through 
right,  throwing  the  leg  over  the 
bar  forward  ;  extend  the  left  leg 
forward  in  a  line  with  the  trunk, 
the  arms  straight  (Fig.  103). 


10  The  same  left. 

11  The  same  as  Exercise  9,  with  the 

outer-kneehang  right. 

12  The  same  left. 

13  As    Exercise    9,    and    swing   the 

left  leg  upward  and  downward, 
flexing  the   left  hip  ;    stop   the 


Fig.   102. 


swing,  turn  backward,  squat- 
ting through  left  backward  into 
the  rearhang  ;  JO. 

The  same  left. 

As   Exercise   13,   and  innerknee- 


backward  into  kneehang  ;  squat 
forward  into  the  HH,  and  JO. 

16  The  same  left. 

17  As  Exercises  15  and  16,  with  out- 

erkneeswingup  forward. 


swingup  right    forward  ;    drop      18  As  Exercise   15,   and  kneewheel 


Fig.   103. 


right  backward  ;  and  drop  into 
the  kneehang  right ;  turn  back- 
ward into  the  rearhang  ;  JO. 
EXPLANATION.  —  One  and  one-quar- 
ter circle  backward. 

19  The  same  left. 

20  As  Exercises  18  and  19,  with  outer- 

kneewheel  backward. 


21  As  Exercises  IS,  19,  and  20,  with- 
out dropping  backward  into  the 
kneehang  (in  one  swing)  ; 
change  both  hands  to  UH  ;  turn 
over  or  drop  forward  into  the 
kneehang  ;  to  HH,  and  JO. 


P.  S.  —  If  necessary,  all  the  kneehangs  and  kneeupswings 
can  be  taken  through  more  thoroughly  on  the  low  bar. 


152 


< ;  KKMA  N- AM  ERIC  A  .v  >.y  MVAS  TICS 


LESSON    3. 

Low  BAK. 

Ueiyht  of  the  shoulders. 


I  FSS  ;  OH  ;  jump  into  FR  ;  half 
circle  with  the  right  leg  for- 
ward, inward  (Fig.  104)  ;  half 
circle  backward,  outward  ;  JO. 

EXPLANATION.  —  The  right  leg  de- 
scribes one  half  circle  forward 
over  the  bar,  passing  under  the 


right  hand,  which  should  be  re- 
placed, the  body  supported  by 
means  of  the  hands  ;  the  right 
leg  extended  downward. 

2  The  same  left. 

3  As  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately. 


Fig.  104. 

4  As  Exercise  1,  but  half  circle  with 

the  right   leg   backward    inward 
into  the  FR. 

EXPLANATION.  —  The  right  leg  passes 
backward  under  the  left  hand. 

5  The  same  left. 

G  FSS  ;  OH  ;  jump  into  the  FR;  a 
half  circle  with  the  right  leg  for- 
ward; outward  and  a  half  circle 
backward  inward  ;  JO- 

EXPLANATION. — In  the  half  circle 
forward  the  right  leg  passes  un- 
der the  left  hand. 


Fig.   105. 

7  The  same  left. 

8  FSS;  OH  ;  jump  into  the  FR;  half 

circle  with  the  right  leg  forward 
inward  ;  crotchwheel  backward 
several  times,  half  circle  with 
the  right  leg  backward,  and 

JO- 

9  The  same  left. 

10  As  Exercise  8,  but  from  a  FSS 
jump  and  at  the  same  time  half 
circle  with  the  right  leg  forward, 
outward  ;  change  to  UH,  and 
crotchwheel  forward. 


HORIZONTAL  BAR 


153 


11   As  Exercise  8  ;    after  half   circle 
forward  a  quarter  turn  left,  both 


Fig.   106. 

hands  in  front  of  the  body  in 
outerhold  ;  crotchwheel  side- 
ways left  or  right. 

EXPLANATION. — For  the  crotch- 
wheel  right  sideways  the  left 
hand  should  be  in  front  of  the 
right,  and  vice  versa. 

12  Innerkneehang    left ;    throw  the 

right  arm  forward  over  the  bar  ; 
into  the  SH;  right  ;  and  wheel 
backward. 

13  The  same  opposite  also  with  hands 

close  together. 


14  RSS.     Throw  the  arms  over  the 

bar,  the  forearms  under  and  for- 
ward ;  the  hands  pressed  against 
the  chest,  and  swing  forward  and 
backward  in  the  rear  upperarm- 
hang  (Fig.  105). 

15  As  Exercise  14,  with   upperarin- 
.    wheel  forward. 

16  FSS;   OH  ;     frontswingup    back- 

ward into  the  FR;  JO  backward 
(Fig.  106). 

EXPLANATION.  —  The  legs  swing 
over  the  bar,  at  the  same  time 
bring  the  hips  against  the  bar, 
flexed  ;  then,  by  means  of  the 
arms  and  a  straightening  of  the 
hips,  raise  the  body  into  FR. 

17  Frontswingup   backward  ;    swing 

the  legs  forward  under  the  bar, 
bending  the  arms  slightly  ;  then 
swing  backward  ;  the  body  free 
from  the  bar  into  the  free  FR; 
JO. 

As  Exercise   17,  and  a  fronthip- 
wheel  backward  ;  JO. 

EXPLANATION.  —  With  the  forward 
swing  execute  a  complete  turn 
backward  around  the  bar  at  the 
moment  when  the  hips  touch  the 
bar. 

19  Frontswingup  backward  ;  half 
circle  with  the  right  leg  forward ; 
inward  ;  the  same  left  into  the 
RR,  OH.  Sittingwheel  backward 
(see  kneewheel  backward). 


18 


Fig.  107. 

20  As  Exercise  19,  but  with  one  leg 
or  both  legs  outside  of  the  hands. 


154 


GERMAN-AMERICAN   <.  VMNASTH  8 


Jil.  Turn  over  backward  into  the 
nesthang  several  times.  Also 
with  extending  one  leg  back- 
ward (Fig.  107). 


KXI-I.AN ;.\ ;  ION. — The  toes  a-uin-t 
the  bar,  the  knees  and  the  body 
pressed  through  backward.-.  tl><- 
back  well  arched,  the  head  up. 


P.  S.    After  learning  the  exercises  of  this  lesson  thoroughly, 
take  them  on.  the  bur  raised  a  few  feet  higher. 


LESSON  4. 
HK.II  BAR. 


1  Side  HH  ;  OH  ;  longswing  forward 

and  backward  ;  JO. 
EXPLANATION.  —  Bend  the  arms, 
raise  the  legs  forward,  the  feet 
above  the  bar  ;  then  extend  the 
hips  and  anus,  throw  the  chest 
forward;  arch  the  back  well,  at 
the  same  time  pushing  the  body 
as  far  as  possible.  Then  swing 
backward,  renewing  the  hold  by 
slightly  moving  the  hands  over 
the  bar  at  the  beginning  of  the 
forward  swing.  Repeat  several 
times,  and  jump  off  with  the 
backwardswing. 

2  Longswing,    and    raise     the     left 

hand  at  the  end  of  each  back- 
wardswing, replacing  it  immedi- 
ately. The  same  right  and  alter- 
nately ;  JO. 

3  As  Exercise  2,  raising  both  hands 

simultaneously. 

4  At   the   left  end  of  the  bar,  long- 

swing  and  travel  sideways  right. 
Move  the  right  hand  first,  follow- 
ing with  the  left  at  the  end  of 
the  backwardswing. 

5  The  same  opposite. 

6  As  Exercise  4,  moving  both  hands 

simultaneously. 

7  The  same  opposite. 

8  Longswing,  and  raise  the  knees  in 

forwardswing;  also  spread  the  legs 
in  forward  and  backwardswing. 


0  HH;  UH  ;  longswing,  change  right 
and  left  hand  to  OH ;  at  the  end 
of  the  backwardswing  ;  also 
both  hands  simultaneously. 

10  HH;  OH  ;  longswing,  at  the  end  of 

the  forwardswing  change  to  an 
outerkneehang  right  ;  to  HH; 

JO- 

11  The  same  left. 

12  As   Exercise    10,    changing   to   a 

squatdrophang  ;  turn  backward 
into  a  rearhang  ;  JO. 

13  As  Exercise   10,   changing  to  an 

innerkneehang  right  ;  to  a  HH, 
and  JO. 

14  The  same  left. 

15  HH ;    OH  ;     longswing,    with    the 

backwardswing  change  to  EH 
right  ;  to  HH,  and  JO. 

16  The  same  left. 

17  As  Exercise  15,  but  from  EH  to 

SH  ;  then  HH  and  JO. 

18  The  same  left. 

19  As  Exercise  17,  with  both   arms 

EH,  then  to  upperarmhang,  fore- 
arms crossed,  the  hands  OH ; 
back  to  HH;  JO. 

20  Shortswing  and   half  turn   back- 

ward into  a  squatdrophang  ;  ex- 
tend the  legs  upward  in  front  of 
the  bar  to  a  frontdrophang  : 
bend  the  arms  and  pullup  back- 
ward into  the  FR  ;  lower  back- 
ward slowly  to  HH,  and  JO. 


HORIZONTAL   BAR 


155 


21  UH  frontpullup  backward  into  the 

FR;  OH  ;  lower  backward  to 
HH,  and  JO. 

EXPLANATION.  —  Similar  to  Exercise 
20,  but  without  the  swing  and 
squatdrophang,  the  knees  ex- 
tended. 

22  As  Exercise  20,  turning  forward 

into  a  squatdrophang  ;  to  HH, 
and  JO. 

23  HH,    OH  ;     shortswing     forward, 

backward  and  forward  with  a 
jerkup  forward  to  a  BAR  right 
(Fig.  108);  lower  to  HH,  and 
JO. 

24  The  same  left. 

25  As  Exercise  23,  pushing  left  into 

the  FR  ;  turn  forward,  the  hips 
flexed,  until  the  toes  touch  the 
bar  ;  lower  with  extended  legs  to 
HH,  and  JO, 


26  The  same  left. 

27  As  Exercise  25,  to  FR  ;  men  f  ront- 


Fig.  108. 

hipwheel  backward,  and  finish 
as  in  Exercise  25. 


GRADE     II. 

LESSON    1. 
Low  BAB. 

Shoulder  height. 


1  At  the  left  end  of  the  bar  FR ;  OH ; 

travel  sideways  right  moving  both 
hands  simultaneously  (hopping). 
The  same  left. 

2  FR  as  in  Exercise  1 ;  a  half  circle 

with  the  right  leg  forward  out- 
ward; the  legs  in  the  crossstrad- 
dle  position  between  the  hands  ; 
travel  as  in  Exercise  1.  The  same 
left. 

3  As  Exercise  2  ;  stop  in  the  middle 

of  the  bar  ;  crotchwheel  back- 
ward ;  one  half  circle  left  forward, 
and  with  one  quarter  turn  right 

JO- 

4  The  same  left ;  also  forward  right 

and  left. 


5  FR;  OH;  one  half  circle  right  for- 
ward inward  ;  left  forward  in- 
ward into  the  RR;  UH;  lower  to 
a  rear  BAR  ;  swing  the  body  for- 
ward and  backward  ;  stop  and 
lower  the  body  to  rearhang  (RH) 

JO- 

6.  RSS  ;  throw  both  arms  over  the 
bar  backward,  forearms  under 
the  bar,  and  the  hands  pressed 
against  the  chest ;  the  body  hang- 
ing on  the  upper  arms  (rear 
upperarmhang)  ;  swing  and  rear 
upperarmwheel  forward  :  JO. 

7  As  Exercise  5,  lowering  into  a  rear 
upperarmhang  and  wheel  as  in 
Exercise  6. 


150 


GERMAN-AMEHK  .  I  A    <.Y M  A  .  1 STIC  8 


8  As  Exercise  7,  with  a  rear  BAR 
wheel  UH  backward  ;  JO. 


Fig.  1C9. 

9  FSS;  OH;  turn  over  backward  into 
a  reardrophang,  the  hips  ex- 
tended, rearpullup  forward  into 
RR  (Fig.  109);  change  to  UH; 


Fig.   110. 

and  sittingwheel  forward  ;  JO. 
The  same  backward  with  OH  ; 
JO- 


10  FSS;  OH;  jump  and  mount  by  ;i 

half  circle  with  the  right  !•••,' 
forward  inward,  change  the 
right  hand  to  UH,  then  dismount 
by  a  half  circle  left  forward  in- 
ward and  one  quarter  turn  ri.^ht 
into  the  LCS.  Turn  dismount 
forward  left  (Fig.  110). 

11  The  same    left.      Execute  Exer- 

cises 10  and  11  without  a  stop. 

12  As  Exercise  10,  with  a  half  circle 

right  forward  outward.  The 
same  left. 


13  FR  right  hand  UH,  left  hand  OH, 

and    frontvault  right   into  the 
RCS  (Fig.  111). 

EXPLANATION.  —  Swing  the  legs  for- 
ward and  backward,  and  then 
with  a  quarter  turn  right  the 
body  passes  in  a  horizontal  posi- 
tion over  the  bar,  facing  it. 

14  The  same  opposite. 

15  RR  ;    OH.      Flankvault  left  into 

RSS. 

EXPLANATION.  —  Similar  to  Exercise 
13,  but  without  the  quarter  turn 
right. 

16  The  same  left. 

17  FR ;   OH.     Rearvault  right    into 

LCS  (Fig.  112). 


HORIZONTAL   BAR 


157 


EXPLANATION.  —  With  a  quarter  turn 
left,  raise  the  legs  forward  to  a 
right  angle,  clear  the  bar  facing 
from  it ;  replace  the  left  hand, 
raising  the  right  arm  sideways, 
when  landing  ;  change  to  the 
fundamental  position. 

18  The  same  left. 

19  As  Exercises  10,  11,  and  12  from 

aFSS. 


LESSON    2. 
HIGH  BAR. 


Fig.  112. 


HH,   OH. 

1  Longswing,  during  the  backswing 

change  to  EH;  right  swing;  for- 
ward and  change  to  HH ;  JO. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  left;  also  with  both 

arms. 

3  As  Exercise  1  from  EH;  change 

to  SH;  back  to  HH,  and  JO. 

4  The   same  left  ;    also  with  both 

arms. 

5  As  Exercise   1,  but  to  SH,  then 

swingover  backward  into  the 
FR.  Underswing  (US)  JO  into 
the  RSS. 

EXPLANATION.  —  US  JO  is  similar  to 
the  beginning  of  taking  a  long- 
swing.  See  Exercise  1,  Lesson  4, 
Grade  I. 

6  The  same  left ;  also  with  botharms. 

7  OH  LS;   turn  backward  into  the 

squatdrophang  ;  to  a  RH  JO. 

8  As  Exercise  7,  but  from  the  squat- 

drophang change  to  an  inner- 
kneehang  right  ;  kneeupswing 
forward;  kneewheel  backward; 
change  to  UH  and  kneewheel 
forward ;  lower  forward  into  the 
kneehang  ;  change  to  RH;  JO. 

9  The  same  left. 

10  LS;   turn  as  in  Exercise  8,   and 


outer  kneeupswing  right  for- 
ward ;  one  half  circle  right  back- 
ward outward  into  the  FR;  US 

JO- 

11  The  same  left.     As  Exercise  10 

and  11  without  a  stop. 

12  As  Exercise  10,  with  inner  knee- 

swingup  right  forward  ;  change 
the  right  hand  to  UH  ;  raise  the 
left  leg  sideways  and  hook  it 
under  the  bar  and  wheel  for- 
ward ;  half  circle  left  forward 
inward  into  the  RR  ;  JO. 

13  As  Exercise  12,  with  crotch  wheel 

backward,  OH  ;  (Fig.  113), 
change  the  right  hand  to  UH, 
turn,  dismount  forward  left  into 
the  RCS. 

14  The  same  left. 

15  LS  ;  OH  and  crotchupswing  for- 

ward right;  dismount  as  in  Ex- 
ercise 13. 

EXPLANATION.  —  Similar  to  the  in- 
ner kneeswingup,  but  with  both 
knees  extended. 

16  As  Exercise  15  ;  then  a  half  circle 

left  forward,  inward  into  the 
RR;  change  to  UH;  lower  for- 
ward into  the  RH ;  then  forward 
into  the  HH;  JO. 


158 


(i  HUM  A  \-A  MKllK '.  I  -V    <,  )    U  \  .  I  .s  il<  > 


17  The  same  loft. 

18  As  Exercise  Ki,  but  lowerbackwaril 

into  the  RH.     The  same  left. 

19  LS   and    frontswingup   backward 

into     the     FR;      fronthipwheel 
backward  US;  JO. 

EXPLANATION.  —  With  the  forward 
swing  bend  the  arms  and  hips 
slightly,  throw  the  hips  against 
the  bar,  at  the  same  time  raising 
upward  to  a  FR. 

20  LS    and    crotchswingup   forward 

right  ;  a  half  circle  left  forward 
inward    into   the   RR;    change 


to  UH;  raise  the  legs  forward 
and  drop  into  the  rear  BAR; 
straighten  the  hips  and  wheel 
forward  (Fig.  114)  ;  lower  to 
the  RH,  and  JO. 

21  The  same  left. 

22  Shortswing     forward    backward  ; 

forward  and  jerkup  forward  into 
the  FR;  lower  backward  into 
theHH;  JO. 

EXPLANATION.  —  First  come  to  BAR 
right,  follow  immediately  with 
the  left,  and  straighten  the 
arms.  . 


Fig.    773. 


LESSON    3. 


Fig.   114. 


HIGH 
HH   OH. 

1  Raise  the  legs  forward  ;  raise  them 

upward  ;  instep  touching  the  bar 
to  a  half  drophang  ;  squat  back- 
ward and  extend  the  hips  to  a 
reardrophang  ;  lower  backward 
to  a  RH  (the  hips  flexed  or  ex- 
tended while  lowering)  ;  turn 
forward  into  the  HH;  JO. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  but  while  in  RH  re- 


BAB. 

lease  the  hold  with  the  right 
hand  ;  execute  one  complete  turn 
around  the  left  arm  ;  both  hands 
OH;  JO. 

3  The  same  opposite. 

4  As  Exercise  1,  to  a  reardrophang; 

then  a  rearpullup  forward  into 
the  RR;  JO  forward. 

5  As  Exercise  4,  with  a  rearswingoff 

backward  into  the  SS. 


HORIZONTAL   BAR 


159 


EXPLANATION.  —  Before  swinging 
off,  lower  the  body  forward  so 
that  the  back  rests  against  the 
bar  (Fig.  115)  ;  then  with  ex- 
tended hips  turn  over  backward 
and  release  the  hold. 

6  UH;  LS   and  inner  kneeswingup 

right  forward  ;  with  a  half  circle 
left  forward  inward,  dismount, 
or  JO  into  the  RSS. 

7  The  same  opposite  ;  also  with  a 

quarter  turn  right  into  the  RCS 
and  LCS. 

8  Swingup  as  in  Exercise  6,  then  a 

half  circle  left  forward  into  the 
RR;  UH  and  sittingwheel  for- 
ward and  JO  forward  in  a  con- 
tinued swing. 

9  HH  right  hand  OH;  left  hand  UH; 

and  LS  inner  kneeswingup  right 
forward  with  half  turn  left, 
changing  the  right  hand  to  OH 
extend  the  right  leg,  bend  the 
left,  the  body  resting  on  the  left 
thigh,  outer  kneewheel  left  back- 
ward three  times  ;  half  a  circle 
left  backward  outward;  hip- 
wheel  backward  and  US;  JO  in 
a  continued  swing. 

10 "The  same  left. 

11  HH;  LS;  with  the  forward  swing 
half  turn  left,  the  same  with  the 
next  forward  swing  ;  repeat  sev- 
eral times  (Fig.  116). 


EXPLANATION.  —  With  the  half  turn 
release  the  hold  of  both  hands 
and  take  OH  on  the  opposite  side 
of  the  bar. 


Fig.   7i 


12  The  same  right. 

13  As  Exercise   11  ;   after  the   half 

turn,    crotchswingup   right  for- 
ward;    half    turn    left    crotch- 
wheel  backward ;  US  JO. 
EXPLANATION.  —  The  left  leg  squats 
forward  with  the  US  and  JO. 

14  The  same  opposite. 


Fig.  116. 


15  HH  OH;  LS  and  turn  backward 
into  the  reardrophang;  rearpull- 
up  forward  ;  half  turn  left  into 


the  FR;  hipwheel  backward 
with  a  JO  backward  into  the 
FSS. 


160 


<;  HUM.  I  -V-.l  MKIiH  '-1  -V    C,  YMNA8TICS 


16  The  same  opposite. 

17  As  Exercise  15,  but  in  a  continued 

swing,  that  is  to  a  RR. 

18  The  same  opposite. 


Ill  HH;  LS  and  change  to  SH  right  ; 
to  FR  ;  with  a  backward  swing 
freehipwheel  backward  two 
times  and  US  JO. 


LESSON    4. 
HIGH  BAR. 


1  HH;  OH  ;  and  LS;  turn  backward 
to  an  inncrkneehang  right  and 
left  ;  release  the  hold  of  both 
hands  ;  straightening  the  hips 
and  with  a  forward  swing  exe- 
cute a  dropkneehang  ;  swingoff 
into  the  RSS  (Fig.  117). 


Fig.   777. 

EXPLANATION.  —  Dropkneehang  : 
body  hangs  in  the  kneejoints,  the 
hips  extended,  the  head  down- 
ward. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  to  an  innerkneehang 

right  and  left,  swing  backward 
and  forward  several  times  and 
execute  a  sitting  upswing  back- 
ward into  the  RR.  Half  circle 
right  and  left  backward,  inward 
into  the  FR;  right  hand  UH  ; 
frontvault  left  into  the  RCS. 

3  The  same  opposite. 


4  HH  ;  OH  ;  LS  ;  and  frontswingup 

backward  into  the  FR  ;  half  turn 
left  backward  into  the  RR  UH  ; 
and  a  backwheel  forward  ;  lower 
forward  into  the  RH  ;  JO. 

5  The  same  opposite. 

G  LS  several  times,  then  during  the 
forward  swing  keep  the  hips  ex- 
tended so  that  the  body  swings 
into  a  horizontal  position ;  break 
the  swing  by  suddenly  bonding 
the  hips  and  throwing  the  feet 
against  the  bar  and  quickly 
dropping  the  legs  to  HH  and  JO. 

7  As    Exercise  6 ;   but    instead    of 

dropping  the  legs,  throw  them 
forcibly  forward  from  the  bar,  at 
the  same  time  pull  the  body  up- 
ward ;  forward  to  a  BAR  right  ; 
with  the  next  backwardswing 
straighten  both  arms  to  a  FR  ; 
US;  JO. 

8  The  same  left.     Exercises  7  and 

8  can  also  be  done  to  SH  right. 

9  UH  ;    frontpullup   backward  into 

the  FR;  change  to  OH  and  lower 
backward  slowly  into  the  HH, 
holding  the  legs  forward  in 
position;  lower  the  legs;  JO. 

10  OH ;  frontpullup  backward  ;  lower 

brckward  into  a  half  drophang, 
turn  backward  into  the  RH  ;  turn 
forward  into  the  HH ;  JO. 

11  HH  ;   shortswing   jerkup   forward 

right  and  follow  quickly  with  the 
left  into  the  FR ;  US  into  the  HH; 


HORIZONTAL   BAR 


161 


LS  swing  backward  forward  and 
frontswingup  backward  into  the 
FR;  US  JO, 


EXPLANATION.  —  A  frontswingup 
backward  is  similar  to  a  front- 
pullup  backward. 


GRADE    III. 

LESSON    1. 

Low  BAH. 
Height  of  the  shoulders  or  hips. 


FR  ;  OH. 

1  Circle  right  forward  inward  into 

the  FR  and  flankvault  right  into 
the  RSS. 

2  The  same  left. 

3  Circle  right  forward  outward  into 

the  FR  and  frontvault  left  into 
the  RCS. 

4  The  same  opposite. 

5  Circle  right  forward   inward,  left 

forward  inward  and  rearvault 
right  into  the  LCS. 

6  The  same  opposite. 

7  Flanks  wing  left  (half  circle  with 

both  legs)  forward  into  the  RR  ; 
flankswing  right  backward  into 
the  FR  and  squatvault  forward 
into  the  RSS. 

EXPLANATION.  —  The  legs  pass 
through  between  the  hands,  the 
knees  bent  and  together. 

8  The  same  opposite. 

9  The  above  exercises  can  also  be 

done  from  a  FSS. 

10  FSS  ;  OH  ;  squat  forward  into  the 

RR,  separate  the  legs,  sit  on  the 
bar  and  change  both  hands  to  an 
inner  close  hold  (the  hands  to- 
gether), then  straddle  sitting- 
wheel  backward.  JO  forward. 
This  can  be  done  at  first  with 
one  hand  on  the  outside. 

11  FSS  ;  OH  ;  straddlevault  forward 

into  the  RSS. 


12  As    Exercise    11,   but    into    the 

straddle  seat,  and  wheel  back- 
ward as  in  Exercise  10. 

13  FR  ;    squat  forward  right  into   a 

crossstraddlerest  (the  right  leg 
forward,  the  left  backward), 
shears  left  sideways  ;  squat 
left  backward  into  the  FR 
and  flankvault  left  into  the 
RSS. 

EXPLANATION.  —  Shears  :  one  half 
circle  right  backward,  inward 
and  left  forward,  inward  ;  the 
legs  crossing  over  the  bar  at  the 
same  time. 

14  The  same  opposite. 

15  As  Exercise  12,   after  the   wheel 

drop  backward  into  an  inner- 
kneehang  right  and  kneeswing- 
up  forward,  with  a  half  circle 
left  forward  dismount. 

16  The  same  opposite. 

17  FSS  ;    UH  ;    frontswingup  back- 

ward ;  raise  the  trunk  and  strad- 
dle the  legs  sideways  ;  hook  the 
toes  under  the  bar  and  toewheel 
forward  (Fig.  118)  ;  JO  back- 
ward. 

18  FR  ;  squat  forward  into  the  RR  ; 

squat   backward  into    the   FR  ; 
hipwheel    forward  ;    squatvault 
forward  into  the  RSS. 
10  FR  ;  OH.    Turn  over  (handspring) 
forward. 


162 


UKltMAX-AMXni('A.\    CYMXASTH  9 


EXPLANATION.  — Swing  the  legs  for- 
ward under  the  bar,  bending  the 
hips  and  anus  slightly  ;  then 
swing  them  backward  upward 
and  turn  over  forward,  executing 


n  complete  turn,  landing  on  the 
feet.  Push  off  strongly  with  the 
hands,  the  back  well  arched. 
Exercise  this  at  first  with  ln-nt 
anus,  thru  with  extended  arms. 


P.  S.     Learn  the  above  exercises  thoroughly  before  attempt- 
ing them  on  the  high  bar. 


Fig.  778. 


LESSON    2. 


HIGH  BAH. 


HH. 

1  The  right  hand  UH;  the  left  OH  ; 

LS  and  inner  kneeswingup  right 
forward   and  with   a  half   circle        7 
left   forward  inward   and   a  half        8 
turn  right  come  into  the  FR  OH. 
fronthip wheel  backward  with   a        9 
JO  backward  into  the  FSS. 

2  The  same  opposite. 

3  OH  ;  LS  ;  sitting  swingup  forward  : 

sittingwheel   backward   into   the 

RR  and  swingoff  backward  into       10 

the  FSS. 

4  As  Exercise  3,    with   sittingwheel 

forward   with  UH  ;   and  JO  for- 
ward into  the  RSS. 

5  As   Exercise    3,    with    a    straddle 

sitting   swingup,    forward   wheel       11 
backward  and  JO  forward. 


0  HH,  OH  ;  frontpullup  forward  into 
the  FR,  change  right  to  UH  and 
frontvault  left  into  RCS. 
7   The  same  left. 

As  Exercise  6,  with,  squatvault 
forward  into  the  RSS. 

HH  ;  OH  ;  shortswing  jerkup  for- 
ward into  the  FR  ;  drop  back- 
ward into  the  HH,  and  again 
the  shortswing  jerkup  US  ; 
JO. 

HH  ;  OH  ;  frontpullup  forward,  a 
half  turn  left  into  the  RH. 
Lower  the  body  forw.  with  ex- 
tended hips  and  knees  into  the 
reardrophang;  turn  forward  into 
the  HH  ;  JO. 

HH  ;  OH  ;  LS  a  half  turn  left  in 
the  forward  swing  and  a  front- 


HORIZONTAL   BAR 


163 


swingup  backward  into  the  FR  ; 
US  ;  JO. 

12  The  same  opposite. 

13  LS   and   a    rearswingup    forward 

into  the  RR  ;  rearhipwheel  back- 
ward ;  JO  forward. 

14  As  Exercise  13   with  UH  and  a 

backwheel  forward  into  the  rear 
BAR  ;  a  half  turn  left  into  a 
front  BAR,  push  up  forward 
and  straighten  the  arms  into  the 
FR  ;  squatvault  forward. 

15  The  same  opposite. 

16  HH  ;  OH  ;  LS  and  longswing  jerk- 

up  forward  into  the  FR  ;  US 
JO.  See  Exercise  7,  Lesson  4, 
Grade  II. 

17  As  Exercise   16,    and  a  freehip- 


wheel  backward  with  JO  back- 
ward. 

18  As  Exercise  17,  with  a  rearvault 

right  into  the  LCS. 

19  As  Exercises  16,  17,  and  18  with 

UH  ;  for  the  longswing  jerkup 
and  OH  for  the  rearvault. 

20  LS  and  longswing  jerkup  forward ; 

f reehipwheel  backward  into  the 
FR;  change  to  UH  and  swing 
over  forward  into  the  HH;  LS 
and  JO  at  the  end  of  the  back- 
wardswing. 

21  As  Exercise  20,  but  at  the  end  of  the 

backwardswing,  change  to  OH, 
and  f rontswingup  backward  into 
the  FR ;  flankvault  left  into  RSS. 

22  The  same  opposite. 


LESSON    3. 
HIGH  BAR. 


1  HH  OH  ;  turn   backward  into  the 

reardrophang  ;  lower  backward 
into  a  rear  horizontal  lever  (head, 
trunk,  and  the  legs  in  one  line); 
lower  into  the  RH  ;  JO. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  but  from  the  lever, 

rise  to  a  reardrophang,  squat  for- 
ward into  a  frontdrophang  ;  lower 
into  the  HH,  the  legs  forward  ; 
lower  the  legs  ;  JO. 

3  Raise  the  legs  forward  ;  frontpull- 

up  forward  ;  turn  forward  into 
frontdrophang  ;  squat  backward 
into  a  rearlever,  then  sink  to  a 
RH  ;  release  the  hold  right  and 
four  quarters  turn  around  the  left 
arm  into  the  HH  and  JO. 

4  The  same  opposite. 

5  Frontpullup  backward  into  the  FR  ; 

lower  backward  into  the  HH,  the 
legs  being  held  forward  and  re- 
peat; lower  the  legs  and  JO. 


6  HH  ;  OH  ;   longswing  jerkup  for- 

ward; swing  out  backward  and 
repeat ;  US  JO. 

7  Longswing  jerkup  forward  ;  squat 

forward  right ;  shears  left  side- 
ways ;  a  half  circle  left  back- 
ward outward  and  flankvault 
right. 

8  The  same  opposite. 

9  Longswing  jerkup  forward  ;  free- 

hipwheel  backward  and  squat- 
vault  forward. 

10  As  Exercise  9,  but  after  the  free- 

hipwheel,  swingout  backward 
and  rearswingup  forward  into 
the  RR  ;  JO  forward  with  a  half 
turn  into  the  FSS.  The  same 
opposite. 

11  Longswing  jerkup  forward  ;  US 

and  repeat  with  a  rearvault 
right. 

12  The  same  left. 


164 


GERM  A  N-A  M  EliUJA  N  G  YMNA  8  TICS 


1:5  HH  ;  OH  ;  longswing  pullup  for- 
ward with  a  fronthipwheel  back- 
ward, and  JO  backward  (similar 
to  a  slow  pullup). 

14  As  Exercise    13,   with    UH ;  but 


change  to  OH  for  the  fronthip- 
wheel. 

15  UH  LS  and  rearswingup  forward 
into  RR  with  a  half  turn  left  into 
the  FR  ;  squat  forward  and  JO. 


Fig.   11 9. 


LESSON    4. 

HIGH  BAR. 


1  UH   longswing    jerkup    forward  ; 

swingover  forward  and  long- 
swing  pullup  forward  into  the 
FR  ;  change  to  OH  and  freehip- 
wheel  backward ;  rearvault  right 
into  the  LCS. 

2  The  same  opposite. 

3  UH    longswing    pullup    forward  ; 

toewheel  forward  with  a  swing- 
over  forward  ;  at  the  end  of  the 
backwardswing  change  to  OH 
and  rearswingup  forward  with 
JO  forward. 

4  OH,  longswing  jerkup  forward  with 

a  circle  right  forward  inward 
and  flankvault  right  into  the 
RSS. 

5  The  same  left. 

6  As  Exercise   4,   but    circle  right 

forward,  outward  and  a  rear- 
vault  right  into  the  LCS. 

7  The  same  opposite. 

8  Longswing  jerkup  forward  and  a 

flankvault  left. 

9  The  same  right. 

10  As  Exercise  8,  with  a  rearvault 
left. 


11  The  same  right. 

12  As  Exercise  8,  with   a  rearvault 

right. 

13  The  same  left. 

14  As   Exercise   8,    with    squatvault 

forward. 

15  As  Exercise  8,   with   a  straddle- 

vault  forward. 

16  HH ;  UH  right  hand,  OH  left  hand  ; 

the  hands  close  together  ;  raise 
the  legs  forward,  at  the  same 
time  executing  a  half  turn  left; 
bend  the  arms  and  pullup  right 
forward  into  the  BAR  right;  ex- 
tend the  hips,  release  the  hold 
left,  and  a  half  turn  left ;  into 
the  *  rear  BAR  ;  take  UH  left 
lower  to  a  rearlever.  JO. 

17  The  same  opposite. 

18  HH  hold  as   in   Exercise   16,  the 

hands  apart ;  turn  over  back- 
ward to  a  rearlever  ;  move  the 
hands  close  together  ;  one  quar- 
ter turn  right  and  change  to  a 
BAR  right  ;  lowering  the  legs, 
release  the  hold  left,  change  to 
OH  left  ;  a  quarter  turn  right 


HORIZONTAL   BAR 


165 


and  push  upward  into  the  FR  ; 
lower  backward  into  the  HH,  the 
(Fig.  119)  legs  forward  ;  JO.  26 

19  The  same  opposite. 

20  HH  ;  OH  1  longs  wing  jerkup  for- 

ward into  the  FR,  dropjerkup 
forward  ;  rearvault  right  into 
the  LCS.  27 

EXPLANATION.  —  Dropjerkup  :  simi- 
lar to  the  longswing  jerkup,  drop 
the  trunk  backward,  the  feet 
against  the  bar,  swing  them  from 
the  bar  about  4  to  6  inches,  re- 
turn and  forcibly  straighten 
hips,  jerkup  up  to  FR. 

21  HH  ;  OH  ;  longswing  pullup,  with 

a  half  circle  right  and  left  for- 
ward inward  ;  also  forward  out- 
ward ;  also  with  front,  rear, 
flank,  squat,  or  straddle  vaults 
forward. 

22  HH  ;  OH  ;  LS  ;   and   frontswing- 

over  backward  with  longswing 
jerkup  forward  ;  dropjerkup  for- 
ward ;  US  ;  JO. 

EXPLANATION. — Frontswingover  is 
similar  to  a  frontswingup  back- 
ward, without  stopping  and 
touching  the  bar  ;  the  body 
again  coming  into  the  HH  and 
LS.  28 

23  HH  ;  OH  left  hand,  UH  right  hand  ; 

LS  and  with  the  backwardswing 
release  the  hold  left  a  half  turn 
left,  taking  OH  left  and  raising 
feet  to  the  bar  with  the  turn  and 
a  longswing  jerkup  forward  into 
the  FR;  freehip wheel  backward  29 
with  JO. 

24  The  same  opposite.  30 

25  Shorts  wing  jerkup  forward  ;  drop 


into  the  HH  and  repeat  and 
flankvault  left  forward. 

HH  ;  OH  ;  longswing  jerkup  for- 
ward; underswing  and  long- 
swing  pullup  forward ;  dropjerk- 
up forward  and  high  frontvault 
left.  The  same  opposite. 

The  same  as  Exercise  26,  but 
swing  to  a  handstand  (Fig.  120), 
squat  forward.  JO. 


Fig.  120. 

HH  ;  OH  ;  front  pullup  forward 
into  the  FR  ;  lower  forward  into 
a  frontlever  ;  squat  backward  to 
a  rearlever  ;  rise  to  a  reardrop- 
hang  and  rearpullup  forward 
into  the  RR  ;  change  to  UH  and 
lower  forward  to  a  rearlever  JO. 

The  same  as  Exercise  27,  with  UH 
and  giant  swing  forward. 

The  same  as  Exercise  27,  and  giant 
swing  backward. 


REMARKS.  —  A  great  variety  of  exercises  can  be  done  on  the 
horizontal  bar  combined  with  buck,  parallel  bars,  or  vaulting 
board. 


1G6 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  <•  IV  \  - 1 STICS 


PARALLEL     BARS 

BY   A.    E.   KINDERVATER 

THREE  sets  of  graded  exercises  for  parallel  bars,  each  set 
containing  six  lessons,  three  of  which  begin  from  the  cross- 
stand,  or  crossrest,  i.e.,  the  bars  running  at  right  angles  to 
the  width  of  the  body ;  and  three  from  the  sidestand  or  side  rest, 
i.e.,  the  length  of  the  bars  running  parallel  with  the  width 
of  the  body. 

ELEMENTARY     GRADE. 

LESSON    1. 
Crossstand  facing  the  bar,  the  hands  grasping  the  ends. 


Fig.  121. 

1  Hop  up  into  the  rest  ;  the  head 
erect,  the  back  hollow,  the  legs 
pressed  together  and  straight,  the 


Fig.  122. 

toes  down.  Resume  the  first  posi- 
tion (or  stand).  Repeat  this 
several  times  (Fig.  121). 


PARALLEL   JtABS 


167 


2  Rest  as  in  Exercise  1,  and  raise  the 

legs  forward  or  backward,  right 
and  left  alternately,  or  both 
(straight  or  bent  legs). 

3  Rest  as  in  Exercise  1,  turn  the  body 

to  the  right  and  left  alternately 
(around  the  longitudinal  axis). 

4  Rest  as  in   Exercise   1,   raise  the 

straight  legs  forward  and  back- 
ward right  and  left  alternately 
and  both  ;  also  left  forward,  and 
right  backward,  or  vice  versa. 

5  Rest  as  in  Exercise  1,  lift  the  hands 

(for  a  moment)  right  and  left  al- 
ternately or  both  (hop  in  place). 


6  Rest  as  in  Exercise  1,  travel,  lifting 

the  hand  and  grasping  forward 
with  the  right  hand,  and  return  ; 
also  left,  and  return. 

7  Rest  as  in  Exercise   1,  travel  for- 

ward, grasping  three  times  with 
the  right  and  three  times  with  the 
left  hand. 

8  Rest  as  in  Exercise  1,  travel  for- 

ward, grasping  right  and  left 
alternately. 

9  Rest  as  in  Exercise  1,  hop  forward 

to  the  other  end  (short  hops, 
both  hands  grasping  forward  si- 
multaneously). 


Fig.  123.  Fig.   124. 

LESSON    2. 
Mounts   and  Dismounts. 

Crossstnnd  facing  the  bars,  the  hands  on  the  ends. 


1  Mount  to  inner  crossseat  on  the 

right  thigh,  in  front  of  the  right 
hand  (Fig.  122).  Dismount  into 
the  first  position  ;  repeat  several 
times.  The  same  exercise  left. 

2  Mount  into  the  ridingseat,  in  front 


of  the  right  hand  (Fig.  123). 
Dismount  into  the  first  position. 
The  same  exercise  left. 
3  Mount  into  the  straddleseat  in  front 
of  the  hands  on  both  bars  (Fig. 
124).  Dismount  into  first  position. 


168 


a  Kit. MAX-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 


4   Mount  into  the  outer  crossseat  left 
in  front  of  the  right  hand  (Fig. 


Fig.   125. 

125).     Dismount    into    the    first 

position.    The  same  exercise  left. 

5  Turn  and  jump  into  the  rest,  back 


to  the  bars  ;  swing  tho  body  bark- 
ward  and  place  one  foot  on  each 
bar  —  front  eroM-leaningrest  (fa- 
cing the  bars,  the  amis,  legs,  and 
body  straight).  Hwinj;  through 
forward,  jump  off  and  alight  on 
both  feet,  the  back  to  the  bar 
(Fig.  126). 

Rest  facing  the  bars  ;  swing  the 
body  forward  and  place  one  foot 
on  each  bar,  the  outer  edge  of  the 
feet  resting  on  the  bars  (extend 
the  legs  and  arch  the  back),  rear 
cross-leaningrest,  back  to  the 
bars  (Fig.  127),  swing  through 
backward,  jump  off  and  alight 
on  both  feet  facing  the  bars. 

Cross-leaningrest  facing  the  bars 
as  in  Exercise  5,  draw  the  feet 
toward  the  hands  into  the  squat- 
ting position  (knees  outside  of 
the  arms,  the  head  erect).  Re- 
sume the  first  position  and  alight 
as  in  Exercise  5. 


Fig.  126. 

Rest  in  the  centre  of  the  bars; 
swing  the  body  backward  into 
the  squatting  position  right 
(place  the  right  foot  on  the  right 
bar  behind  the  hand,  the  knee 


Fig.  127. 

bent,  the  left  leg  extended 
downward  between  the  bars, 
the  head  erect).  Alight  and 
.stand  in  the  centre  of  the 
bars. 


PARALLEL   BARS 


109 


•9  Rest  in  the  centre  of  the  bars ; 
squatting  position,  right  foot  on 
the  left  bar  (behind  the  hand, 
the  left  leg  extended  downward, 
on  the  outside  of  the  left  bar). 
Jump  off  sideways  left. 


10  As  Exercise  8,  with  the  left  leg 
extended  downward,  on  the  out- 
side of  the  right  bar;  also  chan- 
ging from  the  squatting  position 
on  one  bar  over  into  the  other. 
Jump  off  sideways. 


LESSON   3. 
Upperarmhang   and  Kindred   Exercises. 


1  Upperarmhang  in  the  centre  of  the 

bars  (Fig.  128).  Resume  stand 
in  the  centre  of  the  bars. 

2  Armhang  as  in  Exercise  1,  raise 

the  knees  ;  the  heels  ;  swing  the 
straight  leg  forward,  backward, 
and  sideways  right  and  left  alter- 
nately, or  both.  Resume  stand 
in  the  centre. 

3  Armhang   as  in  Exercise    1,   and 

swing  the  body  forward  and  back- 
ward. Resume  stand  in  the  cen- 
tre. 

4  Armhang  as  in  Exercise  1,  swing 

as  in  Exercise  3,  and  in  the  fore- 
swing  straddle  the  legs,  hollow 
the  back,  the  arms  and  the  thighs 
resting  on  the  bars  (lying  on  the 
bars  the  body  horizontal,  the  face 
upward).  Resume  the  hang  and 
stand  in  the  centre. 

5  Armhang  as  in  Exercise  1,  swing 

the  body  as  in  Exercise  3,  and  in 
the  backswing  straddle  the  legs 
sideways  over  the  bar  (remain 
lying  on  the  bars  on  arms  and 
thighs,  face  downward).  Resume 
the  hang  and  stand  in  the  centre. 

6  Armhang  as  in  Exercise  1,  swing 

forward  and  lie  on  the  bar  as  in 
Exercise  4,  raise  the  body  into  the 
straddleseat  in  front  of  the  hands. 
Dismount  sideways  right  or  left. 

7  Armhang  as  in  Exercise  1,  swing 

backward  and  lie  on  the  bar  as  in 
Exercise  5,  raise  the  body  into 


the  straddleseat  behind  the 
hands.  Dismount  sideways  right 
or  left. 


Fig.  128. 

8  Armhang  as  in  Exercise  1,  swing 

as  in  Exercise  3,  and  in  the  fore- 
swing  raise  the  body  into  the 
straddleseat  in  front  of  the  hands, 
swing  the  body  backward  through 
the  bars  into  the  cross-leaning 
rest  facing  the  bars  (as  in  Exer- 
cise 5,  Lesson  2).  Alight  side- 
ways right  or  left. 

9  Armhang  as  in  Exercise  1,  swing 

the  body  as  in  Exercise  3,  and  in 
the  backswing  raise  the  body 
into  the  straddleseat  behind  the 
hands,  swing  forward  through  the 
bars  into  the  cross-leaningrest 
back  to  the  bars  (as  in  Exercise 
6  of  Lesson  2).  Alight  sideways 
right  or  left. 


170 


i ;  /•;/,'  .W .  I  ,\  - .  I  M  ERIC  AN   (.  Y  M  \  A*TH  > 


LESSON    4. 

Hangstand   and    Exercises   in   the   same. 
Outer  sidestand  facing  the  bars,  ordinary  yraxp  on  the  nearer  bar. 


Front  hangstand;  place  the  feet 
forward  below  the  bars  (Fig.  129). 
Position. 


2  As  Exercise  1,  raise  the  legs  for- 

ward or  sideways  right  or  left 
alternately  (straight  or  bent); 
change  the  hands  to  the  reversed, 
combined,  or  twisted  grasp;  bend 
and  straighten  the  arms. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  placing  one  or  both 

feet  against  the  second  bar,  bend 
and  straighten  the  legs  (the  arms 
remain  straight). 

4  As  Exercise  1,  placing  one  or  both 

legs  over  the  second  bar  into  a 
kneehang  on  one  or  both  legs; 
the  hands  remain  on  the  first 
bar  (Fig.  130). 

5  As   Exercise   1,  placing  the   heels 

against  the  second  bar  (the  arms 
and  legs  straight);  while  in  this 
position,  raise  one  or  the  other 
leg  towards  the  first  bar,  or  move 


sideways  right  and  left;  also  bend 
and  straighten  the  arms;  change 
grasp,  etc. 

6  As  in  Exorcise  1,  raising  the  body 

upward  between  both  bars  into 
the  reversedhang  (the  feet  up- 
ward, the  head  downward);  while 
in  this  position,  lower  the  body 
onto  the  second  bar  by  bending 
the  arms  and  pushing  the  body 
over.  Jump  off  forward. 

7  As  Exercise  1 ;  raise  the  knees,  be- 

tween the  hands;  toes  against  the 
inside  of  the  first  bar;  bend  the 
body  through  into  the  nest,  and 
return. 

8  As   Exercise    1,  raising  the   knees 

and  squat  through  between  the 
hands;  turn  the  body  over  back- 
ward, the  feet  on  the  floor  (ex- 
tending the  arms,  legs,  and  back), 
into  the  rearhangstand  (Fig.  131). 


Fig,  130. 

9  As  Exercise  8,  bend  the  knees, 
squat  through  and  straighten  the 
body  over  into  the  reversedhang 
(feet  upward,  the  head  down- 
ward), on  the  outside  of  the  first 
bar,  and  return. 


PARALLEL   BARS 


171 


Fig.  131. 


Fig.   132. 


LESSON    5. 
Rests   and  Mounts. 

Sidestand,  facing  the  bars. 


1  Sidestand  in  front  of  the  bar,  the 

hands  on  the  first  bar,  ordinary 
grasp  ;  hop  into  the  siderest,  on 
the  first  bar  (Fig.  132)  ;  repeat 
several  times  ;  the  same  adding 
exercises  of  the  legs,  as  swing- 
ing the  straight  leg  sideways 
right  and  left  alternately  or  both 
(straddle),  or  placing  the  feet 
onto  the  nearer  bar,  the  legs  ex- 
tended, sideways  right  and  left. 

2  Siderest  on  the  first  bar;  swing  the 

right  or  left  leg  over  the  first  bar 
and  return  (half  circle  right  for- 
ward). 

3  Rest  as  in  Exercise  2  ;  grasp  over 

onto  the  second  bar,  moving  the 
body  forward  into  the  side-lean- 
ingrest,  facing  the  bars  (Fig. 
133).  Jump  backward  into  the 
sidestand,  the  hands  on  the  first 
bar. 


4  As  in  Exercise  3  ;  in  the  leaning- 
rest  exercise  the  legs  and  arms  ; 
as  kneeling,  right  knee  on  the 
first  bar  and  extending  the  left 
leg  backward,  horizontally  ;  vice 
versa,  or  kneeling  on  both  knees  ; 
bend  the  arms,  etc. 


Fig.  133. 

5  As  Exercise  3,  raise  the  right  knee, 
and  place  the  right  foot  on  the 


11-2 


GERMAN-AMERICAN   OYMNA8TK  - 


lir>l  l>ar,  tin-  other  leg  extended 
aslant  downward  (the  arms 
straight)  ;  also  with  both  feet  on 
the  first  bar  in  the  squatting  po- 
sition. 

0  As  Exercise  3,  swing  the  right  leg 
over  the  first  and  between  both 
bars,  execute  a  quarter  turn  left 
(three  quarter  leg  circle).  Re- 
sume the  first  position  ;  the  same 
left,  and  then  alternately. 

7  As  Exercise  3,  circle  with  the  right 
leg,  inward  over  the  first  bar; 


the    same    left,    and    also 
nately. 

8  As  Exercise  3  ;    swing  the   right 

and  the  left  leg  over  and  sit  on 
the  first  bar,  the  hands  on  tin- 
second  (inner  seat). 

9  As  Exercise  8,  hook  the  toes  undiT 

the  second  bar  and  bend  the 
body  backward  until  the  hands 
touch  the  floor ;  or  lower  the 
body  out  horizontally,  with  the 
arms  crossed  on  the  chest  (Fig. 
134). 


Fig.   134. 


LESSON    6. 
Mounts  and  Changes  from  the  Cross  and  Siderest. 


1  Crossstand  facing  the  bars  ;  mount 

into  the  inner  sideseat,  the  right 
leg  on  the  left  bar  at  the  side  of 
the  left  hand  (Fig.  135).  Re- 
sume the  stand,  the  same  left, 
and  alternately. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  then  swing  the  left 

leg  in  a  circle  over  the  left  bar, 
at  the  same  time  turning  the 
body  one  half  turn  to  the  right 
(and  grasping  forward  with  the 
left  hand  over  onto  the  right  bar) 
into  the  side-leaningrest  facing 
the  bars.  Jump  backward  into 
the  sidestand,  the  hands  on  the 
first  bar. 

3  Stand  as  in  Exercise  1,  mounting 

into  the  outer  crossseat  onto  the 


right  bar  (see  Lesson  2,  Exercise 
4).  One  quarter  turn  left,  the 
right  hand  grasping  over  onto 
the  left  bar,  into  the  side-lean- 
ingrest, facing  the  bars.  Half  a 
turn  left  into  the  outer  sideseat 
on  the  right  bar,  both  hands 
on  the  right  bar  ;  push  off  for- 
ward. 

4  Stand  as  in  Exercise  1,  mounting 
into  the  side  straddleseat  on  both 
bars  in  front  of  the  hands  ;  one 
quarter  turn  to  the  left  raising 
the  body  into  the  cross  straddle- 
seat,  left  hand  grasping  reverse 
on  the  left  bar  (Fig.  136);  alight 
by  swinging  the  right  leg  forward 
over  both  bars,  at  the  same  time 


PARALLEL   BARS 


173 


turning  the  body  one  quarter 
turn  to  the  left,  the  left  hand 
keeps  its  hold.  Turn  dismount 
forward  right. 

5  Stand  as  in  Exercise  1,  mounting 
into  the  innerseat  right  on  the 
left  bar  (as  in  Exercise  1),  turn 
right  about  into  the  side-leaning- 
rest  (as  in  Exercise  3)  ;  swing 
the  left  leg  forward  over  both 
bars,  the  right  hand  grasping 
over  onto  the  left  bar,  into  the 
straddleseat  behind  the  hands  ; 


alight  by  swinging  the  right  leg 
backward  over  both  bars,  and 
turning  right  into  the  sidestand, 
both  hands  on  the  first  bar. 
6  Stand  as  in  Exercise  1,  mount  as 
in  Exercise  3,  half  a  turn  left  cir- 
cling with  the  right  leg  through 
the  centre  again  into  the  outer 
crossseat  on  the  right  bar  (now 
in  front  of  the  left  hand),  facing 
the  starting-point.  Rearvatilt 
sideways  right  (over  the  other 
bar). 


Fig.  135. 


Fig.  136. 


7  Stand  as  in  Exercise  1,  mount  as 

in  Exercise  1,  turn  right  and  cir- 
cle the  left  leg  forward  over  the 
left  bar,  through  the  centre  and 
then  onto  the  former  right  bar, 
into  a  side  straddleseat  in  front 
of  the  hands  ;  swing  backwards 
through  the  bars  into  a  cross- 
leaningrest,  facing  the  bars  ; 
jump  down  sideways  right  or  left. 

8  Stand  as  in  Exercise  1,  mount  as 

in  Exercise  4,  grasp  forward  with 


the  hands,  swing  through  for- 
ward into  the  cross-leaningrest 
back  to  the  bars,  jump  down  side- 
ways right  or  left. 
Stand  as  in  Exercise  1,  mount  as 
in  Exercise  4,  grasp  forward- 
swing  through  forward,  into  the 
outer  crossseat  on  the  right  bar, 
in  front  of  the  hand ;  swing 
through  backward  and  vault  over 
the  left  bar  behind  the  hand. 
Frontvault  left. 


174 


< :  Kit  M .  I  A •  -  - 1  .V KR1CAN  G  YMNA 8 TICS 


INTERMEDIATE     GRADE. 

LESSON    1. 

Swinging  in  the  Rest,  with  Exercises  of  the  Arms  and  the  Legs. 
Crossrest  in  the  centre  of  the  bars. 


Swing  forward  and  backward  sev- 
eral times,  the  feet  at  least  as 
high  as  the  head,  the  arms 
straight  (Fig.  137)  ;  vault  over 
the  right  bar  behind  the  hand. 
Frontvault  right 


Fig.  137a. 

2  Swing  as  in  Exercise  1,  and  in  the 

backswing  open  and  close  the 
legs  above  the  bars  (sidestraddle). 
Vault  over  the  left  bar  in  front  of 
the  hand.  Rearvault  left. 

3  Swing  as  in  Exercise  1,  and  strad- 

dle the  legs  sideways  in  the  fore- 
swing  (above  the  bars).  Front- 
vault  left. 

4  Swing  as  in  Exercise  1,  and  strad- 

dle the  legs  sideways  in  both  back 
and  foreswing.  Rearvault  right. 

5  Swing  as  in  Exercise  1,  and  cross- 

straddle  the  legs  (right  forward, 
left  backward,  or  vice  versa). 
Frontvault  with  one  quarter  turn 
left,  facing  the  bars. 

6  Swing  as  in  Exercise  1,  and  in  the 

backswing  bend  and  straighten 
the  legs  (heels  touching  the 
seat).  Rearvault  left  with  one 
quarter  turn  right,f  acing  the  bars. 


7  Swing  as  in   Exercise   1,  and    in 

the  foreswing  bend  and  straight- 
en the  legs  (the  knees  touching 
the  chest).  Frontvault  left  with 
one  quarter  turn  right,  facing 
the  bars. 

8  Swing  as  in  Exercise  1,  bend  and 

straighten  the  legs,  as  in  the  Ex- 
ercises 6  and  7  in  the  back  and 
foreswing.  Rearvault  right  with 
one  quarter  turn  left,  facing  bars. 

9  Swing  as  in  Exercise  1,  and  in  the 

backswing  bend  and  straighten 
the  arms.  Rearvault  left  with 
one  quarter  turn  left. 
10  Swing  as  in  Exercise  1,  and  in  the 
foreswing  bend  and  straighten 
the  arms.  Frontvault  left  with 
one  half  turn  right. 


Fig.  137  b. 

11  Swing  as  in  Exercise  1,  bend  and 
straighten  the  arms  as  in  Exer- 
cises 0  and  10  in  both  back  and 
foreswings.  Frontvault  right 
with  one  half  turn  left. 


PARALLEL   BARS 


175 


LESSON    2. 

Swinging  in  the  rest  with  lifting  the  hands  alternately  or  simultane- 
ously (walking  or  hopping)  on  and  from  place.  Shearsmount, 
circling  and  straddling  off  at  the  end. 


1  Crossrest  at  the  end,  facing  the  bars ; 

swing  and  lift  one  hand  moment- 
arily from  the  bars  in  either  back 
or  foreswing,  or  the  right  hand  in 
the  fore,  ^the  left  hand  in  the 
backswing,  also  lifting  both  hands 
simultaneously  in  either*  fore, 
back,  or  in  both  swings. 

2  Swing  as  in  Exercise   1,   lift  the 

hand  and  grasp  forward  (small 
steps),  right  and  left  alternately. 

a.  Only  in  backswing  ; 

b.  Only  in  foreswing  ; 

c.  In  both  back  and  foreswing,  to 

the  end  of  the  bars  (travelling 
forward). 

3  Swing   as   in   Exercise   1,  and  lift 

both  hands  simultaneously  (hop- 

Ping)- 

a.  Only  in  the  backswing  ; 
6.  Only  in  the  foreswing  ; 
c.  In  both  back  and  foreswing,  to 
the  end  of  the  bars. 

4  The  same  as  in  Exercises  2  and  3, 

but  travelling  or  hopping  back- 
ward. Begin  the  exercise  with 
back  to  the  bars. 

5  Swing  as  in  Exercise  1,  travel  for- 

ward, the  hands  grasping  forward 
alternately  in  each  backswing 
to  the  end  of  the  bars,  swing 
backward  to  the  front-leaning- 
rest  (facing  the  bars).  Straddle- 
off  forward  over  the  right  bar 
with  one  quarter  turn  to  the  left 
(the  left  hand  remains  on  the 
left  bar). 

6  Swing  as  in  Exercise  1,  travel  for- 

ward to  the  end  of  the  bar,  grasp- 


ing forward  on  the  foreswing  ;  in 
the  last  backswing  cross  the  legs 
and  turn  about  into  the  straddle- 
seat  in  front  of  the  hands  (shears- 
mount  backward).  Place  the 
outer  edge  of  the  feet  on  the 
bars,  raise  the  body  with  arched 
back  into  the  back-leaningrest 
(back  to  the  bars).  Straddleoff 
backward  over  the  left  bar,  alight 
facing  the  bars. 

7  Swing    as    in    Exercise    1,    travel, 

grasping  forward  right  and  left 
with  each  swing  to  the  end  of 
the  bars  ;  swing  back  into  the 
front-leaningrest  (as  in  Exercise 
5) ;  bend  and  straighten  the  arms 
several  times  ;  straddleoff  for- 
ward over  both  bars,  alight  back 
to  the  bars. 

8  Swing  as  in  Exercise  1  ;  hop  for- 

ward with  both  hands  in  the 
backswing  to  the  middle  of  the 
bars  ;  in  the  last  foreswing  cross 
the  legs  and  turn  about  into  the 
straddleseat  behind  the  hands 
(shearsmount  forward);  grasp 
back  to  the  ends  of  the  bars 
and  raise  the  body  into  the  rear- 
leaningrest.  Straddleoff  back- 
ward over  both  bars,  alight  facing 
the  bars. 

9  Swing   as   in  Exercise  1,  and  hop 

forward  on  both  hands  in  each 
foreswing  to  the  centre  of  the 
bars  ;  shearsmount  backward  into 
the  straddleseat  (twice)  ;  grasp 
forward  to  the  ends  of  the  bars, 
swing  through  forward,  back- 


176 


GKltMA  N-A  M  ERIC  AN  G  TMNA8TICS 


ward  and  straddleoff  forward 
over  both  bars.  Alight  back 
to  the  bars. 

10  Swing  as  in  Exercise  1,  and  hop 
forward  on  both  hands  in  the 
fore  and  backswing  to  the  centre 
of  the  bars  ;  shearsmount  for- 


ward into  tin-  straddle-seat ;  grasp 
backward  and  shearsmount  back- 
ward into  the  same  seat ;  grasp 
forward  to  the  ends  of  the  bars, 
and  turn  ove  forward  with 
bent  arms,  alight  back  to  the 
bars  (handspring). 


LESSON    3. 
Armhang,  half  turnover,  uprise,  upstart,  and  vaults. 


1  Cross  upperarmhang  in  the  centre 
of  the  bars  (Fig.  128;  swing  fore 
and  backward  several  times  ;  in 
the  foreswing  straddle  the  legs 
sideways  above  the  bars,  arch  the 
back  and  lie  on  the  bars  (face  up- 


Fig.  138. 

ward  and  body  horizontal),  rest- 
ing on  the  upper  arms  and  thighs 
(see  Exercise  4  of  Lesson  3,  First 
Grade);  rise  into  the  straddleseat 
in  front  of  the  hands  ;  swing 
through  backward  and  frontvault 
right. 

2  Swing  as  in  Exercise  1,  in  the  back- 
swing,  straddle  the  legs  sideways 
above  the  bars  and  lie  on  the  bars 
as  in  Exercise  1,  with  face  down- 
ward (see  Exercise  5  of  Lesson 
3,  First  Grade)  ;  rise  into  the 
straddleseat  behind  the  hands  ; 
swing  through  forward  and  rear- 
vault  left. 


3  Swing  as  in  Exercise  1,  in  the  fore- 

swing  raise  the  legs  well  over  the 
body  (the  feet  above  the  head 
half-turnover)  (Fig.  138);  from 
here  drop  quickly  into  the  strad- 
dleseat in  front  of  the  hands. 
Upstart.  Swing  through  back- 
ward and  frontvault  left. 

4  Swing  as  in  Exercise  1,  half  turn- 

over as  in  Exercise  3  ;  swing 
down,  then  backward  and  uprise 
from  the  backswing  into  the 
front-leaningrest;  swing  through 
forward  and  rearvault  right. 

5  Swing  as  in  Exercise  1,  half  turn- 

over as  in  Exercise  3 ;  swing 
through  backward  and  uprise 
in  the  next  foreswing  into  the 
straddleseat  in  front  of  the 
hands,  raise  the  feet  and  body 
into  the  rear-leaningrest ;  swing 
through  backward  and  front- 
vault  right. 

6  Swing  as  in  Exercise  5  ;  uprise  in 

the  backswing  into  the  rest  ; 
swing  forward  into  the  rear-lean- 
ingrest ;  swing  backward  and 
frontvault  left. 

7  Swing  as  in  Exercise  5  ;  uprise  in 

the  foreswing  into  the  rest  ;  swing 
backward  into  the  frontleaning- 
rest ;  swing  forward  and  rear- 
vault  right. 


PARALLEL   BARS 


177 


8  Swing  as  in  Exercise    5  ;    uprise 

in  the  backswing  into  the  rest  ; 
swing  forward  and  rearvault  left 
with  one  quarter  turn  right,  fa- 
cing the  bars  (the  whole  exer- 
cise without  interruption). 

9  Swing  as  in  Exercise  5  ;  uprise  in 

the    foreswing     into    the     rest : 


swing  backward  and  frontvault 
right  with  one  quarter  turn  left, 
facing  the  bars. 

10  Swing  as  in  Exercise  3 ;  half  turn- 
over and  upstart  into  the  rest 
with  straight  arms;  swing  back- 
ward and  forward  and  res.rvault 
right,  with  one  half  turn  'eft. 


LESSON    4. 

Sidestand  facing  the  bars,  mounts,  leaningrest,  dismounts, 
.         combinations,  and  vaults. 


1  Sidestand  facing   the  bars  ;    take 

a  short  run  and  mount  from  the 
left  into  the  ridingseat  behind 
the  right  hand  on  the  first  bar, 
the  left  hand  grasping  the  second 
bar ;  raise  and  swing  both  legs 
through  forward  into  the  side- 
seat  right  in  front  of  the  left 
hand  on  the  second  bar  (the  left 
leg  between  the  bars);  circle  the 
left  leg  forward  over  the  second 
bar  and  dismount  with  a  quarter 
turn  right  —  turn  dismount  for- 
ward left. 

2  Mount  into  the  ridingseat  in  front 
'    of    the   right   hand   on   the   first 

bar ;  raise  and  swing  the  legs 
through  backward  into  the  side- 
seat  left  behind  the  left  hand  on 
the  second  bar  (the  right  leg 
outside  of  the  second  bar)  (Fig. 
139) ;  raise  the  legs,  swing  through 
forward  and  rearvault  left. 

3  Mount  right  into  the  straddleseat 

on  both  bars  behind  the  hands  ; 
swing  through  forward  into  the 
outer  crossseat  in  front  of  the 
right  hand  ;  one  quarter  turn  left 
into  the  side-leaningrest  facing 
the  bars  (or  forward).  The 
hands  grasping  the  second  bar  ; 
push  off  backward. 


4  Mount  right  into  the  cross-leaning- 
rest  facing  the  bars  ;  swing 
through  forward  and  backward 
and  shears  backward  into  the  rid- 
ingseat on  the  first  bar  (in  front 
of  the  right  hand);  dismount  to 
the  left,  rearvault  over  the  sec- 
ond bar. 


Fig.  139. 

5  Mount  right  into  the  cross-leaning- 
rest  facing  the  bars ;  swing 
through  forward  then  over  the 
first  bar  and  with  a  quarter  turn 
right  come  into  the  front  side- 
leaningrest  ;  reverse  the  grasp  of 


178 


<; /•;/;.»/.  i  \-.  i  M i:ni< '. \  v  <.  >  .»/  Y.I  >  / v  > 


the  left  hand  and  frontvault 
right  over  both  hars. 
t;  .Mount  right  into  the  straddleseat 
in  front  of  the  hands  on  both 
bars  ;  raise  the  body  into  the  rear 
cross-leaningrest ;  swing  through 
backward  with  shears  backward 


into  the  straddleseat  in  from  of 
the  hands  :  change  the  left  hand 
to  the  reversed  grasp.  Turn  dis- 
mount forward  with  three  quar- 
ter turns  left,  the  right  leg  cir- 
cling forward  over  both 


LESSON    5. 

Side  leaningrest  and  combinations.     Sidestand  facing  the  bars. 
All  exercises  begin  with  a  short  nm. 


1  Jump  into  the  front-leaningrest, 
the  right  hand  on  the  first,  the 
left  on  the  second  bar  ;  swing 
through  and  over  the  second  bar 
into  the  outer  sideseat  on  the 
second  bar,  both  hands  grasping 
the  same  bar;  pushoff  forward. 


Fig.  140. 

2  As  in  Exercise  1,  but  from  the 
outer  sideseat,  change  to  the 
rear  side-leaningrest,  both  hands 
grasping  the  first  bar.  Reverse 
the  grasp  and  change  to  the  front- 
leaningrest  by  turning  right  or 
left  about ;  pushoff  backward. 


3  Jump  into  the  side-leaningrest  as 

in  Exercise  1;  lower  the  body  for- 
ward ;  the  chest  on  the  second  bar, 
the  hands  grasping  the  first  bar 
reversed  (the  body  lies  horizon- 
tally on  both  bars);  raise  the  legs 
and  the  body  upward,  trpper- 
armstand  (Fig.  140),  return  and 
jump  off  backward  facing  the 
bars. 

4  As  Exercise  3;  from  the  upperarm- 

stand  turn  over  forward  onto  the 
feet;  while  turning,  change  the 
hands  over  to  the  seco.nd  bar. 

5  Jump  into   the  side-leaningrest  as 

in  Exercise  1,  both  hands  grasp- 
ing the  second  bar;  half  turn 
right  or  left  into  the  rear  side- 
leaningrest;  the  hands  reversed; 
bend  the  hips  and  lower  the 
body,  through  between  the  bars, 
into  the  hammockhang  on  the 
heels  and  the  hands,  by  drop- 
ping the  feet,  come  to  a  stand. 

6  As  in  Exercise  5;  out  of  the  rear- 

leaningrest,  lower  the  body 
backward  and  lie  on  the  bars, 
the  body  horizontal,  the  hands 
grasping  the  first  bar;  raise  the 
body  backward,  the  feet  up- 
ward, and  roll  off  backward, 


PARALLEL   BARS 


179 


alight  facing  the  bars.  The  hands 
give  up  their  hold  as  soon  as 
the  feet  are  turned  towards  the 
floor. 

7  Jump   into    the    front-leaningrest, 

the  hands  grasping  the  second 
bar;  the  flankvault  right  or  left 
over  both  bars. 

8  Jump   into  the   front   leaningrest, 

the  hands  on  the  second  bar ; 
frontvault  right  or  left  over  both 
bars.  The  off  hand  changes  to 


the  reversed  grasp  before  vault- 
ing. 

9  Jump  into  the  front-leaningrest; 
the  hanJs  on  the  second  bar, 
rearvault  over  both  bars. 

O^Jump  into  the  front-leaningrest; 
the  hands  on  the  second  bar; 
step  with  the  right  foot  on  the 
first  bar,  turn  over  forward, 
(pushoff  with  the  foot  and  the 
hands).  Alight  back  to  the 
bars.  (Handspring.) 


LESSON    6. 

Vault  over  the  first  bar  into  a  seat  or  leaningrest  and  vault  over 

the  second  bar. 


1  Sidestand  facing  the  bars,  take  a 

short  run  and  frontvault  right 
over  the  first  bar,  the  right  hand 
grasping  the  second  bar;  swing 
through  forward  into  the  strad- 
dleseat  in  front  of  the  hands; 
swing  through  backward  and 
frontvault  right. 

2  Stand  as  in   Exercise  1,  rearvault 

right  over  the  first  bar,  the  right 
hand  grasping  the  second  bar; 
swing  through  backward  into  the 
straddleseat  behind  the  hands; 
swing  through  forward  and  rear- 
vault  right. 

3  Frontvault  right,  over  the  first  bar, 

as  in  Exercise  1;  swing  through 
forward  into  the  rear  cross-lean- 
ingrest;  swing  through  backward 
and  frontvault  right,  with  a  quar- 
ter turn  right  or  left. 

4  Rearvault  right  over  the  first  bar, 

as  in  Exercise  2;  swing  backward 
into  the  front  cross-leaningrest; 
swing  through  forward  and  rear- 
vault  right  with  a  quarter  turn 
left. 


5  Frontvault  right  over  the  first  bar, 

swing  through  forward  to  side- 
seat  right  on  the  left  bar,  see 
Exercise  1,  Lesson  6,  of  the  First 
Grade  (the  right  thigh  in  front 
of  the  left  hand,  the  left  leg  be- 
tween the  bars).  Turnmount 
left  forward  into  the  straddleseat 
on  both  bars  behind  the  hands; 
swing  through  forward  and  rear- 
vault  left  with  a  quarter  turn 
left. 

6  Rearvault  right  over  the  first  bar ; 

swing  through  backward  and 
shears  backward  into  the  strad- 
dleseat on  both  bars  in  front  of 
the  han:ls;  swing  through  back- 
ward and  frontvault  left,  with 
one  half  turn  right. 

7  Frontvault  right  over  the  first  bar, 

swing  through  forward  and  shears 
forward  into  the  straddleseat  on 
both  bars  behin  1  the  hanls; 
swing  through  forward,  and  rear- 
vault  left  with  one  half  turn 
right. 


GERM  A  X-A  M  /•:/.'  /'  . !  .V   GYMNASTICS 


Fig.   141  a. 


Fig.  141  b. 


ADVANCED    GRADE. 

LESSON    1. 

Swing  in  the  centre  of  the  bars,  -with  bending  and  straightening  the 
arms  (dip).     Mounts  and  vaults. 


1  Crossstand,  take  a  short  run  and 

jump  into  the  crossrest  in  the 
centre  of  the  bars;  swing,  bend 
and  straighten  the  arms  during 
the  foreswing  (foredip)  several 
times  (Fig.  141).  Frontvault 
right. 

2  As    Exercise     1,    but    bend    and 

straighten  the  arms  during  the 
backswing  (backdip)  several 
times.  Rearvault  right. 

3  As  Exercise   1,   one   foredip,   two 

intermediate  swings  with  straight 
arms,  and  one  backdip.  Rear- 
vault  left. 

4  As  Exercise  1,  fore  and  backdip 

without  intermediate  swings  (the 
arms  straight  at  the  end  of  each 
swing).  In  the  backswing  front- 
vault  left. 

5  As    Exercise    1,    one  foredip  and 

mount  into  the  sideseat  left  on 
the  right  bar  in  front  of  the 
hand;  circle  forward  with  the 
right  leg  over  the  right  bar,  at 
the  same  time  turning  the  body 
left  about,  into  the  straddleseat 
on  both  -bars  behind  the  hands. 


Turnmount  forward  right,  fore- 
dip  and  rearvault  right. 

6  As  Exercise  1,  backdip  and  shears- 

mount  backward  into  the  strad- 
dleseat in  front  of  the  hands; 
backdip  with  frontvault  right. 

7  As  Exercise  1,  one  or  more  fore- 

dips;  after  the  last  swing  shears 
forward  into  the  straddleseat  be- 
hind the  hands;  swing  through 
forward  and  rearvault  left  with 
half  a  turn  left. 

8  As  Exercise  1,  backdip  and  shears 

backward  into  the  straddleseat 
in  front  of  the  hands;  from 
here  repeat  the  dip  and  shears 
backward  into  the  straddleseat; 
swing  through  backward  and 
frontvault  left  with  one  half 
turn  right. 

9  As   Exercise   1,  foredip  with  one 

half  turn  right  or  left  into  the 
npperannhang;  uprise  in  the 
foreswing  to  the  rest  and  then 
appropriate  vaults. 

10  As  Exercise  9;  with  backdip  and 
uprise  in  backswing  and  appro- 
priate vaults. 


PARALLEL  BARS 


181 


LESSON    2. 

Dip  with  hopping,  shoulderstand,  upstart,  and  vaults. 
All  exercises  on  this  lesson  begin  from  the  crossrest. 


1  Foredip  with  hopping  forward 
(both  hands  grasping  forward 
simultaneously)  to  the  other  end 
of  the  bar ;  in  the  last  swing 
straddleoff  forward  over  both 
bars  (push  off  strongly  with  the 
hands). 


Fig.  142. 

2  Backdip,   with  hopping  backward 

to  the  end  of  the  bars  ;  in  the 
last  swing  straddleoff  backward 
over  one  or  both  bars  (assistance 
needed). 

3  In  the  centre  of  the  bars ;  alternate 

the  foredip  and  hopping  forward 
with  the  backdip  and  hopping 
backward  ;  in  the  last  swing 
front  or  rearvault  over  the  right 
bar. 

4  Foredip  with  hopping  forward  to 

the  centre  of  the  bars  ;  in  the 
last  backswing  lower  the  right 
shoulder  onto  the  right  bar  and 
raise  the  body  into  a  vertical  po- 


sition —  shoulder  standright  (Fig. 
142);  turn  over  sideways  and 
alight  at  the  right  side  of  the 
bars. 

5  Backdip  with  hopping  backward  to 

the  centre  of  the  bars ;  in  the  last 
swing  raise  the  body  into  the 
shoulderstand  left;  straighten  the 
arms  partly  and  frontvault  right. 

6  Foredip  with  hopping  forward  to 

the  centre  of  the  bars;  in  the 
last  backswing  raise  the  body 
vertically  into  the  upperarm- 
stand  (Fig.  143);  lower  the  legs, 
straighten  the  arms  partly  and 
swing  forward  with  rearvault 
right. 


Fig.  143. 

Backdip  with  hopping  backward  to 
the  centre  of  the  bars  ;  in  the 
last  backswing  raise  the  body  into 
the  upperarmstand  ;  bend  the 


182 


GERMAN-AMEU1CAN   GYM.\.\  >  IK  > 


hips  and  roll  forward  with  strad- 
dling the  legs  sideways  into  the 
straddleseat  ou  both  bars  in  front 
of  the  hands;  swing  backward 
and  execute  a  high  frontvault 
over  the  right  bar. 

8  Foredip  with   hopping  forward  to 

the  centre  of  the  bars ;  in  the  last 
swing  rise  into  a  shoulderstand 
right;  change  to  the  upperarm- 
stand;  bend  the  hips  and  upstart 
into  the  rest;  swing  through  for- 
ward; pushoff  and  alight  at  the 
end  of  the  bars  with  a  quarter 
turn  right  or  left. 

9  Backdip   with    hopping  backward 

to  the  centre  of  the  bars  ;  in  the 
last  backswing  rise  to  the  upper- 
armstand  ;  bend  the  hips,  roll 
forward  slowly,  and  uprise  into 
the  rest  with  straight  arms  ;  raise 
the  legs  forward  ;  leglever ;  swing 


backward  into  the  handstand 
(Fig.  144;;  swing  through  for- 
ward with  rearvault  right  and 
half  turn  left. 


Fig.   144. 


LESSON    3. 
Roll  with  bent  and  straight  hips.      Uprise,  upstart,  and  vaults. 

All  the  exercises  of  this  lesson  begin  from  the  upperarmhang  in  the  centre 

of  the  bars. 


1  Swing  forward  and  backward;  in 

the  last  foreswing  roll  over  back- 
ward, straddling  the  legs  into  the 
straddleseat  behind  the  hands; 
roll  over  forward  (on  the  arms) 
through  the  bars  (closing  the 
legs)  and  uprise  in  the  back- 
swing  into  the  rest;  swing  for- 
ward and  rearvault  right. 

2  Swing,  and  in  the  last  backswing 

bend  the  hips,  roll  forward  strad- 
dling the  legs  into  the  straddleseat 
in  front  of  the  hands;  roll  over 
backward  into  the  arnihang,  clos- 
ing the  legs  and  straightening  the 


hips;  uprise  in  the  foreswing  into 
the  rest  with  straight  arms ;  rear- 
vault  right. 

3  Swing  and  roll  over  backward  (a 

complete  turn)  with  straight  body; 
bend  the  hips  to  a  half  turn  over 
and  upstart  into  the  rest;  swing 
forward  and  rearvault  left. 

4  Swing  and   roll   over    forward   (a 

complete  turn)  with  straight 
body  ;  uprise  in  the  backswing, 
into  the  rest  drop  back  onto  the 
arms  with  the  hips  bent  to  the 
half  turn  over  and  upstart;  swing 
back  and  frontvault  right. 


PARALLEL    BARS 


183 


5  Swing  and  roll  backward  as  in  Ex- 

ercise 3,  and  uprise  in  the  fore- 
swing  into  the  rest;  swing  back 
into  the  handstand;  swing  for- 
ward and  rearvault  right  with  a 
half  turn  right. 

6  Swing  and  roll  over  forward  as  in 

Exercise  4 ;  with  the  returnswing 
roll  over  backward  as  in  Exercise 
5  to  a  half  turn  over ;  upstart  into 
a  handstand  ;  frontvault  right 
with  a  half  turn  left. 

7  Swing,   and  in  the  foreswing  roll 

over  backward  (with  straighten- 
ing the  hips  quickly)  into  the 
upperarmstand  ;  lower  the  legs 
slowly  into  the  lever  on  the  right 
elbow  (Fig.  145);  change  to  the 
left  elbow  lever  and  frontvault 
left  with  half  a  turn  right. 

8  Swing  and  roll  over  backward  as 

in  Exercise  7  into  a   handstand 


with  bent  arms  ;  straightening 
the  arms  and  walk  forward  on 
the  hands  to  the  end  of  the  bar; 
straddleoff  forward. 


Fig.  145. 

9  Swing  and  roll  over  backward  as 
in  Exercise  3;  in  the  next  back- 
swing  uprise  to  a  handstand; 
walk  forward  on  the  hands  to  the 
end  of  the  bars  and  turn  over 
(handspring)  forward  with 
straight  arms. 


LESSON    4. 

Vaults  over  the  first  bar  into  the  rest;  intermediate   exercises  and 
vaults  over  the  second  bar. 

All  exercises  in  this  lesson  begin  from  a  sidestand,  in  front  of  the  bars.  Take 
a  short  run,  vault  over  the  first  bar,  each  hand  grasping  one  bar.  (  These 
exercises  should  be  practised  on  the  low  barfirst.~) 


1  Frontvault  right  over  the  first  bar; 

swing    forward;    backward    and 
frontvault  right. 

2  Rearvault  right  over  the  first  bar; 

swing    backward;    forward    and 
rearvault  right. 

3  Frontvault  right  over  the  first  bar; 

swing  forward  and  rearvault  right. 

4  Rearvault  right  over  the  first  bar; 

swing  backward  and  frontvault 
right. 

5  Frontvault  right  over  the  first  bar; 

swing    forward;    backward,   and 


during  the  backswing  circle  the 
left  leg  backward  over  the  first 
bar  (lift  the  left  hand  momenta- 
rily, the  right  leg  in  the  mean- 
time swings  backward  between 
the  bars);  swing  forward  and 
rearvault  right. 

6  Rearvault  right  over  the  first  bar; 
swing  backward;  forward,  and  in 
the  foreswing  circle  the  left  leg 
forward  over  the  first  bar  (the 
right  leg  meanwhile  swinging 
between  the  bars);  swing  back- 


184 


GERMAN-AMERIC.  1  V    /.  )   M  \ .  I  8  11'  > 


ward  and  frontvault  right  over 
the  second  bar. 

7  Frontvault  right  over  the  first  bar; 

swing  forward  and  backward, 
and  in  the  backswing  straddle 
the  legs  over  both  bars  ;  swing 
forward  and  rearvault  right. 

8  Rearvault  right  over  the  first  bar; 

swing  backward  and  forward, 
and  in  the  foreswing  straddle 
the  legs  over  both  bars  ;  swing 
backward  and  frontvault  right. 

9  Frontvault  right  over  the  first  bar; 

swing  forward;  backward  and  in 
the  backswing  circle  backward 
with  both  legs  over  the  first  bar; 
swing  forwardand  rearvault  rigfct. 


10  Real-vault  right  over  the  first  bar; 

swing  backward  and  circle  for- 
ward with  both  legs  over  the  first 
bar;  swing  backward  and  front- 
vault  right. 

11  Frontvault  right  over  the  first  bar; 

swing  forward  and  circle  back- 
ward with  both  legs  over  the 
first  bar,  and  frontvault  right. 

12  Rearvault  right  over  the  first  bar; 

swing  backward;  circle  forward 
with  both  legs  over  the  first  and 
rearvault  right.  (Rearvault 
over  both  bars  to  be  executed 
without  intermission) — double 
rearvault  right. 


LESSON    5. 

Vaults  over  the  first  bar  into  the  armhang,  roll,  uprise, 
upstart,  and  vaults  over  the  second  bar. 

All  exercises  begin  as  in  Lesxon  4. 


1  Frontvault  right  over  the  first  bar 

into  the  armhang  in  the  centre 
of  the  bars ;  swing  forward,  back- 
ward and  uprise  in  the  backswing 
into  the  rest.  Swing  forward 
and  rearvault  right. 

2  Rearvault  right  over  the  first  bar 

into  the  armhang  in  the  centre ; 
swing  backward,  forward  and 
uprise  in  the  foreswing  into  the 
rest ;  swing  backward  into  a 
handstand  and  frontvault  right. 

3  Frontvault  right  over  the  first  bar 

into  the  armhang  in  the  centre; 
swing  forward  to  a  half  turn  over; 
upstart  into  the  rest;  swing  back 
to  a  handstand;  swing  forward 
and  rearvault  right  with  half  a 
turn  left. 

4  Rearvault  right  over  the  first  bar 

into  the  armhang  in  the  centre; 


swing  backward,  forward,  and 
roll  backward  with  straight  body  ; 
uprise  in  the  foreswing  into  the 
rest;  swing  backward  into  a 
handstand;  turn  over  sideways 
with  straight  body,  alighting  in 
the  crossstand. 

5  Frontvault  right  over  the  first  bar 

into  the  armhang  in  the  centre; 
swing  forward,  backward  and 
uprise  in  the  backswing  into  the 
elbow  lever  right ;  lower  the 
legs,  swinging  through  the  bars 
(straightening  the  arms)  and 
hold  them  in  a  balance  over  the 
bars;  one  quarter  turn  right  (the 
left  hand  grasping  over  to  the 
second  bar),  pushoff  forward. 

6  Rearvault  right  over  the  first  bar 

into  the  armhang  in  the  centre; 
swing  backward,  forward  and 


PARALLEL   BARS 


185 


roll  backward  with  straightening 
the  body  quickly  into  a  shoulder- 
stand  right ;  push  up  to  a  hand- 
stand ;  step  over  with  the  left 
hand  onto  the  second  bar  with 
a  quarter  turn  right  and  a  high 
frontvault  over  the  second  bar. 
7  Frontvault  right  over  the  first  bar 
into  the  armhang  in  the  centre; 
roll  backward  (straight  hips)  and 
uprise  in  the  next  backswing  to 
a  handstand  ;  step  over  into  a 


handstand  on  the  second  bar  and 
squatoff  forward. 

Rearvault  right  over  the  first  bar 
into  the  armhang  in  the  centre; 
roll  forward  (straight  hips)  and 
in  the  returnswing  quickly  roll 
over  backward  with  straight  hips 
into  a  handstand  with  bent  arms; 
straighten  the  arms,  step  over  to 
a  handstand  on  the  second  bar; 
turn  over  or  straddleoff  forward. 


LESSON    6. 


Vaults   over  both   Bars. 


These  should  be  practised  on  the  low  bars  first. 

Lessons  4  and  5. 


The  exercises  beyin  as  in 


1  Squat   forward  over  the   first   bar 

into  a  stand  in  the  centre;  flank- 
vault  right,  the  hands  grasping 
the  second  bar. 

2  Straddle  forward  over  the  first  bar 

into  a  stand  in  the  centre ;  squat 
forward,  the  hands  grasping  the 
second  bar. 

3  Squat  forward  over  both  bars,  the 

hands  grasping  the  second  bar; 
also  with  the  hands  grasping  the 
first  bar. 

4  Straddle  forward   over  both  bars, 

the  hands  grasping  the  second 
bar. 


5  Flankvault  right   over  both  bars, 

the  hands  grasping  both  bars. 

6  Frontvault   right   over  both   bars, 

the  hands  grasping  both  bars. 

7  Rearvault  left  over  both  bars,  the 

hands  grasping  both  bars. 

8  Exercises  3,  4,  5,  6,  and  7  with  a 

quarter  or  a  half  turn  right  or 
left. 

9  Turn  over  both  bars  (handspring), 

both  hands  grasping  either  the 
second  or  the  first  bar  (assis- 
tance necessary). 


186 


i ;  /•:/;  M  .  I  A - .  i  M  1:1;  WAJN   M  -V -\  - 1  .s 27C'S 


SIDE     HORSE 

Bv  VI  1. 1. 1  A.U   A..STECHKU 

Every  exercise  begins,  with  a  run. 

I  6   Rearvault  left  with  a  quarter  turn 

1  Flankvault  right  (Fig.  146).  right. 

2  Frontvault  right  (Fig.  147).  7   Rearvault  left   with    a   half    turn 
:)   Rearvault  left  (Fig.  148).  right. 

4  Frontvault   right   with    a    quarter      8   Squatvault     forward     (Fig.    149); 

turn  left.  also  with  a  quarter  or  half  turn 

5  Frontvault  right  with  a  half  turn  left  or  right. 

left. 


Fig.   146. 


9  Straddlevault  forward  (Fig.  150); 
also  with  a  quarter  or  half  turn 
left  or  right  (help). 

II 

1  Wolf's  vault  left  (Fig.  151). 

2  Wolf's  vault  in  form  of  a  f  rontvault. 


3  Wolfs  vault  in  form  of  a  rearvault 

(Fig.  152). 

4  Thief's  vault  (Fig.  153).     (Spring 

off  Avith  one  foot,  the  board  about 
three  feet  from  the  horse.)  Also 
with  a  quarter  or  half  turn  left 
or  right. 


187 


Fig.  147. 


Fig.    148. 


Fig.   149. 


Fig.   150. 


188 


GEHMAN-AMEltlCAN   GYMNASTICS 


Fig.   757. 


Fig.   752. 


Fig.  153. 


SIDE  HORSE 


189 


Fig.  154. 


5  Freejump  forward  (as  Exercise  4, 

but  without  the  help  of  the 
hands);  also  with  a  quarter  or  a 
half  turn  left  or  right.  (When 
springing  off  left,  turn  left.) 

6  Pike's  leap,  resting  the  hands  mo- 

mentarily on  the  pommels  (Fig. 
154),  and  then  on  the  shoulders 
of  the  leader. 

7  Pike's  leap,   resting  the  hands  on 

the  shoulders  of  the  leader. 

Ill 

1  Jump    into    the    freerest    several 

times  (land  on  the  balls  of  the 
of  the  feet,  bending  the  knees 
well)  (Fig.  155). 

2  As  Exercise  1,  after  landing  on  the 

board,  mount  right  into  the  riding- 
seat  on  the  croup  (stridemount), 
(Fig.  156),  dismount  into  the 
sidestand  on  the  right  side. 


For  description  of  sidestand,  etc., 
see  explanations  on  page  20. 


Fig.  155. 


3  As  Exercise  2,  from  the  ridingseat 
swing  the  legs  backward  three 
times  (the  knees  and  heels  locked, 


190 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  G YMNASTWS 


the  legs  straight),  pushoff  back- 
ward. 

As  Exercise  2,  from  the  riding- 
seat  swing  the  legs  backward  and 
cross  them  (right  under  the  left) 
with  a  turn  left  about  (shears  left 
backward);  straddleoff  forward. 

As  Exercise  4,  with  two  shears 
backward,  but  with  a  right  about 
(left  leg  under);  swing  both  legs 
backward  and  dismount  to  the 
right. 


IV 

1  Stridemount  left  into  the  ridingseat 

on  the  neck;  dismount  onto  the 
board. 

2  As   Exercise    1,    then    left    shears 

backward;  swing  both  legs  for- 
ward three  times  and  dismount 
to  the  right  with  a  quarter  turn 
left. 

3  As  Exercise  2,   after  the   shears, 

swing  the  legs  forward  and  cross 
them  (left  under  right)  with  a 


Fig    156. 


turn  left  about  (shears  left  for- 
ward), (Fig.  157  shows  the  exer- 
cise in  the  saddle);  push  off 
backward. 

4  As  Exercise  1,  then  shears  left  for- 

ward (the  hands  on  the  neck) 
and  shears  right  forward,  dis- 
mount left  with  a  quarter  turn 
right. 

5  As  Exercise  1,  then  shears  left  for- 

ward and  backward;  dismount 
left  by  swinging  both  legs 
(closed)  backward. 


Jump  into  the  frontrest,  then 

1  One  half  circle  right  inward  and 

return  (Fig.  158);  several  times. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  then  complete  the 

circle  by  passing  the  leg  back- 
ward under  the  left  hand  (keep 
the  body  well  over  the  horse). 

3  One  half  circle  right  outward  (pass- 

ing under  the  left  hand)  and  re- 
turn, several  times. 

4  As  Exercise  3,  then  complete  the 


SIDE  HORSE 


191 


Fig.  157. 


Fig.  158. 


Fig.  159. 


192 


r;)M/_y.i>T/r,s 


circle  by  passing  backward  under 
the  right  hand. 

5  As  Exercise  1,  jump  down  back- 
ward and  squatvault  forward. 

0  As  Exercise  2,  jump  down  back- 
ward  and  squatvault  forward 
with  a  quarter  turn  left  or  right. 

7  As  Exercise  3,  jump  down   back- 

ward and  straddlevault  forward. 

8  As  Exercise  4,  jump  down  back- 

ward and  straddlevault  forward 
with  a  quarter  turn  left  or  right. 


VI 

1  Mount  left  into  the  ridingseat  on- 

to the  croup  (facing  outward  — 
stridemount  left  by  the  opposite 
side)  (Fig.  159);  straddleoff  for- 
ward. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  then  swing  the  legs 

backward  into  the  front-leaning- 
rest  (Fig.  160);  straddleoff  for- 
ward. 

3  As  Exercise  2,  from  the  leaning- 

rest,   shears  left  backward   into 


Fig.  160. 


the  ridingseat  on  the  croup;  push- 
off  backward. 

4  Mount  as  in  Exercise  1   into  the 

saddle,  then  shears  left  and  right 
backward;  dismount  left  back- 
ward onto  the  board  and  front- 
vault  right. 

5  As  Exercise  4,  with  shears  left  and 

right  forward;  dismount  back- 
ward onto  the  board  and  rear- 
vault  left. 


VII 

.  —  A  feint  left  is  as  follows  : 
From  the  rest,  the  left  leg  is 
moved  over  the  neck  and  around 
the  left  arm  (the  body  in  the 
meantime  executing  a  quarter 
turn  right),  until  the  leg  is  in 
a  horizontal  position  on  the  off 
side  of  the  horse.  The  return 
movement  takes  place  immedi- 
ately (Fig.  161). 


SIDE  HORSE 


193 


1  Feint  left;    jump  down  upon  the 

board   and   repeat   right   several 
times. 

2  Feint  left  and  right  as  a  continu- 

ous movement,  without  jumping 
down. 

3  Feint  left  and  one  half  circle  right 

inward  and  return. 

4  As   Exercise  3,  and  a  circle  right 

inward. 

5  One  half  circle  right  forward  with 


both  legs  (into  the  backrest) 
(Fig.  162).  Pushoff  forward 
(raising  the  legs  well  upwards). 

6  As  Exercise  5 ;  from  the   backrest 

one  half  circle  left  backward  with 
both  legs.  Pushoff  backward 
(raising  the  legs  backward). 

7  Feint  left  and  one  half  circle  right 

forward  with  both  legs  ;  squat 
backward  into  the  frontstand. 


Fig.  161. 


Fig.   162. 


8  As  Exercise  7,  but  the  squat  back- 
ward into  the  frontrest,  then 
squat  forward  with  one  quarter 
turn  left. 

VIII 

1  One  half  circle  right  forward  under 
the  left  hand  into  the  crossstrad- 
dle  position  on  the  saddle,  then 
turndismount  left  forward. 

NOTE.  —  A  turndismount  is  as  fol- 
lows :  —  The  right  leg  being  in 
front,  the  weight  of  the  body  is 


thrown  over  onto  the  right  hand. 
The  left  leg  then  describes  a  half 
circle  forward,  the  body  at  the 
same  time  executing  a  quarter 
turn  right  and  the  scholar  lands 
in  the  crossstand  on  the  off  side 
of  the  horse  in  line  with  the 
pommel  (Fig.  163). 

2  As  Exercise  1,  then  turnmount  left 

forward  into  the  ridingseat  on 
the  croup  (facing  the  saddle); 
pushoff  backward. 

3  As  Exercise  2,  from  the  seat  dis- 


194 


GERM  A  N-AMERICAN    G  YMNA  S  TICS 


mount  onto  the  board  ;  squat  left 
forward  (one  leg)  and  turndis- 
mount  right  forward. 

4  Jump  into  the  freerest,  then  squat 

right  forward  ;  face  left  about ; 
turnmount  right  forward  onto 
the  croup.  Dismount  right  with 
a  quarter  turn  left. 

5  One  half  circle  left  inward;  turn- 

mount  right  forward ;  dismount 
onto  the  board  and  wolf's  vault 
right  forward. 


Fig.  183. 

6  Jump  into  the  freerest,  squat  for- 
ward into  the  backrest,  one  half 
circle  left  inward  and  immedi- 
ately turnmount  left  forward  onto 
the  croup.  Stride  dismount  right 
backward  onto  the  board  and 
straddlevault  forward. 


IX 

1  One  half  circle  left  forward  with 
both  legs  (into  the  backrest),  one 
half  circle  right  inward  and  re- 


turn. (The  right  leg  moves 
backward  over  the  croup  into  the 
crossstraddle  position  in  th<-  sad- 
dle, and  return.)  Pushoff  for- 
ward. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  one  half  circle  right 

inward,  then  complete  the  circle 
by  passing  right  forward  under 
the  left  hand.  Pushoff  forward 
with  one  half  turn  left. 

3  Wolf's  vault  right  forward  into  the 

backrest ;  circle  outward  right 
(the  right  leg  passing  first  under 
the  left  hand).  Turnmount  right 
forward  onto  the  neck.  Stride- 
mount  right  onto  the  croup  (Fig. 
164),  pushoff  backward  with 
one  half  turn  left. 

4  Wolf's  vault  left  forward  into  the 

backrest  ;  one  half  circle  right 
inward ;  one  half  turn  right;  turn- 
mount  left  forward  onto  the  neck; 
stridemount  left  by  the  opposite 
side  into  the  ridingseat  in  the 
saddle  (facing  the  croup,  the 
hands  grasping  the  pommels, 
right  forward,  the  left  leg  swings 
around  backward  and  passes 
under  the  right  hand,  landing  the 
body  in  the  saddle).  (Similar  to 
Fig.  177,  Long  Horse.)  Repeat 
this  stridemount  onto  the  croup; 
then  dismount  tothe  left  by  swing- 
ing both  legs  forward  and  facing 
right  about. 

5  Squat  forward  into  the   backrest, 

one  half  turn  left  (hopping)  squat 
forward  and  one  half  circle  left 
backward  with  both  legs ;  one 
half  circle  right  forward  with 
both  legs  ;  turnmount  right  for- 
ward onto  the  croup.  Swing 
both  legs  backward  and  dis- 
mount to  the  right  with  one  half 
turn  left. 


SIDE  HOUSE 


195 


Fig.  164. 


1  Jump  and  swing  the  legs  backward 

into  the  freerest;  execute  a  quick 
sidestraddle  and  sink  into  the 
frontrest.  Then  circle  right  in- 
ward and  left  inward  ;  rearvault 
left. 

2  As  in  Exercise  1,  raising  the  heels 

backward  (Fig.  165).  From  the 
frontrest  one  half  circle  right  in- 
ward, swing  the  legs  sideways  left 
and  right  (keep  the  body  well 
over  the  horse).  Jump  off  for- 
ward, when  the  legs  again  swing 
to  the  left. 

3  As  in  Exercise  1,  raising  the  knees  ; 

one  half  circle  right  inward ;  then 
continue  the  circle  with  the  right 
leg,  at  the  same  time  executing 
a  half  circle  left  inward  (the  left 
leg  crossing  over  the  right); 
(shears  left  sideways);  one  half 
circle  left  outward  and  rearvault 
left.  (When  executing  the  shears, 
see  that  the  legs  are  kept  per- 
fectly straight,  and  that  the 
weight  of  the  body  is  momen- 
tarily carried  over  onto  the  hand 
keeping  its  hold.) 


As  in  Exercise  1,  with  crossstrad- 
dle ;  one  half  circle  right  inward ; 
shears  left  and  right  sideways  ; 
turnmount  left  forward  onto  the 


Fij.  165. 

croup  ;  feint  right  and  rearvault 
right.  (From  the  ridingseat  on 
the  croup  the  left  hand  grasps 


196 


<:  1.1: MAN-AMERICAN  G YMNASTICS 


the  farthest  pommel,  the  right  the 
second  ;  the  body  being  raised, 
the  right  leg  executes  the  feint, 
which  is  immediately  followed  by 
the  vault  over  the  neck.) 


Fig.  166. 

5  As  in  Exercise  1,  with  crossing  the 
legs  ;  one  half  circle  right  inward 
followed  instantly  by  shears  left 
and  right  sideways,  squat  right 
backward,  feint  right  and  rear- 
vault  right  with  one  half  turn 
left. 

XI 

1  Feint  right  with   both  legs   (Fig. 

166) ;  then  a  circle  right  outward ; 
sidestraddle  stand  on  the  horse 
(croup and  neck),  high  jump  for- 
ward swinging  the  arms  up. 

2  As  in  Exercise  1,  after  the  circle 

right  jump  onto  the  board,  follow- 
ing immediately  with  a  turn- 
mount  onto  the  neck  (Fig.  167); 
swing  back  into  the  leaningrest 
and  shears  left  backward  (lean 
forward  as  far  as  possible). 


As  in  Exercise  2,  but  the  turn- 
mount  takes  place  from  the  rest; 
shearsdismount  left  backward. 

As  in  Exercise  3,  but  after  the 
mount  shears  left  forward  ;  then 
shearsdismount  left  forward  (Fig. 
168)  (sit  back  as  far  as  possi- 
ble, the  hands  behind,  and  push- 
off  backward  the  moment  the 
legs  cross). 

Feint  right  with  both  legs  ;  one 
half  circle  left  forward  with  both 
legs ;  hop  left  about  into  the 
frontrest ;  feint  right  and  turn- 
mount  right  backward  (onto  the 
croup);  shears  left  forward  and 
rearvault  right  over  the  neck, 
both  hands  grasping  the  farthest 
pommel. 


Fig.   167. 

XII 

Rearvault  left  with  one  half  turn 
left  into  the  crossstand  alongside 
of  the  neck  (lean  far  over  to  the 
left  side). 


SIDE  HORSE 


197 


Fig.   168. 

2  Rearvault  left  with  rearmount  left 

into  the  ridingseat  on  the  neck 
(help  at  the  left  side).  Swing 
both  legs  backward  and  squat  off 
forward. 

3  Double  rearvault  left  over  the  croup 

and  neck  (Fig.  169).    (The  body 
must  be  kept  close  to  the  left  arm. 
After  the  body  has  passed  over  the 
neck,  the  right  hand  is  placed  on 
the  neck,  and  the  left  dropped  to 
the     side.      The    body 
executes  a  quarter  turn 
'left.)     (Help  at  the  left 
side.) 

4  Triple  rearvault  left  (Fig. 

170)  (over  the  croup, 
the  neck,  and  the  sad- 
dle). The  body  exe- 
cutes a  three  quarter 
turn  left  and  comes 
into  a  crossstand  on  the 
right  side  of  the  horse 
(help  at  the  right  side). 


Fig.   169. 


5  As  in  Exercises  3  and  4,  with  a  feint 

left. 

6  As  in  Exercises  3  and  4,   with  a 

feint  left  with  both  legs. 


Fig.  170. 


V.ix 


<;  /•;/.•  .V.  I  .V.I  .V  Hi:  H  '.  I  .V    r;  y\i  .v.  1  > T/f  'X 


LONG     HORSE 


BY  WILLIAM  A.  STECHEII 


All  exercises  begin  with  a  run. 


1  Flankvault  right. 

2  Frontvault  right, 
o   Real-vault  left. 

4  Stridevault  right  (Fig.  171).  (The 
right  leg  swings  in  a  circle  inward 
over  the  horse,  and  the  scholar 
comes  into  a  crossstand  at  the 
left  side  of  the  horse. ) 


Fig.   171. 

5  Frontvault  with  one  quarter  or  one 

half  turn  left  or  right. 

6  Rearvault  with  one  quarter  or  one 

half  turn  left  or  right. 

7  Stridevault  with  one  quarter  or  one 

half  turn  left  or  right. 


II 


1  Jump  into  the  freerest,  the  hands 

on  the  croup  (several  times). 

2  As  in  Exercise  1,  with  the  hands 

in  the  saddle  ;  sidestraddle  and 
sink  in  the  ridingseat  on  the 
croup  ;  dismount  left  sideways. 

3  Jump,  the  hands  on  the  neck,  into 

the  ridingseat  in  the  saddle  (Fig. 
172);  swing  the  legs  backward 
into  the  leaningrest;  jump  off 
left  sideways  with  a  quarter  turn 
right. 

4  Jump  as  in  Exercise  2,  hut  directly 

into  the  leaningrest;  jump  off  left 
sideways  with  a  half  turn  right. 

5  As  is  Exercise  3,  then  straddleoff 

forward  from  the  ridingseat. 

6  As  in  Exercise  4,  then  straddleoff 

from  the   leaningrest   (lean  for- 
ward as  far  as  possible,  the  fin- 
gers over  the  end  of  the  horse). 
7   As  in  Exercise  3,  then  swing 
the   legs  backward  into  the 
freerest  and  straddleoff  for- 
ward. 

Ill 

1  Jump  into  the  freerest,  the  hands 
in  the  saddle  ;  sink  into  the 
ridingseat  in  the  saddle  ;  swing 
the  legs  backward  into  the  free- 
rest  several  times,  dismount  left 


LONG  HORSE 


199 


sideways  with  a  quarter  turn 
left. 

2  As  in   Exercise   1,   swing  the  legs 

backward;  shears  left  backward 
several  times;  place  the  hands 
behind  the  body,  and  dismount 
left  sideways  with  a  quarter  turn 
right. 

3  As  in  Exercise  1,  place  the  hands 

behind  the  body,  and  swing  the 
legs  forward  several  times,  closing 
them  over  the  horse  ;    dis- 
mount left  sideways   with 
a  half  turn  right. 

4  As     in     Exercise     3,     then 

shears  right  forward  sev- 
eral times;  the  hands  in 
front,  swing  the  legs  back- 
ward, and  with  a  quarter 
turn  left  come  into  the 
leaningrest  sideways, 
jumpoff  forward. 

5  As    in    Exercise    3  ;    then 

shears  right  forward  and 
left  backward;  frontlean- 
ingrest,  the  hands  on  the 
neck,  then  shears  left 
backward  into  the  front 
stand. 

6  As  in  Exercise  5;  after  the  shears 

forward  and  backward  swing  the 
legs  backward  into  the  freer- 
est,  the  hands  over  the  end  of 
the  horse  and  shears  backward 
(shearsdismount  backward). 

IV 

1  Stridemount  right  forward  into  the 

ridingseat  on  the  croup  (facing 
the  board);  dismount  left  side- 
ways. 

2  Stridemount  right  forward  by  the 

opposite  side  (the  right  leg  passes 
by  the  left  side,  the  scholar  faces 


the  saddle);  dismount  left  side- 
ways. 

3  As  in  Exercise  1,   landing  in  the 

saddle ;  Stridemount  right  forward 
onto  the  croup  (similar  to  Fig. 
164);  pushoff  backward. 

4  As  in  Exercise  2 ;  repeat  onto  the 

neck ;   straddleoff  forward. 

5  As  in  Exercise  3 ;  then  flankvault 

right  forward  (from  the  riding- 
seat  over  the  croup). 


Fig.   172. 

6  As   in   Exercise  2;  then  rearvault 

right  forward  (over  the  saddle). 

7  As  in  Exercise  2 ;  then  frontvault 

left  forward  (over  the  saddle). 

8  As  in  Exercises  6  and  7,  with  the 

vaults  with   one  quarter  or  one 
half  turn  left  or  right. 


Jump  into  the  frontrest  in  the  sad- 
dle, on  the  left  side  of  the  horse 
(Fig.  173);  pushoff  backward. 

As  in  Exercise  1 ;  circle  with  the 
right  leg  inward ;  jump  down  and 


200 


OEnMAN-AMl-:i:iCA.\   '.  YM.\ASTK  s 


Fig.   173. 


Fig.   174. 


directly  up  into  the  freerest;  push 
off  backward. 

3  As  in  Exercise  1 ;  circle  with  the 

right  leg  outward,  jump  down 
and  flankvault  left  forward. 

4  As  in  Exercise  2,  after  the  circle 

jump  down,  and  rearvault  left. 

5  As  in  Exercise  3,  after  the  circle 

jump  down,  and  rearvault  right. 

6  As  in  Exercise  4,  with  the  squat- 

vault  forward  (help). 

7  As  in  Exercise  4,  with  the  wolf's 

vault  left  forward. 

8  As  in  Exercise  4,  with  the  straddle- 

vault  forward  (help). 

9  As  above,  with  the  vaults  with  one 

quarter  or  one  half  turns  left  or 
right. 

VI 

1  Jump  into  the  freerest  with  raising 

the   trunk    upwards   (the   trunk 
and  legs  at  right  angles). 

2  As  in  Exercise  1,  the  head  touch- 

ing the  horse,  and  roll  over  for- 


ward into  the  ridingseat  —  roll 
forward  (Fig.  174)  (help  at  both 
sides);  dismount  left  sideways. 

3  Roll  forward  lying  flat  on  the  horse 

(help);  rise  up,  dropping  the  legs 
on  the  left  side,  into  the  crossseat 
left ;  the  hands  behind,  pushoff 
forward. 

4  Roll  forward  left  obliquely  into  the 

crossstand  at  the  left  side  (help 
at  the  left  side). 

5  Roll  forward  into  the   ridingseat; 

shears  for  ward;  roll  backward  in- 
to the  frontstand  (the  body  sinks 
backward  rapidly,  the  hands 
catching  hold  of  the  horse  over 
the  head.  The  legs  are  then 
quickly  raised  upward  and  back- 
ward, the  hands  at  the  same 
time  pressing  the  body  from  the 
horse)  (help  at  both  sides). 

6  Roll   forward   into   the   ridingseat 

and  then  immediately  roll  back- 
ward into  the  stand  on  the  board 
(help). 


LONG  HORSE 


VII 


1  Long  leap  into  the  freerest  on  the 

neck  ;  pushoff  left  sideways. 

2  As  in  Exercise  1,  then  straddleoff 

forward  (Fig.  175). 

3  As   in   Exercise    1,    straddling  off 

right  sideways  (before  pushing 
off  a  quarter  turn  left  is  executed, 
the  right  leg  in  front,  the  left 
behind)  (help). 

4  As  in  Exercise  1,  straddling  back- 

ward (with  a  half  turn)  (help). 

5  As  in  Exercise  1,  with  a  rearvault 

left  into  the  crossstand  at  the  left 
side  of  the  neck.  (Lean  far  over 
to  the  left)  (help). 

6  As  in  Exercise  1,  with  squat  for- 

ward (help). 

7  As  in  Exercise  1,  with  a  turnover 

(handspring)  with  bent  arms 
(Fig.  176)  (help). 

8  As   in    Exercise    7,   with   straight 

arms  (help). 


Fig.  175. 

VIII 

Jump,  immediately  swinging  the 
legs  forward,  the  hands  behind 
the  body  and  executing  a  shears 


201 


for- 


left   forward    (shearsraount 
ward);  straddleoff  forward. 
Shearsmount  left  forward  onto  the 
croup ;  stridedisinount  right  back- 
ward. 


Fig.  176. 

3  As  in  Exercise  2,  feint  right  and 

stridemount  right  forward  by  the 
opposite  side  (Fig.  177) ;  place  the 
hands  behind  and  dismount  right 
sideways. 

4  As  in  Exercise  2,  feint  right  and 

rearvault  right. 

6  As  in  Exercise  2,  feint  right  and 
rearvault  right  with  a  half  turn 
left. 

6  As  in  Exercise  2,  feint  right  and 
rearvault  right  with  a  rearmount 
into  the  ridingseat  in  the  saddle 
(keep  the  body  as  closely  to  the 
right  arm  as  possible  and  lean  to 


•202 


G  EHMAN-AMEBICAN  <;  YM  \ .  I  >  /  i<  s 


the  right  side) ;  the  hands  behind, 
dismount  right  sideways. 
7   As  in  Exercise  2;  feint  right  and 
rearvault    right  over  croup   and 
neck  (double  rearvault  right). 


IX 


1  Jump,  and   with  a  half  turn  left 

straddlemount  backward  into  the 
ridingseat  on  the  croup  (after 
the  turn  lean  well  forward,  rest- 
ing the  hands  on  the  horse  in 
front  of  the  body);  dismount  left 
sideways. 

2  Jump    as    above,    but    instead    of 

sinking  into  the  seat,  circle  the 
left  leg  backward  over  the  horse, 
and  land  in  the  crossstand  (stride- 
vault  left  backward)  (Fig.  178) 
(help). 

.'5  As  Exercise  2,  resting  on  the  left 
hand,  swing  the  right  leg  forward 
at  the  same  time  springing  off 
with  the  left  and  flankvault  right 
forward  (Fig.  179)  (also  called 
a  fencer's  vault). 

4  As  in  Exercise  3,  with  a  frontvault 

right. 

5  As  in  Exercise  3,  swinging  the  left 

leg  forward  and  a  rearvault  left. 

6  Lay  the  springboard  at  an  obtuse 

angle  to  the  horse,  and  execute 
the  fencer's  mounts  and  vaults. 
Help  is  needed,  when  vaulting 
over  the  saddle  and  neck. 


Jump  into  the  siderest  on  the  right 
side  of  the  horse ;  swing  the  left 
leg  backward  executing  a  three 
quarter  turn  left  into  the  riding- 
seat  in  the  saddle  (turnmount 
backward);  the  hands  behind, 
dismount  right  sideways. 


2  Turnmount  left  backward  into  the 

Middle;  shears  left  forward;  dis- 
mount right  sideways  with  a 
quarter  turn  left. 

3  As  in  Exercise  2,  then   a  quarter 

turn  left  (crossstraddle  position) 
and  turnmount  right  forward 
onto  the  croup;  the  hands  behind, 
dismount  right  sideways  with  one 
half  turn  left. 

4  As   in    Exercise    2,    but   onto   the 

neck;  shears  left  forward;  the 
hands  behind,  the  fingers  over 
the  end  of  the  horse,  shears  left 
forward  dismount  at  the  same 
time  —  (shearsdismount  forward 
—  see  Fig.  168)  (help). 

XI 

1  Frontvault  right  into  the  siderest 

on  the  left  side  of  the  horse 
(three  quarter  turn  left);  squat 
forward  (help). 

2  As  Exercise  1 ;  feint  right  and  one 

half  circle  with  both  legs  left  for- 
ward into  the  backrest;  pushoff 
forward  with  one  half  turn  right. 

3  As  in  Exercise  2,  from  the  back- 

rest, one  half  circle  with  both 
legs  right  backward  into  the 
frontrest;  straddle  over  forward 
(help). 

4  As  in  Exercise  1,  feint  right,  circle 

right  leg  outward  and  turnmount 
right  backward;  front  leaningrest 
on  the  neck  and  squat  forward 
(help). 

5  As  in  Exercise  2,  from  the  back- 

rest one  half  circle  of  both  legs 
right  backward,  turnmount  left 
backward;  sink  down  backward 
and  roll  backward  over  the  neck 
(help). 

0   As  in  Exercise  1,  feint  right  with 
both  legs,  and  flankvault  left. 


LONG  HORSE 


203 


Fig.  177. 


Fig.  178. 


Fig.  179. 


204 


GERMAN-AMERICA  \    <;  YM  .\  .  1  .s  TH  '8 


7  As   in   Exercise   0,    with   front   or 

rear  vault. 

8  As  in  Exercise  6,  with  double  rear- 

vault. 

XII 

1  Free  jump  (spring  off  with  one 
foot)  into  a  stand  on  the  horse; 
fall  forward  into  the  front  lean- 
ingrest;  straddleoff  backward. 


2  As  in  Exercise  1;  after  the  straddle- 

on*,  immediately  execute  a  flank- 
vault  right. 

3  As    in   Exercise    2,    with  a   high 

frontvault  (Fig.  180);  also  a 
frontvault  with  one  quarter  or 
one  half  turn  right. 

4  As  in  Exercise  2,  with  a  rearvauli ; 

also  a  rearvault  with  one  quarter 
or  one  half  turn  right  or  left. 


From  the  stand  on  the  horse  as  in 
Exercise  1,  lean  forward  and  turn 
over  forward  (handspring)  with 
bent  or  straight  arms  (help). 

From  the  stand  on  the  horse  as 
in  Exercise  1,  handstand  on  the 


neck  and  pushoff  left  sideways 
into  the  crossstand  (Fig.  181). 

7  As  in  Exercise  6,  squatting  off  from 

the  handstand  (help). 

8  As  in  Exercise  6,   straddling  off 

(help). 


VERTICAL   LADDER  205 


VERTICAL     LADDER 

Bv  DR.  HENRY  HARTUNQ 

THESE  exercises  may  be  arranged  into  three  parts  or 
grades,  according  to  the  degree  of  difficulty,  and  should  be 
practised  accordingly.  As  it  is  not  the  intention  to  enu- 
merate, all  the  exercises  possible  in  a  certain  set  or  order,  it 
is  left  to  the  option  of  the  teacher  to  arrange  the  move- 
ments belonging  to  certain  related  groups  into  such  com- 
binations as  may  suit  his  own  purposes. 

The  vertical  ladder  must  be  fastened  into  such  a  frame 
or  position  as  to  allow  free  access  to  it  from  all  sides,  since 
exercises  may  be  practised  on  all  four  sides  of  the  appa- 
ratus. 

After  ascending  one  side  of  the  ladder  it  is  not  absolutely 
necessary  for  the  pupil  to  descend  on  the  same  side ;  but,  as 
it  should  be  the  teacher's  object  to  make  his  lesson  as  diver- 
sified and  interesting  as  possible,  he  may  allow  the  pupil 
to  execute  one  quarter  or  one  half  turn  around  the  ladder, 
and  then  descend  on  the  opposite  or  outer  side. 

There  are  four  distinct  holds  or  positions  of  the  hands  to 
be  remembered. 

1.    Palms    downward    (the    arms    in  position  forward),   or 

forward  (the  arms  in  position  overhead),  the  dorsal 

surface    upward   or   backward  (upperhold,    ordinary 
hold). 


206  GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 

2.  Palms    upward   (the  arms  forward),  or  backward  (tin- 

arms  overhead),  the  forearms  in  supination  (umli-r- 
hold,  reversed  hold). 

3.  The    palms    inward,    the    dorsal   surfaces    outward,   the 

radius  turned  upward  in  the  forward,  and  back- 
ward in  the  upward  position  of  the  arms  (outer- 
hold). 

4.  Palms    outward,   the  dorsal  surfaces  inward,   the  arms 

in  state  of  extreme  pronation,  the  ulna  upward  in 
forward  position,  or  backward  in  upward  position 
of  the  arms  (innerhold). 

A  great  variety  of  holds  or  positions  may  be  taken  on 
the  rounds  or  the  rails  of  the  ladder,  or  on  both.  They 
are :  - 

1.  With  both  hands,  the  palms  forward  on  the  rounds. 

2.  With  both  hands,  the  palms  backward  on  the  rounds. 

3.  With  both  hands,  the  palms  inward  on  the  rails. 

4.  With  both  hands,  the  palms  outward  on  the  rails. 

These  form  the  simple  and  most  common  holds. 

Combinations  of  these  may  be  made  in  various  ways,  con- 
stituting the  mixed  holds. 

The  movements  of  the  hands  in  climbing  or  walking  up- 
ward or  downward  are  executed  by  having  the  one  hand 
leading,  the  other  following  to  the  same  round,  or  by  having 
one  hand  leading,  the  other  passing  to  the  next  round  or 
next  space  on  the  rail.  The  movements  of  the  feet  are  exe- 
cuted in  the  same  way. 


207 


LESSON    1. 


1  Walking  up  and  down  the  ladder, 

the  hands  on  the  rails  at  the 
height  of  the  shoulders,  the  right 
or  left  hand  leading,  the  other 
hand  following  to  the  same  height 
(Fig.  182),  the  feet  advancing 
on  the  rounds  in  a  similar  man- 
ner. 

2  Like  Exercise  1,  with  the  hands  on 

the  rounds. 

3  Like  Exercise  1,  with  the  limbs  of 

the  same  side  moving  simulta- 
neously. 

4  Like  Exercise  2,  with  the  limbs  of 

the  same  side  moving  simulta- 
neously. 


5  Like   Exercise    1, 

with  one  hand 
on  the  rail,  the 
other  on  the 
round. 

6  Like    Exercise    3, 

with  one  hand 
on  the  rail,  the 
other  on  the 
round . 

.7-12  Like  Exercises 
1-6,  the  advan- 
cing hand  and 
foot  passing  to 
the  next  round 
or  space  instead 
of  the  same. 


Fig.  182. 


REMARK.  —  These  exercises  may  be  practised  by  placing 
the  hands  on  the  rails,  the  palms  outward  or  inward,  or  on 
the  rounds,  the  palms  upward  or  downward. 


LESSON    2. 


1  Walking  up  and  down  the  ladder, 

the  hands  on  the  rails,  the  feet 
on  the  rounds,  the  right  hand  and 
left  foot  leading,  the  other  limbs 
following  to  the  same  rounds  or 
space. 

2  The  same  exercise   reversed   (the 

left  hand  and  right  foot  lead- 
ing). 

3  The  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately. 


4  Like  Exercise  1,  with  the  hands  on 

the  rounds. 

5  Like  Exercise  2,  with  the  hands  on 

the  rounds. 

6  Like  Exercise  1,  with  one  hand  on 

the  rail,  the  other  on  the  round. 
7-12   Like  Exercises   1-6,   with    the 
advancing  hand  and  foot  passing 
to  the  next  round  or  space,  in- 
stead of  the  same. 


1  Walking  up  and  down  the  ladder, 
the  left  hand  on  the  rail,  the  right 
hand  on  the  hip,  the  hand  ad- 
vancing one  space,  the  feet  fol- 
lowing successively  (first  one, 
then  the  other,  to  the  same 
round). 


LESSON    3. 

2  The  same  exercise  reversed. 

3  Like  Exercise  1,  with  the  hand  on 

the    rounds    instead    of  on  the 
rail. 

4  Like  Exercise  1,  one  hand  advan- 

cing alternately  with  the  other 
(one  returning  to  the  hip,  while 


208 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 


the   other    passes    to    the    next 
round). 

5  Like  Exercise  1,  the  foot  and  the 

hand  of  the  same  side  advancing 
simultaneously. 

6  Like  Exercise  5,  with  the  opposite 

foot  and  hand. 

7,  8  Like  Exercises  5,  6,  with  the 
hand  on  the  round  instead  of  on 
the  rail. 

9  Like  Exercise  5,  but  after  simul- 
taneous movements  of  the  limbs 
of  one  side,  the  other  foot  passes 
to  the  next  round,  the  hand  also 


passing  to  the  next  round  or 
space. 

10  Like  Exercise  9,  the  limbs  of  tin- 

opposite  side  leading. 

11  Any  of  the  previous  exercises,  but 

in  advancing,  the  hand  changes 
from  the  palm  outward  (on  the 
rails),  or  from  the  palm  down- 
ward, to  the  palm  upward  (on 
the  rounds). 

12  Any  of  the  previous  exercises,  but 

while  advancing  to  next  round 
or  space,  the  hand  changes 
from  rail  to  round,  or  vice  reraa. 


REMARKS.  —  In  the  exercises  of  this  lesson,  or  whenever 
there  is  only  one  hand  employed,  the  other  hand  may  be 
placed  either  on  the  hip,  the  shoulder,  or  on  the  back,  or  in 
any  other  position  to  be  determined  by  the  teacher. 


LESSON    4. 


Most  of  the  exercises  of  this  lesson  may  be  executed  in 

the  same  way  as  indicated  in  Lessons  1,  2,  and  3,  variations 

being    brought   about   by   taking   more    difficult  positions    of 
the  body  and  limbs. 


1  Walking  up  and  down  the  ladder, 

the  legs  in  the  squatting  position 
(the  knees  bent,  the  body  erect). 

2  "Walking  up  and  down  the  ladder, 

omitting  one  round  or  space,  the 
limbs  of  the  same  side  leading, 
those  of  the  opposite  side  follow- 
ing to  the  same  round  or  space. 

3  Like    Exercise    2,   the    advancing 

limbs  passing  to  the  second 
higher  round  or  space. 

4  Like  Exercise  2,  the  limbs  of  the 

opposite  sides  moving  simulta- 
neously. 

5  Like  Exercise  3,  the  limbs  of  the 


opposite    sides    moving    simul- 
taneously. 

6  Walking  up  and  down  the  ladder, 

taking  hold  with  one  hand  and 
one  forearm  on  the  rails. 

7  Like  Exercise  6,  taking  hold  on 

the  rounds. 

8  Walking  up  and  down  with  cross- 

ing the  feet. 

9  Walking    up    and    down   on   the 

knees,    the     hands    in    various 
positions  and  holds. 
10  Walking    up    and    down    in   the 
squatting  position,  taking  hold 
with  only  one  hand. 


VERTICAL   LADDER 


209 


LESSON    5. 


1  Hopping  up  and  down  the  ladder 

on  both  feet,  the  hands  advan- 
cing successively  to  the  same 
round  or  space. 

2  Like  Exercise  1,  the  hands  passing 

alternately  to  the  next  round. 

3  Like  Exercise  1,  the  hands  passing 

simultaneously  to  the  next  round 
or  space. 

4  Like  Exercise  1,  but  on  one  foot, 

the  other  leg  being  extended. 

5  Like  Exercise    2,   with    only  one 

foot. 

6  Hopping  up  and  down  the  ladder 


on  one  foot,  taking  hold  of  the 
rail  with  the  hand  of  the  oppo- 
site side. 

7  Like  Exercise  6,  with  the  hand  on 

the  round  instead  of  on  the  rail. 

8  Like  Exercise  6,  with  the  hand 

changing  from  rail  to  the  round, 
and  vice  versa,  while  advancing. 
9,  10,  and  11.       Like  Exercises  6, 
7,  and  8,  using  the  hand  and 
foot  of  the  same  side. 
12   Hopping    up    and    down   in   the 
squatting  position,  with  various 
holds  of  the  hands. 


LESSON    6. 


Position  in  front  of  the  ladder.  Jump  into  the  hanging 
position  back  turned  towards  the  ladder,  the  hands  on  one 
round,  the  palms  forward  or  backward.  In  this  position :  — 


1  a.  Raise  the   right  knee    forward 

(bending  the  leg  to  a  right 
angle,  the  toes  pointed  down- 
ward ) . 

b.  Raise  the  left  knee. 

c.  Raise  both  knees,  repeating  each 

movement  several  times. 

2  Like  Exercise   1,  raising  the  legs 

forward  horizontally  (Fig.  183), 
repeated  several  times. 

3  Spread  the  legs  to  a  straddle  posi- 

tion sideways  and  close;  repeat. 

4  Cross  the  legs,  one  above  the  other; 

repeat. 

5  Place  one  hand  on  the  hip  and  re- 

turn to  its  former  hold,  the  body 
being  suspended  by  one  arm. 

6  Like    Exercise   6,    changing  from 

one  hand  to  the  other. 

7  Like  Exercise  6,  at  the  same  time 


Fig.  183. 

changing  the  hold  of  the  hands 
from  the  palms  forward  to  the 
palms  backward,  and  vice  versa. 


210 


(,'  /:/.' VAN-AMERICAN  G YMNASTICS 


LESSON    7. 


1  Walking  up  and  down  the  ladder, 

the  ladder  between  the  legs,  with 
any  of  the  various  holds  and  ad- 
vances (Fig.  184). 

2  As  Exercise  1,  but  hopping  instead 

of  walking. 

3  Walking    upward   in   any  of    the 

various  ways  described  and  slid- 
ing downward,  the  legs  strad- 
dling the  rails,  the  hands  pass- 
ing from  one  to  the  next  round 
(Fig.  185). 

4  As  Exercise  3,  the  hands  sliding 


simultaneously  to  the  next  round 
or  space. 

6  As  Exercise  3,  with  the  legs  ex- 
tended downward. 

6  As  Exercise  4,  with  the  legs  ex- 

tended downward  on  one  side. 

7  As  Exercise  3,  with  the  legs  closed 

and  bent    backward    in   a  right 
angle  to  the  thigh  (raising  heels). 

8  As  Exercise  7,  the  hands  sliding 

simultaneously. 

9  Hopping    upward    in  any  of    the 

various  ways  described,  and  slid- 
ing downward. 


Fig.  184. 


Fig.   185. 


Fig.   186. 


Fig.  187. 


LESSON    8. 

1  Walking  up  and  down  the  ladder  3   As  Exercise  1,  with  the  arms  down 

backward,    the   arms    overhead,  and  at  the  sides,  the  hands  tak- 

and    the    hands   on   the   rounds  ing    hold    on    the   rounds    (Fig. 

(Fig.  186).  187). 

2  As  Exercise  1,  with  the  hands  on  4  As  Exercise  3,  with  the  hands  on 

the  sides.  the  rails. 


211 


5  Walking  up  and  down  the  ladder 

backward  having  one  arm  over- 
head, the  other  one  downward, 
the  hands  on  the  rounds  or 
rails. 

6  Change    from    the    rear   standing 

position  on  one  round  to  the  front 


position,  by  twisting  through 
under  one  arm. 

7  Walking  upward  as  in  Exercise  1, 

then  execute  one  half  turn  into 
the  front  position  and  slide  down- 
ward. 

8  Walking  up  and  down  by  continu- 

ally circling  around  the  ladder. 


i,      LESSON    9. 


Fig.   188. 


Fig.   189. 


1  Sit  on  one  round  facing  the  ladder 

and  raise  the  arms  upward,  the 
hands  in  various  holds  on  the 
rounds  or  rails,  and  change  posi- 
tion onto  the  next  round.  Re- 
peat several  times. 

2  Sit  on  the  seventh  or  eighth  round, 

let  go  with  the  hands  and  lower 
the  body  gradually,  until  coming 
to  a  hanging  position  on  the 
knees  (Fig.  188).  Return  to  sit- 
ting position. 

3  As    Exercise    2.      After    bending 

backward  into  the  hanging  posi- 
tion take  hold  of  the  round  in 
reach  and  extend  the  legs  upward 


on  the  opposite  side  of  the  ladder, 
supporting  the  body  on  the  arms 
(Fig.  189).  Return  to  the  hang- 
ing and  sitting  position. 

4  As  Exercise  3,  but  after  taking  hold 

of  the  round  in  reach,  remove 
the  legs  slowly  from  between  the 
rounds,  extend  them  upwards, 
and  turn  over,  landing  on  the  feet. 

5  Sit  on  one  round  and  hook  the  feet 

under  one  of  the  lower  rounds. 
Lower  the  body  backward  gradu- 
ally until  it  assumes  a  horizontal 
position,  the  arms  folded  on  the 
chest  or  raised  upward  (Fig.  190). 
Return. 


Fig.   190. 


As  Exercise  5,  but  raise  the  arms 
upward  and  lower  the  body  grad- 
ually backward  through  the  hori- 
zontal position  and  downward, 
the  arms  and  the  body  having 
the  same  direction. 


212 


','/•;/;  VAN-AMERICAN   '/  YM  \.IST1C8 


LESSON    10. 


1  Jump   into   the   hanging  position, 

facing  the  ladder,  the  hands  on 
the  rounds,  the  legs  in  the  strad- 
dle position  extended  over  the 
sides  of.  the  ladder.  Climb  up 
and  down,  one  hand  leading,  the 
other  following  on  the  same 
round. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  taking  hold  of  the 

rails. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  with  one  hand  on 

one  round,  the  other  on  the  rail. 

4,  5,  and  6.     As  Exercises  1,  2,  and 

3,  with  the  hands  passing  alter- 


nately to  the  next  higher  round 
or  space  (hand  over  hand). 

7  Climb  upward,  but  sliding  down- 

ward, the  legs  placed  around  the 
rails,  the  hands  sliding  simul- 
taneously on  the  rounds. 

8  As  Exercise  7,  but  in  sliding  down- 

ward, take  hold  on  the  rails. 

9  As  Exercise  7,  but  in  sliding  keep 

the  legs  extended  and  closed,  or 
in  the  straddle  position. 
10   As  Exercise  9,  the  hands  taking 
hold  on  the  rails. 


LESSON    11. 
Position  facing  the  ladder. 


1  Jump  into  the  hanging  position,  the 

hands  on  the  rails,  hop  up  and 
down,  the  legs  extended  and  rest- 
ing in  the  straddle  position  on  the 
sides. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  with  the  hands  on 

the  rounds. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  hop  downward  with 

only  one  hand,  the  other  hand 
placed  on  the  hip. 

4  As  Exercise  2,  hop  downward  with 

only  one  hand,  the  other  arm 
raised  sideways. 


5  As  Exercise  1,  the  hands  changing 
from  the  rails  to  the  rounds,  and 
vice  versa. 

Q  As  Exercise  3,  with  the  right  and 
left  hand  changing  alternately 
from  round  to  round  in  hopping 
downward. 

7  As  Exercise  3,  but  in  hopping 
downward,  the  hand  changes 
from  the  round  to  the  rail,  or 
vice  versa. 


LESSON    12. 


1  Walking  up  and  down  the  ladder, 

skipping  two  rounds,  the  right 
foot  beginning,  the  left  following 
to  the  same  round.  The  hands 
move  on  the  rounds  in  a  similar 
way. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  with  the  hands  on 

the  rails. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  the  hands  moving 

simultaneously. 


4  As  Exercise  2,  the  hands  moving 

simultaneously. 

5  Hopping  up  and  down  the  ladder 

on  both  feet,  skipping  one  round, 
the  hands  on  the  rounds  or  rails. 

6  As   Exercise    5,    hopping    on   one 

foot  only. 

7  As   Exercise   5,  taking  hold   with 

one  hand  only. 


VERTICAL  LADDER 


213 


8  As  Exercise  6,  changing  from  one 

foot  to  the  other,  alternately. 

9  Hopping  up  and  down  the  ladder 

on  both  knees,  the  hands  moving 
simultaneously  on  the  rounds  or 
rails. 


10  As  Exercise  9,  but  with  hold  of 

only  one  hand. 

11  As  Exercise  9,  but  on  one  knee 

only,  the  other  leg  extended. 

12  As  Exercise  10,  but  on  one  knee 

only,  the  other  leg  extended. 


Fig.  191. 


Fig.  192. 


LESSON    13. 


1  Jump  into  the  rest,   both    hands 

on  one  round,  the  legs  extended 
in  the  straddle  position,  resting 
on  the  rails  (Fig.  191).  Return  to 
the  standing  position  and  repeat 
by  advancing  the  hands  to  the 
next  higher  round. 

2  Walk  upward  and  jump  into  the 

rest,  the  hands  on  the  eighth 
round,  lower  the  body  slowly  into 
the  hanging  position,  by  bending 
the  arms  gradually,  the  legs  slid- 
ing down  on  the  rails. 

3  As  Exercise  2,  but  keep  the  arms 

extended,  while  sliding  down- 
ward into  the  hanging  position. 


4  From    the    rest,    lower    the   body 

slowly  until  the  extended  arms 
assume  a  horizontal  position  and 
return  to  the  rest. 

5  From  the  rest,  bend  and  straighten 

the  arms  repeatedly. 

6  From  the  rest,  climb  up  and  down, 

one  hand  following  the  other  to 
the  same  round. 

7  As  Exercise  6,  but  hand  over  hand. 

8  Climb  up  and  down,  hanging  by 

one  hand  and  supporting  witn 
the  other  (Fig.  192).  The  hands 
move  alternately. 


214 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 


LESSON    14. 


1  Walking  up  and  down  the  ladder 

backwards,  taking  hold  with  only 
one  hand  on  a  round  or  rail,  the 
other  hand  on  the  hip. 

2  Hopping  up  and  down  the  ladder 

backwards,  on  both  feet,  the 
hands  following  overhead  on  the 
rounds  or  rails. 

3  As  Exercise  2,  with  the  arras  down- 

ward, at  the  sides,  the  hands  tak- 
ing hold  on  the  rails  or  rounds. 

4  As  Exercise  2,   but  on  one  foot 

only. 


5  As  Exercise  3,  but  on   one   foot 

only. 

6  Climb  up  and    down   the    ladder 

backwards,  the  hands  on  the 
rounds,  the  legs  extended  In  the 
straddle  position  over  the  rails,  or 
closed. 

7  As  Exercise  0,  but  raising  the  knees 

forward,  while  climbing. 

8  As  Exercise  6,  raising  the  legs  for- 

ward to  a  horizontal  position. 


Fig.  193. 


Fig.  194. 


LESSON    15. 


Flag  sideways,  vertically  (Fig.  193). 
(The  body  is  suspended  sideways, 
vertically,  by  one  hand  on  one 
round,  the  leg  of  the  same  side 
bracing  against  another  round. 
The  other  limbs  are  extended  in 
the  opposite  directions. )  Dimin- 
ish the  space  between  the  hand 
and  foot,  by  moving  the  hand  or 
foot  to  the  next  round. 


2  Flag  sideways  on  the  feet,  the  body 

in  a  horizontal  position  (Fig. 
194).  (One  foot  braces  against 
one  round  below,  the  other  foot 
is  hooked  under  a  round  or  fas- 
tened by  means  of  a  strap  around 
the  ankle.)  The  body  must  be 
lowered  into  a  horizontal  posi- 
tion (sideways). 

3  Flag  sideways,  horizontally  on  the 


VERTICAL   LADDER 


215 


hands,  both  arms  being  extended, 
one  being  in  the  hanging,  the 
other  in  the  supporting  position 
on  the  rounds,  the  body  is  in  a 
horizontal  position  (Fig.  195). 
4  From  the  position  facing  the  side 
of  the  ladder,  climb  upward  and 
downward,  the  hands  on  the 
rounds,  the  legs  extended  down- 
ward, and  closed  or  in  the  straddle 
position. 


5  As  Exercise  4,  with  the  legs  ex- 

tended in  the  straddle  position 
and  raised  forward  horizontally, 
the  ladder  between  them. 

6  As  Exercise  5,  with  the  legs  closed 

and  raised  forward  to  a  horizontal 
position  on  one  side  of  the  ladder. 

7  As    Exercise    4,    with    the    back 

turned  toward  the  ladder. 

8  As  Exercise  6,  but  hopping  upward, 

the  hands  on  the  rounds  or  rails. 


Fig.  195. 


GERMAN-AMERICAN   <;YUXA8TWS 


INCLINED     LADDER 

THE  ladder  is  inclined  to  an  angle  of  from  forty-five  to 
seventy  degrees.  Most  of  the  exercises  already  described 
for  practice  on  the  vertical  ladder  may  also  be  executed  on 
the  slanting  ladder,  especially  the  climbing  and  walking 
movements.  In  order  to  save  space  and  avoid  repetition,  the 
teacher  is  referred  to  the  Lessons  1,  2,  3,  5,  6,  10,  12,  13, 
and  14  of  the  foregoing  Part. 

It  should  not  be  forgotten,  that  whenever  an  exercise  is 
described  with  only  one  kind  of  hold  or  position  of  the  hands 
or  feet,  it  should  also  be  practised  with  all  the  other  holds 
or  positions  which  the  exercise  may  permit. 

LESSON  i. 

The  exercises  of  this  lesson  are  to  be  executed  on  the 
under  side,  from  the  position  underneath  and  facing  the 
ladder. 

1  Jump  into  the  hanging  position,      4  As  Exercise  8,  but  spread  the  legs 

the  hands  on  the  rails,  and  re-  to  the  crossstraddle  position  (one 

turn    to    the   standing  position.  leg  forward,  the  other  backward) 

Repeat,  and   jump  to   the  next  and  close.     Repeat  several  times, 

higher  space.  5  Jump  into  the  hanging  position  as 

2  As  Exercise  1,  but  grasp  a  round.  in  Exercise  1,  then  raise  — 

In    repeating    grasp    the    next  a.  The  right  knee  forward, 

higher  round.  b.  The  left  knee  forward. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  with  the  back  turned  c.  Both  knees  forward. 

towards  the  ladder.   In  the  hang-  6   Jump  into  the  hanging  position  as 
ing  position  spread  the  legs  side-  in  Exercise  2,  then  raise  — 
ways  to  the  straddle  position  and  a.  The  right  foot  backward,  bend- 
close.     Repeat  several  times.  ing  the  knee  to  an  acute  angle, 


INCLINED  LADDER 


217 


the  thigh  remaining  vertical 
and  the  knees  locked. 

b.  The  left  foot  to  same  position. 

c.  Both  feet  simultaneously  to  the 

same  position  (Fig.  196). 

7  Jump  into  the  hanging  position  as 

in  Exercise  3,  and  raise  — 

a.  The  right  leg  sideways,  the  left 

remaining  in  a  vertical  posi- 
tion. 

b.  The  left  leg  sideways,  the  right 

remaining  in  a  vertical  posi- 
tion. 

c.  The  right  leg  sideways  in  front 

of  the  left  leg. 

d.  The  left  leg  sideways  in  front 

of  the  right  leg. 

8  Jump  into  the  hanging  position 

as  in  Exercise  3,  and  raise  — 
o.  The  right  leg  forward  to  a  hori- 
zontal position. 

b.  The  left  leg  forward  to  a  hori- 

zontal position. 

c.  Both   legs    forward   simultane- 

ously to  a  horizontal  position. 

9  Jump  into  the  hanging  position, 

as  in  Exercise  1,  bend  the  arms 
to  a  right  angle,  and  straighten. 
Repeat  several  times. 
10  Jump  into  the  hanging  position, 
the  hands  on  the  rails,  or  on  one 
round,  and  reverse  the  hold 
with  — 

a.  The  right  hand,  and  return. 

6.  The  left  hand,  and  return. 

c.  The  right  an.l  left  hands  alter- 
nately, and  return. 


d.  Both    hands     simultaneously, 

and  return. 

11  Jump  into  the  hanging  position, 
the  hands  on  a  round,  and 
change  the  hold  with  — 

a.  The  right  hand  to  the  rail,  and 

return. 

b.  The  left  hand  to  the  rail,  and 

return. 


Fig.  196. 

c.  The  right  and  the  left  hand 

alternately  to   the   rail,   and 
return. 

d.  Both     hands     simultaneously, 

and  return. 

12  Jump  into  the  hanging  position 
and  swing  the  legs  forward  and 
backward,  the  body  remaining 
firm,  and  the  legs  closed  and 
well  extended  —  (shortswing). 


LESSON    2. 

Position  underneath  and  facing  the  ladder. 
1   Jump  into  the  hanging   position,  the  arm  sideways  downward 


facing  the  ladder,  the  hands  on 
the  rails.     Release  the  hold,  — 
a.  With  the  right  hand,  and  lower 


to  the  side,  and  return.  Repeat 
several  times. 
6.  With  the  left  hand,  and  return. 


218 


GERM  A  N-A  M  ERIC  AN  G  YMNA  STICS 


2  As  in  Exercise  1,  \\ith  tin-  hands 
on  one  round,  lowering 

a.  The  right  arm  forward,  down- 

ward, and  return. 

b.  The  left  arm  forward,  downward, 

and  return. 


Fig.   197. 

3  Jump   into   the   hanging  position, 

the  hands  on  the  rails,  and  swing 
the  body  sideways,  quickly  rais- 
ing and  returning  the  hand  of 
the  side  towards  which  the  body 
swings  (Fig.  197). 

4  As  Exercise  3,  with  the  hands  on 


one  round,  and  reverse  the  hold 
with  the  right  hand, when  swing- 
ing to  the  right,  and  the  left 
hand,  when  swinging  to  tin- 
left. 

5  As  Exercise  3,  but  swing  the  body 

in  a  circle. 

6  As  Exercise  3,  changing  the  hands 

from  the  rails  to  the  rounds  al- 
ternately while  swinging. 

7  From   the   hanging  position,  the 

hands  on  the  rails,  swing  the 
body  sideways,  and  climb  up- 
ward and  downward,  the  hands 
moving  alternately  to  the  next 
space. 

8  As   Exercise   7,    with   the   hands 

grasping  on  the  rounds  instead 
of  on  the  rails. 

9  As  Exercise  7,  with  one  hand  on 

the  round,  the  other  on  one  rail, 
the  hands  moving  alternately  to 
the  next  higher  round  or  space. 
10,  11,  and  12.  As  Exercises  7,  8,  and 
9,  but  from  the  hanging  position 
back  turned  towards  the  ladder. 


LESSON    3. 
Position  underneath  and  facing  the  ladder. 


1  Jump  into  the   hanging  position, 

the  hands  on  the  rails,  place  both 
feet  on  one  round  so  as  i,o  have 
the  body  and  legs  extended  and 
in  the  same  direction,  the  arms 
also  straightened.  Bend  and 
straighten  the  arms  alternately 
(Fig.  198).  Repeat  several  times. 

2  Take  the  position  as  in  Exercise  1, 

with  both  hands  on  one  round. 

Place  — 

a.  The  right  on  the  hip,  and  return. 
6.  The  left  hand  on  the  hip,  and  re- 
turn. 


Fig.   198. 


INCLINED   LADDER 


219 


Eepeat    each    movement    several 
times. 

3  Take  the  position  as  in  Exercise  1, 

the  hands  on  the  rails,  the  palms 
inward.  Reverse  the  position  of 
the  hands  simultaneously  and  re- 
turn, bending  the  arms  slightly 
while  executing  the  movement. 
Repeat  several  times. 

4  As  Exercise  3,  with  both  hands  on 

one  round.  Repeat  several  times. 

5  Take  the  position  as  in  Exercise 

1.  The  hands  remaining  firmly 
on  the  rails  or  the  rounds,  step 
upward,  bending  the  body,  the 
feet  passing  on  the  rounds  toward 
the  hands  as  high  as  possible, 
and  return. 

6  As  Exercise  5,  the  feet  remaining 

in  position,  while  the  hands  pass 
downward  on  the  rounds  or  rails. 


7   As  Exercise  5,  with  both  feet  ad- 
vancing   simultaneously    (hop- 


10 


8  As   Exercise  6,  with  both  hands 

sliding  downward  simultane- 
ously. 

9  As  Exercise  7,  but  on  one  foot 

only,  the  other  leg  extended  and 
raised  forward  at  the  side  of  the 
ladder. 

As  Exercise  8,  with  only  one  foot 
remaining  in  position  on  the 
round,  the  other  leg  extended 
and  raised  forward  in  posi- 
tion. 

11  From  the  position  as  in  Exercise 
1,  advance  the  feet  upward  into 
the  squatting  position,  then  al- 
ternately straighten  and  bend 
the  knees,  the  hands  remaining 
in  position. 


LESSON   4. 
Position  underneath  and  facing  the  ladder. 


1  Jump  into  the   hanging  position, 

the  hands  on  the  rails  or  on  one 
round.  Climb  up  and  down,  the 
hands  passing  alternately  to  the 
same  round  or  space,  the  body 
and  legs  remaining  extended  in 
the  hanging  position. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  but  the  hands  pass 

alternately  to  the  next  higher 
round  or  space  (hand  over  hand). 

3  As  Exercise  1,  with  one  hand  on 

one  rail,  the  other  on  one  round. 
Reverse  the  position  of  the  hands 
in  climbing  downward. 

4  As  Exercise  1,  changing  the  holds 

of  the  hands  alternately  from  the 
rails  to  the  rounds,  and  vice  versa. 

5  As  Exercise  1,  but  while  climbing 

reverse  the  position  of  the  hands 


Fig.    199. 


220 


GERMAN-AMERICAN   G YMNASTICS 


(from  palms  forward  to  palms 
backward,  and  vice  versa}  on 
the  rounds,  and  (from  palms  in- 
ward to  palms  outward,  and  vice 
versa}  on  the  rails. 


0  As  Exercise  1,  keeping  the  arms 
bent  to  a  right  angle  while  climb- 
ing (Fig.  199). 

7-12.  As  Exercises  1-6,  in  the  hang- 
ing position,  back  turned  towards 
the  ladder. 


LESSON    5. 


The  exercises  of  this  lesson  are  to  be  executed  on  the 
upper  side  of  the  ladder  from  the  position  in  front  of  and 
facing  the  ladder. 


1  Walking  upward  on  the  rounds, 
the  hands  on  the  hips  (Fig.  200). 
On  the  top  of  the  ladder  take  a 
sitting  position,  facing  the  ladder, 
the  legs  around  the  sides,  and 
slide  down  backward,  the  hands 
passing  down  alternately  on  the 
rounds  or  rails. 


Fig.  200. 


Walking  upward  as  in  Exercise  1, 
raising  the  arms  forward  in  posi- 
tion. On  the  top,  face  left  or 
right  about,-  take  a  sitting  posi- 
tion, the  legs  around  the  sides, 
and  slide  down  forward,  the 


hands  passing  behind  the  body  on 
the  rounds  or  rails. 

3  Walking  upward  as  in  Exercise  1, 

raising  the  arms  sideways  in  posi- 
tion. On  the  top  take  a  lying 
position  forward,  the  legs  ex- 
tended in  the  straddle  position 
over  the  sides,  and  slide  down- 
ward, the  hands  passing  alter- 
nately on  the  rounds  or  rails. 

4  As  Exercise  2,   raising  the   arms 

overhead  in  position.  On  the 
top  face  right  or  left  about,  take 
a  lying  position  on  the  back,  the 
legs  extended  in  a  straddle  posi- 
tion over  the  sides,  the  arms 
overhead  on  the  rails  or  rounds, 
and  slide  slowly  downward. 

5  As  Exercise  1,  folding  the  arms  on 

the  chest  while  walking  upward. 
Take  a  straddleseat  and "  slide 
downward.  In  the  sitting  posi- 
tion, take  hold  with  only  one 
hand  on  one  rail  or  round,  the 
other  hand  is  placed  on  the  hip 
or  shoulder. 

6  As   Exercise   2,  folding  the   arms 

on  the  back  in  walking  upward. 
In  sliding  downward,  place  the 
hands  in  front  of  the  body  on 
the  rails  or  rounds,  the  hand:, 


INCLINED   LADDER 


passing  alternately  to  the  same 
rail  or  round. 

7  As  Exercise  6,  in  sliding  down- 

ward the  hands  passing  alter- 
nately to  the  next  round  or 
space. 

8  As  Exercise  6,  in  sliding  down- 

ward the  hands  sliding  simulta- 
neously to  the  next  round  or 
space. 

9  As  Exercise  6,  in  sliding  downward 

fold  the  arms  on  the  chest. 
10   As  Exercise  1,  on  the  top  change 
to  the  hanging  position  on  the 


under  side  of  the  ladder  and 
walk  downward,  the  feet  pass- 
ing on  the  rounds,  the  hands  on 
the  rails. 

11  As  Exercise  10,   slide  downward 

on  the  under  side  of  the  ladder, 
the  legs  are  placed  around  the 
rails,  the  hands  pass  alternately 
on  the  rounds. 

12  As  Exercise  10,  climb  downward 

on  the  under  side  of  the  ladder, 
the  body  in  the  hanging  posi- 
tion, the  hands  passing  down 
alternately  on  the  rails. 


LESSON    6. 
Position  underneath  and  facing  the  ladder. 


1  Jump  into  the  hanging  position, 

the  hands  on  one  round  or  on  the 
rails.  Place  the  feet  on  one 
round  so  as  to  keep  the  body  and 
legs  extended.  Walking  up  and 
downward,  the  hands  and  the  feet 
moving  alternately  to  the  same 
round  or  space. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  the  hands  and  the 

feet  passing  alternately  to  the 
next  round  or  space. 

3  As  Exercise   1,  the  limbs  of  the 

same  side  moving  simultaneously, 
those  of  one  side  leading,  the 
other  following  to  the  same  round 
or  space. 

4  As  Exercise  1,  the  limbs  of  the  op- 

posite sides  moving  simultane- 
ously, passing  to  the  next  higher 
round  or  space. 

5  Walking  upward  on  the  under  side 

of  the  ladder  in  any  of  the  pre- 
viously described  ways.  In  mov- 
ing downward  place  both  legs 
around  the  sides  of  the  ladder, 


the  hands  move  alternately  on 
the  rails  or  rounds. 

6  As  Exercise  5,  the  hands  also  mov- 

ing simultaneously  on  the  rounds 
or  rails. 

7  Jump  into  the  hanging  position 

and  place  one  leg  around  the  side 
of  the  ladder,  the  other  on  one 
round.  Climb  upward  by  mov- 
ing the  hands  and  feet  alter- 
nately. In  passing  downward 
reverse  the  position  of  the  legs. 

8  Jump  into  the  hanging  position 

and  place  both  legs  around  the 
sides  of  the  ladder.  Climb  up- 
ward by  moving  the  hands  and 
the  legs  alternately. 

9  As  Exercise  8,  the  hands  sliding 

simultaneously  upward.  On  the 
top  of  the  ladder  quit  the  hold 
with  the  legs  and  assume  the 
hanging  position.  Jump  to  the 
floor. 

10  Climb    upward    in    any    of    the 
various    ways    mentioned.     On 


090 


'/ /•:/; MA N-AMER1CAN   G  YMNAST1CS 


the  top  change  the  position  from 
underneath  to  ahove  the  ladder, 
by  climbing  around  one  of  the 
sides.  Take  the  sitting  posi- 
tion, back  turned  towards  the 
ladder,  then  bend  forward,  catch- 
ing hold  of  the  rounds,  sup- 
porting the  body  on  the  hands 
extend  the  legs  upward  in  strad- 
dle position  over  the  sides,  and 
walk  downwards  (in  the  front 
leaningrest),  the  hands  moving 
to  the  same  round  or  space 
(Fig.  201). 

11  As  Exercise  10,  but,  in  walking 

downward  on  the  hands,  move 
the  hands  alternately  to  the 
next  round  or  space. 

12  As    Exercise   10,  but  in  walking 


downward  on  tin-  hands,  hop 
with  both  hands  sininllanrniisly 
to  the  next  round  or  space. 


Fig.  2C1. 


LESSON    7. 
Position  underneath  the  ladder. 


1  Jump    into   the   hanging  position 

facing  the  ladder,  the  hands  on 
one  round,  the  palms  turned 
backward.  Bend  the  arms  to  a 
right  angle  and  climb  up  and 
downward  (hand  over  hand). 

2  As  Exercise  1,  with  the  back  turned 

towards  the  ladder,  and  the  hands 
on  the  rails. 

3  From  the  position  sideways  under- 

neath the  ladder,  jump  into  the 
hanging  position  on  one  of  the 
rails,  and  climb  sideways  upward 
and  downward,  the  higher  hand 
leading,  the  other  following. 

4  As  Exercise  3,  crossing  the  hands 

in  advancing. 

5  As    Exercise    1,    with   the   hands 

omitting  one  round  or  space  in 
advancing. 

6  As  Exercise  2,  raising  the  .legs  for- 

ward to  a  horizontal  position 
while  climbing. 


7  As  Exercise  4,  with  the  hands  on 

two  rounds  instead  of  one  side, 
and  raise  the  knees  forward  in 
position,  the  legs  being  bent  to 
right  angles. 

8  As  Exercise  3,  with  one  hand  on 

one  rail,  the  other  on  one  round, 
and  the  feet  raised  backward, 
the  knees  bent  to  a  right  angle. 
The  hands  move  alternately. 

9  As   Exercise    1,    swing   the   body 

slightly  forward  and  backward. 
The  hands  advance  at  the  end 
of  each  backward  movement. 

10  As  Exercise  fl,  but  the  back  turned 

toward  the  ladder.  The  hands 
advance  at  the  end  of  each  for- 
ward movement. 

1 1  As  Exercise  1 ,  swinging  the  body 

sideways. 

12  As  Exercise  2,  swinging  the  body 

sideways. 


INCLINED   LADDER 


223 


LESSON    8. 
Position  underneath  and  facing  the  ladder. 


1  Jump  into  the  hanging  position,  the 

hands  on  the  rails.  Hop  up  and 
downward,  the  body  and  legs  re- 
maining quiet. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  with  the  hands  mov- 

ing on  the  rounds. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  with  one  hand  on 

one  round,  the  other  on  one  rail. 
Keverse  the  hold  of  the  hands  in 
passing  downward. 

4  As  Exercise  1,  but  while  advancing 

to  the  next  round  reverse  the 
hold  of  the  hands. 

5  As  Exercise  2,  but  while  advancing 

to  the  next  round,  reverse  the 
hold  of  the  hands  simultaneously. 

6  As  Exercise  3,  but  while  advancing 

change  the  hold  of  the  hands 
simultaneously,  one  hand  from 


the  round  to  the  rail,  the  other 
from  the  rail  to  the  round, 
i  Jump  into  the  hanging  position 
sideways,  both  hands  on  one  of 
the  rails,  hop  sideways  up  and 
downward. 

8  As  Exercise  7,  with  the  hands  on 

two  rounds,  one  arm  bent,  the 
other  extended. 

9  As  Exercise  7,  with  one  hand  on 

one  round,  the  other  on  one 
rail.  On  the  top,  change  the 
position  to  the  opposite  side  of 
the  ladder,  and  change  the  posi- 
tion of  the  hands. 

10,  11,  12.  As  Exercises  1,  2,  and  3, 
with  the  back  turned  toward  the 
ladder. 


LESSON    9. 


Exercises  on  the  upper  side  of  the  ladder. 

Position  in  front  of  and  facing  the  ladder. 


1  Take  the  lying  position  on  the  lad- 

der, face  downward,  the  hands 
overhead  on  one  round,  the  legs 
extended  in  the  straddle  position 
over  the  sides.  Climb  upward, 
and  downward,  the  hands  pass- 
ing alternately  to  the  same  or  to 
the  next  round. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  the  hands  passing 

simultaneously  to  the  next  round. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  but  in  advancing, 

the  hands  change  alternately  from 
the  rounds  to  the  rails,  and  vice 
versa. 

4  As  Exercise  2,  the  hands  changing 

simultaneously  from  the  rounds 
to  the  rails,  and  vice  versa. 


5-8.  As  Exercises  1-4,  but  in  the 
lying  position  backward,  face 
upward. 

9  From  the  position  forward,  facing 
the  ladder,  support  the  body 
on  both  hands  on  one.  round 
(front  leaningrest),  the  feet 
resting  on  the  sides.  Climb  up- 
ward and  downward,  the  hands 
passing  alternately  to  the  same 
or  to  the  next  round  (Fig.  202). 

10.  As  Exercise  9,  both  hands  advan- 
cing simultaneously  to  the  next 
round  or  space. 

11  As  Exercise  9,  but  in  the  position 
of  support,  the  back  turned 
toward  the  ladder,  the  body  and 


224 


QBRMAN-AMEHWAN    GFJf.Y.I  >  / /'  x 


legs  well  extended  (rear  leaning- 
rest),  the  head  rather  backward 
than  forward  (Fig.  HO:'.))  tne 
hands  advancing  alternately  on 
the  rails  or  rounds. 


12  As  Exercise  11,  both  hands  pass- 
ing simultaneously  to  the  next 
round  or  space. 


Fig.  202.  Fig.  203. 

LESSON    10. 

Exercises  on  the  upper  side  of  the  ladder. 

Position  back  turned  towards  the  ladder. 


1  Walking  upward  and  backward,  the 

feet  and  the  hands  on  the  rounds, 
(rear  leaningrest),  skipping  one 
round  in  advancing.  The  limbs 
of  the  same  side  begin,  those  of 
the  opposite  side  follow  to  the 
same  round. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  the  limbs  of  the  op- 

posite sides  beginning  (  right  hand 
and  left  foot),  the  other  limbs 
passing  to  the  second  higher 
rounds. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  both  hands  moving 

simultaneously. 

4  As  Exercise   1,   taking  hold  with 

only  one  hand,  the  other  is  placed 
on  the  hips. 


5  Hop  upward  and  backward  on  one 

or  both  legs,  omitting  one  round. 
The  hands  pass  simultaneously 
to  the  next  round  or  space. 

6  As    Exercise    5,   on  one  or  both 

legs,  taking  hold  with  only  one 
hand,  the  other  is  placed  on  the 
hip. 

7  Walking    forward    upward,    and 

backward  downward,  without 
taking  hold  with  the  iiands 
(which  are  placed  on  the  hips 
or  in  any  of  the  various  positions 
mentioned  previously),  the  feet 
passing  from  round  to  round. 

8  As  Exercise  7,  but  backward  up- 

ward and  forward  downward. 


INCLINED  LADDER 


225 


0  As  Exercise  8,  but  on  the  top  face 
right  or  left  about,  and  walk  down 
backward. 


10  As  Exercise  7,  omitting  one  or  two 

rounds  with  every  step. 

11  As  Exercise  8,  omitting  one  or  two 

rounds  with  every  step. 


LESSON    11. 


Exercises  on  the  upper  side  of  the  ladder. 

Position  in  front  of  and  facing  the  ladder. 


1  Take    the    lying    position,   facing 

the  ladder,  the  hands  over  the 
head  on  one  round,  and  the  legs 
extended  in  the  straddle  position 
over  the  sides.  Raise  the  body 
upward  into  the  position  of  sup- 
port, holding  the  arms  well  ex- 
tended and  bracing  firmly  against 
the  round.  Return  into  the 
lying  position,  reversing  the  pre- 
vious movement. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  travelling  up  and 

down  the  ladder. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  using  only  one  arm 

for  support,  the  other  hand  grasp- 
ing the  wrist  of  the  bracing  arm. 

4  As  Exercise  1,  with  only  one  arm, 

the  other  hand  resting  on  the 
hip.  Travel  up  and  down  the 
ladder  by  using  the  arms  alter- 
nately. 

5  Take  the  position  of  support  on 

only  one  arm,  the  other  hand  on 
the  hip,  the  feet  resting  on  the 
sides.  Hop  upward  in  this  posi- 
tion, changing  to  the  opposite 
hand  in  hopping  downward. 

6  Take  the  lying  position  facing  the 


ladder,  the  head  downward,  the 
legs  extended  in  the  straddle 
position  upward.  Support  the 
body  on  the  hands,  the  arms 
extended.  (See  Fig.  201.)  Walk 
up  and  downward,  the  hands 
moving  alternately  to  the  same 
round. 

7  As  Exercise  6,  the  hands  moving 

alternately  to  the  next  round. 

8  As  Exercise  6,  hopping  up  and 

downward  (both  hands  moving 
simultaneously  to  the  next 
round). 

9  As  Exercise  8,  the  hands  on  the 

sides,  in  moving  upward,  and 
hopping  on  only  one  hand,  in 
coming  downward. 

10  Take  the  sitting  position,  facing 

the  ladder,  the  legs  extended 
and  spread  sideways  in  the  strad- 
dle position,  the  hands  on  one 
round.  Support  the  body  on 
the  hands,  and  walk  up  and 
downward,  the  hands  passing 
alternately  to  the  same  round. 

11  As  Exercise  10,  the  hands  passing 

alternately  to  the  next  round. 


LESSON    12. 

Exercises  on  the  under  side  of  the  ladder. 
Position  underneath  and  back  turned  towards  the  ladder. 


1  Jump  into  the  hanging  position, 
the  back  turned  towards  the  lad- 
der, and  place  the  feet  on  one 


round  so  as  to  have  the  body 
and  the  legs  well  extended  ( Fig. 
204).  Walk  upward  and  down- 


22G 


O  Eli  MAN- AM  ERIC Afi  G  YMNA  .sv/r.s 


ward,  the  hands  and  feet  moving 
alternately  to  the  same  round. 
2  As  Exercise   1,   the  limbs  of  the 
same    sides    moving    simultane- 
ously. 


Fig.  204. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  the  limbs  of  the 

opposite  sides  moving  simultane- 
ously. 

4  As  Exercise  1,  the  hands  or  the 

feet  advancing  simultaneously. 

5  Jump  into  the   hanging   position, 

the  hands  on  one  round  or  the 
rails.  Hop  upward  and  down- 
ward, omitting  one  round  or 
space. 

6  As  Exercise  5,  at  the  same  time 

changing  the  position  of  the 
hands  from  the  rounds  to  the 
rails,  and  vice  versa. 

7  Jump   into  the  hanging    position 

on  one  hand,  on  round  or  rail, 
the  other  hand  on  the  hip. 
Hop  upward  and  downward. 

8  As  Exercise  7,  changing  the  hand 

from  the  round  to  the  rail  in  ad- 
vancing. 


9  As  Exercise  7,  hopping  sidc\v;iys 
upwards,  the  hand  on  one  rail. 
On  the  top,  change  to  the  oppo- 
site side,  and  hop  downward  on 
the  other  hand. 

10  Jump  into  the  hanging  position 

facing  the  ladder,  the  hands  on 
the  rails  or  on  the  rounds.  Turn 
the  body  over  backward,  the  legs 
passing  between  the  arms,  and 
extend  the  legs  upward  (Fig. 
.  205).  Holding  the  body  in  this 
position,  climb  upward  and 
downward. 

11  As   Exercise    1,    in    the   hanging 

position,  back  turned  toward 
the  ladder,  turn  the  body  over 
completely,  legs  extended  down- 
ward. Climb  upward  and 
downward,  the  hands  moving 
alternately. 


Fig.  205. 

12  As  Exercise  11,  the  hands  moving 
simultaneously  in  coming  down- 
ward. 


HORIZONTAL  LADDER 


227 


HORIZONTAL     LADDER 

BY  DR.  HENRY  HARTUNG 

MOST  of  the  exercises  on  the  under  side  of  the  inclined 
ladder  can  be  practised  on  the  horizontal  ladder.  The  teacher, 
therefore,  is  referred  to  the  respective  exercises  in  the  pre- 
vious part. 

The  ladder  must  be  raised  to  such  a  height,  that  when 
the  body  is  in  the  hanging  position,  with  the  arms  fully 
stretched,  the  extended  feet  will  not  touch  the  floor. 

It  should  also  be  remembered,  that  whenever  an  exercise 
permits,  it  should  be  executed  with  all  the  different  holds  and 

positions  of  the  hands. 

LESSON  i. 

Position  underneath  and  at  one  end  of  the  ladder. 


1  Jump  into  the  hanging  position, 
both  hands  on  one  round  or  on 
the  rails.  Raise  the  knees  for- 
ward and  turn  the  body  over 


2  As  Exercise  1,  then  push  the  feet 
through  the  space  between  two 
rounds  and  hang  on  the  knees, 


Fig.  206. 

backward,  halfways,  placing  both 
feet  against  one  round,  and  re- 
turn (Fig.  206).  Repeat  several 
times. 


Fig.  207. 


228 


GERM  A  N-A  MEHICA  N  G  YMNA  S  TICS 


letting  go  with  both  hands  (Fig. 
207).  The  body  assumes  a  verti- 
cal position.  Return. 


Fig.  208. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  but  from  the  hang- 

ing position  sideways,  facing  in- 
ward, both  hands  on  one  of  the 
rails. 

4  As  Exercise  2,  but  from  the  hang- 

ing position  sideways  facing  out- 
ward, hanging  on  one  rail. 

5  As  Exercise  3,  while  in  the  hanging 

position  on  the  knees,  swing  the 
body  fore  and  backward,  the  arms 
either  overhead  or  folded  on  the 
chest. 

6  As  Exercise  2,  at  the  end  of  the 

ladder  swing  the  body  fore  and 
backward.  At  the  end  of  the 
backward  swing  quickly  remove 
the  legs  from  the  ladder,  and 
jump  to  the  standing  position 
(kneedrop). 

7  As  Exercise  1,  retaining  the  hold, 

then  straighten  the  legs  upward, 


bringing  the  body  into  a  vertical 
position  (Fig.  208).  Ben.l  and 
straighten  the  arms  several 
times.  Return. 

8  As  Exercise  1,  then  straighten  the 

legs  upward,  the  body  and  the 
legs  in  a  vertical  position,  turn 
the  trunk  right  and  left.  Re- 
turn. 

9  As  Exercise  1,  but  hold  with  the 

toes  of  both  feet  on  to  a  round 
back  of  the  hands,  press  the 
body  backward  as  far  as  possi- 
ble (nest)  (Fig.  209).  Re- 
turn. 

10  As  Exercise  9.  taking  hold  with 

only  one  foot,  the  other  leg  ex- 
tended backward  in  a  horizontal 
position. 

11  As  Exercise  1,  then  turn  the  body 

over  completely  backward  into 
the  hanging  position  backward, 
the  legs  extended  downward. 
Let  go  with  both  hands,  and 
jump  to  the  floor. 


Fig.  209. 

12  As  Exercise  11,  but  without  touch- 
ing the  rounds  with  the  feet  in 
turning  over  backward,  then 
return  to  the  hanging  position 
forward,  and  repeat. 


HORIZONTAL  LADDER 


229 


LESSON    2. 
Position  sideways  facing  inward  at  one  end  of  the  ladder. 


1  Jump  into  the  hanging  position  on 

one  of  the  rails.  Move  the  right 
hand  sideways  repeatedly  until 
the  hands  are  apart  at  full  reach 
(Fig.  210).  Return  the  hand  to 
the  starting  position.  Repeat  the 
same  with  the  other  hand. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  moving  the  hands 

simultaneously. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  moving  the  hands 

alternately. 

4  Hanging  position  as  in  Exercise  1, 

cross  one  hand  over  the  other, 
and  return.  The  same  with  the 
other  hand,  and  simultaneously 
with  both  hands. 

5  As  Exercise  1,  but  instead  of  re- 

turning the  hand  to  the  starting 
position,  advance  the  other  hand 
to  the  hand  first  moved,  and  con- 
tinue these  movements,  thus  trav- 
elling sideways  from  one  end  of 
the  ladder  to  the  other. 

6  As  Exercise  5,  the  hands  moving 

sideways  on  the  rounds,  instead 
of  the  rails. 

7  As  Exercise  5,  moving  the  hands 

alternately  on  the  rail  in  the 
same  direction  to  the  end  of  the 
ladder,  and  return  to  the  start- 
ing-point. 

8  As  Exercise  7,  with  the  hands  on 

the  rounds,  and  as  far  apart  as 
possible. 


10 


As  Exercise   7,   with    one    hand 

always  crossing  over  the  other 

in  travelling  sideways. 
As  Exercise  7,  the  hands  moving 

simultaneously  sideways  on  one 

side. 


Fig.  210. 

11  As  Exercise  10,  both  hands  mov- 
ing simultaneously  sideways  on 
the  rounds. 

12.  As  Exercise  10,  with  one  hand  on 
one  round,  the  other  on  the  rail, 
both  moving  simultaneously  to 
the  next  round  or  space. 


LESSON    3. 
Position  underneath  and  in  the  middle  of  the  ladder. 


1  Jump  into  the  hanging  position, 
the  hands  on  the  rails,  the  palms 
forward.  Quit  the  hold  with  one 


hand  and  turn  the  body  forward 
one  quarter  turn  around  the 
other  arm,  taking  hold  of  the 


230 


t;  i:i:  MAN-AMERICAN  G YMNASTICS 


rail  with  both  hands.  Return  to 
the  first  position,  and  repeat 
with  the  other  arm. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  turning  one  quarter 

turn  backward  around  one  arm, 
and  return. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  with  a  half  turn  at 

the  same  time  swinging  the  ex- 
tended arm  downward  and  for- 
ward upward  (describing  a  half 
circle),  taking  hold  on  the  rail 
as  far  away  from  the  stationary 
hand  as  possible.  Return  and 
repeat  with  the  other  arm. 

4  As  Exercise  3,  turning  backward, 

circling  the  arm  downward  and 
then  backward  upward. 

5  As  Exercise  1,  hanging  with  both 

hands  on  one  round,  the  palms 
forward.  Turn  one  quarter  turn 
forward,  the  hand  changing  to 
another  round,  and  return. 

6  As  Exercise  5,  turning  backward 

around  one  arm,  and  return. 

7  As   Exercise    5,  circling  one   arm 

downward  and  forward  to  a 
round  in  farthest  reach.  Return, 
and  repeat  with  the  other  arm. 


8  As  Exercise  7,  turning  and   cir- 

i-liiig  the  arm  backward. 

9  Hanging  position  as  in  Exercise  1, 

but  the  palms  turned  backward. 
Turn  one  quarter  turn  back- 
ward around  one  arm,  circling 
the  other  arm,  and  taking  hold 
on  the  same  rail  which  the  sta- 
tionary hand  holds.  Return, 
and  repeat  with  the  other 
arm. 

10  From  the  hanging  position  on  one 

side,  facing  the  ladder,  palms 
backward,  turn  three  quarters 
turn  around  one  arm  backward, 
the  other  arm  circles  backward 
upward,  taking  hold  of  the  op- 
posite rail.  Return. 

11  Hanging  position  on  one  round, 

the  palms  forward.  Turn  one 
half  turn  forward  around  one 
arm,  circling  the  other  arm  for- 
ward upward,  taking  hold  on  the 
same  round.  Return. 

12  As  Exercise   11,   but  the    palms 

backward  and  turn  backward 
around  one  arm. 


LESSON    4. 
Position  sideways  facing  outward  at  one  end  of  the  ladder. 


1  Jump  into  the  hanging  position, 
both  hands  on  one  rail,  the  palms 
forward.  Turn  one  half  turn 
forward  to  the  right  around  the 
right  arm,  and  advance  left  hand 
on  the  same  rail,  beyond  the 
right,  the  palm  forward.  Then 
turn  one  half  turn  forward 
around  the  left  arm,  changing 
hold  with  the  right  hand;  con- 
tinue this  travelling  from  one  end 
of  the  ladder  to  the  other. 


2  As    Exercise    1,   beginning    from 

position  palms  backward,  and 
turn  one  half  turn  backward 
instead  of  forward,  being  care- 
ful to  always  take  the  position, 
the  palms  backward,  when  re- 
treating. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  the  hands  on  two 

rounds,  the  palms  inward.  Exe- 
cute one  half  turn  backward  con- 
tinually, and  alternately  around 
the  right  and  left  arm,  always 


HORIZONTAL   LADDER 


231 


placing  the  moving  hand  in  posi- 
tion, the  palms  inward. 

4  As  Exercise  3,  but  the  palms  out- 

ward and  turn  forward,  always 
placing  the  advancing  hand  in 
position,  the  palms  outward. 

5  First  movement  like  that  of  Exer- 

cise 1,  taking  hold  with  the 
advancing  hand,  the  palm  back- 
ward. Then  execute  one  half 
turn  backward  around  the  first 
arm  moved,  and  take  a  hold  with 
the  advancing  hand,  the  palm 
forward,  thus  describing  a  whole 
circle  in  the  same  direction. 
Continue  this  travelling  from  one 
end  of  the  ladder  to  the  other. 

6  As  Exercise  5,  beginning  with  the 

position  palms  backward,  and 
reverse  the  movements  and  posi- 
tions of  the  hands,  continually 
describing  circles  backward. 


7  As  Exercise  5,  with  the  hands  on 

two  rounds,  the  palms  inward. 

1st  movement  :  turn  one  half 
turn  backward  around  one  arm, 
change  the  hold  palm  outward. 

2d  movement:  turn  one  half  turn 
forward  around  the  other  arm, 
change  the  hold,  the  palms  in- 
ward. Travel  in  this  manner 
from  one  end  of  the  ladder  to 
the  other. 

8  As  Exercise  7,  beginning  with  the 

position,  the  palms  outward,  and 
turn  first  backward,  then  for- 
ward. 

9-16  As  Exercises  1-8,  swinging  the 
advancing  arm  in  a  circle  down- 
ward and  upward,  to  the  farthest 
reach  on  the  rails  or  rounds, 
thus  skipping  several  rounds  or 
spaces. 


LESSON    5. 
Position  sideways  facing  inward  at  one  end  of  the  ladder. 


1  Jump  into  the  hanging  position  on 

one  of  the  rails  and  swing  the 
body  sideways,  raising  right  and 
left  hand  quickly  when  swing- 
ing to  the  corresponding  sides. 

2  As     Exercise     1,     raising     both 

hands  simultaneously  and  return 
quickly,  at  each  sideways  move- 
ment of  the  body. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  travel  sideways  from 

one  end  of  the  ladder  to  the 
other,  both  hands  advancing  al- 
ternately in  the  same  direction. 

4  As  Exercise  1,  reversing  the  hold 

of  the  hands  alternately  when 
swinging  sideways. 

5  As  Exercise  1,  alternately  crossing 

one  arm  over  the  other  and  re- 
turn. 

6  As  Exercise  4,  at  the   same   time 


travelling  from  one  end  of  the 
ladder  to  the  other. 

7  As  Exercise  5,  and  travel  from  one 

end  of  the  ladder  to  the  other. 

8  As  Exercise  2,  and  advance  both 

hands  simultaneously,  travelling 
from  one  end  of  the  ladder  to  the 
other. 

9  As  Exercise  3,  with  the  hands  on 

the  rounds,  both  hands  advan- 
cing alternately  in  the  same 
direction. 

10  As  Exercise  6,  with  the  hands  on 

the  rounds,  and  change  from 
palms  inward  to  palms  outward, 
when  advancing. 

11  As  Exercise  7,  with  both  hands 

on  the  rounds. 

12  As  Exercise  8,  both  hands  moving 

simultaneously  on  the  rounds. 


GERMAN-AMERK  '.  1  V    G  YMNASTICS 


LESSON    6. 
Position  underneath  and  at  one  end,  facing  the  ladder. 


1  Jump  into  the  hanging  position, 
the  hands  on  the  sides,  the  palms 
inward. 

o.  1st  movement:  Advance  the 
right  hand  one  space,  and  raise 
the  right  knee  forward  to  a 
right  angle  (Fig.  211). 


Fig.  211. 

2d  movement :  Advance  the  left 
hand  to  the  same  space,  and 
straighten  the  leg  downward. 
6.  The  same  movement,  but  with 
the  left   leg  and   left    hand. 
Continue    alternately    to   the 
end  of  the  ladder. 
2   Hanging  position,  the  hands  on  one 

round,  the  palms  forward, 
a.  1st    movement:    Advance    the 
right  hand  to  the  next  round, 
and  raise  the  right  leg  forward 
horizontally. 


2d  movement:  Advance  the  left 
hand  to  the  same  round,  an.l 
lower  the  leg. 

b.  As  a,  but  with  the  left  leg  and 
left  hand.     Continue. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  with  the  palms  out- 

ward. Raise  the  feet  back  war.!, 
bending  the  leg  to  a  right  angle. 
Continue. 

4  As  Exercise  2,  with  the  palms  back- 

ward. Raise  the  legs  sideways, 
and  return  alternately.  Con- 
tinue. 

5  1st  movement:  As  in  Exercise  1. 
2d  movement:   pass  the  left  hand 

to  the  next  round,  straighten  the 
right  leg,  at  the  same  time  rais- 
ing the  left  knee.  Continue. 

6  1st  movement :  As  in  Exercise  2. 
2d  movement:  pass  the  left  hand 

to  the  next  round,  and  lower  the 
right  leg,  at  the  saiue  time  raise 
the  left  leg  forward.  Continue. 

7  1st  movement :  As  in  Exercise  3. 
2d  movement:  pass  the  left  hand  to 

the  next  space,  lower  the  right 
foot,  at  the  same  time  raise 
the  left  one  backward.  Con- 
tinue. 

8  1st  movement:  As  in  Exercise  4. 
2d  movement:   pass  the  left  hand 

to  the  next  round  and  lower  the 
right  leg,  at  the  same  time  raise 
the  left  leg  sideways. 
9-16  As  Exercises  1-8,  beginning 
from  the  hanging  position  at  one 
end  of  the  ladder,  the  back  turned 
towards  the  ladder.  All  move- 
ments of  the  legs,  however,  re- 
main as  in  the  previous  exer- 
cises. 


HORIZONTAL   LADDER 


233 


LESSON    7. 
Position  underneath  and  at  one  end  of  the  ladder,  facing  it. 


1  Jump  into  the  hanging  position  on 

the  rails,  the  palms  inward.  Hop 
forward  and  backward  on  both 
hands  (the  hands  move  simul- 
taneously forward  to  the  next 
space),  and  raise  both  knees 
forward  to  right  angles  on  the 
first  movement  of  the  hands, 
straighten  the  legs  on  the  second. 
Continue. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  with  the  hands  on 

one  round,  the  palms  forward,  and 
raise  both  legs  forward  to  a  hori- 
zontal position  on  the  first  move- 
ment, lower  the  legs  on  the 
second.  Continue. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  with  the  hands  on 

the  rails,  the  palms  outward,  on 
the  first  movement  raise  both  feet 
backward,  bending  the  knees  to 
right  angles. 

2d  movement:  Straighten  the  legs 
downward.     Continue. 

4  As  Exercise  2,  with  the  palms  back- 

ward. 
On  the  first  movement  bend  both 

feet    upward    (the    legs    remain 

extended). 
On  the  second  movement  straighten 

the  feet.     Continue. 


5  As  Exercise  1,  with  one  hand  on 

one  rail,  the  palm  inward,  the 
other  on  one  round,  the  palm 
forward,  hop  fore  and  backward 
in  this  position. 

On  the  first  movement  spread  the 
legs  sideways  to  a  straddle  posi- 
tion. 

On  the  second  movement  close  the 
legs. 

6  As  Exercise  5,  with  one  hand  on 

one  rail,  the  palm  outward,  the 
other  on  one  round,  the  palm 
backward.  Hop  fore  and  back- 
ward. 

On  the  first  movement  spread  the 
legs  to  a  cross  straddle  position, 
one  leg  forward,  the  other  back- 
ward. 

On  the  second  position   close  the 

legs. 

7-12  As  Exercises  1-6,  the  holds  and 
positions  of  the  hands  as  well  as 
the  hopping  movement  fore  and 
backward  are  executed  the  same 
as  in  the  previous  exercises,  but 
the  legs  are  to  be  raised  and  kept 
in  one  of  the  positions  indicated 
in  the  first  movement  of  the  first 
six  exercises. 


LESSON    8. 

Position  sideways,  facing  inward. 
1   Jump  into  the  hanging  position,  2d  movement:  Straighten  the  arms 


both  hands  on  one  rail,  the  palms 
forward. 

1st  movement:  Bend  the  arms 
slowly  to  right  angles,  and  raise 
the  legs  forward  to  a  horizontal 
position. 


and  lower  the  legs.  Repeat. 
2  As  Exercise  1,  but  in  the  first  move- 
ment straighten  the  right  arm 
sideways,  the  hand  on  the  rail, 
and  raise  the  right  leg  side- 
ways. 


234 


CEKMAN-AMERIC.  1  .V    '.  Y 


2d  movement:  Back  to  position,  and 
the  same  with  the  opposite  limbs. 
Repeat. 

3  Hanging  position  as  in  Exercise  1, 
cross  the  limbs  of  one  side  over 
those  of  the  opposite  sides,  and 
return  to  position.  Repeat. 


Fig.  212. 

4  Hanging  position  as  in  Exercise  1, 

then  bend  the  arms  and  reverse 
the  hold  with  both  hands  simul- 
taneously. At  the  same  time  raise 
the  knees  forward  to  right  angles. 
Return  to  the  starting  position. 

5  Hanging  position  as  in  Exercise  1. 

Bend   the  arms  to  right  angles, 
and  — 
a.  Raise  the  right  elbow  over  the 

right  rail,  and  raise  the  right 

foot  backward  ; 
6.  As  a,  but  with  the  left  arm  and 

left  foot ; 
c.  As  a,  but  exercising  both  arms 

and  feet  simultaneously  (Fig. 

212).     (Underarm  hang.) 


0  Hanging  position  as  in  Exercise  1, 

bend  the  arms,  and 
«.  Straighten  the  right  arm  over 
the  upper  side  of  the  ladder, 
raising  the  right  leg  forward 
horizontally,  and  return  to 
position; 

b.  As  a,  but  with  the  left  arm  and 

the  left  leg  ; 

c.  As  a,  but  with  botli  arms  and 

legs  simultaneously. 

7  Hanging  position  as  in  Exercise  1, 

bend  the  arms  and  swing  the 
body  fore  and  backward.  At 
the  end  of  the  backswing  move 
both  arms  to  the  elbows  over  the 
rail  of  the  ladder,  and  return  to 
the  previous  position  at  the  next 
backward  movement. 

8  As  Exercise  7,  moving  the  entire 

arms  over  the  upper  side  of  the 
ladder.  (Upperarm  hang.) 

9  As  Exercise  7,  but  at  the  end  of 

the  backswing  slide  both  hands 
sideways  outward  to  the  farthest 
reach,  return  at  the  next  back- 
ward movement. 

10  As  Exercise  9,  crossing  the  arms 

simultaneously. 

11  As  Exercise  7,  but  at  the  end  of 

the  backswing,  hop  with  both 
hands  toward  one  side ;  con- 
tinue from  one  end  of  the  ladder 
to  the  other. 

12  As   Exercise   11,  with   one   hand 

on  one  rail,  the  other  on  one 
round. 


LESSON  9. 

Position  underneath  and  in  the  middle  of  the  ladder. 

Jump  into  the  hanging   position,  «.  Raise   the   right  hand  quickly 
the  hands  on  the  sides,  the  palms  and  return  ; 

inward.      Turn    the    body    over  b.  Raise  the  left  hand  quickly  and 
backward  into  the  hanging  posi-  '   return ; 

tion  backward,  and  — 


HORIZONTAL   LADDER 


235 


c.  Raise  both  hands  quickly  and 
return. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  but  in  the  hanging 

position  backward :  — 

a.  Spread  the  legs  to  the  side-strad- 
dle position  and  return ; 

6.  Spread  the  legs  to  the  cross- 
straddle  position  (one  leg  for- 
ward, the  other  backward), 
and  return  ; 

c.  Raise  and  straighten  the  knees. 

d.  Raise  the  feet  backward,  bend- 

ing the  knees,  and  return. 

3  Jump   into  the   hanging    position 

sideways  at  one  end  and  facing 
outward,  both  hands  on  one 
rail,  the  palms  backward.  Turn 
the  body  over  backward  half- 
ways  into  the  reversed  hanging 
position.  Straighten  the  legs  up- 
ward and  travel  sideways  to  the 
opposite  end  of  the  ladder,  the 
hands  move  alternately. 


Fig.  213. 

4  As  Exercise  3,  facing  inward  turn 
the  body  over  completely  into 
the  hanging  position  backward 
(Fig.  213). 


5  As  Exercise  4,  but  after  taking  the 
reversed  hanging  position,  bend 
the  arms  and  raise  the  body  up- 
ward onto  the  upper  side  of  the 
ladder  (Fig.  214).  Jump  down 
forward. 


Fh,  214. 

Q  As  Exercise  5,  then  change  the 
holds  of  both  hands  to  palms 
backward  on  one  side,  and 
slowly  roll  over  backward  into 
the  hanging  position  backward; 
then  turn  the  body  over  forward 
into  the  hanging  position  for- 
ward. 

7  Jump  into  'the  hanging  position, 

the  hands  on  both  rails,  the 
palms  inward.  Turn  the  body 
over  backward  halfways, 
straighten  the  legs  through  the 
space  between  the  two  rounds, 
bend  the  arms,  and  wind  the 
body  through  the  space,  coming 
into  the  front  leaningrest.  Re- 
turn, reversing  the  movements. 

8  As  Exercise  7,  winding  through 

one  space  to  the  upper  side  of 
the  ladder,  coming  into  the  rear 
leaningrest.  Walk  in  the  direc- 


230 


GERMAN-.  1  M  l-:ii WAX    GYMNA8TK  S 


tion  of  the  head   or  feet  in  this 
position,  and  at  the  end  of  the 
ladder  jump  down  sideways. 
9   Hanging  position  as  in  Exercise  1, 
turn   the    body   over   backward, 
placing   both  feet  on  one  round 
behind  the  body,  straighten  the 
body  and  extremities.     Return. 
10  Position   as   in    Exercise   9,   and 

lower  — 
a.  The  right  foot  and  return ; 


b.  The  left  foot  and  return ; 

c.  Bend  and  straighten  both  arms. 

1 1  Position   as   in    Exercise   9,    and 

travel  in  the  direction  of  the 
head,  feet  and  anus  moving 
alternately,  one  hand  and  foot 
leading. 

12  As  Exercise  11,  travelling  in  the 

direction  of  the  feet,  both  hands 
moving  simultaneously. 


LESSON    10. 
Position  underneath  the  ladder. 


1  Jump  into  the  hanging  position, 
the  hands  on  the  rails,  the  palms 
inward.  Raise  the  body  and  the 
legs  to  a  horizontal  position  for- 
ward (f rontlever)  and  try  to  hold 
it  for  some  time  (Fig.  215). 


Fig.  215. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  with  both  hands  on 

one  of  the  rails. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  with  both  hands  on 

one  round. 

4,  5,  and  6  As  Exercises  1,  2,  and  3, 
but  turn  the  body  over  backward, 
and  straighten  it  into  a  horizontal 
position  backward;  the  head, 
body,  and  the  legs  in  the  same 
plane  (rearlever).  Hold  the  posi- 
tion for  some  time,  then  bend  the 
knees  and  turn  the  body  forward 
into  the  hanging  position. 

7  Turn  the  body  over  backward  into 
the  rearlever,  then  lower  the  body 


slowly  downward  without  bend- 
ing the  legs.  Return  in  the  re- 
verse order. 

8  Frontlever,   then   turn    the   body 

over  into  the  rearlever,  and  re- 
turn. Repeat. 

9  Hanging  position,  both  hands  on 

one  round.  Turn  the  body  over 
backward  halfways,  spreading 
the  legs  to  a  sidestraddle  posi- 
tion, and  travel  forward  and 
backward,  the  hands  moving 
alternately. 

19  Frontlever,  the  hands  on  the  rails 
or  on  one  round,  travel  in  the 
direction  of  the  head  or  the  feet, 
the  hands  moving  alternately. 

11  As  Exercise  10,  but  in  the  rear- 

lever. 

12  From  the  position  sideways,  facing 

outward,  frontlever,  the  hands 
on  one  of  the  rails,  the  palms 
backward.  Hold  the  body  and 
the  legs  extended,  and  slowly 
turn  into  the  reversed  hanging 
position,  the  head  downward. 
Then  bend  the  arms  and  turn 
the  body  over  backward  into  the 
front  leaningrest  on  top.  Front- 
vault. 


HORIZONTAL   LADDER 


237 


LESSON    11. 
Position  underneath  the  ladder. 


1  Jump   into  the  hanging   position, 

the  hands  on  one  round,  the 
palms  forward.  Quickly  turn 
(hop)  left  or  right  about. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  with  both  hands  on 

the  rails  instead  of  on  one  round. 

3  As  Exercise   1,  but  while  turning 

jump  to  the  next  round. 

4  As  Exercise  2,  but  while  turning 

move  the  hands  to  the  next 
space. 

5  As  Exercise  1,  with  the  body  swing- 

ing forward  and  backward,  the 
turning  at  the  end  of  the  fore- 
swing. 

6  As  Exercise  5,  with  the  hands  on 

both  rails,  and  the  turning  at  the 
end  of  the  backswing. 


7  Hanging  position  as  in  Exercise  1, 

catch  hold  of  one  wrist,  bend 
and  straighten  the  arm  re- 
peatedly. 

8  As  Exercise  7,  hopping  from  one 

round  to  another,  forward  and 
backward. 

9  As  Exercise  7,  placing  one  hand 

on  the  hip. 

10  As  Exercise  9,  and  raise  both  legs 
to  a  horizontal  position. 

12  As  Exercise  11,  and  turn  around 
on  one  hand  as  far  as  possible, 
and  return.  Change  the  hands, 
and  repeat  with  the  other  arm. 


LESSON    12. 
Position  underneath  the  ladder 


1  Jump   into  the   hanging  position, 

the  hands  on  both  rails  or  one 
round.  Swing  the  body  forward 
and  backward,  and  at  the  end 
of  each  forward  movement  raise 
both  knees  and  hop  forward. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  hopping  forward  at 

the  end  of  the  backswing,  at  the 
same  time  bending  and  straight- 
ening the  knees. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  hopping  forward  in 

the  fore  and  backswing,  bending 

and  straightening  the  knees  with 

every  advance. 
4,  5,  and  6   As  Exercises  1,  2,  and  3, 

omitting  one  round  or  space  when 

advancing. 
7  As  Exercise  1,  but  at  the  end  of 

the  forward  movement  turn  the 

body    over    backward    into    the 


rear  hanging  position,  and  con- 
tinue swinging.  Eeturn  and 
repeat. 

8  As   Exercise  7,  but  after  turning 

over  backward,  return  at  once 
into  the  front  hanging  position 
and  continue  swinging.  Repeat. 

9  As  Exercise  7,  but  from  the  rear 

hanging  position  let  go  with 
one  hand  and  execute  a  whole 
turn  around  one  arm,  taking 
hold  again  with  the  hand.  Re- 
peat the  same,  but  turn  around 
the  other  arm. 

10  As  Exercise  7,  beginning  from  the 
hanging  position,  both  hands  on 
one  rail,  the  palms  backward, 
facing  the  ladder.  After  turn- 
ing the  body  over  halfway, 
immediately  pull  the  body  up- 


238 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  G  YMNASTICS 


ward  over  the  upper  side  of 
the  ladder  into  a  sitting  position, 
then  roll  over  backward  and 
jump  down  backward,  quickly 
letting  go. 

11  As  Exercise  10,  but  from  a  sitting 

position  on  the  ladder  change 
to  the  rear  leaningrest.  Bend 
the  arms  and  slowly  lower  the 
body  backward  into  a  rearlever 
underneath  the  ladder.  Jump 
to  the  floor. 

12  As  Exercise  11,  but  from  the  rear 

leaningrest,  bend  the  arms, 
transfer  the  weight  of  the  body 


onto  one  hand,  letting  go  uith 
the  other,  and  turn  around  tin- 
supporting  arm.  Take  hold 
again  with  the  other  hand, 
which  now  carries  the  weight  of 
the  body  and  around  which  the 
body  executes  one  half  turn 
backward,  the  free  hand  swing- 
ing backward,  taking  the  same 
hold  as  in  the  original  position. 
Continue  the  turning  forward 
and  backward  from  one  end  of 
the  ladder  to  the  other.  Itear- 
vault. 


SIMULTANEOUS  EXERCISES   ON  INCLINED  LADDERS     239 


SIMULTANEOUS     EXERCISES     ON     FOUR 
INCLINED     LADDERS 

( ' '  Gem ei  n uebun gren  * ' ) 
BY  DR.   KARL  ZAPP 

THESE  exercises  are  to  be  performed  by  a  class  of  girls 
from  thirteen  to  sixteen  years  of  age.  On  each  of  the  ladders 
three  girls  perform  simultaneously.  In  going  up  the  ladder, 
the  first  girl  starts,  the  second  follows  after  four  counts,  and 
the  third  ditto ;  all  of  them  reaching  the  starting  position 
in  sixteen  counts. 

GROUP     I. 
Exercises  in  the  leaning  position. 

1  Mount  on  the  upper 

side,  and    assume 
the    leaning    posi- 
tion    (Fig.     216). 
Raise  the  left  and 
right  leg  alternate- 
ly,   16    counts ;   turn 
over    on     the     under 
side     of     the     ladder 
into    position     in     4 
counts  ;  then  Nos.  2  and  3  jump 
down  ;   No.   1  moves   downward 
4  counts  and  alights  ;   all  return 
to  their  places  while  the  next  set 
marches  up. 

2  Raise  the  left  and  right  arm  alter- 

nately. 

3  Raise  one  arm  and  one  leg  alter- 

nately. 

4  Raise  one  arm  and  one  leg  (oppo- 

site) simultaneously. 


Fig.  210. 


240  GERMAN-AMERICAN   GYMNASTICS 

GROUP     II. 
Exercises  in  the  hanging  position. 

Mount  on  the  lower  side  (using  the  hands  and  the  feet), 
then  let  go  the  feet,  and  assume  a  hanging  position  on  the  sides 
or  rounds. 

1  Raise  the  right  and  left  knee  alter-      3   Raise  the  leg  forward,  move  back- 

nately,  then  both,  16  counts,  and  ward  left  and  right.       16  counts, 

repeat.  4   Raise  both  knees,  then  straighten 

2  Raise  the  leg  sideways  and  move  the  left  leg  forward  and  the  right 

crosswise,  left  and  right.  leg  backward,  etc.          16  counts. 

16  counts. 

N.  B.  —  After  each  of  these  exercises,  the  girls  return  to 
the  class  and  the  next  twelve  take  their  places. 

GROUP     III. 
Standing  on  the  ladders. 

Mount  on  the  ladder  ad  libitum,  and  stand  in  the  sidestand, 
one  foot  two  rounds  higher  than  the  other. 

1  Hands    on    shoulders  ;    straighten      3  Raise  the  arms  outward,  move  them 

arms  outward,  and  reverse.  upward,  forming  an  arch  over  the 

16  counts.  head.                                 16  counts. 

Then  turn  over  on  the  lower  side,  4  Raise  the  arms  to  the  left,  move 

and  jump  down  as  in  Group  I.  them     upward,     then     sideways 

2  Hands  on  shoulders ;   move   them  right,  then  down.          16  counts. 

upward,  forming  an  arch  over  the 
head,  etc.  16  counts. 

These  exercises  may  also  be  executed  in  the  crossstand 
(back  or  face  toward  the  ladder). 

GROUP    IV. 
Hanging  position. 

Mount  on  the  upper  side  and  turn  over ;  or  mount  on  the 
lower  side. 


SIMULTANEOUS   EXERCISES   ON  INCLINED  LADDERS      241 


1  Hang  on  the  rounds  in  the  side  or 

crosshang,  twist  the  body  left  and 
right.  16  counts. 

This  can  also  be  combined  with  leg 
exercises. 

2  Hang  by  one  hand  and  place  the 

left  or  the  right  hand  on  the 
shoulder  or  hip,  or  raise  the  arm 
outward.  16  counts. 


3  Hang  by  one  hand,  and  raise  the 

arm  sideways,  place  the  hand  on 
the  shoulder,  then  sideways,  and 
return.  16  counts. 

4  Hang  by  one  hand,  and  turn  the 

body;  resume  the  hold. 

16  counts. 


GROUP     V. 
Hangstaud  on  the  lower  side. 

Mount  as  stated  before,   but   let  the   feet   remain   on  the 
rounds. 


1  Draw  the  body  (chest)  up  towards 

the  ladder  four  times. 

2  With  arms  bent,  change  grip,  or  let 

go  and  straighten  one  arm  side- 
ways. 


3  With  arms  bent,  straighten  one  arm 

and  move  one  leg  outward  sim- 
ultaneously. 

4  Let  go  with  one  hand  and  turn  the 

body  (hangstand  sideways). 


GROUP     VI. 


Miscellaneous  exercises. 


1  Sitting  on  one  rail  (hands  behind), 

swing  the  legs  over  to  the  other 
rail. 

2  Rear   leaning   position,  move   the 

left  leg  and  right  arm  outward 
simultaneously ;  move  the  arm 
overhead  and  cross  the  leg  in 
front  of  the  right  (knee  bent), 
and  reverse. 


3  Hang  by  the  knees,  lower  the  body 

with  extension  of  arms ;  raise  the 
body,  and  take  hold  again. 

4  In  hangstand;   change  position  of 

the     hands     (grip)     simultane- 
ously — 

a.  On  the  rounds ; 

b.  On  the  rails ; 

c.  From  the  rounds  to  the  rails,  and 

reverse. 


242 


GERMAN-AMERICAX  G YMNASTICS 


RINGS 


BY  DR.  CARL   ZIEGLEB 


Springing. 
The  rings  must  be  within  easy  reach. 


Grasp  the  rings,  walk  backward  as 
far  as  possible,  then  run  for- 
ward and  swing  backward  sev- 
eral times.  Jump  off  with  the 
backswing. 


Fig.  217. 

2  The  same  as  Exercise  1,  but  run 

backward  and  swing  forward. 

3  Combine  Exercises  1  and   2,  i.e., 

run  both  forward  and  backward. 

4  As  Exercise  1,  and  with  the  fore- 


swing  face  about.  Turn  back 
into  the  original  position  at  the 
finish  of  the  swing. 

5  The  same  as  Exercise  4,  executing 

a  whole  turn.  This  should  hot 
be  attempted  until  the  foregoing 
exercises  have  been  successfully 
performed. 

6  Run  backward,  and   turn  at  the 

end  of  the  backswing. 

7  As  Exercise  1,  with  bending  the 

arms  at  the  finish  of  the  fore- 
swing  (Fig.  217),  at  the  finish 
of  the  backswing  straighten  the 
arms  (sinking  down  slowly). 

8  As  Exercise  2,  and  bend  the  arms 

at  the  end  of  the  backswing  ; 
straighten  the  arms  at  the  end 
of  the  foreswing. 

9  As  Exercise  7  or  8,  swinging  back 

and  forth  several  times  in  the 
bent  arm  position. 

10  Combine  Exercises  7  and  8.  At 
the  finish  of  the  foreswing  bend 
and  straighten  the  arms  quickly, 
then  take  several  steps  and  bend 
and  straighten  the  arms  again, 
etc. 


RINGS 


243 


NOTE.  —  After  having  mastered  the  foregoing  exercises  thor- 
oughly, try  them  with  the  rings  raised  out  of  reach,  i.e.,  so 
that  you  must  jump  for  them  and  have  some  one  swing  you  or 
give  you  "  a  start." 

II 

Without  Swinging. 
The  rings  must  be  as  high  as  the  shoulders. 


1  Grasp  the  rings,  then  allow  the  body 

to  drop  backward  slowly  into  the 
fronthangstand  (Fig.  218). 
NOTE.  —  The  arms  should  be  parallel, 
the  body  straight  and  inclined 
backward  from  the  feet,  which 
should  be  planted  firmly  upon 
the  floor,  the  chest  should  be 
well  forward,  the  head  in  a  line 
with  the  body. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  then  raise  the  left 

leg  forward  and  upward  (the  leg 
perfectly  straight). 

3  As  Exercise  1,  then  raise  the  left 

knee.  (The  thigh  and  the  body 
form  a  right  angle,  the  thigh  and 
leg  also.) 

4  Step  forward  and  sink  into  the  front- 

hangstand, then  execute  a  half 
turn  over  backward,  both  legs 
bent,  into  the  inverted  squathang 
(Fig.  219). 

NOTE.  — To  turn  over  backward,  jump 
off  lightly  with  both  feet  and 
throw  them  quickly  upward;  at 
the  same  time  bend  both  knees, 
drawing  them  up  closely  to  the 
body. 

5  As  Exercise  4,  then  straighten  the 

boJy  upward  into  the  inverted 
hang.  (See  Fig.  109.)  Let  the 
feet  touch  the  ropes  at  first ;  later 
have  the  legs  and  the  feet  together. 


6  As  Exercise  4,  then  place  the  feet 
within  the  rings  and  turn  the 
body  over  backward  and  down- 
ward (retaining  the  hold  with 
the  hands  and  the  feet)  into  the 
nest. 


Fig.  218. 

7  As  Exercise  6,  then  straighten  the 

left  leg  backward  (remove  the 
foot  from  the  rings  and  replace 
after  a  short  pause). 

8  As  Exercise  6,  then  straighten  the 

left  arm  forward.  (Let  go  of 
the  rings  and  straighten  the 


244 


GERM  A  N-AMElilCAN  G  YMNASTICS 


10 


ami,  then  grasp  the  ring  again 
after  a  short  pause. ) 

Combine  Exercises  7  and  8 
(straighten  the  left  ann  and 
right  leg,  or  the  right  arm  and 
left  leg)  (Fig.  220). 

As  Exercise  4,  then  pass  the  feet 
through  the  rings  into  the  knee- 
hang  ;  the  hands  remain,  i.e.,  do 
not  give  up  their  hold. 


11  As  Exercise  10,  then  let  go  with 

the  hands,  straighten  the  back 
and  fold  the  anus  —  kneehang 
(See  Fig.  117). 

12  As  Exercise  4,  then  continue  the 

turn  backward  and  straighten 
the  legs  downward  into  the 
hangstand  backward  (See  Fig. 
131). 


NOTE.  —  After  executing  an  exercise,  always  return  to  the 
original  or  starting  position  in  the  reverse  order. 


Fig.  219. 


Fig.   220. 


Ill 
"Without  Swinging. 

The  rings  must  be  as  high  as  the  shoulders. 


1  Stand  directly  between  and  under 
the  rings,  grasping  them.  Al- 
low the  body  to  sink  backward 
slowly  into  the  fronthang- 
stand  (Fig.  218). 

Bend    and    straighten    the    arms 
rapidly. 


2  As    Exercise    1,    sinking    forward 

slowly  into  the  rearhangstand 
(the  arms  above  the  head)  (Fig. 
221). 

3  As  Exercise   1,  but  sinking  side- 

ways left  (Fig.  222). 


RINGS 


245 


4  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately,  chan- 

ging   from    one    to    the    other 
through  the  upright  position. 

5  As  Exercise  4,  sideways  left  and 

right  alternately. 

6  As  Exercise  2,  then  change  to  po- 

sition forward  by  describing  a  half 
circle  to  the  left  passing  through 


the  position  sideways.  Reverse 
into  the  first  position. 
7  As  Exercise  2,  then  change  to  po- 
sition sideways  left,  then  forward 
and  sideways  right  again  to  the 
first  position.  Circle  from  left  to 
right,  or  from  right  to  left. 


Fig.  221. 


Fig.  222. 


IV 
Swinging  the  legs  and  the  body. 


The  rings  must  be  stationary. 

1  Jump  into  the  ordinary  hang. 
Swing  the  legs  forward  and  back- 
ward—  shortswing  (Fig.  223,  a 
and  6). 

NOTE.  —  When  swinging  the  legs  for- 
ward the  thighs  are  flexed  upon 
the  body,  but  the  legs  remain  ex' 


tended.  The  legs  can  thus  grad- 
ually be  raised  until  the  feet  touch 
the  ropes.  This  exercise  (the 
shortswing)  can  be  used  as  a  pre- 
liminary movement  to  the  exer- 
cises of  the  second  group  and 
other  kindred  exercises,  when  the 
rings  are  above  reaching  distance. 
When  swinging  the  legs  back- 
ward keep  them  straight,  throw 


24G 


(;KI;.MA\-A  M  ERIC  AN  GYMNASTICS 


Fig.  223  a. 

the    chest    forward,   with    head 
erect. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  swinging  sideways 

left  and  right. 

3  Swing  the  legs  in  a  circle  from  left 

to  right,   or  from  right  to  left 
(Fig.  224). 


Fig.  223  b. 

NOTE.  —  The  upper  part  of  the  body 
moves  very  little,  while  the  hips 
and  the  legs  describe  the  circle. 
The  ropes  must  not  *wist.  Begin 
and  stop  gradual?. 


Fig.  224. 


B 


The   rings   must   be   within   easy 
reach. 

4  Pass  the  arms  through  the  rings 
into  the  elbowhang,  then  repeat 
Exercises  1,  2,  and  3. 


Fig.  225. 


The  rings  must  be  as  high  as  the 

head. 

5  Pass  the  arms  through  the  rings 
into  the  shoulderhang,  then  re- 
peat Exercises  1,  2,  and  3  (Fig. 
225). 


RINGS 


247 


NOTE.  —  In  the  last  exercises  the  rings  should  be  under 
the  shoulders ;  the  arms  may  be  either  straight  or  down  at  the 
sides,  or  the  hands  may  hold  on  to  the  rings,  or  the  pupil 
may  grasp  hands  backward,  the  latter  being  the  most  difficult. 


V 

Swinging. 
The  rings  must  be  within  easy  reach. 


1  Grasp  the  rings  with  the  ordinary 
hold.  Step  backward,  run  for- 
ward, and  at  the  end  of  the  fore- 
swing  turn  over  backwards  into 


the  inverted  squathang,  as  in  the 
Second  Group  (Fig.  219). 
Exercise  in  the  same  manner  the 
movements  of  the  Second  Lesson. 


NOTE.  —  By   gradually   raising   the    rings,    these    exercises 
become  more  difficult. 


VI 

"Without  swinging. 
The  rings  must  be  at  jumping  distance. 


1  Jump  into  the  hang  with  the  ordi- 

nary hold.  Raise  both  legs  for- 
ward. 

NOTE.  —  In  this  and  all  of  the  fol- 
lowing exercises,  the  legs  should 
be  raised  perfectly  straight,  the 
knees  and  the  feet  together. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  continuing  the  rais- 

ing until  the  feet  are  as  high  as 
the  rings. 

3  As  Exercise  2,  then  straighten  up- 

ward into  the  inverted  hanging 
position ;  lower  the  body  forward 
slowly  without  flexing  the  thigh. 

4  As  Exercise  3,  lowering  the  body 

backward  into  the  rearhang ; 
then  flex  the  thighs  and  turn 
over  forward. 


5  As  Exercise  4,  stopping  when  the 

body  has  reached  the  horizontal 
position  backward  —  rearlever 
(Fig.  226).  Then  sink  lower  into 
the  hang,  and  jump  off. 

6  As  Exercise  5,  turning  over  forward 

again  from  the  rearhang  as  in 
the  Fourth  Exercise. 

7  As  Exercise   6,   in    the    rearhang 

twisting  the  shoulders  and  so 
regain  the  original  position. 
NOTE.  —  This  exercise,  called  the 
shouldertwist,  is  rather  difficult 
to  describe.  The  body  gives  a 
slight  jerk  upward,  the  arms  are 
spread  sideways,  and  the  head 
of  the  humerus  of  each  arm  turns 
completely  around  in  its  socket. 


GERMAN-AMEUU:A.\  <.  VMNASTICS 


8  As  Exercise  5,  from  the  rear  lever 

raise  the  straight  body  into  the 
inverted  hang,  then  lower  slowly 
forward. 

9  As    Exercise    2,   then    straighten 

the  body  backward  into  the  rear 
lever.  Jump  off. 

10  As  Exercise  9,  then  bend  the 
knees  and  turn  over  forward  into 
the  inverted  squathang,  then 


straighten  the  left  leg  upward, 
and  lower  the  body  forward  into 
the  frontlever.  Sink  into  the 
hang,  and  jump  off. 

1 1  As  Exercise  3,  then  lower  the  body 

forward  into  the  frontlever. 

12  As  Exercise  9,  then  from  the  rear- 

lever  raise  into  the  inverted 
hang  and  lower  into  the  front- 
lever. 


Fig.  226. 


Fig.  227. 


VII 
Without  swinging. 


The  rings  must  be  within  jumping  distance. 


1  Grasp  with  the  ordinary  hold.  Turn 

over  backward  into  the  inverted 
hang  with  bent  hips  ;  then  move 
the  left  leg  outward,  and  cross 
and  bend  it  over  the  left  wrist 
(Fig.  227). 

NOTE.  —  The  left  leg  lies  upon  the 
left  wrist,  the  right  leg  and  the 
body  are  in  a  horizontal  position. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  placing  the  right  leg 

upon  the  left  wrist. 

3  As  Exercise  1 ,  as  the  left  leg  touches 

the  arm,  the  left  hand  releases 


its  hold  and  allows  the  leg  to 
pass  between  it  and  the  ring, 
then  resumes  its  hold  —  left 
hand  cutoff. 

4  As  Exercise  2,  releasing  the  hold 

as  in  Exercise  3. 

5  As  Exercise  1,  straddling  and  re- 

leasing both  the  rings,  and  jump- 
ing into  the  stand  under  the 
rings  —  double  cutoff.  (Throw 
the  body  well  forward  the  mo- 
ment you  let  go.) 


NOTE.  —  The    foregoing    exercises    may   also    be    executed 
while  swinging. 


RINGS 


249 


VIII 

Without  swinging. 


The  rings  must  be  within  easy  reach  or  jumping  reach 


Grasp  with  the  ordinary  hold. 
Raise  the  legs  forward  and  up- 
ward, at  the  same  time  bending 
the  arms,  and  turn  over  back- 
ward into  the  resting  position  in 
the  rings  (Fig.  228). 

2  As  Exercise  1,  then  bend  the  arms 

to  the  bent  arm  rest. 

3  As  Exercise  2,  then  sink  backward 

into  the  hanging  position. 

4  Bend  the  arms  until  the  shoulders 

are  on  a  level  with  the  hands, 
then  turn  the  hands  forward  and 
straighten  the  arms,  pushing  the 
body  upwards  into  the  resting 
position  —  pushup. 

5  As  Exercise  4,  then  roll  over  for- 

ward into  the  hang. 

6  As  Exercise  1,  then  turn  over  for- 

ward into  the  bent  arm  handstand 
in  the  rings,  the  feet  around  the 
ropes. 

7  As  Exercise  4,  then  turn  forward 

into  the  handstand  in  the  rings, 
the  feet  against  the  ropes  (Fig. 
229). 


Fig.  228. 


Fig.  223. 


As  Exercise  7,  the  handstand 
without  the  feet  touching  the 
ropes. 


NOTE.  —  Although   very  difficult,   the   foregoing  exercises 
may  he  performed  with  swinging. 


250 


VERMAN-AMEliKJAN   G YMNAST1CS 


VERTICAL     POLES 


BY  WM.  KOPP 


Climbing. 

ON  one  pole,  with  the  help  of  the  hands  and  the  feet. 
Position  of  attention,  facing  the  pole. 

with  the  right  ;  lift  the  left  foot 
from  the  ground,  anil  place  it 
against  the  right  side  of  the  pole, 
the  knee  on  the  left  side  ;  lift  the 
right  foot,  and  place  it  in  front  of 
the  pole,  the  ankles-  crossing,  the 
outside  edge  of  the  feet  together, 
the  pole  between  them  (Fig.  230) 
—  climbing  position. 

Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  reach, 
and  grasp  the  pole,  the  left  fol- 
lowing ;  draw  up  the  legs  with- 
out moving  them  from  the  pole, 
and  without  bending  the  arms, 
tighten  the  hold  of  the  feet  when 
elevated  (Fig.  231),  then  straight- 
en the  legs  and  the  trunk.  Re- 
peat, thereby  gradually  climbing 
upward.  Then  descend  in  the  re- 
versed order.  The  teacher  should 
not  permit  any  sliding  down. 

As  Exercise  1,  beginning  with  the 
right  hand,  and  the  position  of  the 
feet  reversed. 


230. 


Fig.  231. 


1   Raise 
and 


the  left  hand  to  the  reach 
grasp   the    pole,    following 


II 
Hand  over  hand  climbing. 


1   As  in  the  First  Exercise  of    Les- 
son I. 


2   Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  reach, 
and  grasp  the  pole,  raise  the  legs 


VERTICAL   POLES 


251 


to  the  climbing  position  without 
bending  the  right  arm,  straighten 
the  legs  and  the  trunk.  Repeat, 
raising  the  left  hand  to  the  reach. 
Descend  in  the  reversed  order. 


3  As  Exercise  2,  grasping  upward 
with  both  hands  at  the  same 
time. 


With  the  hands  only  (HANDCLIMBING). 


4  a.  Raise    the    right    hand    to   the 

reach,  and  grasp  the  pole,  the 
left  following,  bending  the 
arms,  thereby  lifting  both  feet 
from  the  ground,  the  legs  to- 
gether and  straight,  the  toes 
pointing  downward  (Fig.  232). 
b.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the 
reach  and  grasp  the  pole,  the 
left  hand  following.  Repeat. 
Descend  in  the  reversed  order. 

5  As  Exercise  4,  the  left  hand  lead- 

ing. 

6  As  Exercise  4,  hand  over  hand. 

7  As  Exercise   4,   with  the  body  to 

the  right  of  the  pole,  the  left 
side  slightly  touching  it,  the  legs 
together,  straight  and  slanting  to 
the  front,  the  toes  pointed  in  the 
same  direction  (Fig.  233). 

8  As  Exercises  4,  5,  and  6,  with  leg 

movements,  such  as  side  or  cross- 
straddle,  raising  the  knees  and 
heels,  crossing  the  legs. 


Fig.  232. 


Fig.  233. 


As  Exercise  8,  changing  the  posi- 
tion of  the  legs  after  a  certain 
number  of  steps. 


Ill 
Climbing  on  two  stationary  poles  with  help  of  the  hands  and  feet. 

Stand  between  the  poles. 


1  a.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the 
reach,  and  grasp  the  right 
pole,  the  left  following  on 
the  left  pole,  bend  the  arms 
and  raise  the  legs  to  the  ordi- 
nary climbing  position  on  the 
right  pole  (Fig.  234). 


b.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the 
reach,  follow  with  the  left, 
and  raise  the  body.  Repeat. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  the  left  hand  lead- 

ing, and  the  feet  in  the  climbing 
position  on  the  left  pole. 

3  Exercises  1  and  2  alternately. 


252 


GERM .  I  V    AM  /•;/;  K'.  I  .V    M  -  M  .V .  1  >  7  7  f  > 


4  As  Exercise  1,  pressing  thf  l«--s 
against  tlie  poles  from  the  inside 
(the  feet  on  the  outside)  (Fig. 
235). 

6  As  Exercise  1,  pressing  the  legs 
against  the  poles  from  the  out- 
side (the  feet  on  the  inside). 

6  As  Exercises  4  and  5,  with  both 

hands    simultaneously,   but   one 
leg  after  the  other. 

7  As   Exercises  4   and   5,   with   one 

hand  after  the   other,   but  both 
legs  simultaneously. 

8  As  Exercises  4  and  5,  with  both 

hands  and   both  legs  simultane- 
ously. 


Fig.  235. 


Fig.  234. 


IV 


Climbing  on  two  stationary  poles  without  the  help  of  the  feet. 


1  a.  Raise    the    right    hand    to   the 

reach,  and  grasp  the  right 
pole,  the  left  following  on 
the  left  pole  ;  bend  the  arms, 
the  body  in  a  line  with  the 
poles.  Repeat.  In  descend- 
ing, reverse  the  order. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  the  left  hand  lead- 

ing. 

3  Climb  up  and  downward,  the  hands 

grasping  alternately. 

4  As  Exercises  1,  2,  and  3,  with  the 

following  leg  movements  :  — 


a.  Cross  or  sidestraddle. 

b.  One  or  both  knees  raised. 

c.  One  or  both  heels  raised.      -.- 

d.  One  or  both  legs  raised  forward. 

e.  Raising  and  then  straightening 

the  knees. 
/.  Raising     the     heels     and     then 

straightening  the  legs,  etc. 
Travel  from  one  pole  to  the  next, 
gradually  climbing  upward  at  the 
same  time.    Hop  down  on  one,  or 
two  poles. 


1  Repeat  the  above  climbing  exer- 

cises while  swinging. 

2  Repeat  the   above  climbing  exer- 

cises on  two  poles  while  swinging. 

3  a.  Climb  from  one  pole  to  the  next. 
b.  Climb    obliquely    upward    and 

downward  along  the  line  of  poles. 


Swinging  vertical  poles. 

The  climbing  from  one  pole  to  the 
next  is  done  in  the  following 
manner :  — 

From  the  climbing  position  on  one 
pole,  one  hand  grasps  the  next 
pole,  then  the  legs  go  over  and 
lastly  the  other  hand  follows. 


VERTICAL   POLES  253 

VI 

Slanting  poles. 

Most  of  the  exercises  on  the  vertical  poles  can  be  practised 
on  the  slanting  poles,  but  the  climbing  exercises  on  the  upper 
side  are  a  little  more  difficult.  The  climbing  can  also  be  varied 
by  changing  from  the  lower  to  the  upper  side,  or  by  circling 
around  a  pole.  Many  exercises  of  the  inclined  ladders  may  also 
be  practised  here. 


254 


GEltMAN-AMERU:. I  .V    <.  YM  \  .  1  .S77CS 


SIMULTANEOUS     EXERCISES     ON 
SWINGING     POLES 

For  boys  or  girls  11  to  13  years  ol  age 
BY   DR.   KARL  ZAPP 

HAVE  as  many  children  exercise  simultaneously  as   there 
are  spaces  between  the  poles. 

GEOUP     I. 
Hangstand.     Leg  exercises. 

In  the  hangstand   the    feet  are  flat  on  the  floor,  the  body 
straight,  the  head  erect,  the  chest  active.     The  smaller  boys  or 


Fig.  238. 


girls  may  stand  alternately  with  the  larger  ones,  and  take  hold 
below  the  hands  of  the  latter  (Fig.  236). 


SIMULTANEOUS  EXEHCISES   ON  SWINGING  POLES     255 


1  Move  the   left   and   the   right   leg 

alternately  outward    and    cross- 
wise. 8  counts. 

2  Raise  the  left  and  the  right  leg  up- 

ward. 8  counts. 

3  Raise  the  left  knee,  1;  extend  the 


leg,  2;  reverse,  3,  4.     The  same 
right.  8  counts. 

4  Raise  the  left  leg,  1 ;  bend  the  knee, 
2;  extend,  3;  lower,  4.  The  same 
right.  8  counts. 


GROUP     II. 
Hangstand.    Arm,  leg,  and  trunk  exercises. 


1  Lower  the  grasp  of  one  hand,  also 

give  up  the  grasp  of  one  hand. 

8  counts. 

2  Move  the  head  in  different  direc- 

tions (8  counts),   also  roll   the 
head.  8  counts. 

3  Turn  the  body  sideways.     (If  all 


turn  in  the  same  direction,  they 
effect  a  swaying  movement.) 

8  counts. 

4  Change  from  the  front  hangstand 
to  the  rear  hangstand,  four  times. 
(Face  toward  the  floor,  the  body 
well  extended. )  8  counts. 


GROUP     III. 
Swinging  on  two  poles. 

Each  pupil  takes  hold  of  two  poles,  goes  back  about  three 
steps,  and  then,  upon  command,  runs  forward,  the  hands  glid- 
ing upward;  with  the  first 
step  he  jumps  up,  and  grasp- 
ing the  poles  firmly,  he  swings 
himself  backward  and  forward 
two  or  three  times,  jumping 
down  upon  command. 

1  Run  and  swing.  6  counts. 

2  Run    and    swing    and    flex    the 

knees  upward.  6  counts. 

3  Run  and  swing  and  flex  the  legs 

upward.  6  counts. 

4  Run  and  swing  with  bent  arms 

(Fig.  237).  6  counts. 

5  Run  and  swing  with  bent  arms 

continually    swinging  the  legs 

forward   and  backward  (short-  Fig.  237. 


25G 


QEKMAN-AMERK  .  I  A    <;  YMNASTIC8 


GROUP     IV. 
Exercises  on  one  pole. 


1    Hang  in  the  climbing  position. 

8  counts. 


extend  right  or  left  arms,  side- 
ways. 8  counts. 


2   Hang  in  the  climbing  position,  and      5   Hang  in  the  climbing  position,  and 


change  the  position  of  the  legs. 
8  counts. 


extend  arm  and  leg  sideways  al- 
ternately. 8  counts. 


3    Hang  in  the  climbing  position,  and       6   Climbing. 


extend  left  or  right  leg  sideways. 
8  counts. 


7   Wander-climbing    (from    pole    to 
pole). 


4    Hang  in  the  climbing  position,  and       8   Climbing  on  the  swinging  pole. 


B  UCK 


257 


BUCK 

BY  WM.  A.  STECHER 


ALL  exercises  begin  with  a  run. 

The  word  lengthwise,  or  crosswise,  before  a  lesson,  means 
that  the  buck  is  to  stand  with  its  length  either  in  line  with 
the  run,  or  at  right  angles  thereto. 


Lengthwise. 


1  Jump  into  the  freerest  (see  Fig. 

155),  then:  — 
a.  Sidestraddle. 
6.  Crossstradle. 

c.  Raise  the  heels  (Fig.  238). 

d.  Raise  the  knees; 

e.  Cross  the  legs. 

(See  that  the  legs  are  closed,  and 
the  body  in  good  position  before 
landing  on  the  board. ) 

2  Jump  into  the  ridingseat;  dismount 

left  backward  with  a  quarter  turn 
left,  and  immediately  jump  into 
the  ridingseat  again;  dismount 
right  backward. 

3  Jump  into  the  ridingseat;   swing 

the  legs  backward  several  times; 
straddleoff  forward. 

4  As  in  Exercise  3,  swing  the  legs 

backward  into  the  leaningrest 
(see  Fig.  160)  ;  straddleoff  for- 
ward. 

5  Straddlevault  forward. 

6  Straddlevault  forward  as  a  farjump, 


gradually  moving  the  board  away 
from  the  buck. 

Straddlevault  forward  as  a  high- 
jump,  gradually  raising  the  buck 
higher. 


Fig.  238. 


258 


GERMAN-AMERICA  y    G  YMNA  >  TH  > 


II 


Crosswise. 


1  Jump  into  the  freerest;  repeat  as 

soon  as  landing  on  the  board. 

2  As  in  Exercise  1,  with  the  leg  move- 

ments as  in  the  first  lesson. 

3  As  in  exercise  1,  then  kneel  on  the 

buck.     Straighten  up,  then  knee- 
jump: — 


a.  Backward. 

b.  Sideways. 

c.  Forward. 

(Swing  the  arms  in  the  direction  of 

the  jump. ) 

4  As  Exercise  3;  with  one  quarter  or 
one  half  turn  right  or  left. 


Fig.  239, 

III 
Lengthwise. 


1  Jump,  raising  the  knees  well  up- 

ward, into  a  squatting  position 
on  the  buck  (help);  straighten 
the  legs  backward,  and  jump 
down. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  then  straighten  the 

body  upward   (standing  on  the 


buck);  jump  off  sideways  or  for- 
ward. 

3  As  in  Exercise  2,  swinging  one  leg 

well  sideways   or   forward  when 
jumping  off. 

4  As  in  Exercise  3,  with  one  quarter 

or  one  half  turn. 


BUCK 


259 


5  Straddlevault  forward  over  a  rope 

and  a  buck.  The  rope  on  the 
jumping-stand  lies  between  the 
board  and  the  buck;  high  strad- 
dlevault  (Fig.  239).  After  each 
jump  the  rope  is  raised. 

6  As  in  Exercise  5,  the  rope   being 

stretched  beyond  the  buck. 


As  in  Exercise  6,  as  a  farjump, 
gradually  moving  the  rope  away. 

As  in  Exercise  5;  gradually  mov- 
ing the  board,  or  board  and  rope, 
farther  from  the  buck  —  f arstrad- 
dlejump. 


The  board  may  also  be  moved  and  the  rope  raised,  thereby 
increasing  the  difficulty  still  more. 


IV 
Crosswise. 


1  Stridemount  right  (see  Fig.  156); 

swing   the    legs    backward,    and 
pushoff  backward. 

2  As  in  Exercise  1 ;  shears  left  back- 

ward ;  dismount  left  sideways. 

3  Flankvault  right  (see  Fig.  146). 


4  Wolf's  vault  left  (see  Fig.  151). 

5  Squattingvault  (help). 

6  Frontvault   right,    also    with    one 

quarter  or  one  half  turn  left. 

7  Rearvault     left,     also     with     one 

quarter  or  one  half  turn  right. 


Cross-wise. 


1  Jump  with  a  quarter  turn  left  into 

the  seat  on  the  buck  (the  right 
leg  forward,  the  left  backward), 
raise  the  body  up,  resting  on  the 
hands  (Fig.  240),  and  swing  the 
legs  left  and  right  sideways  sev- 
eral times;  when  swinging  to  the 
right,  pushoff  sideways. 

2  Straddlevault  right  sideways  (the 

right  leg  in  front). 

3  .Straddlevault  left  backward  (with 

a  turn  left  about). 

4  Straddlevault  sideways  or  backward 

with  one  quarter  or  one  half  turn 
before  landing. 

5  As  in  Exercise  5,  gradually  moving 

the  board  from  the  buck. 

6  As  in  Exercise  5,  gradually  raising 

the  buck  higher. 


As  in  Exercise  5,  moving  the  board 
and  raising  the  buck. 


Fig.  240. 


260 


< ; K i; .MAN-AMERICA N   G  YMNA S TICS 


VI 

Lengthwise. 

Let   the   different   movements  of   this    lesson   follow  each 
other  rapidly. 

1  Stridevault  right  with  one  quarter 

turn  right  and  straddlevault  for- 
ward. 

2  As  in  Exercise  1,  with  squatting- 

vault  (help). 

3  As  in  Exercise  1,  frontvault  right 

with  a  quarter  turn  left. 

4  As  in  Exercise  3,  and  then  let  a 

rearvault  left  follow  the  front- 
vault. 

5  From    the    frontrest    (Fig.     241), 

straddlevault  forward;  also  side- 
ways; also  backward. 

6  As  in  Exercise  5,  then  squatting- 

vault  forward;  also  with  one 
quarter  or  one  half  turn  right 
or  left. 

Fig.  241. 


ROUND   SWING 


261 


ROUND    SWING 

(GIANT  STRIDE) 
BY  HANS   BALLIN 


THE  class  is  formed  in  a  column  composed  of  ranks  of 
three  or  four,  the  number  being  determined  by  the  apparatus, 
which  has  either  four,  six,  or  eight  ropes  and  ladders. 


Fig.  242. 

A  circle  whose  centre  is  just  below  the  centre  of  the  swing 
is  divided  into  as  many  parts  as  there  are  ropes.  This  aids 
the  pupils  in  finding  their  correct  distances  and  positions.  The 
pupils  just  through  exercising  remain  in  their  places  until  the 
next  ones  take  the  ladders  out  of  their  hands. 


262 


(i  ERMA  N-A  M  ERIC  A  N   G  YMNA  S  TICS 


Most  of  the  exercises  of  the  following  themes  may  also  be 
executed  on  two  ladders.  In  using  two  ladders,  the  pupils 
generally  face  the  centre ;  and  then  the  ladder  to  the  right  is 
for  the  right  arm,  and  to  the  left  for  the  left  arm 


Fig.  243. 


Fig.  244. 


THEME    FIRST. 


Moving  in  a  circle  by  walking,  running,  skipping,  hopping,  hopping 
on  one  foot,  galloping,  etc. 


A  —  Moving 

Walking  forward  with  quick  steps 
in  a  circle  right  or  left.  The 
pupils  grasp  a  round,  and  stand 
as  far  from  the  centre  as  pos- 
sible (Fig.  243).  The  right  arm 
is  straight,  the  right  side  of  the 
body  turned  toward  the  centre, 
the  left  hand  is  on  the  hip,  or 
grasps  the  lower  end  of  the  ladder, 
a.  Walk  around  the  circle ;  upon 

command  turn  right  about ; 

then  walk  in  a  circle  left. 

Repeat  several  times. 


forward. 

2  The  same  on  tiptoes. 

3  The  same  running  (Fig.  244). 

4  The  same,  changing  from  running 

to  walking,  or  vice  versa. 

5  Skipping. 

6  Changing  from  skipping  to  walk- 

ing or  running. 

7  Changing  from  walking  to  hopping 

on  one  foot. 

8  Changing  from  one  movement  to 

another  upon  command,  or  at 
a  given  number  of  counts  (Fig. 
245). 


ROUND   SWING 


263 


9-  As  8,  but  with  each  change  a  turn 
in  the  opposite  direction  is  ex- 
ecuted. 


10  As  above,  the  pupils  performing 
different  exercises  ;  for  in- 
stance, while  some  run,  the 
others  skip. 


B  —  Moving  sideways. 


11  Quick  walking,  executing  a  closing 

step  sideways  (Fig.  246). 

12  Gallop  sideways  left  or  right. 

13  Gallop  left  or  right  and  change, 

as  in  4. 

14  Changes  of  gallop  and   walking 

sideways  with  closing  step,  a 
given  number  of  counts  for  each 
movement. 


15  The  same  as  in  14,  in  opposite 

directions. 

16  Running  sideways. 

o.   with  closing  step. 

b.  with  crossing  the  left  foot 
over  the  right,  when  run- 
ning right. 


Fig.  245. 


Fig.  246. 


THEME    SECOND. 

Moving  in  a  circle  forward  and  sideways,  performing  exercises 
in  walking  and  hopping. 

1  Gallop   forward    in    a    circle,   the      3  The  same  alternating. 

outer  foot  in  advance.  a.   after  having  completed   the 

2  The  same  with  the  inner  foot  in  circle  once. 

advance.  b.   after  a  given  number  of  steps. 

c.   upon  command. 


264 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNAsTK  > 


4  Moving  forward  in  a  circle  upon 

command. 

5  As  above,  the   pupils   performing 

different     movements  ;     for    in- 
stance, while  four  of  them  gallop 
forward  in  a  circle,  four  are  skip- 
ping. 
0  Polka  forward  in  a  circle. 


7  The  same,  alternating  with  walk- 
ing, running,  skipping,  Imppin.i:. 
or  with  double  gallop  (two  gal- 
lops forward,  with  one  foot  and 
then  two  forward  with  the  other 
foot),  in  the  manner  indicated  in 
Exercises  3,  4,  and  5. 


B 


Moving  sideways. 

8   Running  sideways,    the    left   foot 
crossing  over  the  right. 

a.  In  front. 

b.  In  rear. 

c.  Alternating  in  front  and  rear. 


9  Double  gallop  sideways  left,  with 
closing  step  right  at  each  third 
count. 

10   The  same  as  9,  executing  a  cross 
step  instead  of  closing  steps. 


THEME    THIRD. 
A  —  Moving  backward. 


1  Walking  backward  in  a  circle,  the 
left  or  right  hand  grasping  a 
round. 

a.  Fast  walking. 

b.  Running. 

c.  Skipping. 

d.  Hopping  on  one  foot. 


e.    Galloping. 
/.    Polka. 

2'  Upon  command,  change  from  one 
to  another  of  the  exercises  un- 
der 1. 

3  Upon  command,  change  the  direc- 
tion of  the  exercises  as  enume- 
rated under  1. 


B  —  Turning. 


4  Upon  command,  execute  a  quarter 

turn  in  a  stated  direction.   (When 
turned  toward  the  centre,  both 
hands  grasp  the  same  round.) 
a.   Executing      the    exercises 

named  under  1. 
&.   Executing  two  exercises  al- 
ternately after  each  turn. 
c.   A    different  exercise  after 
each  turn. 

5  Sideways  and  backward,  alternately 

executing  movements  as  under  4. 

0   A  succession  of  forward,  sideways, 

backward,  and  sideways,  moving 


along  in  the  same  line,  executing 
movements  as  under  4. 

7  Forward   and  backward    (after  a 

half  turn),  executing  movements 
as  under  4.  The  turn  is  best 
executed  toward  the  centre  (in- 
ward). 

8  A  whole  turn  inward  (or  outward) 

during  an  exercise  forward,  side- 
ways, or  backward.  The  turn  is 
either  executed  by  a  quick  mo- 
tion during  the  flight,  or  by  sev- 
eral steps  on  the  floor. 


ROUND   SWING 


265 


C  —  Rocking-step  and  Rocking-hop. 


9  Three  gallop-hops  forward  in  a 
circle  ;  at  the  close  of  third  hop 
execute  a  rocking-step. 

10  Facing  the  centre  ;  six  gallop-hops 

sideways  in  one  direction,  and 
then  a  rocking-step  ;  then  the 
same  in  the  opposite  direction. 

11  Sideways  as  in  10,  executing  two 

gallop-hops  and  one  side  step 
with  closing  step,  and  then  two 
rocking-hops  in  both  directions. 
The  rocking-hop  (three-quarter 
time)  is  the  same  exercise  as 
the  rocking-step ;  the  last  count, 
however,  is  hopped. 

12  Sideways  as  in  10,  executing  four 


gallop-hops,  one  closing  step  in 
one  direction,  and  one  rocking- 
hop  in  the  opposite  direction. 

13  Sideways  as  in  Exercise  10,  execut- 

ing six  gallop-hops  in  one  direc- 
tion, and  one  rocking-hop  in  the 
opposite  direction. 

14  Sideways  as  in  Exercise  10,  ex- 

ecuting a  rocking-hop,  and  clos- 
ing step  at  each  third  count. 

15  Rocking-hop  forward. 

16  Rocking-running  forward. 

(A  rocking-running  forward  is 
executed  in  two-fourths  time. 
The  rocking-step  is  shown  as  a 
run.) 


THEME    FOURTH. 


A  —  Giant   Stride. 


1  Running  in  a  circle,  executing  three 

running  steps  and  one  giant 
stride  alternately.  The  running 
is  begun  with  the  inner  foot. 

2  The  same  sideways,  running  with 

cross-steps. 

3  The  same  backward. 

4  Run  forward  in  a  circle,  executing 

long  strides,  gradually  reducing 
the  number  required  to  finish 
the  circle  to  8,  7,  6,  5,  etc. 
(Fig.  247). 

5  Giant  strides  in  a  circle  sideways, 

as  in  4  (executing  cross-steps). 

6  The  same  backward. 


Fig.  247. 


B  —  Flying  in  a  circle. 


Run  around  the  circle  forward  one 
or  more  times,  and  upon  com- 
mand fly  through  the  air,  rais- 
ing the  heels  backward. 


8  As  in  7,  skipping,  galloping,  hop- 

ping on  one  foot,  or  striding  to 
get  a  start. 

9  As  in  7,  letting  half  of  the  schol- 


266 


GERM  A  N-A  M  ERIC  A  N  GYMNAS  TICS 


ars  that  are  exercising  fly,  while 
the  rest  run.  (All  begin  the 
exercise  with  a  run.) 
10  Run,  gallop,  or  hop  sideways  to 
get  a  start,  and  fly  with  raising 
the  knees,  or  straight  legs  for- 
ward (Fig.  248). 


14 


Fig.  248. 

a  start  of  three  or  five  steps,  the 
pupil  jumps  outward  upward. 
The  grasp  as  before ;  i.e.,  hanging 
on  one  round,  the  arm  straight, 
in  the  under-arui  hang,  or  in 


Fig.  250. 


Flying  in  a  circle  with  swinging 
of  the  legs  forward  in  a  half 
circle.  (The  closed  feet  touch 
the  floor,  the  legs  are  swung  out- 
ward vigorously,  and  perform  a 
half-circle  before  the  feet  touch 
the  floor  again.)  (Fig.  250.) 
17  The  same  sideways. 


11  As  above,  the  pupil  standing  be- 

tween two  ropes,  and  grasping 
one  round  of  each  ladder. 

12  Running     backward     alternately 

with  a  giant  stride. 

13  Running  forward  and  high  flying  in 

a  circle  (circle  jumping).    After 


18 

19 


20 


Fig.  249. 


the  upper-arm  hang  (Fig.  249). 

14  The  same  exercise  ;  the  pupils  fly 

and  run  upon  command. 

15  The  same  exercise,  hanging  by  one 

hand  (for  strong  pupils  only). 


Fig.  251. 

The  same  backward. 

The  Exercises  19  and  20,  in  con- 
nection with  whole  turns  left  or 
right  during  the  flight. 

As  16,  17,  18,  the  legs  describing 
one  and  one-half  circle  before 
the  feet  touch  again  (Fig.  251). 


ROUND   SWING 


267 


THEME    FIFTH. 
Moving  in  a  circle  over  obstacles. 


Giant  stride  forward  with  stepping 
on  elevations.  Some  apparatus 
of  the  gymnasium  must  serve  for 
the  exercise ;  for  instance,  spring- 
boards can  be  used. 

The  pupils  step  on  the  elevations, 
and  execute  as  many  steps  be- 
tween the  elevated  points  as  are 
necessary. 


Fig.  252. 

some  other  apparatus,  which  the 
teacher  holds  out  to  them. 
5  Running  in  a  circle,  two  pupils 
change  places  with  each  other. 
The  one  ahead  stops  upon  com- 
mand, and  quickly  exchanges 
ropes  with  the  pupil  overtaking 
him.  Then  both  continue  in  the 
same  direction. 


2  Giant  stride  over  obstacles.    Jump- 

ing-ropes or  balancing-boards  are 
placed  in  the  line  of  the  swing, 
at  distances  as  far  apart  and  as 
suits  the  ability  of  the  pupils. 

3  Running  start  and  high  flying  over 

a  rope  (Fig.  252.) 

4  Running  in  a  circle;  the  pupils  en- 

endeavor  to  grasp  some  rings  or 


Fig.  253. 

6  Running  in  a  circle.    Upon  com- 

mand, the  next  squad  changes 
with  those  exercising.  They  also 
may  run  a  certain  distance  on 
the  inner  side  of  those  exercis- 
ing, and  change  places  with  them 
upon  command. 

7  Running  in  ranks  of  two. 

The  pupil  next  the  centre  holds 


268 


<; /•;/,'  MAN-AMERICAN   <;  YM  V .  1 STJCS 


Fig.  254. 


the  ladder  with  the  right  hand, 
the  left  arm  is  placed  around  the 
waist  of  the  other  pupil.  The 
latter  places  his  right  hand  on 
the  right  shoulder  of  his  neigh- 
bor, and  with  his  left  hand  takes 
hold  of  the  lower  end  of  the  lad- 
der (Fig.  253). 

8  Running  backward  in  a  circle,  as 

in  7. 

9  Exercise   7,  the  pupils   taking  a 

different  grasp. 

10  The  same  as  9,  moving  backward. 

11  As  in  Exercise  7,  the  pupils  stand- 

ing so  that  when  one  moves 
forward,  the  other  must  move 
backward  ;  also  sideways  (Fig. 
254). 


WHIPPLE-L  A  D  DEK 


269 


WHIPPLE-LADDER    (SEE-SAW) 

BY   HANS   BALLIN 

THEME    FIRST. 

Exercises  in   hanging.      Ordinary    grasp.      Arms   straight.     Leg   and 

trunk  exercises. 


Fig.  255. 


1  Swinging.  The  whole  body  is 
straight,  and  the  arms  are  not 
bent  during  the  flight.  Pupils 
alight  on  tiptoes,  bending  the 
knees  deeply,  and  turning  them 
outward.  The  body  must  not 
swing  forward  or  backward. 
The  ladder  must  be  within  easy 
reach  for  both  pupils. 


2  Swinging    and    raising  right  leg 

forward.     Leg  straight  and  toes 
pointing  downward. 

3  Swinging  and    raising   right  (or 

left)  leg  sideways. 

4  Swinging    and    raising    left    leg 

backward. 

5  Swinging  and  raising  (or  swing- 

ing) both  legs  forward. 


270 


GKHMAX-AMXItlt  A\    (,  Y M \ AST1CS 


6  Swinging  and  raising  (or  swing- 

ing) legs  sideways  left  (or 
right). 

7  Swinging  and  raising  legs  as  in  2, 

:!,  4,  .">,  ('>,  \\iini  going  downward. 

8  Swinging  and  alternately  exercis- 

ing two  of  the  foregoing  exer- 
cises when  going  upward  and 
downward. 

9  Swinging  and  crossing  right  leg 

quickly  in  front  of  left  when 
going  upward. 

10  Swinging    and    crossing    legs    as 

often  as  possible  when  going 
upward. 

1 1  The  same  when  going  downward. 


12  The  same  when  going  upward  and 

downward. 

13  Swinging   and   raising   left    knee 

when  going  upward. 

14  The  same  when  going  downward. 

15  The  same,  and  raising  both  knees. 

16  Swinging  and  turning  trunk  left 

when  going  upward. 

17  The  same  when  going  downward. 

18  The  same  alternately. 

19  The  same,  turning  left  going  up, 

turning  right  going  down. 

20  The  same,  executing  two  of  the 

foregoing  exercises  alternately 
when  going  upward  and  down- 
ward. 


THEME    SECOND. 
Exercises  in  hanging,  changing  grasp.    Leg  and  trunk  exercises. 


1  Swinging,  lifting,  and  re-grasping 

left  hand  when  going  upward. 

2  The  same  going  downward. 

3  The  same  alternately. 

4  The  same,  lifting  and  re-grasping 

left  and  right  hand  going  up- 
ward. 

5  The  same  going  downward. 

6  The  same  alternately. 

7  The  same  exercises  as  1,  2,  3,  4, 

5,  6,  lifting  hand  oftener  than 
once. 

8  The  same    exercises    of    Theme 

First,  and  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7  of 
Theme  Second. 

9  Swinging  and   lifting  left  hand, 

and  re-grasping  a  short  distance 
forward  on  the  beam  when  go- 
ing upward ;  grasping  the  former 
place  when  going  downward. 

10  Swinging,  and  the  same  as  9,  lift- 

ing left  and  right  hand. 

11  The  same  as  9  and  10,  travelling 

smaller  distances,  and  more 
than  once. 


12  Swinging  and   lifting  left  hand, 

grasping  a  round  when  going 
upward,  and  grasping  the  beam 
again  when  going  downward. 

13  Swinging  and  with  the  left  hand 

grasp  a  round,  and  then  the 
next  time  also  grasp  that  round 
with  the  right  hand,  re-grasping 
the  former  places  the  next  two 
times  going  upward. 

14  The  same,  alternating  in  various 

ways. 

15  Swinging  and  grasping  a   round 

with  both  hands  when  going  up- 
ward. (For  older  pupils  and 
more  experienced  ones  only.) 
Re-grasping  the  next  time  when 
going  upward. 

16  The  same,  alternating   with   the 

various  foregoing  exercises. 

17  The  same,  Exercises  8-16  alternat- 

ing with  Exercises  1-8. 

18  The   same,    Exercises    8-16   with 

exercises  of  Theme  First,  or  al- 
ternating with  same. 


WHIPPLE-LADDER  271 

19   The  same,  exercises  of  grasping      20  The  same,  touching  different  parts 
and  re-grasping  with  different  of  the  body  with  one  hand,  and 

grasps.  then  re-grasping. 

THEME    THIRD. 
Exercises  in  hanging,  arms  bent. 

The  exercises  of  Themes  First  and  Second  and  exercises 
with  arms  bent.  The  arms  are  either  bent  going  upward,  or 
going  downward,  or  both  ways. 

THEME    FOURTH. 
Exercises   in  the   upper-arm  hang. 

The  ladder  is  lowered  to  the  height  of  pupils'  shoulders, 
and  exercises  of  Theme  First  are  executed.  Exercises  which 
are  of  a  more  difficult  nature  than  those  named  in  the  above 
themes  do  not  properly  belong  to  this  apparatus,  which  is 
most  eminently  an  apparatus  for  girls. 


272  GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 


BALANCING    BOARD 

BY   RICHARD  PERTUCH 

EXERCISES  in  standing,  walking,  or  hopping  on  a  narrow 
raised  board,  necessitating  a  balancing  of  the  body,  are  called 
balancing  movements. 

The  apparatus  is  a  board  fourteen  to  sixteen  feet  long,  two 
inches  wide,  and  six  inches  high,  placed  on  three  or  four  iron 
footings  six  inches  high,  thus  giving  a  base  twelve  inches  from 
the  floor,  and  two  inches  wide,  to  exercise  on. 

For  classwork  there  should  be  from  four  to  eight  boards  in 
a  gymnasium,  so  that  a  large  number  of  pupils  can  exercise 
together.  The  boards  are  generally  placed  side  by  side  par- 
allel with  each  other,  the  distance  being  regulated  by  the 
exercise.  The  exercises  on  the  boards  may  be  started  from  a 
standing  position,  either  sidewise  or  crosswise  to  the  board. 

All  exercises  must  be  executed  with  the  weight  of  the 
body  resting  mainly  on  the  ball  of  the  foot,  with  the  body 
and  the  head  erect. 

The  most  suitable  connections  for  the  scholars  are  :  - 

A  —  Hand  in  hand  with  neighbors  (the  arms  bent,  the 
hands  in  height  of  shoulders  (Fig.  256),  or  the 
arms  raised  upward)  (Fig.  258). 

B  —  Arm  in  arm  with  neighbors. 

C  —  The  hands  on  the  shoulders  of  neighbors  (or  only  one 
hand,  either  the  right  or  left). 


BALANCING   BOARD 


273 


D  —  The  arms  over  the  shoulders  of  neighbors  (or  only  one 
arm,  right  or  left). 

E  —  3  and  4  combined. 

F  —  Cross  arms  with  neighbors,  and  grasp  hands  forward. 
(Fig.  257.) 

G  —  Cross  arms  with  neighbors,  and  grasp  hands  backward. 

If  the  scholars  stand  or  exercise  in  couples  facing  each 
other,  the  following  connections  may  be  used :  — 


Fig.  256. 

H  —  Grasp  opposite  hands. 

I  —  Grasp  opposite  hands,  the  arms  crossed. 

J  —  Grasp  right  hands  (in  Exercises  7,  8,  and  9,  the  arms 

can  be  held  in  position  as  in  Exercise  1). 
K  —  Grasp  opposite  forearms. 
L  —  Place  hands  on  the  opposite  shoulders. 

The  class  must  be  arranged  so  that  the  divisions  can  go  to 
and  from  the  apparatus  without  delay,  and  that  every  scholar 
can  see  the  exercises. 


274 


i; I:I;MA  \-. I .v /•;/,•/'  . i  \  <;  YM \.\  8  TI<  > 


The  l>rst  pliiii  is  to  arrange  the  class  around  the  boards  in 
form  of  a  square.  All  exercises  must  be  executed  left  and 
right,  and  started,  executed,  and  finished  simultaneously  by 
those  exercising. 

GKADE   I. 
Exercises  in  Stepping. 
Standing  facing  the  boards. 

3  Step  up  and  down  forward  by  a 

followstep. 

4  Step  up  and  jump  down  forward. 

5  Step  up  and  down  forward. 

6  Step  over  by  a  followstep. 


1  Step  up  forward  and  down  back- 

ward by  a  followstep. 

2  Step  up  forward  and  jump  down 

backward. 


Fig.  257. 

Standing  crosswise  to  the  boards. 


7  Step  up  sideways  into  the  step  po- 
sition forward  or  backward  (Fig. 
257),  and  step  or  jump  down  on 
the  same  side. 


8   As  Exercise  7,  stepping  or  jumping 
down  on  the  other  side. 


The  above  exercises  may  be  executed  successively  on  all 
boards ;   variations  may  be  made  by  counting  off  the  scholars 


BALANCING   BOARD 


275 


in  ones  and  twos ;  then  No.  1  can  exercise  while  No.  2  assists, 
and  vice  versa ;  or  all  can  exercise  at  the  same  time.  The 
different  connections  suitable  for  the  exercises  may  be  added. 


Fig.  258. 


Exercises  in  standing. 


9  Standing  sidewise  or  crosswise  for 
a  length  of  time,  as  for  two, 
four,  or  eight  counts. 

10  Standing  sidewise,  exercising  step 

positions  sidewise. 

11  As  Exercise  10,  with  crossstep  po- 

sition in  front  or  rear. 

12  Standing  crosswise,  exercising  step 

positions  forward  or  backward. 

13  Standing  sidewise,  executing  the 

layout  step  on  the  floor  forward 
or  backward  (one  foot  touches 
the  floor,  while  the  other  leg  is 
bent). 


14  Standing  crosswise,  executing  the 

layout  step  on  the  floor  sidewise. 
(Fig.  258). 

15  Standing   sidewise    or  crosswise, 

rise  on  the  toes. 

16  As  Exercise  15,  bending  the  knees. 

17  As  Exercise  15,  raising  one  leg  for- 

ward, backward,  or  sidewise. 

18  As  Exercise  15,  bending  the  trunk 

forward,  backward,  or  sidewise. 

19  As  Exercise  15,  turning  the  trunk 

right  or  left. 

20  As  Exercise  15,  raising  the  arms 

forward,   sidewise,   or   upward, 
with  connections. 

In  the  above  exercises  assistance  should  be  given  by  some 
of  the  scholars,  as  explained  before. 


»  GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 

Exercises  in  •walking. 
Standing  sidewise  on  the  end  of  the  board. 


21  Walking  sidewise  in   couples   fa- 

cing each  other,  one  on  the 
board,  the  other  on  the  floor  as 
assistant. 

22  As  Exercise  21,  both  on  the  boards 

with  different  connections. 


23  As  Exercise  22,  walking  and  stand- 

ing alternately. 

24  Walking  forward  in  one  line,  with 

different  connections  from  one 
board  to  the  other,  by  followstep. 

25  As  Exercise  24,  by  the  common 

step. 


Standing  crosswise  on  the  end  of  the  board. 


27  As  Exercise  26,  by  common  step. 

28  As  Exercises  26  or  27,  alternately. 


26  Walking  forward  in  one  line,  with 
the  different  connections  by  fol- 
lowstep left,  right,  or  alter- 
nately. 

In  Exercises  24  and  25,  assistance  may  be  given  by  part  of 
the  class  walking  on  the  floor  stepping  over  the  boards,  and  in 
26,  27,  and  28  by  walking  between  the  boards. 


GRADE    II. 

Exercises  in  stepping  with  turning. 
Standing  facing  the  board. 


1  Step  up  with  one  quarter  turn  into 

step  position  backward  or  for- 
ward, and  step  down  in  the  op- 
posite direction. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  jumping  down  with 

one  quarter  turn. 

3  As   Exercise   1,    one   half  turn  to 


the  sidestanding  position  on  the 
boards. 

4  As  Exercise  3,  jumping  down  back- 

ward without  a  turn. 

5  Step  up  from  one  side  and  down  on 

the  other,  by  one  half  turns. 


Standing  crosswise  to  the  board. 
6   Step  up  with  one  quarter  turn  to      8   Step  up  with  one  quarter  or  one 


the    sidestanding   position,    and 
down  in  the  reverse  direction. 
7   Step  up  from  one  side,  and  down 
on  the  other,  by  one  half  turn. 


half  turn,  and  execute  the  exer- 
cises of  the  Grade  I.,  Exercises 
9-20,  without  assistance,  using 
the  different  connections. 


BALANCING  BOARD 


277 


13 


Exercises  in  -walking. 
Stand  crosswise  on  one  end  of  the  board.    Walking  forward. 


9  Touchstep  forward,  and  follow- 
step.  Three-quarter  time.  (Step 
position  forward  left  (1),  step 
(2),  and  follow  with  the  right 
(3)-) 

10  As  Exercise  9,  touching  the  floor 

during  the  first  course. 

11  Raise   the    leg  forward,  and  fol- 

lowstep.  Three-quarter  time. 
(Raise  the  left  leg  forward  (1), 
step  (2),  and  follow  right  (3).) 

12  Raise  the  knees,  and  followstep. 

Three-quarter  time. 
As  Exercises  9-12,  left,  right,  or 

alternately. 
As    Exercises  9-12,   in   common- 

step.     Two-quarter  time. 


14  Followstep  and  rise  on  the  toes. 

Three-quarter  or  four-quarter 
time. 

15  As  Exercise  14,  with  bending  the 

knees. 

16  Followstep  and  trunk  exercises ; 

bending  forward,  backward, 
sidewise,  or  turning.  Four- 
quarter  time. 

17  Followstep    and    arm    exercises; 

bending  or  raising  forward  or 
upward. 

18  Walking  on  the  toes. 

19  Changestep.     Two-quarter  time. 

20  Change    and    followstep,     three- 

quarter  time. 


Standing  sidewise  on  one  end  of  the  board,  walking  sidewise. 


21  Touchstep  sidewise,  or  cross  and 

followstep.  Three-quarter  time. 
(Step-position  sidewise  (or  cross 
in  front  or  rear  with  the  left 
foot),  step  and  follow  with  the 
right. ) 

22  As  Exercise  21,  touching  the  floor. 

23  Raise  the  leg  sidewise  and  follow- 

step.    Three-quarter  time. 

24  Raise  the  knees  forward  and  fol- 

lowstep.    Three-quarter  time. 


25  Crossstep,  stepping  over  in  front. 

Two-quarter  time. 

26  As  Exercise  25,  crossing  in  the 

rear. 

27  Followstep  and    crossstep    alter- 

nately.    Four-quarter  time. 

28  Changestep       and        followstep. 

Three-quarter  time. 

29  Changestep  and  crossstep.  Three- 

quarter  time. 

30  As  Exercises  14-18,  sidewise. 


Standing  crosswise  on  one  end  of  the  board.    Walk  backward. 
The  scholars  are  divided  into  ones  and  twos. 


31   No.  1  walk  backward  by  follow-  33 

step  on  the  board,  while  No.  2  34 
walk     forward     between      the 
boards,  assisting  No.  1. 

As    Exercise    31,   with    common  35 

step.  36 


32 


As  Exercise  31,  with  changestep. 

As  Exercise  31,  No.  2  walk  for- 
ward on  the  boards  by  follow- 
step. 

As  Exercise  34,  with  common  step. 

As  Exercise  34,  with  changestep. 


278 


GERMAN-AM  /•;/;/'  .1  A     (,  YM  .V.I  >  IK  < 


For  connections,  a  long  wand  carried  by  the  scholars  in 
different  positions  may  be  added  (Fig.  259).  The  exercises 
of  the  First  Grade  may  be  executed  here  without  assistance. 


<i  K  ADE     III. 
Exercises  in  walking  and  double  touchstep. 


1  Walk  forward  by  follow  or  com- 

mon step  in  fast  time  (quick- 
step). 

2  As  Exercise  1,  sideways  by  follow 

or  crossstep  in  front  or  rear. 

3  Walk     backward     by    followstep, 

common,  or  changestep,  without 
assistance,  but  in  connected 
ranks. 

4  Walk  forward  by  balancestep  (step- 

position  forward  with  rising  on 
the  toes).  Three-quarter  time. 

5  As  Exercise  4,  beginning  with  the 

touchstep  forward  or  backward. 
Four-quarter  time. 

6  Walk   forward  with   touchstep   in 

front  and  rear,  and  by  followstep. 
Four-quarter  time. 

7  As  Exercise  6,  backward,  touchstep 

in  rear  and  front. 

8  As  Exercise  6,  sidewise,  touchstep 

sidewise  and  crossstep  in  front 
or  rear. 

9  As  Exercise  6,  with  common  step. 

Three-quarter  time. 


10  As  Exercise  7,  with  common  step. 

Three-quarter  time. 

11  As  Exercise   8,    in   three-quarter 

time  (the  left  foot  touchstep 
sidewise,  then  cross  touchstep 
in  front,  and  then  step  sidewise. 
The  right  foot  cross  touchstep 
in  front,  then  touchstep  side- 
wise,  and  then  crossstep  in 
front). 

12  As  Exercise  6,  with  changestep. 

Four-quarter  time. 

13  As  Exercise  7,   with  changestep. 

Four-quarter  time. 

14  As  Exercise  6,  with  touchstep  on 

the  floor,  first  on  one  side  and 
then  on  the  other  side  of  the 
board,  crossing  in  front  or  rear 
by  follow,  common,  or  change- 
step. 

15  As  Exercise  14,  backward. 

16  As  Exercise  8,  with  touchstep  on 

the  floor,  in  front  and  rear  of 
the  board  by  follow  or  crossstep. 


Exercises  in  walking  •with  turning. 

In  couples,  crossing  arms  and  grasping  hands,  or  with  a 
long  wand  raised  upward. 


17  Walk  forward  and  sidewise  alter- 

nately by  one  quarter  turn  in- 
ward or  outward. 

18  Walk  forward  with  the  half  turn 

inward  and  outward  alternately. 


19  As  Exercises   17  or  18,  the  turn 

after  a  certain  number  of  steps. 

20  As  Exercises  17,  18,  and  19,  walk- 

ing backward. 


BALANCING   BOARD 


279 


Exercises  in  walking  with  leg,  trunk,  or  arm  movements. 


21  Walk  forward,  raising  the  leg  for- 

ward for  2  counts,  and  then  fol- 
io wstep.     Four-quarter  time. 

22  As  Exercise  21,  with  changestep. 

23  As  Exercise  21 ,  with  common  step, 

holding  the  leg  in  position  for  3 
counts.     Four-quarter  time. 

24  As  Exercises  21,  22,  and  23,  back- 

ward, raising  the  leg  backward. 

25  As  Exercises  21,  22,  and  23,  side- 

wise,  raising  the  leg  sidewise. 


26  As  Exercises  21-25,  with  bending 

the  other  leg  during  the  raised 
position,  or  bend  it  on  the  sec- 
ond count  and  straighten  it  on 
the  third  (Fig.  259). 

27  As  Exercises  21,  22,  and  23,  raising 

the  knee  forward. 

28  As  Exercises  24,  raising  the  foot 

backward  (knees  together). 

29  As  Exercises  27  and  28,  straight- 

ening the  leg  before  stepping. 


Fig.  259. 


30  Raise  the  leg  forward  at  1,  bend 

the  leg  at  2,  straighten  at  3, 
and  then  step.  Four-quarter 
time. 

31  As  Exercise  30,  backward,  raising 

the  leg  backward. 

32  Walk  forward  in  common  step, 

swinging  the  leg  forward,  back- 
ward, forward,  and  down.  Four- 
quarter  time. 

33  As  Exercise  32,  walking  backward 

and  swinging  the  leg  backward, 
forward  and  backward. 


34  As  Exercise  32,  walking  sidewise 

and  swinging  the  leg  out,  in 
(crossing  in  front  or  rear)  and 
out,  and  step  ;  then  swing  the 
other  leg  sidewise  in,  out  and 
in,  and  step. 

35  Execute  trunk  or  arm  movements 

with  single  touchstep,  combined 
writh  follow  or  changestep. 
Three-quarter  time. 
(Walking  forward,  touchstep  in 
front  with  bending  the  trunk 
backward  (Fig.  260),  thea 


280 


GERMAN-AMERICAN   GYMNASTICS 


86 


straighten  with  follow  or  change- 
step.  ) 

(Walking  sidewise,  touchstep 
sidewise  out  with  raising  the 
arms  up,  then  lower  with  follow- 
step. ) 

As  Exercise  35,  with  double  touch- 
step.  Four-quarter  time. 

(Walking  sidewise,  touchstep 
sidewise  out  bending  the  trunk 
sidewise  in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion, touchstep  cross  in  front 
and  bend  the  trunk  to  the  other 
side,  straighten  and  followstep. 


38 


39 


(Walking  forward,  touchstep  for- 
ward (long  wand  as  help),  raise 
the  wand  to  the  shoulder,  the 
arms  bent,  touchstep  backward, 
straighten  the  arms  upward, 
changestep,  wand  on  shoulders 
and  down. ) 

37  Walk  forward,  sidewise  or  back- 
ward with  different  steps  to  the 
centre  of  the  board.  When 
standing  unconnected,  execute 
the  leg,  trunk,  and  arm  move- 
ments upon  command  or  in 
time. 


Fig.  280. 


Exercises  in  -walking,  hopping,  and  running. 


Walk  forward,  three  steps  and 
hop.  Four-quarter  time. 

(Step  left,  right,  left,  and  hop  on 
the  left  foot,  swinging  the  right 
leg  forward,  then  start  with  the 
right  foot. ) 

As  Exercise  38,  with  two  steps. 
Three-quarter  time. 

(The  hop  is  always  on  the  same 
foot.) 


40  As   Exercise   38,   with   one   step. 

Two-quarter  time. 
(Step  left  and  hop,  swinging  the 
right    leg    forward,   then    start 
right.) 

41  Walk  forward  by  followstep  and 

hop.     Three-quarter  time. 

42  As  Exercise  41,  sidewise. 

43  Hop  forward,  or  sidewise  by  fol- 

lowstep (gallop). 


281 

44  Polka  step.  49  As  Exercise  40,  running.      One- 

45  Heel  and  toe  and  polka  step.  quarter  time. 

46  Run  forward  with  an  assistant  be-  50  Hop  on  one  foot  across  the  boards. 

tween  the  boards.  Hop  two,  three,  or  four  times  al- 

47  Run  forward  with  different  con-  ternately  left  and  right,  forward 

nections.  and  backward. 

48  As  Exercise  38,  running.     Two- 

quarter  time. 


282  GEIIM  AX-AM  Kill'  A  .\    <.  YM. \AsTICS 


JUMPING 

BY  HEItM.   HEIN 

IN  all  jumping  distinguish  between :  - 

A  —  The   spring   or  jumpoff; 

B  —  The   flight   of  the   body   during  the   jump  ; 

C  —  The  landing  of   the  body,  or  the   finish, 

and  when  the    jump   is  not  executed  from  the   stand, 
D — Between   the   standing   and  running  jump. 

A  — The  Springoff. 

The  springoff  should  be  executed  from  the  ball  of  the  foot, 
and  whenever  practicable,  be  supported  by  a  swing  of  the  arms. 

B  — The  Flight  of  the  Body. 

The  moment  the  body  leaves  the  floor  (at  the  springoff),  it 
is  in  a  state  of  flight ;  in  this  position  the  different  parts  of  the 
body  may  be  exercised  in  various  ways.  The  arms  assist  the 
body  in  keeping  its  equilibrium,  during  the  flight  as  well  as 
at  the  finish.  During  the  flight  the  legs  are  either  bent  (the 
knees  being  raised  forward),  or  the  legs  extended  well  for- 
ward, and  closed  (Fig.  261).  Various  exercises  of  the  legs, 
such  as  straddling  crosswise,  sideways,  raising  the  heels,  etc., 
and  exercises  of  the  amis,  as  thrusting  or  swinging  in  all 
directions,  clapping  hands,  etc.,  may  be  executed.  These 
exercises  help  to  acquire  full  control  of  the  body. 


JUMPING 


283 


C  —  The  Landing,  or  the  Finish. 

Special  attention  must  always  be  paid  to  the  finish.  The 
moment  the  balls  of  the  feet  touch  the  floor,  the  knees  should 
be  well  bent,  in  order  to  break  the  force  of  the  jump,  and  to 
avoid  all  jarring  of  the  body,  which  always  ensues  if  the  knees 
are  kept  stiff.  Injury  being  thus  guarded  against,  beauty  and 

gracefulness,  as  well  as  a  firm  stand 
at  the  finish,  are  next  aimed  at. 

The  body  must  be  so  controlled 
as  to  prevent  a  stepping  forward, 
backward,  or  a  fall. 

D — The  Run  or  Walk. 
A    long    run  is  advisable  in   the 
broad  jump,  but  not  in  the 
high     jump.       Most     people 
have    a    habit    of    taking    a 
\  longer    run    than    necessary. 

The  run  for  a  jump  may  be 
either  directly  forward,  or  ob- 
liquely forward.  The  former 
is  generally  used  for  the  broad,  the  latter  occasionally  for  the 
high  jump.  A  high  jump  executed  with  a  forward  run  and 
fully  raised  knees  is  generally  a  more  graceful  movement  than 
the  jump  from  the  oblique  run. 

HIGH   JUMP. 
Exercises  from  the  stand  on  both  feet. 

GROUP  I. 

1  Jump  forward.  4   Jump  forward  with  three  quarter 

2  Jump   forward  with  one    quarter  turn  right  or  left. 

turn  right  or  left.  5   Jump  forward  with  a  whole  turn 

3  Jump  forward,  with  one  half  turn  right  or  left. 

right  or  left. 


Fig.  261. 


284  GERMAN-AMERICAN   GYMNASTICS 

GROUP    II. 
(  With  Leg  Exercises.) 

1  Jump  forward  with  swinging  the      3   Jump    forward   with    raising    the 

right  or  left  leg  forward.  knees. 

2  Jump  forward  with  a  side  strad-      4  Jump    forward  with    raising    the 

die.  heels. 

GROUP    III. 
(With  Arm  Exercises.) 

1  Jump    forward   with    raising    the      3   Jump  forward  with  thrusting  the 

arms  in  any  direction.  arms  in  any  direction. 

2  Jump  forward  with  straightening 

the  arms  in  any  direction. 

GROUP    IT. 
Combine  the  exercises  of  Groups  I.  and  II. 

GROUP    V. 
Combine  the  exercises  of  Groups  I.  and  III. 

GROUP    VI. 
Combine  the  exercises  of  Groups  I.,  II.,  and  III. 

GROUP    VII. 
(With  a  Walk  or  a  Run.) 

All  exercises  of  the  former  groups,  with  a  springoff  with 
one  foot. 

GROUP    VIII. 

1   Jump  forward  from  the  squatting      2  Jump  sideways  right  or  left  from 

position  into  the  squatting  posi-  the  squatting  position  into  the 

tion.  squatting  position. 

3  The  same  backward. 


JUMPING 


285 


GROUP    IX. 

The   exercises   of  Group  VIII.,  with  raising  the  heels,  or 
straddling  sideways. 

GROUP    X. 

The  exercises  of  Group  VIII.,  with  turns. 

GROUP    XI. 

Consecutive  jumps  over  a  number  of  ropes  placed  a  small 
distance  apart. 


Fig.  282. 

VARIOUS     JUMPS. 
WINDOW   JUMPS. 

Two  ropes  are  placed  one  above  the  other,  the  pupil  to 
jump  through  between  them.  To  increase  the  difficulty  of 
this  exercise  the  distance  between  the  ropes  is  gradually 
lessened,  or  the  jumping-stands  are  placed  nearer  together,  or 
both  (Fig.  262). 


286 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  G YMNASTICS 


PIKE'S  LEAP. 

Take  a  run  and  spring  off  with  both  feet,  keeping  the  body 
in  a  horizontal  position  during  the  flight,  extending  the  arms 
forward,  and  placing  the  hands  on  the  helper's  shoulders.  The 
helper  stands  one  or  two  paces  on  the  other  side  of  the  rope, 
and  faces  the  jumper.  (See  Fig.  154.) 


BROAD     JUMP. 

Preliminary  Exercises. 
With  both  feet. 


1  Raise  the  arms  forward  and  rise  on 

the  toes. 

2  Bend  the  knees  to  a  squatting  posi- 

tion, the  legs  bent  to  a  right  angle, 
the  heels  locked,  the  body  inclined 
slightly  forward,  and  move  the 
arms  downward  and  backward. 

3  Straighten  the  knees,  rise  on  the 

toes,  swinging  the  arms  forward, 
and  then  come  back  to  the  start- 
ing position. 

With  one  foot. 


4  As  Exercises    1  and  2,  spring  off 

with  both  feet,  straightening  the 
body  well,  swinging  the  arms  for- 
ward, and  landing  in  the  former 
place. 

5  As  Exercise  4,  jumping  forward, 

swinging  the  arms  forward  with 
the  springoff,  and  lower  them, 
when  straightening  the  knees. 


1  Raise  the  arms   forward   and   the 

right  leg  forward. 

2  Move  the  arms  backward  and  right 

leg  backward,  slightly  bending 
the  left  knee. 

3  Straighten    the    knee,    swing    the 

right  leg  and  arms  forward,  then 
come  back  to  the  starting  posi- 
tion. 


4  As  Exercises  1  and  2,  and  swing  the 

right  leg  forward,  at  the  same 
time  spring  off  with  the  left 
foot,  swinging  the  arms  forward 
and  landing  in  the  former 
place. 

5  As  Exercise  4,  jumping  forward. 


Sideways  to  the  right  and  left. 
With  both  feet. 


1  Raise  the  arms  to  the  right   and 

rise  on  the  toes. 

2  Swing  the  arms  downward  to  the 

left  and  bend  the  knees. 

3  Straighten  the  knees  and  swing  the 

arms  to  right,  then  lower  the  arms. 


4  As  Exercises  1  and  2,  spring  off 

and  swing  the  arms  to  the 
right,  landing  in  the  former 
place. 

5  Like   Exercise  4,  jumping  to   the 

right. 


JUMPING  287 

With  one  foot. 

1  Raise  the  arms  to  the  right,  and      4  As  Exercises  1  and  2,  spring  off 

right  leg  sideways.  left,  and  at  the  same  time  swing 

2  Move  the  arms  to  the  left,  and  cross  the  right  leg  and  the  arms  side- 

the  right  leg  in  front  of  the  left.  ways  to  the  right,  and  land  in 

3  Swing  the  right  leg  and  the  arms  the  former  place. 

sideways,  and  then  lower  the  leg,      5  As  Exercise  4,  jumping  sideways 
and  the  arms.      .  right. 

With  both  feet. 

1  Raise  the  arms  backward  and  rise  knees,   then  come  back  to   the 

on  the  toes.  starting  position. 

2  Move  the  arms  forward  and  bend      4  As  Exercises  1  and  2,  spring  off, 

the  knees.  and  swing  the  arms  backward, 

3  Swing  the  arms  backward  and  rise  landing  in  the  former  place. 

on    the   toes,   straightening    the      5  As  Exercise  4,  jumping  backward. 

With  one  foot. 

1  Raise  the  arms  backward  and  the      4  As  Exercises  1  and  2,  spring  off 

right  leg  backward.  left    and    swing    the    right    leg 

2  Move  the  arms  forward  and  the  backward,  landing  in  the  former 

right  leg  forward.  place. 

3  Swing  the  right  leg  and  the  arms      5  As    Exercise    4,    jumping    back- 

backward,   and  then    lower  the  ward, 

arms  and  the  leg. 


2SS 


GERMAN-AMERICA  N  G  YMNAST1CS 


POLE     VAULTING 

Apparatus  — 

JUM  PING-STANDS. 

POLES  7  TO  10  FT.  LONG  AND  ONE  AND  ONE-HALF  INCHES  THICK. 

ROPE  OR  REED  8  TO  10  FT.  LONG. 

THE  vault  over  the  rope  with  a  quarter  turn  left  seems 
to  come  most  natural  to  beginners.  A  firm  grasp,  the  pla- 
cing of  the  pole  into  the  ground  at  the  springoff,  and  keeping 
close  to  the  pole  are  essential  for  the  success  of  the  jump 
(Figs.  263,  264). 


Fig.  283.  Fig.  264.    - 

There  are  three  different  vaults :  the  rear,  flank,  and  front, 
vault. 

During  a  rearvault  the  back  is  turned  towards  the  rope. 


POLE   VAULTING  289 

During  a  flankvault  the  side  is  turned  towards  the  rope. 

During  a  frontvault  the  face  is  turned  towards  the  rope. 

In  high  vaults  the  lower  hand  should  he  placed  about  as 
high  as  the  rope.  The  moment  the  hody  begins  to  sink,  the 
pole  should  be  pushed  back  in  the  direction  from  where  the 
start  was  made.  Both  hands  release  the  hold  at  about  the  same 
time,  the  left  pushing  the  pole  back.  The  left  arm  is  raised 
slightly  to  avoid  touching  the  rope. 


290 


GERMAN-AMERICAN   G YMNASTICS 


HOP,    STEP,    AND    JUMP,    AND    HIGH 
LONG     JUMP 

BY  D.  M.  F.  KKOGH 

THE  hop,  step,  and  jump,  as  well  as  the  high  long  jump  are 
generally  practised  by  advanced  classes. 

These  jumps  should  not  be.  taken  up  as  regular  classwork 
until  a  certain  proficiency  in  the  long  jump  (also  called  broad 
jump),  step  jump,  and  high  jump  has  been  attained. 

HOP,    STEP,    AND    JUMP. 
LESSON    1. 


Walk  forward  and  hop  from  the 
board  with  the  right  foot,  then 
execute  a  step  jump,  i.e.,  from 
the  right  onto  the  left  foot,  and 
finally  make  another  jump  onto 
the  mattress,  alighting  on  the 
toes  of  both  feet  simultaneously, 
bending  the  knees  and  keeping 
the  heels  together. 


2  The  same  as  Exercise  1,  with  run- 

ning instead  of  walking  forward. 

3  The  same  as  Exercise  1,  beginning 

the  hop  with  the  left  foot. 

4  As  Exercise  3,  with  a  run. 
(Repeat  each  jump  twice,  thrice, 

or  even  four  times  before  moving 
the  board  back  farther. ) 


To  secure  a  good  hop,  step,  and  jump,  the  resting  leg 
is  bent  and  held  well  backward  until  foot  of  the  hopping  leg 
touches  the  floor,  it  then  takes  a  brisk  step,  followed  by  a 
jump.  Swing  the  arms  forward  while  making  the  last  jump. 

LESSON  2. 
With  turns  before  alighting  on  the  mat. 


Jump  from  the  board  with  the 
right  foot,  executing  a  quarter 
turn  left  before  alighting  on  the 
mattress.  The  left  side  is  then 
turned  towards  the  board. 


2  With  the  left   foot  and  a  quarter 

turn  right. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  with  half  a  turn  left. 

4  As  Exercise  3,with  half  a  turn  right. 
(Repeat   each   jump  two  or  three 

times  before  moving  the  board. ) 


HOP,    STEP,    AND  JUMP,   AND  HIGH  LONG  JUMP      291 

THE    HOP,    STEP,    AND    JUMP    AS    A    FIELD- 
EXERCISE. 

Put  a  wide  board,  the  front  end  of  which  is  covered  with 
a  rubber  plate,  firmly  in  the  ground.  It  is  well  to  have  the 
board  about  thirty  feet  long,  as  it  affords  a  solid  foundation 
for  running.  The  place  for  alighting  should  be  excavated 
and  filled  with  moist  sand,  sawdust,  or  tanbark. 


Fig.  265. 


HIGH     LONG    JUMP. 
LESSON    1. 

The  rope  or  stick  lies  about  2  or  3  feet  high,  the  board  about  the  same 
distance  from  the  rope. 


1  Running  high   jump  with  raising 

the  knees,  jumping  from  the 
board  with  the  left  or  right  foot 
(alight  on  the  toes,  bending  the 
knees  well). 

2  As  Exercise  1,  with  straight  legs, 

i.e.,  jump  off  with  the  right  foot 
from  the  board  and  swing  the 


straight  left  leg  forward  (Fig. 
265)  (the  right  leg  is  jerked  up 
quickly  close  to  the  left). 

3  As  Exercise  2,  with  the  left  leg. 

4  Jump   over  the   rope  with  raised 

knees  and  straighten  the  legs  for- 
ward suddenly,  while  the  feet 
move  over  the  rope. 


292  GEliMAX-AMKKir.l.V    (,  YM.\AsTICS 

LESSON    2. 
The  mattress  to  be  2  feet  away  from  the  rope. 

1  Repeat  the  exercises  of  the  preced-      5   Jump  with  the  right  foot,  and  a 

ing  lesson.     See  that  the  knees  quarter  turn  left. 

and  hips  are  straightened  with  a  6   Jump  with  the  left,  and  a  half  turn 

quick  motion.  left. 

2  As  Exercise  1,   jumping  with  the  7   Jump  with  the  right,  and  a  half 

left  foot,  and  a  quarter  turn  left.  turn  right. 

3  As  Exercise  2,  right,  and  a  quarter      8   Jump  with  the  left,  and  a  half  turn 

turn  right.  right. 

4  Jump  with  the  left  foot,  and  a  quar-      9   Jump  with  the  right,   and  a  half 

ter  turn  right.  turn  left. 

LESSON    3. 
The  rope  at  a  height  of  2i  feet ;  the  mattress  about  4  feet  away  from  it. 

1  High  long  jump  as  Exercise  4,  Les-      5   As  Exercise  1,  clapping  hands  once 

son  1.  (twice,  thrice,  etc.)  while  jump- 

2  As  Exercise  1,  with  swinging  the  ing. 

arms  forward.  G   As  Exercise  1,  with  touching  the 

3  As  Exercise  1,  with  swinging  the  knees  with  the  hands  while  jump- 

arms  sideways.  ing. 

4  As  Exercise  1,  with  swinging  the       7   As   Exercise  1,  with  touching  the 

arms  forward  upward.  feet  while  jumping. 

LESSON   4. 
Height  of  rope  2  feet,  distance  of  board  3  feet. 

1  From  a  stand,  jump  with  both  feet  (while  jumping  over),  alighting 

from  the  board  (raise  the  knees  with  the  feet  together. 

well  and   then   straighten   them  3   As  Exercise  1,  swinging  the  arms 

forward  quickly).  forward  upward. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  straddling  the  legs  4  As  Exercise  2,  swinging  the  arms 

sideways. 

LESSON    5. 

Height  2  feet,  distance  3i  feet. 

After  every  jump  raise  the  rope  two  inches,  and  move  the 
board  six  inches  farther  away.  Let  it  be  your  object  to  get 
a  good  strong  run,  to  raise  your  legs  as  high  as  possible,  and 
to  straighten  your  body  suddenly  when  the  feet  have  cleared 
the  rope. 


WEIGHT  THROWING  293 


WEIGHT     THROWING;     WEIGHT     LIFTING; 

(Putting:  the  Shot) 

AND 

THROWING     THE     SPEAR 

(Javelin) 

WEIGHT  throwing,  weight  lifting,  and  spear  throwing 
should  be  practised  frequently;  as  they  require  a  good  deal 
of  strength,  they  are  practised  in  classes  for  men  and  older 
boys  only. 

The  following  few  lessons  will  suffice  to  supply  the  needs 
of  most  teachers. 

WEIGHT    THROWING. 
(Putting:  the  Shot.) 

REMABKS.  —  The  weight  consists  of  an  iron  ball  (shot)  or 
a  stone  for  out-door  practice,  while  a  strong  leather  bag,  filled 
with  small  shot,  is  used  for  in-door  practice.  The  ball  or  stone 
usually  weighs  ten,  fifteen,  twenty-five,  or  thirty-five  pounds. 

Every  gymnasium  should  be  supplied  with  about  one  for 
every  ten  scholars. 

LESSON  i. 

1   Throw  (or  "put"  )  with  the  right  with  energy  and  force,  the  pupil 

hand  (Fig.  266).  at   the   same  time  straightening 

REMARKS.  —  For  a  throw  from  the  the   right  and  bending   the  left 

stand,  the  weight  is  taken  in  the  knee  ;    the   right  shoulder  must 

right    hand,    holding    it    above  be  brought  forward  as  far  as  pos- 

the  shoulder,  then  the  layout  po-  sible  without  losing  the  position 

sition  left  forward  is  taken,  while  or  stepping  over  the  mark, 
the  trunk  is  turned  to  the  right.      2   The  same  as  Exercise  1,  with  the 

The  weight  is  then  put  forward  left  hand. 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 


LESSON    2. 


In  the  sidestraddle  position. 

1  Raise  the  weight  over  the  head  with 

both  hands,  and  throw  it  forward. 

2  Throw  the   weight  forward   from 

between  the  knees  (the  trunk  is 


bent  forward  and  the  arms  swung 
forward  and  backward  several 
times,  in  order  to  give  more  force 
to  the  throw). 


LESSON   3. 

1   Pitch   the   weight  with  the  right      2   The  same  with  the  left  hand, 
hand  (the  weight  and  the  hand 
held  downward  at  the  right  side) 
(Fig.  267). 


Fig.  266. 


Fig.  267. 


LESSON    4. 


Layout  position,  left  forward  and 
grasp  the  weight  with  both  hands, 
holding  it  above  the  right  shoul- 
der, and  from  here  throw  it  for- 
ward with  both  hands. 

LESSON 


2  The  same  from  the  opposite  side. 

3  The  same,  but  an  armcircle  forward 

and.  downward  previous  to  the 
throw. 


5. 


In  the  sidestraddle  position,  with  the  back  turned  towards 
the  direction  in  which  the  weight  is  to  be  thrown. 


1  Throw  the  weight  backwards  over 

the  head. 

2  Throw  the  weight  backwards  from 

between  the  knees  with  the  trunk 
bent  forward. 


3  Bend  the  trunk  forward  and  hold 
the  weight  between  the  legs, 
straighten  the  trunk,  swing  the 
arms  forward  upward,  and  throw 
the  weight  backward  over  the 
head. 


WEIGHT  LIFTING  295 

4  Hold  the  weight  above  the  head  the  weight  backward   (between 

(with    both    hands),    bend    the  the  legs). 

trunk  forward,  swing  the  arms      NOTE.  —  Practise  the  throwing  also 
forward  and  downward  and  throw  with  hopping  forward  and  with  a 

run,  previous  to  the  throw. 

WEIGHT     LIFTING. 

The  weight  of  the  dumb-bells  for  the  various  exercises  will 
be  mentioned  in  each  lesson.  Care  must  be  taken  that  the 
dumb-bells  are  not  too  heavy.  It  is  much  better  to  practise 
with  light  dumb-bells  than  with  ones  too  heavy. 

LESSON  i. 

Weight :  from  10  to  30  Ibs.  each,  according  to  the  strength  of  the  class  members. 

1   Bend  the  trunk  forward  and  grasp  2   Bend  the  arms  as  in  Exercise  1. 

the  dumb-bells.     Straighten  the  Straighten  the  arms  sideways,  and 

trunk  and  bend  the  arms.    (Bells  reverse  the  motions  as  in  Exer- 

height  of  shoulders)    straighten  else  1. 

the    arms    upward.      Bend    the  3   The  same   as   in  Exercise  1,  but 

arms.     The  arms  down.  straighten  the  arms  forward. 

These  movements  may  also  be  practised  with  one  arm  first. 

LESSON  2. 
Weight:   10  to  25  Ibs. 

1  Raise  the  arms  forward;  then  up-      3   Raise  the  arms  sideways;  then  up- 

ward; lower  the  arms  forward  in  ward;  lower  the  arms  sideways; 

position;  then  down.  then  down. 

2  Raise  the  arms  forward;  move  the      4   Raise  the  arms  sideways  ;  then  for- 

arms  sideways;  move  the  arms  ward;  then  sideways;  then  down, 

forward ;  then  down. 

LESSON    3. 

Weight:   10  to  35  Ibs. 

1   Raise  the  arms  forward    upward  2  Raise  the  arms  sideways  upward; 

(vertical     position);    bend     the  bend  the  trunk  forward  and  lower 

trunk  forward  and  arms  down  the  arms  sideways  in  position; 

(vertical  position) ;  straighten  the  straighten  the  trunk  and  raise  the 

trunk  and  raise  the  arms;  lower  arms  upward;    lower    the   arms 

the  arms  forward  down.  sideways  down. 

REMARKS.  —  All  these  movements  must  be  executed  very 
slowly. 


296 


<;YMNA8T1(  S 


LESSON    4. 
t/<e  shot,  or  weight  uxed  for  throwing. 


1  Raise  the  weight  from  the  floor 
with  the  right  hand  (the  left 
does  not  touch  the  weight).  The 
weight  is  then  balanced  and  raised 
to  the  shoulder,  during  which 
motion  the  hand  is  turned  out- 
ward and  backward.  Straighten 


Fig.  268. 


the  arm  upward,  then  lower  the 
weight  again  (Kig.  2tjS;. 

2  As  Exercise  1,  with  the  left  hand, 

and  after  the  weight  is  raised, 
bend  and  straighten  the  arm  sev- 
eral times. 

3  As  Exercise  1,  when  the  arm  is  up, 

bend  and  straighten  the  knees  ; 
kneel ;  sit  down  on  the  floor,  etc. 


Fig.   289. 


LESSON    5. 


Weitjht:  10  to  35  Ibs. 

1  Raise  the  arms  sideways  ;  turn  the      3 

arms  forward  and  backward  (pro- 
nation  and  supination  of  hand). 

2  Bend  the  trunk  forward  and  grasp 

the  dumb-bells  (legs  straight  and 
together,  the  hips  bent) ;  turn  the 
arms  inward  and  outward;  place 
the  dumb-bells  on  the  floor. 


(Dumb-bells}. 

In  the  position  described  in  Exer- 
cise 2,  bend  the  arms  (dumb-bells 
almost  touching  the  shoulders ),. 
straighten  the  arms  downward, 
keeping  the  legs  straight;  repeat; 
place  the  dumb-bells  on  the  floor. 


THROWING    THE  SPEAR 


297 


LESSON    6. 


Use  dumb-bells  with  a  long  rod  between  the  bells,  long 
enough  to  be  grasped  with  both  hands. 

The  weight  of  the  dumb-bell  (or  bar-bell)  may  be  between  25  and  100  Ibs. 


1  Raise  the  weight  from  the    floor 

(with  both  hands)  up  to  the 
chest,  the  arms  bent;  straighten 
the  arms  upward ;  bend  the  arms, 
dumb-bell  height  of  the  chest; 
the  arms  down. 

2  Bend  the  a.-ms,  dumb-bell  height 

of  chest;  straighten  the  arms  up- 


ward; turn  the  weight,  moving 
the  right  hand  forward  and  the 
left  hand  backward ;  turn  it  back 
to  the  former  position;  bend 
arms  ;  arms  down  (Fig.  269). 
The  above  exercises  with  appro- 
priate leg  and  trunk  movements. 


LESSON    7. 


Lying  on  the  back  on  a  mat,  use   the  same  dumb-bell  as 
in  Lesson  6,  the  weight  at  the  head. 


1  Grasp  the  weight ;  bend  the  arms, 

the  weight  above  the  chest ; 
straighten  the  arms  upward,  i.e., 
towards  the  ceiling ;  bend  the 
arms  ;  place  the  weight  on  the 
floor  from  where  it  was  taken. 

2  Grasp  the  weight  ;  raise  the  arms 

upward  (the  elbows  straight)  ; 
bend  the  arms  ;  straighten  the 
arms  upward  ;  lower  the  arms 
backward,  and  place  the  weight 
on  the  floor. 


3  Grasp  the  weight ;  bend  the  arms  ; 

the  weight  over  the  chest ;  rise 
(with  the  weight)  to  an  erect 
sitting  position  ;  straighten  the 
arms  upward ;  bend  the  arms 
and  reverse  the  preceding  mo- 
tions so  as  to  bring  the  dumb- 
bell back  to  the  floor  again. 

4  Grasp  the  weight ;  bend  the  arms, 

weight  over  the  chest,  straighten 
the  arms  upward  ;  rise  to  erect 
standing  position.  Reverse  the 
foregoing  movements. 


THROWING    THE     SPEAR     (JAVELIN). 

A  spear  (javelin)  is  ten  feet  in  length  and  an  inch  in  diam- 
eter, with  an  iron  ring  at  both  ends.  A  wooden  block  about  a 
foot  square,  or  shaped  like  a  human  head,  fastened  to  a  ver- 
tical post  by  means  of  strong  hinges,  is  used  as  a  target. 
Whenever  this  head  is  struck  squarely  by  the  spear,  it  tilts 


298 


<:KHMA\ -AMI-:I;K:A.\  a  YM. \ASTICS 


backward.  A  sheet-iron  target  two  feet  in  diameter,  or  a 
large  tarpaulin  hung  up  loosely,  may  also  be  used.  If  this 
tarpaulin  hangs  in  a  hall,  a  few  mattresses  should  be  placed 
in  front  of  it  to  catch  the  spears.  The  distance  between  the 
thrower  and  the  target  is  from  thirty  to  forty  feet.  If  a 
class  is  large,  three  or  four  scholars  throw  simultaneously 
on  command. 


Fig.  270. 


1  The  form  of  spear-throwing  most 
in  use  is  the  straight  throw.  The 
spear  is  grasped  with  the  right 
hand,  several  inches  back  of  the 
middle,  the  arm  is  bent,  and  the 
spear  is  held  in  a  horizontal  posi- 
tion as  high  as  the  eyes  (aim- 
ing). The  right  arm  is  then 
straightened  backward  (the  right 
leg  lunging  backward,  the  body 
turning  to  the  right,  the  left  arm 
being  raised  forward  in  line  with 
the  spear)  (Fig.  270),  and  the 
spear  is  then  thrown  forward  with 
full  force.  While  the  throw  is 


being  made,  the  right  knee  is 
straightened  and  the  left  one 
bent,  the  trunk  inclining  forward 
somewhat. 

2  The  throw  may  also  be  executed  in 

a  curved  line  by  moving  the  right 
hand  backward  and  downward, 
sending  the  spear  in  a  curved  line 
towards  the  target. 

3  Both  ways  of    throwing  may  be 

varied  by  taking  a  certain  num- 
ber of  steps  before  throwing,  or 
by  hopping  or  running  forward. 
The  throw  should  also  be  prac- 
tised with  the  left  hand. 


GYMNASTIC   GAMES  ,  299 


GYMNASTIC     GAMES 

BY  KARL  KROH 

BALL     GAMES. 
CATCH    BALL. 

A  NUMBER  of  girls  or  boys  form  a  circle  (standing  at  arm's 
length  from  each  other),  and  pass  a  hand-ball,  a  rubber  foot-ball, 
or  a  leather  ball  of  a  weight  adapted  to  the  strength  of  the 
players,  quickly  either  to  the  left  or  right.  The  player  who 
first  muffs  the  ball  is  "  it "  ;  he  steps  into  the  centre  of  the 
circle,  and  throws  the  ball  to  the  other  players. 

The  players  now  pass  or  throw  the  ball  to  each  other  in 
such  a  manner  as  to  make  it  difficult  for  the  runner  inside 
the  circle  to  get  it.  Should  the  runner,  who  must  run  about 
within  the  circle  only,  get  possession  of  the  ball,  the  player 
who  "threw  the  ball  last,  or  the  one  who  muffed  it  (as  may 
have  been  determined),  takes  the  place  of  the  runner,  and  in 
turn  becomes  "it." 

The  game  may  be  played  with  the  players  in  a  prescribed 
position,  which  must  be  kept  by  them,  or  a  player  may  be 
allowed  to  leave  his  place  when  the  ball  is  tossed  in  his  direc- 
tion. Throughout  the  game  the  circle  must  be  preserved. 
Any  number  of  players,  from  ten  to  thirty,  may  engage  in 
this  game,  which  requires  both  skill  and  agility. 

ROLL   BALL. 

A  number  of  players,  twelve  to  twenty-four,  boys  or  girls, 
form  a  circle  and  grasp  hands.  A  large  leather  ball  filled  with 


300  G ERMA  N- AMERICAN   G  YMNA  S TICS 

sawdust,  or  a  foot-ball,  is  placed  on  the  floor  before  one  of  the 
pi  avers,  and  rolled  sideways  left  or  right  by  pushing  or  gently 
kicking  it  (when  rolling  the  ball  to  the  left,  the  right  foot 
pushes  it,  and  vice  versa).  The  ball  must  pass  in  front  of  the 
players,  and  each  one,  in  turn,  must  direct  it  in  its  course 
around  the  line  of  the  circle.  If  the  ball  rolls  out  of  its 
course,  so  that  the  player  cannot  kick  it  without  leaving 
his  place,  the  one  who  last  kicked  the  ball  is  "it,"  and  steps 
into  the  circle,  and  endeavors  to  kick  the  ball  out  of  the 
same. 

The  players  may  close  or  enlarge  the  circle,  and  should,  as 
long  as  their  hands  remain  grasped,  do  everything  in  their 
power  to  keep  the  ball  from  getting  out  of  the  circle.  The 
moment  the  ball  is  out  of  the  ring,  the  player  at  whose  right 
side  the  ball  got  out  of  the  circle  is  "it."  At  no  time  shall 
the  ball  be  caught  with  the  hands. 

GUESS   BALL. 

A  row  of  players  (boys  or  girls)  count  off  by  twos  from 
left  to  right.  The  last  odd  number  steps  in  front  of  the  row 
at  a  distance  of  from  four  to  ten  paces  and  is  "it,"  and  must 
turn  his  back  to  the  other  players,  who  pass  the  ball  from  one 
to  the  other.  When  the  player  who  is  "it"  has  counted  a 
given  number,  the  player  having  the  ball  in  his  hand  at  that 
time  throws  it  at  him.  If  he  misses  him,  they  exchange 
places.  If  he  hits  him,  the  player  who  is  "it"  turns  about 
and  guesses  who  threw  the  ball.  If  he  guesses  right,  they 
exchange  places.  If  not,  the  play  continues  as  before. 

A  light  rubber  ball  or  bean-bag  is  best  suited  for  this 
game. 


GYMNASTIC  GAMES  301 

SQUARE   BALL. 

An  open  square  of  twelve  to  fifteen  paces,  and  a  soft  rub- 
ber or  hand-ball  or  a  bean-bag,  are  necessary  for  this  game. 

Four  or  eight  players  stand  at  each  of  the  corners  of  the 
square  as  outposts,  and  a  like  number  within  the  centre  of  the 
square.  The  outposts  toss  the  ball  from  corner  to  corner, 
the  centre  players  keeping  out  of  the  ball's  way  as  much  as 
possible,  for  the  outposts  must  try  to  hit  one  of  the  centre 
players  with  the  ball. 

When  an  outpost  succeeds  in  hitting  a  centre  player,  all 
the  outposts  at  once  flee,  until  the  centre  player  who  was  hit 
has  grasped  the  ball  and  called  out  "  HALT."  The  outposts 
then  stand  still,  and  the  centre  player  who  has  the  ball  throws 
it  at  any  one  of  the  outposts. 

All  misses  of  the  respective  sides,  corners,  or  centres  are 
scored  with  chalk-marks  at  the  respective  corners,  or  in  the 
centre  ring,  three  sufficing  to  oust  a  player. 

The  party  first  losing  half  its  players  loses  the  game. 

The  game  may  also  be  played  in  such  a  manner  that  all 
outposts  who  are  hit  must  enter  the  square,  the  last  outpost 
upon  being  hit  entering  the  square  for  a  new  game. 

CENTRE   BALL    (SOW-DRIVING). 

This  game  may  be  played  in-doors  as  well  as  out-doors, 
as  many  as  ten  to  fifty  participating.  There  must  be  a  suf- 
ficiently large  and  even  surface  on  which  to  form  a  circle, 
with  room  enough  between  the  players  for  them  to  move 
about  freely.  Each  player  must  have  a  stick  or  wand  about 
three  feet  long.  A  hand-ball  of  leather  about  ten  to  twelve 


302  GEllMAN-AMERICAN   GYMNASTICS 

inches  in  diameter  is  used.  If  played  out-doors,  each  phm-r. 
except  one,  makes  a  hole  about  four  inches  in  diameter  in 
front  of  the  place  he  occupies  in  the  circle,  in  which  to 
place  one  end  of  his  stick.  If  played  in-doors,  a  chalk  ring 
may  be  made  to  indicate  the  hole. 

A  hole  or  chalk  ring  large  enough  to  hold  the  ball  must 
be  made  in  the  centre  of  the  circle.  In  beginning  the  game, 
all  players  place  one  end  of  their  stick  into  the  centre  hole 
under  and  around  the  ball.  Upon  counting  one,  two,  three, 
all  uplift  the  ball  with  their  sticks,  and  rush  for  a  ring  or  hole 
in  which  to  place  one  end  of  their  stick.  When  all  holes  are 
taken,  one  player  will  be  left  as  "centre  player,"  or  be  "it." 

He  must  now  roll  and  push  the  ball  from  where  it  may 
have  fallen  into  the  centre  hole  with  his  stick,  at  the  same 
time  guarding  against  the  attacks  of  the  other  players,  who 
strive  to  direct  the  ball  from  its  course,  it  being  the  duty  of 
all  players  to  prevent  him  from  getting  it  into  the  centre 
ring  or  hole.  Attacks  on  the  ball  are  best  guarded  against 
by  placing  the  stick  in  front  of  the  ball  so  as  to  ward  off 
the  thrusts  in  its  direction.  Any  player  may  leave  his  place 
to  attack  the  ball ;  but  as  soon  as  the  centre  player  spies  a 
vacant  hole,  he  may  abandon  the  ball,  and  aim  to  place  his 
stick  into  the  vacant  hole.  The  players  who  may  have 
left  their  places  will  then  scramble  for  holes  (or  rings),  and 
one  of  their  number  will  always  be  left  as  centre  player. 
Such  centre  player  then  attempts  to  get  the  ball  into  the 
centre  ring  or  hole.  If  successful,  the  game  is  begun  over 
again.  During  the  game  any  unoccupied  ring  or  hole  may 
at  any  time  be  taken  by  any  player,  and  the  more  this  is 
done  the  livelier  and  more  interesting  the  game  will  be. 


.   GYMNASTIC   GAMES 


RIDER    BALL. 

The  players  "pair  off"  according  to  height,  strength,  and 
weight,  and  form  a  double  circle  (one  behind  the  other),  at 
from  two  to  six  paces  from  each  other.  A  "toss-up"  decides 
who  shall  first  be  "horse,"  and  who  shall  be  "rider."  The 
horses  take  a  stride-straddle  position,  and  brace  themselves 
by  placing  both  hands  on  the  knees, 
which  should  be  kept  straight.  The 
body  is  bent  forward,  in  order  that  the 
riders  standing  in  their  rear  (outer 
circle)  may  readily  mount  by  strad- 
dling their  backs  (Fig.  271). 

The  riders,  having  mounted,  play 
catch  ball,  the  horses  (as  the  play 
becomes  better  understood)  growing 
restive,  turning  left,  right,  or  about 
(always  staying  in  the  circle),  in  order 
to  make  the  catching  of  the  ball  as 
difficult  as  possible. 

If  a  rider  muffs  the  ball,  they  all 
dismount  and  run,  while  any  one  of  the  horses  quickly  picks 
it  up  and  commands  all  to  "stand,"  or  "halt."  The  riders 
must  obey;  and  the  horse  endeavors  to  hit  one  of  the  riders, 
who  may  avoid  being  hit  by  dodging,  or  any  other  means 
but  leaving  his  place. 

If  the  horse  having  the  ball  is  afraid  of  missing  the  riders, 
he  may  pass  the  ball  to  any  other  horse ;  but  as  soon  as  the 
ball  is  muffed  or  thrown  at  a  rider  without  hitting  him,  the 
game  begins  anew;  if,  however,  the  horse  succeeds  in  hit- 


Fig.  271. 


304  GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 

ting  a  rider,  places  are  changed,  riders  becoming  horses,  ;unl 
horses  riders. 

The  ball  must  at  no  time  be  held  any  length  of  time  by 
any  player,  but  must  be  tossed  as  soon  as  caught,  no  matter 
in  what  position  the  rider  may  find  himself. 


RUNNING  AND   OTHER   GAMES  305 


RUNNING     AND     OTHER     GAMES 
STAKE-GUARD    (DUCK-STONE). 

THIS  game  may  be  played  out-doors  as  well  as  in-doors. 
If  played  in-doors,  the  players  decide  who  shall  be  "it"  by 
throwing  their  bean-sacks,  called  "  ducks,"  at  an  Indian 
club  or  stake  at  a  distance  of  about  twenty  feet ;  and  the  one 
whose  bean-sack  lands  farthest  away  from  the  mark  is  "it," 
or  must  be  guard.  If  played  out-doors,  a  large  stone,  or  a 
block  of  wood,  may  be  used  as  stake,  while  the  players  may 
use  rocks  or  tin  cans  as  "ducks." 

The  guard  places  his  "duck"  on  the  stake,  and  the  other 
players  try  to  knock  it  off  with  their  "ducks,"  throwing 
from  a  line  about  fifteen  to  twenty  feet  away  from  the  stake. 
As  long  as  the  guard's  duck  is  not  knocked  off,  he  may 
tag  any  player  who  picks  up  his  duck  and  tries  to  run  to 
home-base  (the  throwing  line)  with  it;  if  a  player  but 
touches  his  duck,  the  guard  may  tag  him  if  he  can ;  if,  how- 
ever, any  player  succeeds  in  knocking  off  the  duck,  all  the 
players  may,  as  long  as  the  duck  has  not  been  replaced  on 
the  stake  by  the  guard,  pick  up  their  ducks  and  run  home. 
Of  course  the  guard  replaces  the  duck  on  the  stake  as  quickly 
as  possible,  and  until  he  succeeds  in  tagging  a  player,  as  per 
above  rules,  must  be  "  it."  And  even  after  having  tagged  a 
player  he  must  quickly  pick  up  his  duck  and  run  home, 
lest  the  party  tagged  get  ahead  of  him  in  placing  his  duck 
on  the  stake. 


306  GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 

The  guard  can  tag  a  player  only  within  the  square.  I£ 
he  succeeds  in  catching  some  one,  he  in  turn  must  seek  to 
escape  from  the  square  before  the  new  guard  can  place  his 
duck  on  the  stake. 

All  players,  of  course,  strive  to  regain  their  sacks  or  ducks 
so  long  as  the  guard  is  engaged  in  placing  his  own;  those 
who  are  successful  being  entitled  to  throw  from  the  line  again 
upon  the  given  signal,  while  the  unsuccessful  ones  linger 
outside  the  square,  and  await  the  next  opportunity  to  regain 
their  ducks.  After  a  while  the  throwing  distance  may  be  in- 
creased, in  order  to  make  the  game  more  interesting ;  it 
frequently  occurring  then  that  no  one  will  succeed  in  dis- 
placing the  guard's  duck,  when  it  behooves  the  guard  to  be 
watchful  that  no  one  enters  his  trust,  since  a  misdirected 
run  may  end  in  freeing  all  players,  who  are  standing  around 
watchful  for  a  chance  to  grab  their  ducks. 

CROSS-TAG. 

This  game  may  be  played  by  any  number  of  persons  in- 
or  out-doors.  If  played  out-doors  there  should  be  no  goal, 
or  limit  to  the  playgrounds,  all  players  promiscuously  par- 
ticipating in  the  game,  as  opportunity  offers,  without  any 
special  order.  If  played  in-doors  a  large  square  or  circle, 
formed  by  the  players,  should  indicate  the  space  in  which 
the  game  is  played. 

As  a  rule  one  of  the  players  volunteers  to  be  "  it ;  "  if  not, 
they  decide  after  their  own  manner  who  shall  be  "it."  The 
player  who  is  "it"  calls  out  that  he  will  catch  some  other 
player,  calling  him  by  name,  and  starts  after  him.  Any 
other  player  may  at  any  time  cross  between  these  two,  when 


RUNNING  AND   OTHER   GAMES  307 

the  one  who  is  it  must  try  to  catch  the  one  who  crossed  be- 
tween him  and  the  one  whom  he  started  out  to  catch.  Of 
course  this  crossing  may  be  repeated  ad  libitum,  until  the 
right  party  is  tagged. 

WOOD  TAG. 

Any  number  of  players  take  part  in  the  game,  and  all  must 
run  to  place  one  or  both  feet  on  a  piece  of  wood.  The  last 
one  to  do  this  is  "it,"  and  must  try  to  tag  any  one  of  the 
players  whenever  they  leave  their  "wood."  As  soon  as  he 
succeeds  in  this,  the  party  tagged  becomes  "it." 

This  is  an  out-door  game,  and  if  played  in-doors  "the 
wood"  would  have  to  be  something  else. 

PUSSY   WANTS   A    CORNER. 

All  the  players  run  for  a  tree  or  post  or  some  designated 
spot  (a  circle  traced  on  the  ground,  or  marked  off  with  chalk)  ; 
and  the  one  who  gets  a  place  or  "corner"  last  is  "it,"  or  is 
"  Pussy,"  and  must  go  from  player  to  player,  saying,  "  Pussy 
wants  a  corner ;  "  while  the  players  reply,  "  Go  to  the  next 
neighbor."  During  this  time  the  players  having  corners  ex- 
change places,  any  player  having  the  right  to  take  any  corner 
as  soon  as  it  is  unoccupied.  As  soon  as  Pussy  succeeds  in 
getting  a  corner,  the  player  without  a  corner  is  "it." 

FOOT   IN   THE   HOLE. 

A  ring  twelve  to  twenty-four  inches  in  diameter  is  drawn 
on  the  floor  or  ground.  A  stands  with  one  foot  in  the  ring, 
and  B,  hopping  on  one  leg,  endeavors  to  push  him  out  of 
the  ring,  both  with  arms  crossed  abreast  (similar  to  Fig.  272, 


308 


GERMAN-AMKI:H:.I.\  <;YMNASTH  8 


only  A  must  have  both  feet  on  the  floor).  A  loses  if  pushed 
out  of  the  ring;  J5,  if  he  touches  the  floor  with  the  other  foot. 
Good  players  may  defy  two  attacking  parties. 


Fig.  272. 

PULLING   OVER   THE   LINE. 

A  line  is  drawn;  and  two  players  on  either  side  of  it  face 
each  other,  grasping  each  other's  wrists  (or  a  ring-strap  while 
sitting).  At  the  word,  Ready!  both  bend  low;  and  .at  the 
word,  Pull !  try  to  pull  each  other  across  the  line  (Fig.  273). 


Fig.  273. 

PUSHING   "WITH   THE   WAND. 

Two  or  more  boys  take  hold  of  a  wand,  and  try  to  push 
each  other  across  a  drawn  line  (same  as  above)   (Figs.  274, 


RUNNING  AND   OTHER    GAMES 


309 


Fig.  276. 


310  GERMAN-AMERICAN   GYMNASTICS 

275,  and  276).     If  a  long  wand  is  used,  four  or  more  boys  may 
take  hold  of  the  wand. 

WRESTLING  CIRCLE  (POISON  SNAKE). 
The  players  form  a  circle,  grasping  hands  firmly;  in  the 
centre  of  the  circle  a  light  Indian  club  is  placed,  or  the 
players'  hats  are  piled  up  on  the  floor.  Each  player  tries  to 
push  the  others  against  the  club  so  as  to  knock  it  over.  The 
one  upsetting  the  club  or  hats  steps  out,  and  the  others  con- 
tinue with  the  game,  until  a  victor  remains  (Fig.  277). 


Fig.  277. 
TUG   OF   "WAR. 

The  players  choose  two  sides,  divided  as  equally  as  possible 
in  regard  to  number  and  strength.  The  players  face  each 
other,  firmly  grasping  with  both  hands  a  strong,  thick  rope. 
At  a  given  signal  they  begin  to  pull  or  tuff  with  all  their 
might;  and  the  side  succeeding  in  pulling  the  other  over  a 
designated  distance,  or  rendering  the  players  incapable  of 
further  resistance,  wins. 

Should  no  rope  be  handy,  the  players  form  sides  by  en- 
circling each  other's  waist. 


SUNNING  AND    OTHER   GAMES  311 

SACK-BEETLE. 

The  players  sit  on  the  floor  in  a  circle,  with  their  feet 
towards  the  centre  and  their  knees  closed  and  bent.  The  one 
who  is  "  it,"  is  called  the  "  centre-player,"  and  must  try  to  get 
hold  of  the  sack-beetle,  which  the  players  pass  rapidly  from 
one  to  the  other  under  their  knees.  As  soon  as  the  centre- 
player  succeeds  in  getting  the  sack-beetle,  the  player  in  whose 
hands  it  was  found  must  be 
"  it."  Whenever  the  centre- 
player  happens  to  turn  his 
back  to  any  player  who  has 
the  sack-beetle,  this  player 
may  throw  it  at  the  centre- 
player.  If  the  centre-player 
guesses  correctly  who 
threw  the  beetle,  the  one 
who  threw  it  must  be 
"it." 

Fig.  278. 
STICK   WRESTLING. 

Two  boys  in  sidestraddle  position  face  each  other,  and 
grasp  a  stick  with  right-hand  reversed  grip,  and  common  left- 
hand  grip,  and  at  a  signal  both  wrestle  for  the  stick.  Who- 
ever loses  his  grip,  loses  the  game  (Fig.  278). 

PRISON-BARS. 

The  players  form  an  open  circle  by  grasping  wrists,  with  one 
player  in  the  middle  who  is  "it."  The  prisoner  in  the  centre 
endeavors  to  get  out  by  all  fair  means,  such  as  leaping,  jump- 
ing, pushing,  etc.,  or  breaking  the  line.  The  others  must  try 


312  GERMAN-AMEUICAN    GYMNASTICS 

to  prevent  his  escape.     The  one  to  the  left  (or  right) 
the  centre-player  breaks  through  the  circle  must  l>e  "it." 

BEETLE-GOES-ROUND. 

The  players  form  a  circle,  standing  with  their  hands  grasped 
backward.  One  then  goes  around  on  the  outside  of  the  circle 
with  the  beetle  (generally  a  knotted  handkerchief)  in  his  hand, 
and  cries  out:  "Look  before  you,  don't  look  'round,  or  with. 
the  beetle  I'll  you  pound."  The  players  must  look  straight 
before  them,  any  one  looking  around  receiving  a  slap  with  the 
beetle.  As  soon  as  the  player  who  is  "it"  sees  fit  he  places 
the  beetle  in  the  hands  of  another  player,  and  continues  on  his 
round  just  as  before.  After  a  few  moments  the  player  who 
got  the  beetle  drives  his  right-hand  neighbor  around  the  circle, 
beating  him  with  the  beetle  until  he  has  again  reached  his 
place.  The  one  who  was  "  it "  first  takes  the  place  of  the  player 
to  whom  he  gave  the  beetle,  while  the  latter  must  be  "it." 

CAT   AND    MOUSE. 

The  players  form  a  circle,  grasping  each  other's  hands,  and 
standing  about  arm's  length  apart,  One  of  the  players  on 
the  outside  of  the  circle,  called  "  the  cat,"  cries  out,  "  Mousey, 
mousey,  do  come  out ;  "  while  another,  on  the  inside  of  the 
circle,  called  "  the  mouse,"  answers,  "  No,  Miss  Cat,  I  won't 
come  out."  •  —  "  Then  I'll  break  into  your  house,  and  I'll  catch 
you,  Mrs.  Mouse,"  cries  the  cat,  and  makes  for  the  mouse. 
During  the  chase  the  players  do  all  in  their  power  to  prevent 
the  cat  from  catching  the  mouse,  by  blocking  her  way  in  all 
possible  manners,  while,  on  the  other  hand,  they  facilitate  the 
escaping  of  the  mouse.  As  soon  as  the  cat  has  caught  the 
mouse,  two  other  players  take  their  places. 


RUNNING   AND   OTHER   GAMES  313 

GARDEN   SCAMP. 

This  game  is  similar  to  the  one  described  above  as  Cat  and 
Mouse.  While  in  Cat  and  Mouse  the  players  blockade  the 
cat's  way,  in  this  game  they  do  not  do  this ;  and  both  the 
gardener  and  the  scamp  are  inside  the  ring.  The  gardener 
says,  "What  are  you  doing  in  my  patch?  " — "Eating  berries," 
replies  the  scamp.  "Who  let  you  in?"  continues  the  gar- 
dener. "  No  one,"  answers  the  scamp,  skipping  away,  with 
the  gardener  after  him.  Lest  he  succeed  too  quickly  in 
catching  the  scamp,  the  gardener  is  compelled  to  pass  through 
the  same  "  holes "  through  which  the  scamp  went ;  he  may 
also  be  compelled  to  imitate  the  actions  of  the  scamp,  such  as 
crawling,  hopping  on  one  leg,  etc.,  and  not  until  he  succeeds 
in  capturing  the  scamp  is  the  game  ended,  and  two  new 
players  take  the  place  of  the  gardener  and  the  scamp. 

SKIP    AWAY. 

The  players  form  a  circle,  standing  with  hands  grasped 
backwards.  One  of  the  players  remains  outside  of  the  circle, 
and  is  "  it."  He  must  tap  any  one  of  the  players  on  the  back, 
and  then  he  and  the  player  whom  he  tagged  must  run  around 
the  circle  in  opposite  directions.  The  one  to  reach  the  open 
place  in  the  circle  last  is  "it." 

The  runners  must,  if  so  agreed  upon,  make  a  low  bow,  or 
shake  hands,  or  perform  some  antic,  as  they  meet  in  their  run 
around  the  circle. 

JACOB,   WHERE   ART   THOU? 

The  players  form  a  circle  as  above,  with  two  of  their  num- 
ber inside  the  circle,  both  of  whom  are  blindfolded.  The  blind- 


314  <;i-:iiMAN-AUi-:i;i<  .\.\ 


folded  players  are  called  Jacob  and  Ruth  respectively.  Ruth 
calls  for  Jacob,  saying,  "Jacob,  where  art  thou  ?  "  and  In- 
must  answer,  "Here  I  am,"  trying  his  best,  being  governed 
by  the  sound  of  Ruth's  voice,  to  evade  her.  Ruth,  on  tin- 
other  hand,  seeks,  from  the  sound  of  Jacob's  voice,  to  locate 
and  catch  him.  As  soon  as  she  has  succeeded  in  doing  this, 
two  other  players  take  the  place  of  Jacob  and  Ruth. 

It  need  hardly  be  said  that  both  Jacob  and  Ruth  may  be 
boys  or  girls,  or  one  of  them  a  girl  and  the  other  a  boy. 

PASSING   THE    BEAN-BAG. 

The  players  form  a  circle,  standing  from  four  to  eight  feet 
apart.  A  bean-bag  is  passed  from  one  to  the  other,  either  to 
the  left  or  right  ;  and  when  one  bag  has  been  passed  around  the 
circle  two  or  three  times,  a  second  bag  is  added,  then  a  third, 
and  so  on,  until  as  many  bags  are  circulating  as  can  be  handled 
by  the  players. 

The  game  may  be  varied  by  passing  the  sacks  sideways 
forward,  backward,  overhead,  etc.,  positions  to  be  taken 
accordingly. 

LAST  COUPLE   OUT   (PIG.   279). 

An  uneven  number  of  players  pair  off,  and  the  couples  form 
a  column,  one  couple  standing  behind  the  other.  The  player 
who  was  left  when  the  couples  formed  is  "  it,"  and  takes  his  stand 
in  front  of  the  first  couple.  He  (or  she)  claps  hands  three 
times,  whereupon  the  last  couple  runs  forward  on  either  side 
of  the  column,  and  endeavors  to  grasp  hands  before  the  player 
who  is  "it"  succeeds  in  tagging  one  of  them. 

If  the  couples  are  made  up  of  boys  and  girls,  the  player 
at  the  head  of  the  column,  if  a  boy,  must  tag  the  girl,  and  vice 


RUNNING   AND    OTHER    GAMES 


315 


versa ;  and  the  partner  of  the  boy  or  girl  tagged  must  then  be 
"  it."  If  the  couple  succeed  in  evading  the  player  in  front  of 
the  column,  and  grasp  hands  before  he  tags  them,  they  take 
their  place  at  the  head  of  the  column,  and  the  game  continues. 
The  player  in  front  must  not  turn  around  to  see  which  way 
the  players  are  coming.  If  successful  in  catching  one  of  them, 
places  are  exchanged  with  the  child  caught  by  joining  hands 


Fig.  279. 

with  its  former  mate  at  the  head  of  the  group,  as  the  first  pair. 
The  player  caught  now  stands  at  the  head  of  the  group  and 
gives  the  signal,  the  game  proceeding  until  all  have  had  their 
turn  at  running  to  the  front. 

BANDY. 

Two  groups  of  players  form  rows  opposite  each  other  with  a 
distance  of  ten  to  twenty  feet  between  the  rows,  and  far  enough 
apart  for  each  player  to  wield  a  stick  or  wand  with  which  to 
strike  the  rubber  ball. 


316  GERMAN-AMERICAN   GYMNASTICS 

Players  stand  behind  each  other,  the  rows  facing  in  oppo- 
site directions.  The  duty  of  each  player  is  to  guard  the  open- 
ing in  front  of  him,  so  that  the  ball  does  not  pass  through. 
The  ball  is  hit  alternately  by  both  sides,  the  player  missing 
the  ball  and  allowing  it  to  pass  him  being  assigned  to  the 
opposite  rank.  The  game  continues  until  one  side  loses  too 
many  men,  when  new  sides  are  chosen. 

SCULPTOR. 

One  of  the  players,  called  "the  sculptor,"  arranges  the 
other  players  in  different  postures  and  attitudes  as  statues. 
No  player  dares  move  or  speak,  for  as  soon  as  he  does  the 
sculptor  punishes  him  by  beating  him  with  a  knotted  hand- 
kerchief (the  sack-beetle). 

After  having  arranged  the  players  to  suit  his  fancy,  the 
sculptor  leaves  the  playground,  saying,  "The  sculptor  is  not 
at  home."  No  sooner  is  he  gone  than  the  "  statues  "  come 
to  life,  sing,  dance,  jump,  and  play  havoc  in  general. 

On  the  return  of  the  sculptor  he  counts,  "  one,  two,  three !  " 
and  any  player  who  is  not  in  his  former  posture  at  three 
receives  a  beating  with  the  knotted  handkerchief  from  the 
sculptor.  Should  the  sculptor  punish  the  wrong  statue,  all 
the  players  rush  at  him  with  knotted  handkerchiefs,  and 
drive  him  to  a  goal  previously  decided  upon,  and  the  game 
is  resumed  with  some  other  player  as  sculptor. 

COCK   AND    HENS. 

Two  opposite  goals  are  chosen.  Between  these  stands 
the  cock,  while  all  the  other  players  (the  hens)  are  in  one 
of  the  goals. 


RUNNING  AND    OTHER    GAMES  317 

The  cock  calls  :  - 

"The  cock  crows  once,  the  cock  crows  twice, 
A  sack  full  of  wheat,  a  basket  of  rice! 
All  you  hens,  flee !  flee ! 
The  one  I  catch,  I'll  take  home  with  me." 

At  this  the  hens  make  for  the  other  goal.  The  one 
caught  by  the  cock  is  obliged  to  carry  him  on  his  back  to 
the  opposite  side  of  the  playground,  and  then  to  take  his 
place  as  cock. 

BATTERING  RAM. 

The  players  join  hands  and  form  a  circle,  with  one  player 
on  the  inside  and  one  on  the  outside  of  the  circle.  The 
latter,  called  the  "ram,"  tries  to  get  out  of  the  circle,  in  any 
way  he  can ;  and  the  outside  player  must  do  all  in  his  power 
to  assist  him.  If  he  succeeds  in  getting  out,  the  players  to 
the  right  and  left  of  the  place  where  he  made  his  escape 
take  the  place  of  the  ram  and  his  assistant. 

HARE. 

The  players  grasp  hands  and  form  a  circle  around  the 
hare,  crying,  "Hare,  oh,  hare,  how  did  you  get  into  the 
patch?"  The  hare  replies,  "I  jumped  in."  They  then  cry, 
"  Then  see  if  you  can  get  out,"  whereupon  the  hare  tries  by 
all  possible  means  to  escape.  Should  he  succeed,  the  players 
pursue  him,  and  the  one  catching  him  is  hare. 

BLACK    MAN. 

The  players  select  two  opposite  goals,  one  of  which  the 
black  man  takes,  while  all  the  other  players  go  to  the  oppo- 
site goal.  The  black  man,  on  leaving  his  base,  calls  out, 


318  GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 

"Are  you  afraid  of  the  black  man?"  whereupon  the  other 
players  cry,  "No,  not  of  one  like  you,"  and  start  for  the 
opposite  goal.  The  black  man  must  try  to  tag  as  many  of 
the  players  while  on  their  way  to  the  opposite  goal  as  he 
can ;  and  every  player  tagged  joins  the  black  man  and  helps 
him  tag  other  players,  until  all  the  players  shall  have  been 
caught.  In  the  new  game  the  one  first  tagged  by  the  black 
man,  is  "it." 

LAME    GOOSE. 

A  goal  is  selected  to  which  one  of  the  players,  called  the 
"lame  goose,"  repairs.  The  other  players  call  out  to  him, 
"Lame  goose,  lame  goose,  can't  catch  anybody,"  and  run 
up  and  down  in  front  of  his  goal,  tantalizing  him  in  all 
manners  conceivable.  "Can't  I,  though,"  replies  the  lame 
goose,  and  starts  after  the  players.  He  must  not,  however, 
run  after  them,  but  must  take  three  steps  only,  and  then 
hop  on  one  leg,  and  as  soon  as  he  "breaks,"  all  the  players 
rush  at  him  and  drive  him  to  his  goal,  pommelling  him  on 
the  back  with  their  fists,  until  he  has  reached  it.  If,  how- 
ever, the  lame  goose  succeeds  in  tagging  one  of  the  players, 
he  joins  the  other  players  in  driving  the  one  tagged  to  the 
goal,  as  described  above,  and  the  player  tagged  is  "it." 

PRISONER'S    BASE. 

Two  sides  of  equal  numbers  occupy  two  opposite  goals. 
At  a  certain  distance,  not  too  far  from  their  goal,  each  side 
has  another  base,  generally  designated  by  a  post  or  a  circle 
drawn  on  the  ground,  called  "Prisoner's  Base,"  where  any 
player  caught  in  the  manner  hereafter  described  is  kept 
prisoner.  One  of  the  sides  starts  the  game,  by  giving  "a 


RUNNING  AND      OTHER   GAMES  319 

dare,"  i.e.,  one  of  the  players  leaves  his  goal,  and  ventures 
as  near  to  that  of  the  enemy  as  he  dares.  The  opposite  side 
sends  out  a  player  to  tag  the  darer,  while  the  darer's  side 
immediately  sends  out  a  second  man  who  "  covers  "  the  darer, 
and  tries  to  tag  the  player  who  came  out  after  the  darer. 
The  first  side  follows  suit,  and  so  on,  until  one  or  more 
players  are  caught,  or  all  the  players  shall  have  returned 
to  their  goals.  During  all  this  time  the  player  who  left  his 
goal  last  has  the  right  to  tag  any  player  of  the  opposite  side 
who  left  his  goal  before  he  did,  and  any  player  may  at  any 
time  return  to  his  goal,  whereupon  the  one  who  started  out 
after  him  will,  of  course,  do  the  same. 

If  any  players  are  caught,  they  are  conducted  to  the 
prisoner's  base  above  mentioned,  and  can  be  freed  only  if 
one  of  their  side  succeeds  in  tagging  one  of  them  before 
the  other  side  can  send  out  a  player  to  prevent  this.  Any 
side  succeeding  in  making  prisoners  of  all  the  players  but 
one  of  the  other  side  wins  the  game ;  for  one  player  alone 
cannot  continue  the  game,  as  the  goals  must  at  all  times  be 
guarded ;  if  it  is  left  unguarded  at  any  time,  and  one  of  the 
enemy  succeeds  in  entering  it,  the  game  is  lost. 

The  sending  out  of  players  to  "cover"  another  player 
may  be  done  at  the  direction  of  a  "  captain,"  who  also 
appoints  one  of  the  players  as  "goal-guard;"  or  each  player 
may  use  his  own  judgment  in  the  matter. 

GUESS    "WHO? 

For  obvious  reasons  this  is  a  game  for  boys  only.  One 
of  the  players  either  volunteers  or  is  chosen  to  "  be  down " 
or  "  it."  He  must  place  his  head  in  the  lap  of  another  player, 


320  GERMAN-AMERICAN   GYMNASTICS 

who  is  seated,  and  who  so  holds  the  head  of  the  one  k-<l<>\\n  " 
that  he  cannot  see.  The  other  players,  one  or  more,  thru 
slap  the  one  who  is  down  with  their  flat  hand  on  a  prominent 
part  of  his  body,  whereupon  he  jumps  up  and  guesses  who 
slapped  him.  If  he  guesses  correctly,  down  goes  the  one 
who  hit  him ;  if  he  guesses  the  wrong  one,  down  he  goes 
himself  again,  and  the  fun  continues. 

THREE-HIGH,  OR,  TAG  THE  THIRD  MAN. 
The  players  form  a  double  circle,  standing  one  in  front 
of  the  other.  Two  players,  a  tagger  and  a  runner,  are  "it." 
The  tagger  must  try  to  tag  the  runner,  who  runs  around 
the  circle,  and  soon  steps  in  front  of  any  pair  of  players. 
The  tagger  must  then  try  to  tag  the  last  or  third  man.  If 
the  tagger  succeeds  in  tagging  his  man,  he  steps  in  front  of 
any  pair,  and  the  party  tagged  makes  for  the  "third  man." 

TENDER-GREEN. 

This  game  is  very  like  Black  Man,  and  in  some  places  called 
so  too.  It  differs  from  Black  Man  in  that  the  one  who  is  '•  it " 
must  fold  his  hands,  and  must  tag  one  or  more  of  the  other 
players  in  this  position  only.  After  he  has  caught  one  or  more 
players,  they  must  join  hands,  and  the  end  players  only  are 
allowed  to  tag  the  other  players,  the  players  having  a  right 
to  break  through  the  line  if  they  can. 

When  all  the  players  are  caught,  the  first  one  tagged  must 
be  "it." 

THE    KING'S    RUN. 

Two  sides,  divided  as  equally  as  possible  in  regard  to  num- 
bers and  strength,  stand  at  a  convenient  distance  opposite  each 
other,  the  players  grasping  each  other's  hands  firmly.  Each 


RUNNING   AND   OTHER    GAMES  321 

side  has  a  captain,  or  king  as  he  is  sometimes  called,  who 
stands  at  the  left  end  of  the  line.  At  his  command  one  of  his 
players  runs  with  all  his  might,  and  tries  to  break  through  the 
enemy's  line.  If  he  succeeds,  all  the  players  cut  off  from  the 
captain's  end  of  the  line  must  cross  over  and  join  the  other 
side.  If  he  fails,  he  must  join  the  enemy's  side.  The  other 
side  then  sends  out  one  of  their  men,  and  so  on,  until  but  one 
man,  the  king,  is  left.  He  is  allowed  three  trials  to  break 
through  the  enemy's  line,  and  redeem  his  fallen  fortunes ;  but,  if 
in  three  times  he  does  not  succeed,  his  side  has  lost  the  game. 

To  make  the  game  shorter,  the  players  cut  off  from  their 
line,  and  the  •  runners  who  fail  to  break  through  the  enemy's 
line,  are  out  of  the  game  until  it  is  ended. 

NIGHT   AND    DAY,    OR,   BLACK   AND   "WHITE. 

Two  sides  are  chosen,  and  take  their  places  at  some  distance 
from  each  other.  An  umpire,  standing  somewhere  on  the  play- 
ground, where  he  may  be  plainly  seen  by  the  players  of  both 
sides,  holds  in  his  hand  a  disk  or  board,  black  on  one,  and 
white  on  the  other  side.  Each  side  has  chosen  its  color, 
and  waits  for  the  umpire  to  display  his  disk.  If  he  displays 
the  black  side,  the  "  Nights "  or  "  Blacks "  must  run,  with 
the  "  Days  "  or  "  Whites  "  after  them,  and  vice  versa.  All  the 
"  Nights  "  who  are  tagged  by  the  "  Days  "  before  reaching  a 
goal  agreed  upon  are  prisoners,  and  are  out  of  the  game  until 
a  new  one  begins. 

The  side  losing  all  its  players  loses  the  game. 


31-2  GERMAN-AM  ERIC  AX   GYMNASTIC* 


ROUNDEL 

BY  WM.  A.  STECHER 

A  ROUNDEL  is  a  gymnastic  composition,  and  is  generally 
accompanied  by  music. 

A  Roundel  should  not  be  practised  or  drilled  for  its  own  sake  ; 
but  it  should  be  the  result  of  class-work  in  tactics,  fancy  steps, 
free  exercises,  wand  and  club  exercises,  and  so  on.  The  move- 
ments that  have  been  learned  by  a  class  during  a  term  must  be 
arranged  in  such  a  manner  that  the  different  parts  harmonize. 

The  examples  given  below  are  intended  to  show  how  such 
compositions  may  be  arranged. 

MARCH     ROUNDELS 

I 

The  class  is  formed  in  a  circle  opened  half  distance  facing 
inward,  and  divided  into  ranks  of  twos  and  fours  (Fig.  280). 
Whenever  possible,  the  neighbors  grasp  hands,  and  hold  them 
shoulder  high,  with  arms  bent.  When  not  otherwise  em- 

ployed, all  mark  time.  ^  _,_ 

^ 


COtTKTS 


/I,  3        X 

1  All  march  backward  four  steps  /     \  '     \ 

and  then  four  steps  in  place.      8  ^     ^  **     \ 

2  All  march  forward  four  steps  /  , 

and  then  four  steps  in  place.      8 

3  The  ones  march  backward  four 

steps  and  then  forward  four  i 

steps.  8  ^  / 

4  The  twos  march  backward  four  X     ,  ^     y 

steps  and  then  forward  four  ^      *  \  ^    y 

steps.  8  ^  ^     *    {    Z    ^  ^ 

-u   _i_   *• 

32  fig.  280. 


ROUNDEL 


323 


B  COUNTS 

1  All  march  backward  four  steps 

and  then  the  ones  forward 
four  steps.  8 

2  The  ones  backward  four  steps 

and  return,  the  twos  forward 
four  steps  and  four  steps  in 
place.  8 

3  All   backward   four  steps  and 

then  the  twos  forward  four 
steps.  8 

4  The  twos  backward  four  steps 

and  return,  the  ones  forward 
four  steps  and  four  steps  in 
place.  8 


1  The  ones  circle  left  around  the 

twos  (Fig.  281). 

2  The  twos  circle  right  around 

the  ones 


COUNTS 

3  Both  circle  left  grasping  left 

hands.  8 

4  Both  circle  right  grasping  right 

hands.  __8 

32 


1  The  ones  four  steps  forward 

and  backward,  the  twos  four 
steps  backward  and  forward.      8 

2  Both  circle  left  grasping  left 

hands,  which  are  raised  up- 
ward. 8 

3  The  twos  four  steps  forward 

and  backward,  the  ones  four 
steps  backward  and  forward.       8 

4  Both  circle  right  grasping  right 

hands,  which  are  raised  up- 
ward. _8 

32 


Fig.  281. 


II 


Fig.  282. 


The  scholars  are  formed  in  a  front  column  composed  of 
ranks   of   fours;    the    arms    are    crossed   with   the  neighbors' 

(Fig.  282). 


324 


CKliMAN-AMERK'AX    <.  YM  VA.STlt   - 


A  COUNTS 

The  ranks  a  quarter  wheel  left 
and  forward  four  steps.  8 

The  ranks  backward  four  steps 
and  a  quarter  wheel  right 
backward.  8 

The  ranks  a  quarter  wheel 
right  and  forward  four  steps.  8 

The  ranks  backward  four  steps 
and  a  quarter  wheel  left  back- 
ward. __8 

32 


B 

1  The  odd  ranks  a  quarter  wheel 

left  and  four  steps  in  place, 
and  the  even  ranks  a  quarter 
wheel  right  and  four  steps  in 
place.  8 

2  All    four    steps    forward   and 

backward.  8 

3  All  odd  ranks  a  quarter  wheel 

right  backward  and  four  steps 
in  place,  and  all  even  ranks  a 
quarter  wheel  left  backward.  8 

4  All    four    steps    forward    and 

backward.  _8 

32 


C  oomm 

1   The   ranks  a  complete  wheel 


left. 

2   The  ranks  a  complete  wheel 
right. 


1  The    odd    ranks    a    complete 

wheel  left,  and  the  even 
ranks  a  complete  wheel  right. 

2  The    odd    ranks    a    complete 

wheel  right,  and  the  even 
ranks  a  complete  v/heel  left. 

E 

1  The  odd  ranks  one  half  wheel 

left  and  right,  and  the  even 
ranks  one  half  wheel  right 
and  left. 

2  The  odd  ranks  one  half  wheel 

right  and  left,  and  the  even 
ranks  one  half  wheel  left  and 
right. 


1  The  ranks  a  quarter  wheel  and 
then  four  steps  forward;  re- 
peat three  times,  the  odd 
ranks  wheeling  to  the  left, 
the  even  to  the  right. 


16 

16 
32 


16 


32 


16 


32 


32 


III 

Sixteen  scholars  are  formed 
in  a  front  column  in  connected 
ranks  of  four  (see  Fig.  282). 

A  COUNTS 

The  first  rank  wheels  in  a  circle 
left,  the  others  marching  for- 
ward and  following,  until  all 
are  formed  in  a  cross  left 
(Fig.  283).  32 


h 

\ 

\- 

Fig.  283. 


ROUNDEL 


325 


B  couxxs 

1  The    ranks    a    quarter   wheel 

right  and  four  steps  in  place.       8 

2  The  ranks  a  quarter  wheel  left 

backward  and  four  steps  in 
place.  8 

3  The  ranks  a  quarter  wheel  left 

and  four  steps  in  place.  8 

4  The    ranks    a    quarter   wheel 

right     backward    and     four 
steps  in  place. 


COUNTS 

and 

8 


_8 
32 


The  ranks  a  quarter  wheel  left 
and  four  steps  in  place  ;  re- 
peat three  times. 

D 

The  odd  ranks  a  quarter  wheel 
left  and  four  steps  in  place, 
and  the  even  ranks  a  quarter 
wheel  right  and  four  steps  in 
place. 


32 


2  All    four    steps   forward 

backward. 

3  The  odd  ranks  a  quarter  wheel 

right  backward  and  four  steps 
in  place,  and  the  even  ranks 
a  quarter  wheel  left  back- 
ward and  four  steps  in  place. 

4  All    four    steps    forward    and 

backward. 


E 

1  The  ranks  a  half  wheel  right. 

2  The   ranks  a   complete  wheel 

left. 

3  The  ranks  a  half  wheel  right. 


The  ranks  four  steps  forward 
and  a  quarter  wheel  left;  re- 
peat three  times. 


_8 
32 


16 


32 


32 


IV 

Any  even  number  of  ranks  of  four  can  take  part  in  this 
Roundel.      They  stand  formed  in  a  front  column    (see    Fig. 

282). 


COUNTS 

The  first  rank  marches  in  a 
circle  left,  the  others  march 
forward  and  follow  to  a  star 
left  (Fig.  284).  32 


B 

On  the  first  count  all  face  to  the 
right,  and  then  the  leader  of 
each  rank  marches  to  a  large 
circle  left  (Fig.  285).  32 


H 


X     h     K 

*  *< 

^  h  v. 


I- 

Fig.  284, 


326 


GERMAN-A MERICAN   G  YMXA8 TICS 


-I     f- 


xi 


sr.  285. 


C  COUNTS 

1  On  the  first  count  the  leader  of 

each  rank  marches  in  a  small 
circle  left  (each  rank  has  a 
circle  for  itself)  (Fig.  286).  16 

2  On  the  seventeenth  count  the 

leader  of  each  rank  marches 
to  the  common  centre  (to  re- 
form the  star).  8 

3  Then  the  leaders  countermarch 

left,  and  all  face  to  the  left, 
and  stand  as  in  Part  A.  _8 

32 


1- 
t 

:*w-h 


Fig.  286. 


1  On  the  first  count  the  odd  ranks 

face  right,  march  forward, 
circling  left  around  the  even 
ranks,  and  back  into  place 
(Fig.  287). 

2  On  the  seventeenth  count  the 

even  ranks  face  right,  march 
forward,  circling  right  around 
the  odd  ranks,  and  back  into 
place. 


E 

On  the  first  count  the  odd  ranks 
face  right,  march  forward 
four  steps,  countermarch  left, 
march  to  the  centre,  again 
countermarch  left,  and  form 
into  place. 

The  even  ranks  then  repeat 
the  above. 


16 


J16 
32 


Fig.  287. 


16 


32 


ROUNDEL  327 

F  COUNTS  ,. ~***"**--«L 

On  the  first  count  all  the  ranks  ^.X  ^  y 

face    right,    the    odd    ranks  .•'  ^»    ,  x 

then  march  into  a  large  cir-  /  .-•"  /  >• 

cle  left,  the  even  ranks  in  a  /  /  ^         •** 

somewhat  smaller  circle  right  /  •'  ^.         •*- 

(in  two    concentric  circles)  -,-         -«- 

(Fig.  288).  16          1  \  •>.         ^ 

The  even  ranks  then  march  \  \  >>         ^. 

to  the  centre,  countermarch  \  \.  y'  ^ 

right,  and  face  left  (in  their  N%  * "  x, 

former  place).  *\  .   ^ 

The  odd  ranks  follow  in  the  ***•-. --"' 

same  manner  when  arriving  ^  288. 

opposite  to  their  places.  32 


328  GERMAN-AMERICAS   QYMNA8TH  - 


RING     ROUNDEL 

BY   DR.   KARL  ZAPP 

To  be  executed  by  twenty-four  girls. 

ARRANGEMENT  OF  CLASS.  —  Two  front  lines  of  twelve 
(Fig.  289),  each  line  subdivided  into  ranks  of  sixes,  fours, 
threes,  and  couples. 

The  arms  are  chained,  each  girl  holding  with  one  hand  the 
ring  of  her  second  neighbor  (cross  arms  and  grasp  hands). 


Fig.  289. 

PART     I. 
Introduction  (fancy  steps  ad  libitum). 

1  Forward  on  the  toes  with  swinging         7   The  same,  with  bending  the  trunk 

of  the  legs  forward.1      16  counts.  backward  and  forward. 

2  The  same,  with  swinging  the  legs  16  counts. 

crosswise  and  bending  the  head        8   The  same  step,  touching  the  feet 
sideways.  16  counts.  sideways,    and    crosswise,    and 

3  Forward,  with  cross  step  backward.  bending  the  trunk  sideways. 

16  counts.  16  counts. 

4  The  same,  combined  with  turning        9   Gallop  step  (4  left  and  4  right). 

the  trunk  and  bending  the  knees.  8  counts. 

16  counts.       10  All  march  forward  to  the  centre 

5  Forward,  with  cross  step  left  and  (8),  divide  into  fours,  forming  a 

right,  or  polka  step.      16  counts.  star  (see  Fig.  284)  (8),  and  turn 

6  Double  schottische  (like  heel  and  face  to  face  (8).  24  counts. 

toe  polka),  touching  the  toe  for- 
ward and  backward.      16  counts. 

1  NOTE.  —  Line  one  advances,  executing  the  designed  steps,  then  the 
line  separates  into  two  lines  of  six,  which  wheel  backward  (thus  clearing  the 
way  for  line  two),  then  face  towards  the  rear  and  march  to  their  starting-places, 
while  line  two  has  begun  with  the  movements  that  line  one  has  just  finished. 


RING   ROUNDEL 


329 


PART     II. 

POSITION  —  FACE  TO  FACE. 
A  —  Ring  Exercises. 

GROUP     I. 
Arm  and  leg  exercises. 


Bend  the  arms, 

Extend  the  arms  outward, 

Reverse, 

Repeat, 

Raise  the  heels  and  bend  the 

arms, 
Bend  the  knees  and  extend 

the  arms  outward, 
Reverse, 


1  Brought  forward,     12 

2  Repeat,  5-8 
3-4      3   Bend  the  arms,  1 
5-8           Bend  the  right  knee,  and  raise 

or   swing  the   left   leg  for- 

1  ward,  2 
Reverse,  3-4 

2  Repeat  right  5-8 
3-4           Repeat  left  and  right                 9-16 

12  32 


GROUP     II. 
Arm  and  step  exercises. 


1  Raise  the  arms  outward, 
Raise  the  arms  upward, 
Reverse, 

Repeat, 

2  Raise  the  arms  outward, 
Place  the  left  foot  obliquely 

forward, 
Reverse, 
Repeat  right, 

3  Raise  the  arms  outward,  and 


COUNTS 

1 
2 
3-4 

5-8 

1 


2 

3-4 
5-8 


raise  the  left  leg  obliquely 

forward, 
Raise  the  arms  upward,  swing 

the  left  leg  backward,  and 

rise  on  the  toes  of  the  right 

foot, 
Reverse, 
Repeat  right, 
Repeat  3  left  and  right, 


2 

3-4 

5-8 

9-16 

32 


GROUP     III. 
Ann,  step,  lunge,  and  rocking  exercises. 


Raise  the  left  arm  forward, 
right  arm  backward,  with  a 
step  left  obliquely  forward, 

Return  to  position, 


Repeat  with  the  opposite  arm 
and  leg,  3-4 

1  Repeat  left  and  right,  5-8 

2  2   The  same,  lunging  obliquely 

forward,  1-8 


830 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  G YMNASTICS 


3  Lunge  obliquely  forward  left 

and  raise  the  arms, 
Rock  the  knees  and  bend  the 
arms, 


Rock  the  knees  and  extend 

the  arms, 
Position, 

The  same,  lunging  right, 
Repeat  left  and  right, 


3 

4 

6-8 


32 


GROUP    IV. 

Bending  the  trunk  backward. 


1  Bend    the    trunk  backward, 

and  raise  the  arms  upward,  1 

Lower,  2 

Repeat,  3-8 

2  Step   position    left   obliquely 

forward,    bend    the    trunk 

backward,  the  arms  upward,  1-2 

Reverse,  3-4 

Repeat  with  the  right  foot,  5-8 


COUNTS 


3   Lunge  left  obliquely  forward, 

the  arms  outward,  1 
Bend  the  trunk  backward,  the 

arms  upward,  2 

Reverse,  3-4 

Repeat  right,  6-8 
Repeat  left  and  right,                9-16 


GROUP    V. 
Turning  of  the  trunk. 


COUNTS 

1  Turning    the    trunk    to    the 

front,      raise      the      arms 
towards  the  front  upwards, 
and  place  the  feet  towards 
the  front  in  a  sidestep  posi- 
tion, 1 
Recover,                                           2 
Repeat  in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion,                                             3-4 
Repeat  both,                                 5-8 

2  The  same,  lunging  instead  of 

step  positions,  1-8 


COUNTS 
3  Lunge  sideways  towards  the 

front,  and   raise  the  arms 

towards  the  front  upward,         1 
Face  in    opposite    direction, 

and  change  the  position  of 

the  arms  and  knees, 
Reverse, 
Opposite, 
Repeat, 


2 

3-4 
5-8 
9-16 
32 


160  counts  in  all. 


B  —  Tactics. 


COUNTS 

1  Form  a  star  of  six  ranks  of 

fours  (Fig.  290),  8 

2  Ranks  one,  three,  and  five  gal- 

lop sideways  four  steps  and 


Ranks  two,  four,  and 
wheel  in  the  star  at 
same  time, 

Repeat  three  times, 


return, 


8 


COUNTS 

oix 

the 

8 

24 
48 


RING   ROUNDEL 


331 


3  Form  the  wheel  star  (Fig.  291), 
Ranks  two  and  five  forming  in 

the  centre. 

4  Ranks  one,  three,  four,  and 

six  wheel  around  in  the  star 
once  with  polka  step, 
Ranks   two  and  five  form  a 
circle    in  the    centre  with 


32 


hands  joined  overhead,  and 
circle  around  with  side- 
steps, 

5  Form  a  star  and  fours  again; 
and  turn  back  to  back  by 
couples  (position  for  Part 
III.), 


40 


16 
96 


vvl 

x<  I 


*>• 


X, 

I-         ^x. 


\ 


V 


X 


Fig.  290. 


Fig.  291. 


PART     III. 

POSITION  —  BACK  TO  BACK. 

A  —  Ring  Exercises. 

GKOUP     I. 
Arm,  step,  lunging,  and  trunk  exercises. 


COUNTS 

1  Raise  arms  outward  with  step 

forward,  1 

Raise  the  arms  overhead  with 

step  backward, 
Reverse, 
Repeat  with  opposite  step, 

2  The  same,   lunging  sideways 

toward  the  front, 
Raise  the  arms  overhead,  and 
bend  the  opposite  knee, 


Reverse, 
Toward  the  rear, 

3  Lunge  sideways  toward  the 

front,  the  arms  outward, 
Bend  the  trunk  sideways  to 

the  rear,  the  arms  upward, 
Reverse, 
Lunge  toward  the  rear, 

4  Repeat  Exercise  3, 


COCNTS 
3-4 

5-8 


2 

3-4 

5-8 

9-16 

32 


332 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 


GROUP     II. 
Lunging,  kneeling,  and  bending  backward. 


COUNTS 

1  Lunge  left  and  right  forward, 

raising  the  arms  outward,  1-8 

2  Lunge  forward  left,  1 
Kneel  on  the  right  knee,  2 
Reverse,  3-4 
Same  right,  6-8 

3  Lunge  forward  left,  1 
Bend     the    trunk    obliquely 


backward,  turning  the  head 
toward  the  partner,  the 
arms  upward,  2 

Reverse,  3-4 

Same   in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion, 5-8 
4   Repeat,                                        9-16 

32 


GROUP     III. 
Lunging,  rocking  of  the  knees,  and  twisting  of  the  trunk. 


COUNTS 

1  Lunge    left    and  right  side- 

ways, the  arms  upward,  1-8 

2  Lunge  sideways  left,  the  arms 

upward,  1 
Bend  the  right  knee,  the  arms 

downward,  2 

Reverse,  3-4 

Repeat,  5-8 


cororn 

3  Lunge  sideways  left,  the  arms 

upward,  1 

Twist  the  tnmk  inward  (face 

to  face),  2 

Reverse,  3-4 

Repeat,  5-8 

4  Repeat  Exercise  3,  9-16 

32 
96  counts  in  all. 


B  —  Tactics. 


1  Form  the  star  of  ranks  of  four, 

2  Form  the  star  wheel    (Fig. 

292), 

(Ranks  one,  three,  four,  and 
six  form  a  ring  around  ranks 
two  and  five,  which  form 
a  star  of  couples), 

3  Ranks  one,  three,  four,  and 

six  form  the  ring  around 
the  little  star  with  schot- 
tische  step,  turning  of  the 
trunk,  and  alternate  raising 
and  curving  of  the  arms. 
The  little  star  in  the  centre 


ootrrra 

moves  in  the  opposite  di- 
rection with  double  schot- 
tische  step,  16 

4  Pause  and  face  about  at  5,        8 

5  Repeat    the    movements    of 

Exercise  3  in  the  opposite 
direction,  16 

6  Pause  and  face  about  at  5,  8 

7  Form  the  star  of  ranks  of  four,         8 

8  Form  three  lines  of  eights, 

9  Form  three  columns  of  twos,         8 
10   Take  position  for  Part  IV.,        _8 

96 


KING   ROUNDEL 


333 


PART     IV. 

POSITION  —  A  BODY  COMPOSED  OF  FOUR  FRONT  COLUMNS  OF  COUPLES 

(Fio.  293). 

A  —  Ring  Exercises. 

GROUP      I. 
Step  and  lunging. 


COUNTS 

1  Step    position   forward  with 

the  inner  leg,  and  raising  of 
the  inner  arm  forward,  1 

Position,  2 

Step  position  sideways  with 
the  outer  leg,  and  raise  the 
outer  arms  sideways,  3 

Position,  4 

Repeat,  5-8 

2  Lunge  forward  with  the  inner 

leg,  and  raise  the  inner  arms 
upward,  1 

Position,  2 

Lunge  sideways  outward  with 


COUNTS 

the  outer  leg,  and  raise  the 
outer  arms  obliquely  up- 
ward, grasping  the  ring  of 
the  next  neighbor,  3 

Position,  4 

Repeat,  5-8 

3  Lunge  forward  with  the  inner 

leg  as  in  Exercise  2,  1 

Rock   backward,   and    swing 

the  arms  down, 
Return, 
Position, 
The  same  outward, 

4  Repeat, 


2 
3 
4 

5-8 
9-16 
32 


Fig.  292. 


Fig.  293. 


GROUP     II. 
Rising  on  the  toes  and  bending  of  the  knees. 


1  Step  position  forward  left,  the 

arms  forward, 
Rise   on   the   toes,  the  arms 

upward, 
Return, 
Repeat  with  the  other  foot, 

2  Step  position  left  backward, 
Bend  both  knees,   the  arms 

the  same  as  in  Exercise  1, 


Return, 

1  Right, 

3  No.  1  execute  the  Exercise  1 

2  left  and  right. 

3-4          No.  2  execute  the  Exercise  2 
5-8  .  left  and  right, 

1       4  Repeat,  exchanging  the  exer- 
cises, 


3-4 

5-8 


J6 
32 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 


GROUP     III. 
Bending  of  the  trunk  side-ways. 


COUNTS 

1  Bend  the  trunk  sideways  out- 

ward and  inward,  alter- 
nately raising  the  inner  and 
outer  arms  upward  (see  Fig. 
308),  1-8 

2  The  same,  with  a  cross  step 

position  simultaneously  with 
the  outer  and  inner  leg,  1-8 

2  Lunge  outward,  the  arms  out- 
ward, 1 


•  "I    NTS 

Bend  the  trunk  outward,  let 
go  one  hand  and  grasp  the 
ring  with  both  hands  over- 


head, 
Return, 

Lunge  outward  as  before, 
Bend  the  trunk  inward, 
4  Repeat  Exercise  3, 


2 

3-4 
5 

6-7-8 
1-8 
16 
32  counts  in  all. 


Fig.  294. 


B  —  Tactics. 


COUNTS 

1  Form  six  ranks  of  fours  (Fig. 

294),  8 

2  Form   two    lines   of    twelves 

(see  Fig.  289),  8 

3  The  .two    lines    of    twelves 

change  into  a  cross  of  sixes 
(Fig.  295),  8 

4  The   cross   of   sixes   changes 

into  a  cross  of  threes,  sur- 
rounded by  a  square  of 
threes,  by  the  outer  three 
of  each  six  wheeling  about 
their  own  centre  (Fig.  296),  8 

5  a.  The  star  of  threes  in  the 

centre,      execute     4  |  4 
.  wheel. 

6.  The  four  lines  forming  the 
square  march  backward 
and  forward,  8 


COUNTS 

c.  And  execute  the  twirling 
step  outward  (in  three 
directions,  one  sideways 
right,  the  centre  back- 
ward, the  third  sideways 
left),  8 

^ 


r 
rv 

Fig.  295. 


DOUBLE   WAXD  EXERCISES 


335 


^ULJ-^xo  i;<j 

6  Form  the  cross  of  sixes,  8      8  Same  in  the  opposite  direc- 


Line  1  and   3   execute  4  |  4 

wheel  left, 
Line  2   and  4  execute  4  |  4 

wheel  right, 


tion, 

16  9  Form  six  small  squares  of 
fours  (for  Part  Y.)  (Fig. 
297), 


16 


_8 
96 


H 
H 

-f 

"r- 
h 
h 


\ 


\ 


\ 


290. 


A       -\ 

-L. 

/-  '     -\ 

Fig.  297. 


/ 


PART 


POSITION  —  Six  SMALL  SQUARES  OP  FOUBS. 

NOTE.  —  For  Exercises  1  and  2,  take  two  beats  of  music 
for    each   movement;    for   Exercise    3,    four    beats    for    each 


movement. 

COUNTS 

1  Nos.  1  and  3  lunge  left  and 

right  forward,  and  extend 
the  arms  outward, 
Nos.  2  and  4  lunge  left  and 
right  backward,  and   raise 
the  arms  forward,  16 

2  Nos.  1  and  3  lunge  forward, 

the  arms  outward, 
Rise  on  the  toes, 
Reverse, 
Nos.  2  and  4  lunge  backward, 

the  arms  forward, 
Kneel,  the  arms  upward, 
Reverse, 

Same  with  the  opposite  foot, 
Same,  exchanging  exercises,        16 

32 


COUIfTS 

3  Nos.   1  and  3  give  up  their 

hold,  facing  about  in  step 
position,  ring  overhead, 

Nos.  2  and  4  take  hold  of 
their  rings,  face  to  face, 

Nos.  1  and  3,  bend  backward 
over  the  extended  arms  of 
Nos.  2  and  4,  who  lunge 
backward  and  support  1 
and  3  at  the  back, 

Reverse, 

Repeat, 

4  Exchanging  exercises, 
Repeat, 


96  counts  in  all. 


UEliMAX-A.MKRH  A  \     (.  )    MSASTH  .S 


DOUBLE     WAND     EXERCISES 

BY  DE.  KAEL  ZAPP 

To  be  executed  by  a  class  of  girls  from  thirteen  to  six- 
teen years  of  age.  The  partners  are  numbered  1  and  2,  ami 
stand  side  by  side,  each  hand  holding  the  end  of  the  wand ; 
the  right  hands  hold  the  upper,  the  left  hands  the  lower  wand 
(Fig.  298). 


Fig.  298. 


Fig.  299. 


PART     I. 
Step  and  lunging  exercises. 


1   a 


COUNTS 

Left  foot  forward  into  the 
step  position,  with  raising 
the  upper  wand  forward,  1 

Move  the  left  foot  into  the 
step  position  backward, 
raising  the  upper  wand 


COUNTS 

upward,    and    the    lower 
wand  forward  (Fig.  299),        2 
Reverse, 

l>.  The  same  as  Exercise  1, 
lunging  forward  with  the 
left  foot  at  the  second 


3-4 


DOUBLE   WAND   EXERCISES 


337 


COUNTS 

count,  and  the  right  foot 
at  the  sixth  count,  9-16 

a.  Left  foot  forward,  and  raise 


Fig.  300. 


the  upper  wand  upward, 

Move  the  left  foot  back- 
ward, and  lower  the  up- 
per wand  backward,  at 
the  same  time  raising  the 
lower  wand  upward, 

Reverse, 

The   same  with   the   right 

foot, 

6.  The  same  as  Exercise  2, 
lunging  forward  at  the  2 
and  6  (Fig.  300), 
3  a.  Inner  foot  forward  into  the 
step  position,  and  raise 
both  hands  forward, 

Lunge  forward  with  the 
inner  foot,  and  raise  the 
wands  in  triangle  or  slant- 
ing position, 

Reverse, 

6.  The  same,  using  the  outer 
foot  and  raising  the  wands 
in  the  opposite  triangular 
position, 
c.  Repeat  a  and  6, 


PART    II. 
Bending  of  knees  and  trunk. 


COUNTS 

1  o.  Rise  on  the  toes, 

and   raise    both 
wands  forward,         1 
Bend   arms,    and 
move  arms  and 
wands    outward 
(Fig.  301), 
Reverse, 

6.  The  same,  but 
moving  the  arms 
inward,  5-8 

c.  Repeat  a  and  6,      9-10 

2  a.  Rise  on  the  toes, 

and    raise    both 
wands  upward,          1 


9-16 


5-4 


5-8 

0-16 


Fig.   301. 


338 


GEKMAN-AMEUICAN   G YMNASTICS 


2 
3-4 


COUNTS 

Bend  the  knees  (deep), 
with  the  wands  across 
the  shoulder-blades, 

Reverse, 

b.  The    same,    lowering    the 

wands  down  backward,       5-8 

c.  Repeat  a  and  6,  9-16 
8   a.  Outer  foot  into  step  posi- 
tion forward,  and  wands 
upward, 

Turn  inward  on  toes,  the 
wands  downward  and 
crossed  (Fig.  302), 

Reverse, 

b.  The  same  with  the  inner 

foot,  facing  outward 
(back  to  back),  (wands 
stay  upward), 

c.  Repeat  a  and  6, 

4  a.  Step  position  outward  with 
the  outer  foot,  and  wands 
upward, 

Bend  the  trunk  sideways 
outward,  and  cross  the 
outer  feet  inward,  cross- 
ing the  wands, 


Reverse,  ;i-4 
The  same,  with  step  am! 

trunk  movement  inward,  ">-S 

Repeat  a  and  b,  !•-]»» 

Pause  from,  1-4 


Turn    face    to    face 

wands  crossed), 
Pause  from, 


(the 


5 

«'.-* 
72 


Fig.  302. 


PART     III. 

Bending  of  trunk. 

(Position  —  Face  to  face,  the  wands  crossed.) 


COUNTS 

a.  Step  position  forward  left, 

the  arms  outward  (wands 
horizontal),  1 

Bend  the  trunk  backward, 
raising  the  wands  up- 
ward, and  placing  the 
hands  together,  2 

Reverse,  3-4 

The  same  with  the  right 
foot  forward,  5-8 

b.  Repeat,  9-16 


COtJXTS 

2  a.  Step  position  forward  left, 
the  wands  upward,  the 
hands  together,  1 

Bend    the    trunk   forward 
with    hollow    back    and 
spread  the  arms  outward, 
moving  the  left  foot  back- 
ward into  the  step  posi- 
tion, 2 
Reverse,                                      3-4 
Repeat  with  the  right  foot,    5-8 


339 


COUNTS 

b.  Repeat  left  and  right,  9-16 

3  a.  Step  position  forward  left, 
the  wands  upward  as  in 
Exercise  2,  1 

Bend  the  trunk  downward 
(chest  upon    the  knee), 


D     u     a 

3Q-C3 

O       U       a 

/7ff.  303. 


COUNTS 

move  the  left  leg  back- 
ward, at  the  same  time 
bending  the  right  knee 
and  moving  the  wands 
downward,  2 

Reverse,  3-4 

The   same  with  the   right 

foot, 

b.  Repeat  left  and  right, 
5   a.  Pause  from, 

Change  position  at  5, 

Pause, 


5-8 
9-16 
1-4 
5 

6-8 
72 


N.  B.  —  In  changing  position,  No.  1  changes  grip  of  hands,  moves  the 
upper  wand  with  the  right  arm  overhead,  and  faces  about ;  at  the  same  time 
each  set  of  ten  couples  change  position  as  indicated  by  the  diagram  (Fig.  303). 


PART     IV. 
Dissimilar  Exercises. 

Executed  in  double  time  (two  beats  of  music  for  one  motion"). 


COUNTS 

Rising  on  toes  and  bending 
the  knees. 

a.  No.  1  step  -position  forward 

left,  the  arms  outward,  1 

Rise  on  the  toes,  the  wands 

upward,  2 

Reverse,  3-4 

Repeat,  5-8 

No.  2,  rise  on  the  toes,  the 

arms  outward,  1 

Bend  the  knees  (deep), 

hands  on  the  shoulders,  2 

Reverse,  3-4 

Repeat,  6-8 

b.  The  same  as  a,  Nos.  1  and  2 

exchanging  exercises,        9-16 
Lunging    and     bending    the 

trunk  downward, 
a.  No.  1  step  position  forward 

left,  the  wands  upward,  1 


COUNTS 

Step  position  backward, 
bending  the  trunk  down- 
ward, moving  the  wands 
downward  (the  ends 
touching  the  floor),  2 

Reverse,  3-4 

The  same  using  the  right 
foot,  5-8 

No.  2,  step  position,  etc.,  as 
in  No.  1,  1 

Lunge  forward  and  extend 
the  arms  forward  (over 
the  back  of  No.  1),  2 

Reverse,  3-4 

The  same  with   the   right 

foot,  5-8 

b.  The  same  as  a,  Nos.  1  and  2 

exchanging  exercises,  9-16 

3  Bending  the  trunk  backward 
and  kneeling. 


340 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  Q YMNASTICS 


a.  No.  1  step  position   back- 
ward left,  the  amis  out- 
ward, i 
Bend  the  trunk  backward; 
move  the   left   foot   into 
the  step  position  forward, 
and   raise   the  arms  up- 
ward (Fig.  304),                       2 
Reverse,                                    3-4 
Repeat  with  the  right  foot,       5-8 
No.  2  step  position  back- 
ward   right,    and   wands 
upward,                                       i 
Kneel  on  the  right   knee, 

the  arms  outward,  2 

Reverse,  3-4 

Repeat  with  the  other  foot,     5-8 
b.  The  same,  Nos.  1  and  2  ex- 
changing exercises,  9-16 
Bending  trunk  forward,  lun- 
ging, kneeling. 
a.  No.  1,  bend  the  trunk  for 
ward  (hollow  back)  with 
a  step  position  backward, 
the  arms  raised  outward, 
Bend  the  trunk  backward 
with    step    position    for- 
ward,   the    arms    raised 
upward, 
Reverse  3.4 


•   '  •  I    N  I  S 

Repeat  with  tin-  right  foot,       5-8 
No.  2,  lunge  forward  left, 


.   Fig.  304. 

the  arms  raised  outwards,  2 
Kneel,  the  arms  outward,  2 
Reverse,       .  3.4 
Repeat  with  the  right  foot,  5-8 
6.  Repeat,  Nos.  1  and  2  ex- 
changing exercises,  9-16 

5  Pause,  g 

"72 

6  Close  with  a  grouping. 


EXERCISES    WITH  HOOPS  341 


EXERCISES     WITH     HOOPS 
BY  DH.  KARL  ZAPP 

THE  hoop  may  be  used  in  a  very  graceful  and  artistic  man- 
ner without  necessarily  losing  sight  of  what  is  essential  in  all 
exercises,  —  the  proper  adaptation  to  development  and  exertion. 
The  hoop  as  a  hand  apparatus  for  light  gymnastics  is  used  in 
about  the  same  manner  as  the  wand. 

Hoops  of  larger  size  may  also  be  used  as  a  substitute  for 
the  small  jumping-rope. 

As  a  rule,  the  hoops  are  made  of  light  wood,  and  their 
dimensions  vary  from  eighteen  to  thirty-six  inches. 

HOOP   ROUNDEL. 

Arranged  for  a  class  of  girls  from  thirteen  to  eighteen  years 
of  age.  The  number  of  the  class  must  be  divisible  by  six  (24, 
30,  36).  The  class  is  divided  into  lines  of  six  or  twelve,  with 
subdivisions  into  threes  (Fig.  305). 


F.lg.  305. 

Each  column  of  threes  may  be  considered  a  unit,  also  each 
column  of  sixes. 

The  Roundel  consists  of  three  parts,  each  part  containing 
three  subdivisions  :  a  set  of  exercises  ;  tactics,  executed  with 
the  waltz  step  or  hop  ;  and  grouping. 


I;I-:HMA.\   AMERICAN 


DIVISION    OF    CONTENTS. 

PART     I. 


COUNTS 

Exercises,  80         Waltzing, 


COUNTS 

32         Grouping, 


Exercises, 


Exercises, 


64 


112 
256 


PART     II. 
Waltzing,  32 

PART     III. 

Waltzing,  32 

96 
Total,   400   counts. 


Grouping, 


Grouping, 


i  ill    S  I  - 

16 


16 


16 
48 


In  Part  I.  the  exercises  are  executed  left  and  right  and 
simultaneously. 

In  Part  II.  the  exercises  are  executed  simultaneously  in 
dissimilar  directions  first,  then  the  exercises  are  divided  and 
the  different  files  execute  different  exercises. 

In  Part  III.  the  exercises  are  dissimilar  from  the  beginning. 
Music  :  A  Waltz  ("  Auf  Wiedersehen  "). 

This  Roundel  was  executed  by  sixty  young  ladies  of  the 
(Cleveland  High  School  at  the  commencement  exercises  of 
1892.  The  young  ladies  were  dressed  in  short,  white  Gre- 
cian costumes,  with  flowing  sleeves,  and  the  hoops  we-  re- 
covered with  white  and  twined  with  smilax. 

PART    I. 

Step  position  and  lunging. 
A  —  Exercises. 

All  exercises  are  executed  left  and  right. 

STARTING  POSITION.  —  Hoop  in  front  of  the  body,  held 
with  both  hands  at  the  lower  third,  hands  in  a  line  with  the 
hips. 


EXERCISES    WITH  UOOPS 


343 


ARRANGEMENT    OF   CLASS. 

(See  Fig.  305.) 


COUNTS 

1  Raise  the  hoops  sideways  left 

with  step  position  sideways 
right,  1 

Position,  2 

The  same  in  opposite  direc- 
tion, 3-4 
Repeat,  5-8 

2  The  same,  but  lunging  side- 

ways instead  of  step  posi- 
tion, 9-16 

3  Raise  the  hoops  obliquely  up- 

ward left  (slightly  tilted), 

with  crossstep  forward  left,  1 

Position,  2 

Opposite,  3-4 

Repeat,  5-8 

4  The  same,  lunging  obliquely 

forward  left  and  right,  9-16 

5  Turn  the  trunk  (1  |  8)  to  the 

left,  raising  the  arms  with 
the  hoop  to  the  height  of 
the  shoulders,  and  crossstep 
backward  left,  1 

Position,  2 


COUNTS 

The  same  opposite,  3-4 

Repeat,  5-8 

6  The  same,  lunging  crosswise 

backward,  9-16 

7  Raise  the  hoops  sideways  left, 

with  sidestep  right,  1 

Raise  the  hoops  vertically 
overhead,  and  close  the 
heels,  2 

Lower  the  hoop  to  the  oppo- 
site side  with  a  side  step  left,         3 
Position,  4 

The  same  in  the  opposite  di- 
rection, 5-8 
Repeat,                                        9-16 

8  Nos.  1  and  3  in  the  same  direc- 

tion, lunging  instead  of  the 

step  position. 
No.   2  executes  the  exercises 

in  the  opposite  direction,      1-16 
(Thus  Nos.  1  and  2,  and  3  and 

2,  apparently  form  one  file 

twice  during  this  exercise. ) 


B  —  "Waltzing. 


COUNTS 

1  Nos.  1  and  3  waltz  forward 

(double  hop,  swinging  the 
legs  crosswise,  the  arms  with 
hoop  in  an  oblique  position, 
alternately  left  and  right), 
while  No.  2  waltzes  back- 
ward, 1-4 

2  Nos.  1  and  3  cross  over  (or 

change  places). 
No.  2  executes  a  complete  turn 
(4  |  4)  to  the  right,  holding 
the  hoop  over  the  head,  5-8 


COUNTS 

3  Nos.  1  and  3  waltz  backward 

with  crosshop  and  a  swing- 
ing of  the  hoop. 
No.   2    waltz    forward    with 
crosshop    and   swinging  of 
the  hoop,  9-12 

4  No.    1   and  3   cross  back  to 

places. 

No.  2  turn  in  place,  the  hoop 
vertically  overhead,  13-16 

5  Repeat,  17-32 


344 


<//•:/;  u.i  .v -AM /•;/.•  /r.l.v  (;y.MNASTIC'8 


C  —  Grouping. 


1  Pause. 

2  At  count  5,  Nos.  1  and  3  lunge 

forward  obliquely  outward, 
the  hoop  is  held  vertically 
above  the  head.  No.  2  lunge 
backward,  the  hoop  held 
forward  in  height  of  the 
shoulders  (all  remain  quiet 
4  counts). 


COUNTS 
4 


COCSTg 

3  At  9,  change  of  position,  1 

and  3  lunging  obliquely  in- 
ward; No.  2  straighten  up 
and  stand  on  tiptoe,  the 
hoop  held  vertically  above 
the  head,  all  remaining 
quiet,  4  counts,  9-12 

4  Pause  from  13-16 


PART     II. 
Bending  of  the  trunk  and  knees. 

Two  exercises  are  first  executed  simultaneously  inward  and 
outward,  that  is  Nos.  1  and  3  toward  each  other,  and  No.  2 
toward  each  other  successively;  afterward,  Nos.  1  and  3 
repeat  the  first  of  the  two  exercises,  while  No.  2  repeats  the 
second;  and  then  the  exercises  are  changed. 

A  —  Exercises. 


COUXTS 

1  Turn  trunk  inward,  with  step 

position  obliquely  forward, 
hoop  forward  shoulder 
height,  1 

Bend  the  trunk  backward,  and 
raise  the  hoop  overhead,  tilt- 
ing it,  2 
Return  to  the  former  position,         3 
Position,                                             4 
The  same  in  the  opposite  di- 
rection,                                        5-8 

2  Turn  inward  with  step  posi- 

tion backward,  hoop  verti- 
cally overhead,  1 
Bend  both  knees  (almost  to 
kneeling),  the  hoop  in  front 
of  the  face,  with  bent  arms 
(Fig.  306),  2 


Return  to  the  former  position, 
Position, 


Fig.  306. 

The  same  in  the  opposite  di- 
rection, 


5-8 


EXERCISES    WITH  HOOPS 


54-3 


COUNTS 

3  Nos.  1  and  3  execute  Exercise 

1;  No.  2,  Exercise  2,  1-8 

4  Nos.  1  and  3  execute  Exercise 

2;  No.  2,  Exercise  1, 

5  Raise  the  hoop  vertically  over- 

head, with  step  position  for- 
ward of  inner  foot, 


Fig.  307. 

Bend  the  trunk  downward, 
with  a  long  stride  backward 
of  the  advanced  foot,  and 
bending  of  the  opposite 
knee,  swinging  the  hoop 
down  and  backward  (Fig. 
307), 

Return  to  the  former  position, 

Position, 

The  same  opposite, 
<>    Raise  the  hoop  obliquely  up- 


2 

3 

4 

5-8 


•  COUNTS 

ward  inward,  with  a  side- 
step inward,  1 
Bend  the  trunk  sideways  in- 
ward, and  swing  the  hoop 
in  a  semicircle  to  an  oblique 
position  outward,  crossing 
the  inner  foot  in  front  (Fig. 
308),  2 


Fig.  308. 

Return  to  position  1, 
Position, 

The  same  opposite, 
7  Nos.  1  and  3,  Exercise  5  ;  No. 

2,  Exercise  6, 

9  Nos.  1  and  3,  Exercise  6;  No. 
2,  Exercise  5, 


3 
4 

5-8 

1-8 

9-16 
64 


B  —  Waltzing. 

COUNTS  COUNTS 

Nos.  1  and  6  (see  Fig.  309),  in  Part  I.     Nos.   2  and  5 

circle  around  Nos.  2  and  5  standing  in  a  posing  posi- 

with    the    same    step    and  tion  (crossstep,  the  hoop  in 

swinging    of    the  hoops  as  an  oblique  position,   trunk 


340 


GERMAN-AMERICAN  G  YMNAST1CS 


slightly  bent  sideways  in- 
ward), 

Nos.  3  and  4  with  the  hoops 
in  the  left  hand,  cross  these, 
and  both  circle  round  a  com- 
mon centre  (Fig.  309). 

Nos.  2  and  5  execute  the  cir- 
cling around  1  and  6.  Nos. 
3  and  4  face  about,  join 
right  hands,  and  circling 
round  a  common  centre, 


1-8 


hold  the  hoop  nicely  in  an 
elevated  position  in  the  left 


hand, 
3  Repeat, 


9-16 
17-32 


Fig.  309. 


C  —  Grouping. 


1  Pause, 

2  Nos.  1  and  3  surrounding  No. 

2,  lunge  inward  obliquely 
in  the  direction  of  No.  2 
(forming  a  star),  the  hoops 
in  a  slanting  position.  No. 
2  crossstep  position,  slightly 
bent  sideways,  the  hoop  en- 
circling the  face, 


4      3  Nos.  1  and  3  bend  the  oppo- 
site knee  and  the  body  out- 
ward, and  swing  the  hoop 
outward. 
No.  2  kneel  and  raise  the  hoop 

over  the  head,  9-12 

4  Pause,  4  counts,  13-16 


5-8 


PART     III. 

Step  position,  lunging,  balancing,  etc. 
A  —  Exercises. 

The   files    begin   with,    dissimilar    exercises    in    dissimilar 
directions. 


1  a.  Nos.  1  and  3  step  position 
sideways  inward,  the 
hoop  sideways  in  the 
same  direction, 

Swing  the  hoop  in  a  semi- 
circle overhead  to  the 
other  side,  with  a  cross- 
step  in  front, 

Return, 

Position, 

In  the  opposite  direction, 


No.  2  face  inward  (1  |  4 
turn)  with  a  step  position 
backward  and  the  hoop 
overhead, 

Face  about  1  ]  2  turn  and 
bend  downward,  bending 
the  arms  slightly, 

Resume  position  1, 

Position, 

In  the  opposite  direction, 


2 
3 

4 
5-8 


b.  Repeat  the  entire  exercise,  9-16 


EXERCISES    WITH  HOOPS 


347 


CODOTfl 

2  Nos.  1  and  3  take  the  exer- 

cise of  No.  2 ;  No.  2  take  the 
exercise  of  Nos.  1  and  3,        1-16 

3  a.  Nos.  1  and  3  lunge  inward 

towards  No.  2,  forming  a 
star  with  the  hoop  raised 
in  an  oblique  direction 
to  the  opposite  side,  1 

Rock  the  knees,  and  swing 
the  hoop  in  a  semicircle 
to  the  opposite  side,  2 

Resume  the  former  posi- 
tion, 3 

Position,  4 

The  same  in  the  opposite 
direction,  5-8 

No.  2  step  position  back- 
ward and  bend  the  knee, 
the  hoop  encircling  the 
face,  1 

Rise  and  raise  the  hoop 
overhead,  2 

Resume  the  former  posi- 
tion, 3-4 

Repeat  with  the  opposite 

foot,  5-8 

6.  Repeat  the  whole  exercise,   9-16 

4  a.  Nos.  1  and  3  march  back- 

ward with  followstep  and 
rising  on  the  toes,  at  the 
same  time  raising  the 
hoop  overhead  (the  hoop 
is  elevated  at  1,  and  low- 
ered at  2),  1-8 

Repeat  the  marching,  but 
forward  to  places,  9-16 

No.  2,  balancing  exercises. 


COUNTS 

Raise  the  hoop  forward, 
and  raise  the  left  leg 
backward,  1 

Move  the  hoop  vertically 
upward  and  the  leg  for- 
ward, 2 

Resume  the  former  posi- 
tion, 3-4 

Repeat  with  the  right  leg,       5-9 

Repeat  left  and  right,  9-16 

b.  Nos.  1  and  3  execute  the 
balancing  exercises  of 
No.  2,  while  No.  2  takes 
the  exercises  of  Nos.  1 
and  3,  marching  forward 
and  backward,  1-16 

5  a.  Nos.  1  and  3,  step  position 
forward  with  the  inner 
foot,  the  hoop  overhead, 
and  the  trunk  bent  back- 
ward, 1-4 

Straighten  the  trunk  grad- 
ually and  lower  the 
hoops,  5-8 

Step  position  backward 
with  the  inner  foot;  bend 
the  trunk  gradually 
downward,  and  lower  the 
hoop  to  the  floor,  9-12 

Straighten  the  trunk  gradu- 
ally and  raise  the  hoop,  13-16 

Nos.  1  and  3  turning  half 
toward  each  other  1  |  8 
turn,  during  the  first  8 
counts,  and  then  turning 
outward,  1-16 


B  —  "Waltzing. 


COUNTS 

Nos.  1  and  3  surrounding 
No.  2,  waltz  around  No.  2, 
holding  the  hoops  in  the 


COUNTS 

hands,  and  toward  the  cen- 
tre of  the  star  ;  No.  2  pos- 
ing, 1-8 


348  GERMAN-AMERICAN  GYMNASTICS 

COUNTS  <  •  1 1   m 

2  No.  2  kneeling,  the  hoop  en-  their  hands  above  No.  2  and 

circling  the  face,  Nos.  1  and  holding  the  hoops  nicely  ele- 

3  face  about,  circling  in  the  vated  outward,                         9-10 

opposite  direction,  crossing  Repeat,                                        1-16 

C  —  Grouping. 

COUNTS 

The  groups  are  arranged  in  accordance  with  the  exercises  and  the 
waltzing,  1-16 


University  of  California 

SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

405  Hilgard  Avenue,  Los  Angeles,  CA  90024-1388 

Return  this  material  to  the  library 

from  which  it  was  borrowed. 


JUN 

REC! 

JUNl 


•liocn  91 


fcDV.     » 


OK 
BE 

R( 
OE 


FornrL 


UCLA-ED/PSYCH  Library 
GV511S81 


L  005  602  488  8 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


A     000831  160     7 


